VOLVO
L60F/L70F/L90F
Foreword
This Operator's Manual is intended as a
guide for the correct use and maintenance of
carefully the machine. Therefore, study it
before starting and operating the machine, or
carrying out any preventive before
.maintenance
Keep the manual in the cab so that it always
.is at hand. Replace it immediate if it is lost
The manual describes the applications for Presentation
primarily is intended and which the machine
is written to apply for all markets. We
therefore ask you to disregard the sections
which are not applicable to your machine or
.to the work for which you use your machine
NOTE! The information in the manual
models L60F, L70F applies to machine
.and L90F, unless otherwise stated
Many hours are spent on design and
production to make a machine that is as
efficient and safe as possible. The accidents
which occur in spite of this, are mostly
caused by the human factor. A safety
conscious person and a well maintained
machine make a safe, efficient and profitable
combination. Therefore, the safety
.instructions and follow them
We continually strive to improve our
products and to make them more efficient
through changes to their design. We retain
the right to do this without committing
ourselves to introduce these improvements
been on products, which have already
delivered. We also retain the right to change
equipment, as well as instructions data and
for service and other maintenance measures
.without prior notice
It is the operator's obligation to know and
follow the applicable national and local
safety regulations. The safety instructions in Specifications
this manual only apply to cases when there
.national or local regulations are no
Alphabetical
WARNING
The symbol above appears at various points
in the manual together with a warning text. it
:means
Warning, be alert! Your safety is involved! It
is the obligation of the operator to make sure
decals are in place on the that all warning
machine and that they are readable.
.Accidents may otherwise occur
Get to know the capacity and limits of
your machine!
1
Opevator’s manual L60F/L70F/L90F
‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ و‬
.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺻﺤﻴﺢ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ از روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻳﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻫﺮ‬
Table of ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ را ﺑﺎ‬، ‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﻴﺮاﻧﻪ‬
contents
.‫دﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ را ﻫﻤﻮاره در داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ و در دﺳﺘﺮس داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ و‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬ .‫اﮔﺮﻣﻔﻘﻮد ﺷﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ دﻳﮕﺮي ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫در اﻳﻦ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﺮدﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﺷﺮح داده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد و ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻮارد ﻓﺮوش ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬ ‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ از ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در‬.‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
Instrument
(‫)اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد ﻳﺎ در ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ‬
panels
. ‫ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫دﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﻧﺪارد‬
Other
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﻳﻦ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺪل‬
controls
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻼف‬L90F , L70F, L60F
.‫آن ذﻛﺮ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺎي‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ و ﺳﺎﺧﺖ زﻣﺎن زﻳﺎدي ﺻﺮف ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ‬
Operating
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬ ‫ ﺑﺎ وﺟﻮد اﻳﻦ‬. ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﻳﻤﻦ و ﻛﺎ رآﻣﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
instructions
.‫ ﺳﻮاﻧﺤﻲ ﻛﻪ رخ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ اﻛﺜﺮاً ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ اﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ اﺳﺖ‬،‫اﻣﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻫﻮﺷﻴﺎر ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ و ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و‬
Operating ‫ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ‬،‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري آن ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻜﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
techniques
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي‬.‫ ﻛﺎر آﻣﺪ و ﭘﺮ ﺳﻮد را ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬، ‫اﻳﻤﻦ‬
.‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ را ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ و اﺟﺮا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Safety ‫ﻣﺎ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻼش ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻت ﺧﻮد را ﺑﻬﺒﻮد ﺑﺒﺨﺸﻴﻢ و ﺑﺎ‬
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
when servicing .‫ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻛﺎر آﻣﺪﺗﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬، ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ دﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺣﻖ را ﺑﺮاي ﺧﻮد ﻣﺤﻔﻮظ ﻣﻲ دارﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻬﺪي در ﻗﺒﺎل‬
‫اراﺋﻪ اﻳﻦ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮي‬
Service and ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات و‬
maintenance ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬ ‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺣﻖ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﻮد‬. ‫ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﻴﻢ داﺷﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮظ ﻣﻲ دارﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﻋﺪاد و ارﻗﺎم ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري را ﺑﺪون اﻃﻼع ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﺘﻌﻬﺪ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ و ﻛﺸﻮري ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ را‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ اﻟﻔﺒﺎﻳﻲ‬
index ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در اﻳﻦ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬.‫ﺑﺪاﻧﺪ و ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮاردي را در ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻛﺸﻮري ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻠﻲ در ﻣﻮرد آﻧﻬﺎ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻓﻮق ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ‬، ‫در ﺟﺎﻫﺎي زﻳﺎدي از اﻳﻦ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
،‫ ﻫﺸﺪار‬:‫ ﻣﻔﻬﻮم اﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ‬.‫ﻫﺸﺪاري دﻳﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻮاﻇﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ! ﻣﻮﺿﻮع اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺷﻤﺎﺳﺖ! اﻳﻦ وﻇﻴﻔﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاري در ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ در‬.‫ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺧﻮد روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ و ﺧﻮاﻧﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت اﺣﺘﻤﺎل ﺑﺮوز ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
!‫ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ و ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺎن آﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬
 Foreword
Identification number
Identification number
State the identification number of the machine and the
components below. The number should be stated when
contacting the manufacturer and when ordering spare parts.
The position of the plates is shown on page11.
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ اﺟﺰاي‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‬. ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و اﺟﺮاي آن را در ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺤﻞ‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﻔﺎرش ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ اراﺋﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬11 ‫اﻳﻦ ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ )ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎي ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ( در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

VOLVO ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬

AB ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻟﻮدر و ﺑﺎرﻛﺶ‬
Manufacturer: Volvo Construction Equipment ‫ اﺳﻜﻴﻠﺴﺘﻮﻧﺎ‬SE-631 85
AB
Hauler & Loader Division ‫ﺳﻮﺋﺪ‬
SE-631 85 Eskilstuna
Sweden
‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
Machine Product
Identification
Number ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Transmission
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Front axle
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Rear axle
‫ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻮم‬
Lifting frame
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

Cab

Please send any comment regarding the Operator´s Manual to ‫ﻟﻄﻔ ﺎ ً ﻧﻈﺮات ﺧﻮد را در ﻣﻮرد راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ آدرس‬
om@volvo.com
‫ ارﺳﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬Om@ Volvo

2
 ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬

Forword ………………………………….……………… 1 ……………………………………………………… ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬

Identification number …………………………………… 2 ……………………………………………………‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ‬
Presentation ……………………………………………… 5 …………………………………………………………‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
CE marking,EMC directive ……………………………… 9 ……………………………………………‫ ودﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬CE‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
Communication equipment,installation…………………… 10 ……………………………………………‫ ﻧﺼﺐ‬، ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ارﺗﺒﺎ ﻃﻲ‬
Product plates……………………………………………… 11 …………………………………………‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
Information and warning plates / decals…………………… 12 …………………………‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاري و اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎ ﻧﻲ‬/ ‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ‬
Federal Clean Air Act……………………………………… 16 …………………………………………… ‫ﻗﺎ ﻧﻮن ﻓﺪرال ﻫﻮاي ﭘﺎك‬
Instrument panels………………………………………… 19 ……………………………………(‫ﭘﺎ ﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات)اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
Front instrument panel…………………………………… 20 …………………………………………………‫ﭘﺎ ﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Overhead panel…………………………………………… 22 ……………………………………………………‫ﭘﺎ ﻧﻞ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﺮ‬
Cab post panel…………………………………………… 23 …………………………………………………‫ﭘﺎ ﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Rear cab wall……………………………………………… 31 …………………………………………………‫دﻳﻮاره ﻋﻘﺐ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Centre instrument………………………………………… 32 ………………………………………‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
Display unit……………………………………………… 37 ……………………………………………………‫واﺣﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
Alarm texts………………………………………………… 55 ………………………………………………‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬
Anti-theft device(optional equipment) …………………… 65 ………………………………(‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
Other controls…………………………………………… 67 ……………………………………………‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Controls…………………………………………………… 67 …………………………………………………‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Boom kick-out and bucket positioner……………………… 73 ……………………………‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻛﺖ و ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻮم‬
Operator comfort………………………………………… 74 ……………………………………………………‫آﺳﺎ ﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
Climate control system…………………………………… 77 ……………………………………………………‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﺎدي‬
Operating instructions…………………………………… 83 …………………………………………‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Safety rules when operating……………………………… 84 …………………………………………‫دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
Measures before operating………………………………… 88 …………………………………………‫اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
Starting engine…………………………………………… 89 ……………………………………………… ‫روش روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن‬
Gear shifting……………………………………………… 90 …………………………………………………… ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
Steering …………………………………………………… 93 …………………………………………………………‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
Braking …………………………………………………… 95 ………………………………………………………‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﻴﺮي‬
Stopping machine………………………………………… 97 ………………………………………………‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
Parkinge…………………………………………………… 98 ……………………………………………………‫ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن‬
Recovering / towing……………………………………… 99 ………………………………………‫ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه‬/‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
Transporting machine……………………………………… 102 …………………………………………………‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
Operating techniques…………………………………… 103 ………………………………………………‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Whole body vibrations…………………………………… 104 ……………………………………………………‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﻛﻠﻲ‬
Attachments ……………………………………………… 106 ………………………………………………………‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬
Attaching and disconnecting attachments………………… 107 ……………………………………‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻬﺎ‬
Buckets …………………………………………………… 110 …………………………………………………………‫ﺑﺎﻛﺘﻬﺎ‬
Timber grapples…………………………………………… 114 …………………………………………………‫ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ‬
Pallet forks………………………………………………… 117 ……………………………………………‫ﻓﻮرك ﻫﺎي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
Material handling arm…………………………………… 120 …………………………………………………‫ﺑﺎزو و ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻮاد‬
Rotating attachments……………………………………… 122 …………………………………………………‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮاد‬
Signaling diagram………………………………………… 123 …………………………………………………‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ دادن‬
Lifting attachments………………………………………… 125 ……………………………………………‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﻧﺪه‬
Getting stuck……………………………………………… …………………………………………‫ﻓﺮو رﻳﺨﺘﻦ و ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬
126
Safety when servicing…………………………………… 127 ………………………………………‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Service position…………………………………………… 127 …………………………………………‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Before service read………………………………………… 128 …………………………………………… ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺨﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬
Fire protection…………………………………………… 130 ……………………………………………‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي‬
Handling hazardous substances…………………………… 132……………………………………………‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮاد ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﺎز‬
Service and maintenance………………………………… 135……………………………………………‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Service points……………………………………………… 138 …………………………………………‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺑﺎزدﻳﺪ‬
Engine …………………………………………………… 139 …………………………………………………………‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Fuel system………………………………………………… 142 ……………………………………………………‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬

3
 ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬
Air cleaner………………………………………………… 146 …………………………………………………………‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬
Oil bath air cleaner ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻫﻮا‬
(optional equipment) ……………………………………… 147 ………………………………………………‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري ﻫﻮا‬
Cooling system …………………………………………… 148 ………………………………………………‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Electrical system…………………………………………… 152 …………………………………………………‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
Transmission ……………………………………………… 158 ………………………………………………………‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Front and rear axles……………………………………… 160 …………………………………………‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺒﻲ و ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ‬
Brake system……………………………………………… 162 ………………………………………………………‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
Cab ………………………………………………………… 163 …………………………………………………………‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Air conditioning ‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬
(optional equipment) ……………………………………… 164 …………………………………………………‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
Operator seat,lubrication………………………………… 167 …………………………………………‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ راﻧﻨﺪه‬
Hydraulic system………………………………………… 168 …………………………………………………‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Accumulators,releasing pressure………………………… 170 ……………………………………(‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺎر اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر )اﻧﺒﺎره‬
Tyres ……………………………………………………… 171 …………………………………………………………‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
Bucket teeth replacing ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
(Volvo tooth system) ……………………………………… 172 ………………………………………………(‫)ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ وﻟﻮو‬
Greasing bearings………………………………………… 173 ………………………………………………‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن‬
Lubrication and service chart……………………………… 174…………………………………………‫ﻧﻤﻮدار روان ﻛﺎري و ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Automatic greasing………………………………………… 178 ………………………………………………‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬
Specifications …………………………………………… 185 ……………………………………………………‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Recommended lubricants………………………………… 185 ……………………………………………‫رواﻧﻜﺎري ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬
Capacities L60F…………………………………………… 189 ………………………………………………… L60F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺘﻬﺎي‬
Engine,specifications L60F……………………………… 191 ……………………………………… L60F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Electrical system , specifications L60F…………………… 192 ……………………………… L60F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
Power transmission, specifications L60F………………… 197 ……………………………………………… L60F‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Brakes / steering system, specifications L60F…………… 198 ………………………… L60F ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
Recommended air pressure L60F………………………… 199 …………………………………… L60F‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎي‬
Hydraulic system , specifications L60F…………………… 201 ……………………………… L60F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Dimensional drawing L60F……………………………… 202 ……………………………………… L60F‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬
Machine capacity L60F…………………………………… 203 ……………………………………… L60F‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬
Pallet fork L60F…………………………………………… 204 ………………………………………… L60F‫ﻓﻮرك ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬
Material handing arm L60F……………………………… 205 …………………………………………… L60F‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
Capacities L70F…………………………………………… 206 ……………………………………………… L70F‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬
Enginge , specifications L70F…………………………… 208 ……………………………………… L70F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Electrical system, specifications L70F…………………… 209 ……………………………… L70F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
Power transmission, specifications L70F………………… 215 ……………………………………………… L70F‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Brakes / steering system, specifications L70F…………… 216………………………… L70F‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
Recommended air pressure L70F………………………… 217 …………………………………… L70F‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎي‬
Hydraulic system , specifications L70F…………………… 218 ……………………………… L70F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Dimensional drawing L70F……………………………… 219 ……………………………………… L70F‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬
Machine capacity L70F…………………………………… 220 ……………………………………… L70F‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬
Pallet fork L70F…………………………………………… 221 ………………………………………… L70F‫ﻓﻮرك ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬
Material handing arm L70F……………………………… 222 …………………………………………… L70F‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
Capacities L90F…………………………………………… 223 ……………………………………………… L90F‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬
Enginge , specifications L90F…………………………… 225 ……………………………………… L90F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Electrical system, specifications L90F…………………… 226 ……………………………… L90F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
Power transmission, specifications L90F………………… 231 ………………………………………… L90F‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻗﺪرت‬
Brakes / steering system, specifications L90F…………… 232………………………… L90F‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
Recommended air pressure L90F………………………… 233 …………………………………… L90F‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
Hydraulic system , specifications L90F…………………… 234 ……………………………… L90F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Dimensional drawing L90F……………………………… 235 ……………………………………… L90F‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬
Machine capacity L90F…………………………………… 236 ……………………………………… L90F‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬
Timber grappie L90F……………………………………… 237 ………………………………………… L90F‫ﻓﻮرك ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﻮار‬
Pallet fork L90F…………………………………………… 238 ………………………………………… L90F‫ﻓﻮرك ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬
Material handing arm L90F……………………………… 240 ………………………………… L90F‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ و ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮاد‬
Cab,specifications………………………………………… 241 ……………………………………… L90F‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Service history…………………………………………… 244 ………………………………… L90F‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
4
 Presentation
Presentation
Intended use
The machine is intended to be used under normal conditions
for the applications described in the Operator's Manual.
If it is used for other purposes or in potentially dangerous
environments, for example explosive atmosphere, flammable
environment or areas with dust containing asbestos, etc.,
special safety regulations must be followed and the machine
be equipped for such use. Contact the manufacturer/dealer for
further information.
The exhaust system is certified as spark arrester according to
ATEX Directive 94/9/EC, EN 1834-2.
The machine is designed for a maximum machine weight
(incl. equipment and attachment) of 14000 kg (30865 lb) for
L60F, 16500 kg (36376 lb) for L70F and 19000 kg (41888 lb)
for L90F. If the maximum weight is exceeded, safety will be
jeopardized. In addition, no warranties on the part of the
manufacturer will apply. However, always pay attention to
national regulations for travelling on public roads.
Environmental requirements
Bear the environment in mind when operating and during
service and maintenance of the machine. Always follow local
and national environmental legislation regarding all handling
of the machine.
Engine
Volvo D6 is a 6 litre (366 in3) engine. The engine is
turbocharged with intercooling of the air to air type. It has
unit pumps (electronic unit pumps, EUP). The unit pumps are
positioned at an angle above the pistons and are controlled via
the camshaft and a control unit, E-ECU.
The fuel system is of the common rail type.
The cylinder head covers all cylinders.
The engine has two valves per cylinder.
The accelerator position is transferred electrically from
accelerator pedal and hand throttle control (optional
equipment) to the control unit (E-ECU).
5
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮارد ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ در‬،‫ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺷﺮح داده ﺷﺪه‬،‫در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻨﺼﻮرت ﺟﻬﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﻧﻔﺠﺎر وﺟﻮد دارد ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺷﺘﻌﺎل و ﻳﺎﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮدو ﻏﺒﺎر‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و‬،‫ﺣﺎوي آز ﺑﺴﺖ )ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز( وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻳﺎ‬.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺮاي ﭼﻨﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ داراي‬EN 1834-2 , 94/91EC ATEX ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ ﮔﻴﺮ اﮔﺰوز ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
.‫ﮔﻮاﻫﻴﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬14000 ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ( ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ وزن‬
‫ﭘﻮﻧﺪ( در ﻣﺪل‬36376) ‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﮔﺮم‬16500 ، L60F ‫ﭘﻮﻧﺪ( در ﻣﺪل‬30865) ‫ﮔﺮم‬
‫ اﮔﺮ‬.‫ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬L90F ‫ﭘﻮﻧﺪ( در ﻣﺪل‬41888) ‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﮔﺮم‬19000 ، L70F
، ‫ ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ‬.‫ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ اﻓﺘﺎد‬، ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ وزن از اﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ در ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎل ﻫﻤﻮاره ﺑﻪ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻛﺸﻮري‬.‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻧﻴﺰ در اﻳﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﻨﺪ داﺷﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ را ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻃﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﻮاره از ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ و ﻛﺸﻮري در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺮوي‬. ‫ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر داراي ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎ‬. ‫( اﺳﺖ‬366in3) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮي‬6 ‫ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬volvo D6
.‫ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﻫﻮا از ﻧﻮع ﻫﻮا ﺧﻨﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
. (EUP ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر داراي ﺗﻌﺪادي ﭘﻤﭗ اﺳﺖ )ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺎي اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
E- ‫اﻳﻦ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺎ در ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻي ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮن ﻗﺮار دارد و ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺑﺎداﻣﻚ و واﺣﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
.‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ECU
‫ )ﭼﺮخ ﺷﺎﻧﻪ رﻳﻠﻲ ﺳﺎده( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬Comnon Rail‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎﻧﻲ از ﻧﻮع‬
.‫ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪرﻫﺎ را ﻣﻲ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬2 ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ازاي ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر داراي‬
‫وﻇﻌﻴﺖ ﮔﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ از ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز و ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ )ﺟﺰء ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري( ﺑﻪ‬
.‫( ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬E-ECU) ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
 Presentation
Electrical system
The machine has three control units (ECUs). The I-ECU for
the instrumentation is integrated with the display unit,
warning lamps and instruments and provides the operator
with information via these. The V-ECU (for the machine)
receives signals from sensors on the machine and these are
sent to the I-ECU. The E-ECU controls the engine.
Power transmission
The transmission is electro-hydraulically controlled, where all
gears are in constant mesh. The gear ranges are selected by
the application of different combinations of clutches. Between
engine and transmission there is a hydraulic torque converter,
which steplessly controls the output torque. The front and rear
axles have planetary gears in the wheel hubs, thus reducing
the strain on the respective drive shafts. The axles are of the
AWB type.
Brake system
The machine is provided with a dual-circuit all-hydraulic
brake system with one circuit for each axle. Each circuit
meets the requirements for secondary brake capability. The
brakes are cooled with oil that circulates in the axle.
Parking brake
The parking brake is electro-hydraulically controlled with a
switch on the instrument panel. It is applied by spring force
and is released hydraulically. The parking brake is a dry disc
brake positioned on the transmission output shaft.
Steering system
The machine is provided with a load-sensing, hydrostatic
steering system and has a steering arc of 40°.
Cab
The cab has a heating and ventilation system with defrosting
for all windows. Air conditioning is available as an option.
Emergency exit
The cab has 1 emergency exit. The rear window which is
smashed with an emergency hammer.
FOPS and ROPS
The cab is approved as a protective cab according to FOPS
and ROPS standards, see page241. FOPS is an abbreviation
of Falling Object Protective Structure (roof protection) and
ROPS is an abbreviation of Roll Over Protective Structure
(roll over protection).
Never carry out any unauthorised alterations to the cab, e.g.
lowering the roof height, drilling, welding on brackets for fire
extinguisher, radio aerial or other equipment, without first,
via a dealer, having discussed the alteration with personnel at
the Volvo Engineering Department. This department will
decide whether the alteration may cause the approval to
become void. It is important that all parties concerned are
ware of these regulations.
.
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﮔﻴﺮي وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬I-ECU ‫( اﺳﺖ‬ECU) ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﺳﻪ واﺣﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاري و وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي اﺳﺖ‬، ‫اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي اﺳﺖ و ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ را از‬V-ECU.‫و اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ را در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
. ‫ ﻣﻲ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪ‬I-ECU ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﻪ‬
. ‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬E-ECU
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و در اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻤﻮاره درﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺳﻄﺤﻲ اﺳﺖ )ﺧﻄﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اي ﻧﻴﺴﺖ( اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬
.‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ از ﻛﻼچ ﻫﺎ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮرك ﻛﻨﻮرﺗﻮر ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻗﺮار دارد ﻛﻪ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور‬
.‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻠﻪ اي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ در ﺗﻮﭘﻲ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ داراي ﭼﺮخ دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺎره اي ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر‬
. ‫ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬AWB ‫روي ﭼﻬﺎر ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ي آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ از ﻧﻮع‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ دو ﻣﺪاره اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ را دارا ﻣﻲ‬، ‫ﻣﺪار وﺟﻮد دارد ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﻣﺪارﻫﺎ‬
. ‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ در اﻛﺴﻞ در ﮔﺮدش اﺳﺖ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬. ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭽﻲ در ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻓﻨﺮ درﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ آزاد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬.
.‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﺧﺸﻚ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ روي ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻫﻴﺪرواﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و زاوﻳﻪ ﻗﻮس ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
.‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬40° ‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮي آن‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ و ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ اﺳﺖ و ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎي آن داراي ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ‬
.‫ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع در ﺻﻮرت ﺳﻔﺎرش ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ اﺿﻄﺮاري‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ داراي ﻳﻚ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ اﺿﻄﺮاري اﺳﺖ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻋﻘﺒﻲ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬
.‫ﭼﻜﺶ ﺧﻮرد ﻛﺮد‬
ROPS,FOPS
،‫ ﻗﺮار دارد‬ROPS,FOPS ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺎرت ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺳﻘﻮط اﺷﻴﺎء‬FOPS.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬241 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ي‬
‫ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻻﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺎرت ﺳﺎزه ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭼﭗ ﺷﺪن‬ROPS ‫)ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺳﻘﻔﻲ( و‬
‫ در ﻣﻮرد ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ وﺟﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﺜﻞ‬.‫)ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭼﭗ ﺷﺪن( اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺳﻮراخ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر ﻧﺼﺐ‬،‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺳﻘﻒ‬
‫ﻛﭙﺴﻮل آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ آﻧﺘﻦ رادﻳﻮ و ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺑﺪون درﻣﻴﺎن ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ‬
.‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪﻳﻪ ﻧﻘﺾ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‬
. ‫ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﻓﺮاد ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ از اﻳﻦ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ آﮔﺎه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
6
 Presentation
Hydraulic system
The hydraulic system is load-sensing, which means that the
oil in the system is supplied in proportion to the position of
the hydraulic control levers. If the hydraulic control levers are
in neutral position, consequently no oil is supplied.
The hydraulic system is equipped with pumps, which are
common to the steering system and the working hydraulics,
however, the steering system has priority supply from one of
the pumps. Normally brake charging takes place when
steering and working hydraulics are used, but when there is a
greater demand, also the fan pump contributes.
Equipment
The machine can be provided with different types of optional
equipment, depending on the requirements of different
markets. Examples of such equipment are lever steering
(CDC), Boom Suspension System (BSS), secondary steering,
separate attachment locking, automatic engine shutoff and
automatic greasing (standard on certain markets).
Anti-theft device (optional equipment)
An installed anti-theft device makes it more difficult to steel
the machine. Volvo CE can supply an anti-theft device as
optional equipment. If your machine is not equipped with
such a device, look into the possibility of having one installed
by your dealer.
Logged machine data
The machine is equipped with a software system that registers
and stores various types of information. The information can
be transferred to Volvo CE in order to be used for product
development purposes and for trouble-shooting. The stored
information contains among other items travelling speed, fuel
consumption and various temperatures.
Volvo CE and its authorised workshops will make use of this
information.
Modifications
Modifications to this machine including the use of
unauthorised attachments, accessories, units or parts that may
affect the machine integrity (condition) and/or the ability of
the machine to function in the way for which it is designed.
Persons or organisation who carry out unauthorised
modifications, assume all responsibility for consequences,
which arise because of the modification or can be attributed to
the modification, including damaging affect on the machine.
No modifications of any kind may be carried out on this
product unless each specific modification having first been
approved in writing by Volvo Construction Equipment. Volvo
Construction Equipment reserves the right to decline all
warranty claims which have arisen because of or can be
traced to unauthorised modifications.
Modifications may be considered to be officially approved, if
at least one of the following conditions has been met:
The attachment, the accessory, the unit or the part has been
made or distributed by Volvo Construction Equipment and
has been installed according to the factory approved method
described in a publication available from Volvo Construction
Equipment; or
The modification has been approved in writing by the
Engineering Department for the respective product line at
Volvo Construction Equipment.
7
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ روﻏﻦ در اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬.‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ روﻏﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬،‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ داراي ﺗﻌﺪادي ﭘﻤﭗ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﺎري‬
‫ اﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن داراي ﺗﻘﺪم ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ از ﻳﻜﻲ از اﻳﻦ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺎ‬. ‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺷﺎرژ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﺎري ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬.‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ اﻣﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ » ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ‬.‫ﻫﻢ در ﺣﺎل اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه « ﻧﻴﺰ در ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ روﻏﻦ ﻣﺸﺎرﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري ﻃﺒﻖ ﺳﻔﺎرش ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬، (CDC) ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻋﺒﺎرت اﺳﺖ از ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي‬.‫ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻨﺪه اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و‬، ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺠﺰا‬، ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬، (BSS) ‫ﺑﻮم‬
( ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ )ﺑﺼﻮرت اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد در ﻣﻮارد ﺧﺎص ﻓﺮوش‬
(‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬volvo.‫ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﺑﺎ وﺟﻮد ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ‬
.‫ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري اراﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ در ﻣﻮرد اﻣﻜﺎن ﻧﺼﺐ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ داراي ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
.‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺧﻮد ﻣﺸﻮرت ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰاري ﻣﺠﻬﺰ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻧﻮاع ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ از اﻃﻼﻋﺎت را ﺛﺒﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ‬volvoCE ‫ اﻳﻦ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ‬.‫و ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬، ‫ در اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺷﺪه‬.‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻت و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ از آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ دﻣﺎﻫﺎي ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮن و ﻣﻮاردي دﻳﮕﺮ وﺟﻮد دارد‬، ‫ ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬، ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
.‫ از اﻳﻦ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﺮد‬، ‫ و ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺎز واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ آن‬volvoCE
‫اﺻﻼﺣﺎت‬
‫ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬، ‫ ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬، ‫در اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ )ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ( ﺻﺤﺖ ﻛﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮاﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ اﺷﺨﺎص ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎزﻣﺎن ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت‬.‫اﻧﺠﺎم آﻧﻬﺎ ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮار دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ دﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻋﻮاﻗﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ آﻧﻬﺎ اﻳﻦ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮان ﻋﻠﺖ را ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﻧﺴﺒﺖ داد و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وارد ﻣﻲ‬
.‫ ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮﻧﺪ‬. ‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫در اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﺻﻼﺣﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺨﺴﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬. ‫ ﻛﺘﺒﺎً ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬volvo ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ ﺣﻖ رد ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺎت ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ اي را در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ آﻧﻬﺎ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ‬volvo
‫ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز در آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﻮد ﻣﺤﻔﻮظ ﻣﻲ‬
.‫دارد‬
‫ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت رﺳﻤﺎً ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺮار‬،‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﻘﻖ ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬، ‫ ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬، ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ و ﻳﺎ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﻃﺒﻖ روش ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ در دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ اي‬volvo
‫ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺨﺶ‬،‫ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫از ﻃﺮف ﺷﺮﻛﺖ آورده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
، volvo ‫ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ در ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬
.‫ﻛﺘﺒﺎً ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Presentation
CareTrack (optional equipment)
The machine can be equipped with CareTrack, a telematics
system developed by Volvo Construction Equipment. The
system stores information about the machine, e.g. machine
position, operating hours, fuel consumption and alarms (may
vary by machine model and/or subscription). This information
can then be wirelessly transferred to a computer. CareTrack is
available in different versions, depending on the required
information level.
CareTrack makes it easier to plan for service and reduces
costly downtime. Productivity is improved by knowing if
machines are being operated correctly and how much fuel is
being consumed. CareTrack also allows the customer to
restrict the operating area of the machine, by using virtual
fences. This helps eliminate unauthorised machine usage and
theft. For further information, contact a Volvo Construction
Equipment dealer.
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
(‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ردﻳﺎب )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ردﻳﺎب ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ از راه دور اﺳﺖ و ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ را در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬.‫ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻛﺮد‬، ‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ داده ﺷﺪه‬volvo ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮﻫﺎ )ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬،‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
. ‫اﻳﻦ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪل ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و داﺷﺘﻦ ﺣﻖ اﺷﺘﺮاك ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ردﻳﺎب در‬.‫اﻳﻦ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﻲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫وﻳﺮاﻳﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻔﺎوﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت درﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ردﻳﺎب داﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ را آﺳﺎن ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از زﻣﺎن‬
‫ ﺑﺎ آﮔﺎﻫﻲ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ و‬.‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ‬.‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﺼﺮف ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻬﺮه وري را ﺑﻬﺒﻮد ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‬
‫ردﻳﺎب ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ ﺣﺼﺎر ﻣﺠﺎزي ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮي اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎرﺑﺮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﻨﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺬف اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ‬.‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺷﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬Volvo ‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬
8
 Presentation
CE marking, EMC directive
CE marking, EMC
directive
CE marking
(Declaration of Conformity)
(Applies only to machines marketed within
the EU/EEA)
This machine is CE marked. This means that,
when delivered to the customer, the machine
meets the applicable "Essential Health and
Safety Requirements" according to the EU
Machine Safety Directive.
Any person carrying out changes that affect
the safety of the machine, is also responsible
for the same.
As proof that the requirements are met, the
machine is supplied with an EU Declaration
of Conformity, issued by Volvo CE for each
separate machine. This EU declaration also
covers attachments manufactured by Volvo
CE. The documentation is a valuable
document, which should be kept safe and
retained for at least ten years. The document
should always accompany the machine when
it is sold.
If the machine is used for other purposes or
with other attachments than described in this
manual, safety must at all times and in each
separate case be maintained. The person
carrying out such action is also responsible for
the action which, in some cases, may require a
new CE marking and the issue of a new EU
Declaration of Conformity.
The EU EMC directive
The electronic equipment of the machine may
in some cases cause interference to other
electronic equipment, or suffer from external
electromagnetic interference, which may
constitute safety risks.
The EU EMC directive on "Electromagnetic
compatibility", 89/336/EEC, provides a
general description of what demands can be
made on the machine out of a safety point of
view, where permitted limits have been
determined and given according to
international standards.
A machine or device which meets the
requirements should be CE marked. Our
machines have been tested particularly for
electromagnetic interference. The CE marking
of the machine and the declaration of
conformity also cover the EMC directive.
If other electronic equipment is fitted to this
machine, the equipment must be CE marked
and tested on the machine with regard to
electromagnetic interference.
9
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
EMC ‫ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ‬، CE ‫ﻧﺸﺎن‬
EMC ‫ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ‬، CE ‫ﻧﺸﺎن‬
CE ‫ﻧﺸﺎن‬
(‫)اﻇﻬﺎر ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬EEA ‫)ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
.(‫ﻓﺮوش رﺳﻴﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬CE ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﻧﺸﺎن‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد »ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت اﻳﻤﻨﻲ و ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺮوري« را ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ‬
.‫اروﭘﺎ دارا ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮار‬، ‫اﮔﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎ اﻋﻤﺎل ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات‬
.‫دﻫﺪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪه ﺧﻮد او ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي اﻇﻬﺎر‬، ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺪرﻛﻲ دال ﺑﺮ وﺟﻮد ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ‬volvo CE‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ اﻇﻬﺎرﻳﻪ اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎ‬. ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺠﺰا ﺻﺎدر ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ را‬Volvo CE ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ و وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ اﺳﻨﺎد ﺑﺎ ارزﺷﻲ‬، ‫ اﺳﻨﺎد اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه‬. ‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ‬.‫ ﺳﺎل ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬10 ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ اﻣﻦ و ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫اﺳﻨﺎد را ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻓﺮوش ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺪي ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫اﮔﺮ از اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻛﺎرﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ از آﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﺤﺒﺘﻲ ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻛﻞ‬
‫ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬، ‫ﻣﺪت اﺳﺘﻔﺎده و ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮردي ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺟﺪا ﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬.‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ را ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ آن را ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ و در ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮاردي ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ و ﺻﺪور ﻳﻚ اﻇﻬﺎر ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬CE ‫اﺳﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺸﺎن‬
.‫اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎ‬EMC ‫ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
.‫ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮوز ﺧﻄﺮات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎ در ﻣﻮرد»ﺳﺎزﮔﺎري اﻟﻜﺘﺮو‬EMC ‫ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ‬
‫ ﺷﺮح ﻛﻠﻲ در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ‬89/336/EEC«‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺪود‬
.‫ﻣﺠﺎز را ﻃﺒﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ اراﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و وﺳﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت را دارا ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ داراي‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎ از ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬CE ‫ﻧﺸﺎن‬
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و اﻇﻬﺎر‬CE ‫ ﻧﺸﺎن‬. ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت وﻳﮋه ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬EMC ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ آن ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ دﻳﮕﺮي روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﻮار‬
‫ ﺷﻮد و روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬CE ‫ آن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ داراي ﻧﺸﺎن‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫از ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
 Presentation
Communication equipment, installation
Communication equipment,
installation
IMPORTANT! All installation of optional communication
equipment must be carried out by trained professionals
and in accordance with the Volvo CE instructions
applicable to the machine.
Protection against electromagnetic
interference
This machine has been tested in accordance with EU directive
89/336/EEC governing electromagnetic interference. It is
therefore very important that all non-approved electronic
accessories, such as communication equipment, should be
tested before installation and use, since they can cause
interference to the electronic systems of the machine.
Mobile telephones
To obtain the best functionality, mobile telephones should be
permanently installed in the electrical system of the machine,
with a permanent aerial fixed on the cab and installed as
advised by the manufacturer. Note, that if a portable mobile
telephone is used, it can constantly transmit information to its
base station, even when the telephone is not used. For this
reason, it must not be placed close to other electronic
equipment in the machine, e.g. directly on a control panel or
similar .
Guidelines
The guidelines given below must be followed during
installation:
ƒ The position of the aerial must be selected so that it is
well adapted to the environment.
ƒ The aerial downlead must be of the coaxial cable type.
Make sure that the cable is undamaged, that the screen is
not split up at the ends, but thoroughly encased in the
connector and has a good galvanic contact with the
same.
ƒ The mating surface between the aerial mounting bracket
and the bodywork must be clean metal surfaces, with all
dirt and oxide removed. Protect the mating surfaces
against corrosion after installation, to maintain good
galvanic contact.
Remember to keep interfering cables and those which may
suffer from interference apart. Interfering cables are the
power supply cables and the aerial cable to the
communication equipment. Cables which may suffer from
interference are cables to and from electronic control units in
the machine. Install cable harnesses as close to grounded plate
surfaces as possible, as these have a screening effect.
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ ﻧﺼﺐ‬، ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ‬
‫ ﻧﺼﺐ‬، ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ اﺧﺘﻴﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ‬
، ‫ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺟﺮا روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬Volvo CE ‫آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه و ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ‬89/336/EEC ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻟﻮازم ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻧﺸﺪه‬.‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﭘﻴﺶ از ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ ﭼﻮن ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﻳﻦ‬،‫از ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻤﺮاه‬
‫ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت داﺋﻤﻲ روي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬،‫ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر دﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎراﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و آﻧﺘﻦ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت داﺋﻤﻲ و ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه روي‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﮔﺮ از ﻳﻚ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺳﻴﺎر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻲ‬.‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻮار ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت را ﺑﻪ اﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎه‬،‫ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت داﺋﻤﻲ ﺣﺘﻲ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ از آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ را ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬.‫ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻳﺶ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﺪ‬
.‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً روي ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و اﻣﺜﺎل آن ﻗﺮار داد‬
‫رﻫﻨﻤﻮدﻫﺎ‬
:‫در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ از رﻫﻨﻤﻮدﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي آﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ƒ
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ آﻧﺘﻦ وﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻧﻮع ﻛﻮآﻛﺴﻴﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن‬ ƒ
‫ در دو اﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬.‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ دو ﺗﻜﻪ ﻧﺸﻮد‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﻮب ﺑﺮ‬
.‫ﻗﺮار ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ آﻧﺘﻦ و ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻠﺰي ﺗﻤﻴﺰي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ و‬ ƒ
‫زﻧﮓ زدﮔﻲ آن ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﭘﺎك ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎس را در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ‬
.‫ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﻮب ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻓﺮاﻣﻮش ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ را ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﻨﺪ از ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺑﺮق و ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ‬.‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ واﺣﺪ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬. ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬،‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وارد ﻳﺎ از آﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﻮح ورق ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ‬.‫ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
.‫دارﻧﺪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر روي ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ دارد‬
10
 Presentation ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
Product plates ‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬

Product plates ‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬

With the aid of the product plates shown below, it is possible
to identify the machine and its components. Product
Identification Number, PIN, indicate the model designation,
engine code and serial number of the machine. The
Component Identification Number, CIN, indicates the serial
number of the component . Make a note of the identification
numbers on page2.
When ordering spare parts, and in all telephone enquiries or
correspondence the PIN and CIN must always be quoted.
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و اﺟﺰاي آن را‬، ‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﺷﺪه‬
‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و‬، ‫ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺪل ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬، (PIN) ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬.‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﺷﻤﺎره‬، (CIN) ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ اﺟﺰاي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬. ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺮﻳﺎل ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻳﺎدداﺷﺖ‬2 ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎي ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ را در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﺳﺮﻳﺎل اﺟﺰاي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﻔﺎرش ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ و در ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺒﺎت و ﺗﻤﺎس ﻫﺎي ﺗﻠﻔﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺪﻫﺎي‬
.‫ را اراﺋﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬CIN ‫ و‬PIN

1 Lifting frame ‫ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻮم‬.1

The manufacturer's name and address and the lifting frame ‫ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻮم‬CIN ‫ﻧﺎم و آدرس ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻛﺪ‬
CIN. ‫ ﻧﺸﺎن اﺻﻠﻲ‬.2
2 Primary marking
(‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )در ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ ﭼﺎپ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬PIN ‫ﻛﺪ‬
The machine PIN (stamped-in on the right side).
‫ ﭘﻼك ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬.3
3 Product plate
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬PIN ‫ﻧﺎم و آدرس ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻛﺪ‬
The manufacturer's name and address, machine PIN.
4 Additional plate for product plate ‫ ﭘﻼك اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﭘﻼك ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬.4
Machine weight, engine output, year of manufacture, year of ‫ )ﻓﻘﻂ‬CE ‫ ﺳﺎل ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ و ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺸﺎن‬، ‫ ﺳﺎل ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬،‫ ﻗﺪرت ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬،‫وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
delivery and position of CE mark (EU/EEA countries only). (EEA ‫در ﻛﺸﻮرﻫﺎي اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎ و‬
5 Cab ‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬.5
The manufacturer's name and address, product number, ، ‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬، ‫ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺪل ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬، ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻣﺤﺼﻮل‬، ‫ﻧﺎم و آدرس ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
machine model designation, max. machine weight, cab serial ‫ و ﺷﻤﺎره ﮔﻮاﻫﻲ‬ROPS/FOPS‫ ﺷﻤﺎره اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬،‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺮﻳﺎل ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
number, ROPS/FOPS number and ROPS/FOPS certificate
ROPS/FOPS
number. ‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬.6
6 Engine ‫ﺷﻤﺎره و ﻋﻨﻮان ﻧﻮع ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
The engine type designation and number.
‫ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬.7
7 Front axle
‫ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮك ﺟﻠﻮ‬CIN ‫ﻧﺎم و آدرس ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻛﺪ‬
The manufacturer's name and address and front drive axle
‫ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬.8
CIN.
8 Transmission ‫ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬CIN ‫ﻧﺎم و آدرس ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻛﺪ‬
The manufacturer's name and address and transmission CIN. ‫ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬.9
9 Rear axle ‫ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮك ﻋﻘﺐ‬CIN ‫ﻧﺎم و آدرس ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻛﺪ‬
The manufacturer's name and address and rear drive axle
CIN.

11
 Presentation
12 Information and warning plates
Information and warning plates /
decals
The operator should know and pay attention to the
information and warning plates / decals which are positioned
on the machine. All plates/decals are not installed on all
machines, as they are market and machine dependent.
The decals/plates must be kept free from dirt, so that they can
be read and understood. If they have been lost or are no
longer legible, they must be replaced immediately. The part
number (order number) of the respective plates/decals can be
found in the Parts Catalogue.
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاري و اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬/ ‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاري و اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬/ ‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاري و اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ واﻗﻊ ﺑﺮ روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را‬/ ‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ روي ﻫﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ‬/‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺪ و ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از‬/‫ اﻳﻦ ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ‬. ‫ﻧﺸﺪه اﻧﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻧﺤﻮه ﻓﺮوش آن ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻫﺎ از ﺑﻴﻦ‬.‫ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﺷﺪن ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺮد ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺧﻮاﻧﺎ و ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬. ‫روﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﻮاﻧﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻮراً ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺮدﻧﺸﺎن اﻗﺪام ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ در‬/ ‫)ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﻔﺎرش( ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪام از اﻳﻦ ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
12
Presentation ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
Information and warning plates / decals ‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاري و اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬/‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ‬

1WARNING! First read the Operator's .‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ﻧﺨﺴﺖ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 1
Manual

2WARNING! Rotating fan. ‫ﻫﺸﺪار ! ﻓﻦ در ﺣﺎل ﭼﺮﺧﺶ‬ 2

3 WARNING! Reversing machine ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 3

4WARNING! Check that the attachment is ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ 4
locked

،‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ﺧﻄﺮ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن وﻟﻪ ﺷﺪن درﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ‬ 5

5 WARNING! Warning, risk of crushing at ‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ دور ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ‬
frame joint if machine is steered

6 WARNING! Do not walk under raised ‫ راه ﻧﺮوﻳﺪ‬،‫ﻫﺸﺪار! زﻳﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ آورده ﺷﺪه‬ 6
attachment

7WARNING! Do not step on this surface ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ر وي اﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺎ ﻧﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬ 7

8 WARNING! Pressurised system ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر‬ 8

9WARNING! When travelling on a public ‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬، ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬ 9
road, it is prohibited to have the lever ‫( ﻣﻤﻨﻮع اﺳﺖ – از ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬CDC) ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي‬
steering (CDC) acti vated - use the steering
wheel .‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

13
Presentation ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬

Information and warning plates / decals ‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاري و اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬/‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ‬

10 WARNING! Before connecting jump ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺗﺼﺎل ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي راﺑﻂ – راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬ 10
leads-read the Operator's Manual .‫را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

11 WARNING! Hot surfaces ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! ﺳﻄﻮح داغ‬ 11

12 WARNING! Hot coolant ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! آب داغ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ 12

13 Hydraulic oil level ‫ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ 13

14 Refrigerant R134a R134a ‫ﻣﺒﺮد‬ 14

15 Hydraulic oil filler point ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ 15

16 Fuel filling point ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ 16

17 Emergency exit ‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ اﺿﻄﺮاري‬ 17

18 WARNING! Use Volvo coolant ‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬volvo ‫ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬VCS ‫ﻫﺸﺪار! از آب‬ 18

VCS - read the Operator's
Manual .‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

14
 Presentation ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
Information and warning plates / decals ‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪاري و اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬/‫ﭘﻼك ﻫﺎ‬

19 Air cleaner - read the Operator's Manual ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا – راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬19

20 Battery disconnect switch ‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬20

21 Attaching point for lashing ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬ 21

22 Sound power ievei outside the machine ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﻠﻨﺪي ﺻﺪا در ﺧﺎرج ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ 22

23 Sound pressure level in cab ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺷﺪت ﻓﺸﺎر ﺻﺪا در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 23

24 Point for lifting ‫ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن‬ 24

25 Maximum force on lowing de- ‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻴﺮوي وارد ﺑﺮ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬25
vice - read the Operator's .‫ﻛﺮدن راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Manual

26 Lifting and lashing information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﭘﻴﺮاﻣﻮن ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ و ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن‬ 26

27 Lubrication and service chart ‫ﻧﻤﻮدار ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬ 27

28 Transmission-read the Operator's Manual .‫ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ 28

29 WARNING! Disconnect the frame joint ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ را‬، ‫ﻫﺸﺪار ! ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬ 29
lock before operating .‫ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

15
 Presentation ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
Federal Clean Air Act ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻓﺪرال ﻫﻮاي ﭘﺎك‬

Federal Clean Air Act ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻓﺪرال ﻫﻮاي ﭘﺎك‬

The Federal Clean Air Act Section 203.a (3) prohibits the
‫ ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻨﺘﺮل آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻫﻮا‬، ‫ ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻓﺪرال ﻫﻮاي ﭘﺎك‬203.a(3) ‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
removal of air pollution control devices or the modification of
an EPA-certified non-road engine to a non certified EPA ‫از روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم اﺻﻼﺣﺎت روي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي داراي ﮔﻮاﻫﻴﻨﺎﻣﻪ‬
configuration. .‫ ﻣﻤﻨﻮع اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﮔﻮاﻫﻴﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
The Federal regulations implementing the Clean Air Act for
40CFR ‫ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻓﺪرال ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻫﻮاي ﭘﺎك در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﻮﺗﻮرﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي‬
non-road engines, 40 CFR 89.1003(a)(3)(i), reads as follows:
: ‫ اﻳﻦ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬، ‫ اﺟﺮا ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬89.1003(a)(3)(i)

The following acts and the causing thereof are prohibited:

:‫اﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ آﻣﺪه و آﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ اﻋﻤﺎل ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺷﻮد ﻣﻤﻨﻮع اﺳﺖ‬
For a person to remove or render inoperative a device or
element of design installed on or in a non-road engine vehicle ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ از ﻓﺮوش و ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮي ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺮء ﻃﺮح ﻛﻪ‬
or equipment in compliance with the regulations under this ‫روي ﻳﺎ داﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻳﺎ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮري ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﺪ‬
part prior to its sale and delivery to the ultimate purchaser or
‫ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ و ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻛﻪ آﮔﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻓﺮوش و ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ‬
for a person knowingly to remove or render inoperative such
a device or element of design after the sale and delivery to the .‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮي اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮل اﺳﺖ‬
ultimate purchaser.
.‫ دﻻر ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﺗﺨﻠﻒ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬2500 ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﺟﺮﻳﻤﻪ اي ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ‬
The law provides a penalty of up to $2,500 for each violation.

An example of a prohibited modification is the recalibration ‫ دﺳﺖ ﻛﺎري ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎﻧﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ‬،‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ از اﺻﻼﺣﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎز‬
of the fuel system so that the engine will exceed the certified .‫ﺗﻮان و ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر از ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎز ﻓﺮاﺗﺮ رود‬
horsepower or torque.

You should not make a change to an EPA-certified non-road

engine that would result in an engine that does not match the ‫ ﭼﻨﺎن ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮي دﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬EPA ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﻮﺗﻮر وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي ﺗﺤﺖ ﮔﻮاﻫﻲ‬
engine configuration certified to meet the Federal Standards. .‫دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻣﻮﺗﻮري ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻓﺪرال اﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

Customer Assistance
Volvo Construction Equipment wishes to help assure that the
‫ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮي‬
Emission Control System Warranty is properly administered. ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ از اﺟﺮاي ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ‬volvo ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬
In the event that you do not receive the warranty service to
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺎت ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ‬. ‫ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل آﻻﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
which you believe you are entitled under the Emission
Control System Warranty, you should contact the nearest ‫و ﻋﻘﻴﺪه دارﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﻖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬.‫ﻧﺎﻣﻪ را درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Volvo Construction Equipment Regional office for assistance.
‫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻤﻚ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ اداره ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ اي‬،‫آﻻﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ را داﺷﺘﻪ اﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬Volvo ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬

16
 Presentation
Federal Clean Air Act
Normal Non-Road Engine Use Normal Non-
Road Engine Use
The Maintenance Instructions are based on the assumption
that this conventional machine will be used as designated in
the Operator's Instruction Manual and operated only with the
specified fuel and lubrication oils.
Non-Road Engine Maintenance
This is a non-road engine of conventional design and any
local dealer may perform the necessary non-road emission
control maintenance as defined in this manual.
Volvo recommends that the purchaser use the service
program for the non-road engine, known as Preventative
Maintenance, including the recommended engine emission
control maintenance.
In order to document that the proper regular maintenance has
been performed on the non-road engine, Volvo recommends
that the owner keep all records and receipts of such
maintenance. These records or receipts should be transferred
to each subsequent purchaser of the non-road engine.
Service Performed By Your Local Dealer
Your local dealer is best suited to give you good, dependable
service since he has trained service technicians and is
equipped with genuine original manufacturer's parts and
special tools and the latest technical publications. Discuss
your servicing and maintenance requirements with your local
dealer. He can tailor a maintenance program for your needs.
For regular, scheduled service or maintenance, it is advisable
to contact your local dealer in advance to arrange for an
appointment to ensure availability of the correct equipment
and service technician to work on your machine. In this way
you will assist your local dealer in reducing the time required
to carry out the service of your machine.
Preventive Maintenance Program
To retain the dependability, noise level and exhaust emission
control performance originally built into your conventional
non-road engine, it is essential that the non-road engine
receives periodic service, inspections, adjustments and
maintenance.
17
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻓﺪرال ﻫﻮاي ﭘﺎك‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻌﻤﻮل از ﻣﻮﺗﻮر وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺎس ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺎرف ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎن ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ در راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري ﺷﺮح داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد و ﺗﻨﻬﺎ از ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و‬
.‫روﻏﻦ رواﻧﻜﺎري ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﻮﺗﻮر وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي ﻣﺘﻌﺎرف اﺳﺖ و ﻫﺮ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل آﻻﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ را ﻫﻤﺎن ﻃﻮر ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺷﺮح داده‬
.‫ﺷﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار از ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي ﻛﻪ‬volvo ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﻴﺮاﻧﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫ﺷﺪه در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل آﻻﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻨﻈﻢ و ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﺎن ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺪارك و رﺳﻴﺪﻫﺎي اﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‬volvo ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺪارك و رﺳﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﻌﺪي ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬.‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات را ﻧﺰد ﺧﻮد ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ اراﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺴﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺧﻮب و ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ ﭼﻮن او داراي ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه اﺳﺖ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻳﺪﻛﻲ‬، ‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻧﻲ اراﺋﻪ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ اﺑﺰار آﻻت ﻣﺨﺼﻮص و آﺧﺮﻳﻦ دﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻫﺎي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ را در‬،‫اﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ در ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺧﻮد ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺧﻮد‬.‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر دارد‬
.‫ او ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺮاي رﻓﻊ ﻧﻴﺎزﻫﺎي ﺷﻤﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ‬.‫ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ و ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ و زﻣﺎﻧﻲ را ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ‬.‫ ﺣﻀﻮر دارﻧﺪ‬،‫و ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎن ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم‬
.‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﻴﺮاﻧﻪ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل آﻻﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ اﮔﺰوز و ﻣﻴﺰان ﺳﺮ و ﺻﺪا در ﻣﻮرد‬، ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن‬
، ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي ﻣﺘﻌﺎرف ﺷﻤﺎ در اﺑﺘﺪا ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ اﻣﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
، ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت و ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دوره اي ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎده اي‬،‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ‬
 Presentation ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
Federal Clean Air Act ‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﻓﺪرال ﻫﻮاي ﭘﺎك‬

Fuel system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬

Fuel Recommendations
The fuel used must be clean, completely distilled, stable and
non-corrosive. Distillation range, cetane level and sulfur
content are most important when selecting fuel for optimum
combustion and minimum wear.
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﺰان ﻋﺪد‬، ‫ ﮔﺴﺘﺮه ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ‬.‫ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﭘﺎﻳﺪار و ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﻮرﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺎن و ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﻮﮔﺮد ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻮاردي ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد ﺗﺎ اﺣﺘﺮاق ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ و ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺷﻮد‬

Engine working conditions and ambient temperature
influence the selection of the fuel with respect to cold
handling properties and cetane levels.
In cold weather conditions, below 32 ºF (0 ºC), the use of
lighter distillate or higher cetane level fuel are recommended.
(Final boiling point max. 660 ºF (349 ºC) and cetane min.
45.).
To avoid excessive deposit formation and to minimize the
emissions of sulfur dioxide into the ambient air, the sulfur
content of the fuel should be the lowest available. The diesel
fuels recommended for use in Volvo engines should meet
ASTM designation: D 975 No. 1D (C-B) or No. 2D (T-T)
with a cetane level above 42 and sulfur content not exceeding
0.5 percent by weight.
Check for fuel leaks (while the engine is running at fast
idle):
ƒ Visually check unions and hose connections.
‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و دﻣﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮاص ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﺮد و ﻣﻴﺰان ﻋﺪدﺳﺘﺎن‬
.‫در اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺷﺪه ﺳﺒﻚ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ‬، (32°F) o°C‫در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻫﻮاي ﺳﺮد زﻳﺮ‬
‫(و‬660 °F(349 °C) ‫ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮش ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬.‫ﻋﺪد ﺳﺘﺎن ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
45 ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻋﺪد ﺳﺘﺎن‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﺟﺘﻨﺎب از ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ رﺳﻮب و ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻛﺮدن آﻻﻳﻨﺪﮔﻲ دي اﻛﺴﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬.‫ ﻣﻴﺰان ﮔﻮﮔﺮد ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﮔﻮﮔﺮد در ﻫﻮاي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ASTM ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬Volvo ‫دﻳﺰل ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
42 ‫ را دارا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻋﺪد ﺳﺘﺎن آن ﺑﺎﻻي‬No.2D(T-T) ‫ ﻳﺎ‬D97 NO.1D(C-B)
.‫ درﺻﺪ وزﻧﻲ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬0.5 ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﻮﮔﺮد آن از‬
‫ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ دور در ﺟﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ در ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن‬
(‫اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ƒ ﻣﻬﺮه ﻣﺎﺳﻮره ﻫﺎ و اﺗﺼﺎﻻت را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﭼﺸﻤﻲ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

:‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ را از ﻧﻈﺮ اﺷﻜﺎﻻت زﻳﺮ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Check the condition of the fuel hoses for:
ƒ Ageing ‫ƒ ﻛﻬﻨﮕﻲ‬
ƒ Cracks ‫ƒ وﺟﻮد ﺗﺮك‬
ƒ Blisters
ƒ Scuffing ‫ƒ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﺪن‬
‫ƒ ﺧﺮاﺷﻴﺪﮔﻲ و ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ‬
Check the condition of the fuel tank:
ƒ Drain condensation water. :‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
ƒ Check for cracks.
ƒ Check for leaks. ‫ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ƒ آﺑﻲ را ﻛﻪ از ﻣﻴﻌﺎن ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻣﺪه‬
ƒ Check the mounting. ‫ƒ وﺟﻮد ﺗﺮك ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ƒ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺸﺘﻲ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Check the turbocharger: ‫ƒ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
ƒ Visually check for leaks in the intake hoses and exhaust
pipe of the turbocharger.
:‫ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ƒ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺸﺘﻲ را در ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ورودي و ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﮔﺰوز ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

18
Instrument panels (‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات)اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬

Instrument panels (‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات)اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬

Warning!
Do not operate the machine until you are thoroughly
familiar with the position and function of the various
instruments and controls. Read through the Operator's
Manual thoroughly - Your safety is involved!
Keep the manual in the cab so that it always is at hand.
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ و ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮن اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻛﺎﻣﻼً آﺷﻨﺎ‬
‫ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را ﻛﺎﻣﻼًﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ – ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ‬.‫ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻧﺸﺪه اﻳﺪ‬
!‫ﻣﻄﺮح اﺳﺖ‬
.‫اﻳﻦ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ را در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ در دﺳﺘﺮس ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬

1 Front instrument panel (centre instrument, switches, ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬،‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬ 1
keyboard for display unit)
(‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
2 Overhead panel (climate control system)
(‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﺮ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 2
3 Cab post panel (mode selector, switches, ignition switch,
hand-throttle control and power socket 12 V. ‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬، ‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ )ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر ﻣﻮد‬ 3
4 Rear cab wall with power socket 24 V, hour recorder, (12V ‫ ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ و ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮق‬،
electrical distribution box with fuses and relays. Socket
‫ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق‬،‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺷﻤﺎر‬، 24V ‫دﻳﻮاره ﻋﻘﺒﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ داراي ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮق‬ 4
for service tool.
.‫ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ و رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻳﻚ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اﺑﺰارﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ اﺳﺖ‬

19
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات)اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي(‬
‫‪Front instrument panel‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫‪Front instrument panel‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ‬

‫‪1 Parking brake‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2 Keyboard for display unit‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫(‪3 Separate attachment locking (optional equipment‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﺰا )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري(‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4 Centre instrument‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5 Hazard flashers‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زن اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ )ﻓﻼﺷﺮ(‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6 Unassigned‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪1 Parking brake‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻧﺤﻮه ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 68‬را‬
‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Parking Parking brake function, see‬‬
‫‪page 68‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫‪2 Keyboard for display unit‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ در ﻣﻮرد ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪about keyboard, see page 37‬‬ ‫‪ 37‬را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪20‬‬
Instrument panels
Front instrument panel
3 Separate attachment locking
(optional equipment)
This equipment makes it possible for the
operator to connect and disconnect
attachments from the operator seat.
When disconnecting attachments, the switch
must be switched on (upper end of switch
pressed in). A catch on the switch ensures that
no inadvertent actuation occurs.
NOTE! When the switch is switched on, it
is possible to operate the tilting and lifting
functions simultaneously in order to align
the attachment.
A question regarding whether a check, that
the attachment is locked, has been carried out
will be shown on the display unit. Make sure
it is locked and acknowledge by pressing the
SELECT key on the keyboard.
Warning!
Before using the machine, check that the
attachment is securely connected and
locked to the attachment bracket by
pressing the front end of the attachment
against the ground.
Information about attaching and
disconnecting attachments, see page108.
4 Centre instrument
Instrument Information about the centre
instrument, see page 32
5 Hazard flashers
Upper end of switch pressed in = All
direction indicators on the ma-
chine will flash in time with the lamp in the
switch together with the
control lamp for direction indicators. The
hazard flashers can be
used even if the ignition switch key has not
been turned on.
21
(‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات)اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ‬
(‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﺰا )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬ .3
‫اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ از روي ﻫﻤﺎن ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﺰا را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ و ﻳﺎ از آن‬
.‫ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺿﺎﻣﻦ‬.‫)ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷﻮد( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫روي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ از ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ آن ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﻣﻜﺎن زاوﻳﻪ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ!وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
‫دادن و ﺑﺎﻻ آوردن ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮان‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪه را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮد‬
‫در ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﻮاﻟﻲ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ "آﻳﺎ‬
. ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ" ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫از ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪن آﻧﻬﺎ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
.‫ آن را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬SELECT
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺳﺮ ﺟﻠﻮي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﭘﻴﺶ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ اﺗﺼﺎل و ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﻪ‬، ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮ روي زﻣﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﭘﻴﺮاﻣﻮن اﺗﺼﺎل و ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
.‫ را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬108 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬ .4
،‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﭘﻴﺮاﻣﻮن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬32 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
(‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زن اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ )ﻓﻼﺷﺮ‬ .5
‫ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﭼﺮاغ راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﻻﻣﭗ داﺧﻞ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ و ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﺣﺘﻲ اﮔﺮ‬.‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻫﺎ در ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎز ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از ﻓﻼﺷﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
Instrument panels (‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات )اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
Overhead panel
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﺮ‬
Overhead panel ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﺮ‬
limate control system
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

1 Air conditioning ‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬ 1

2 Cab ventilation / interval heating ‫ ﺑﺨﺎري ﻗﻄﻊ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي‬/ ‫ﻫﻮا ﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 2
3 Fan control ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﻦ‬ 3
4 Temperature control ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎ‬ 4
5 Air distribution control ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﺤﻮه ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا‬ 5
Information about climate control system, see page77.
‫ را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ‬77 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﭘﻴﺮاﻣﻮن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬

22
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Cab post panel
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

Cab post panel ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

1 Mode selector, gear-shifting programme
(APS III) (APS 111) ‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬،‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر ﻣﻮد‬ 1
2 Unassigned ‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 2
3 Fully automatic downshifting (1-4)
4 Unassigned ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬ 3
5 Unassigned ‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 4
6 Bucket positioner
‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 5
7 Boom kick-out
8 Unassigned ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ 6
9 Unassigned ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬ 7
10 Unassigned
11 Single-acting lifting function (optional ‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 8
equipment) ‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 9
12 Unassigned
‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 10
13 Function selector, Boom Suspension
System (optional equipment) ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬ 11
14 Front working lights (‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
15 Rear working lights
16 Lights ‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 12
17 Rotating warning beacon (optional ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬، ‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ 13
equipment)
(‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
18 Electrically adjustable rear view mirrors
(optional equipment) ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 14
19 Electrically heated rear view mirrors ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 15
(optional equipment)
20 Wiper and washer, rear window ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎ‬ 16
21 Hydraulic emergency stop (optional (‫ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬ 17
equipment)
22 Ignition switch (‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻐﻞ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬ 18
23 Unassigned (‫ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻐﻞ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬ 19
24 Rheostat, instrument lighting, guide
‫ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر و ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎك ﻛﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 20
light in switches
25 Hand-throttle control (optional ‫اﺳﺘﻮپ اﺿﻄﺮاري ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬ 21
equipment) (‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
26 12 V power socket
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ 22
‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 23
‫رﺋﻮﺳﺘﺎي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬ 24
‫و ﻧﻮر ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ‬
(‫ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬ 25
12V ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮق‬ 26

23
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Cab post panel
(APS 111) ‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬، ‫ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر ﻣﻮد‬1
1 Mode selector, gear-shifting
programme
L ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
(APS III)
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ و ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
Position I .‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
The machine shifts at low engine speed
and low travelling speed. M ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و‬،L ‫در ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
Position M
.‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
The machine shifts at slightly higher
engine speed as compared with position ،‫ ﻗﺮار دارد‬L ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ وﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
L. ‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ‬،‫ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‬
NOTE! If the accelerator is depressed
fully with the selector in the "L" .‫ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬H ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
position, upshifting according to the ً‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺮه وري زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‬
"H" position will take place.
L-M-) ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ و ﺗﻔﺎوت ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮدﻫﺎي‬
The best utilisation is obtained if the
accelerator is not depressed fully, as the .‫( ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬H
difference in upshifting speed between
the (L-M-H) modes will be more
noticeable. H ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ از رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ و دور‬
Position H .‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
The machine does not shift until higher ‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ از اﻳﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
engine and travelling speeds have been
reached. ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ‬
Preferably used in cases where the .‫ﻏﻠﺘﺸﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎد اﺳﺖ‬
machine changes gear when operating
uphill or when the rolling resistance is
great. AUT ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬APS ‫ ﺧﻮد ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻮد‬،‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد‬
Position AUT
.‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ آﺳﺎﻳﺶ و ﺻﺮﻓﻪ اﻗﺘﺼﺎدي ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻳﺪ‬
The machine itself selects APS mode
according to current operating condition
to achieve best comfort and economy.
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪه و ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ‬،‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه اي ﻛﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
Position
‫ در ﺣﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ‬.‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
The machine starts and operates in the
selected gear position. Upshifts and .‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
downshifts on the move are controlled
manually. ، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ در زﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
For further gear shifting instructions, see .‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬90 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
page 90.

‫ ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬2
2 Unassigned

3 Fully automatic downshifting (‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬3

(optional equipment)
Upper end of switch pressed in =
automatic downshifting to 1st gear when
required. (Downshifting via any of the
kick-down buttons can still be done
manually)
Lower end of switch pressed in =
downshifting to 1st gear can be done via
any of the kick-down buttons.
4 Unassigned
‫ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬،‫ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ= در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﻴﺎز‬
‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس و رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻳﻚ )ﻫﻨﻮز ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬، ‫از ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
(‫دﺳﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم داد‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺑﺮاي‬
‫رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻳﻚ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم داد‬
‫ ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬4

24
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬
‫‪Cab post panel‬‬
‫‪5 Unassigned‬‬
‫‪6 Bucket positioner‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ= ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زاوﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫= ‪Upper end of switch pressed in‬‬
‫‪adjusting tilling position (spring-‬‬
‫‪return position), see page .73‬‬
‫‪Switch in centre position = detent‬‬
‫‪function for tilling position acti-‬‬
‫‪vated.‬‬
‫‪lower end of switch pressed in == detent‬‬
‫‪function for tilting position‬‬
‫‪deactivated.‬‬
‫‪7 Boom kick-out‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ = ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪Upper end of switch pressed in = adjusting‬‬
‫‪lifting height (spring-return position), see‬‬
‫‪page73.‬‬
‫‪Switch in centre position = detent function for‬‬
‫‪lifting to set height activated.‬‬
‫‪Lower end of switch pressed in = detent‬‬
‫‪function lifting deactivated.‬‬
‫‪Further instructions, see page73.‬‬
‫‪8 Unassigned‬‬
‫‪9 Unassigned‬‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ )وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻓﻨﺮي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ( ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 73‬را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ = ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎرﻛﻲ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ زاوﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ= ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎرﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺮاي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ زاوﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻮم‬
‫رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻮم )وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻓﻨﺮي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ( ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 73‬را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ = ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎرﻛﻲ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻮم ﺗﺎ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ= ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎرﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺮاي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻮم‪ ،‬دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ را در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 73‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
Instrument panels
Cab post panel
10 Unassigned
11 Single-acting lifting function
(optional equipment)
Upper end of switch pressed in = single-
acting lifting function activated.
Lower end of switch pressed in = single-
acting lifting function deactivated.
The attachment can now rise, e.g. if it
encounters uneven ground, but will return
to the original position under its own
weight.
12 Unassigned
13 Function selector, Boom
Suspension System
(optional equipment)
The switch has three positions. When
starting the engine, the function reverts to
the previously preselected position.
Regarding settings of Boom Suspension
System in combination with different
attachments, see section "Operating
techniques".
Upper end of switch pressed in =
Deactivated Boom Suspension System.
Switch in centre position = Gear-
dependent Boom Suspension System.
- The control lamp for the Boom Suspension
System is alight and on the display unit
under the menu hydraulics is shown BSS
- On or BSS - Off depending on whether
the system is engaged or disengaged
(gear-dependent).
- The Boom Suspension System is engaged
in gear positions 2, 3 and 4 when in
neutral, forward or reverse drive.
- When changing down (kick-down) to gear
position 1, the function will be
disengaged.
Lower end of switch pressed in =
Speed-dependent
Boom Suspension System (regardless of
the gear selector position).
- The control lamp for the Boom Suspension
System is alight and on the display unit
under the menu hydraulics is shown BSS
- On or BSS - Off depending on whether
the system is engaged or disengaged
(speed-dependent).
- The Boom Suspension System will be
engaged, if a certain speed is exceeded.
- Below a certain speed (approx. 5 km/h (3.1
mph) in forward drive or approx. 2 km/h
(1.2 mph) in neutral or reverse drive) the
function will be disengaged.
. ‫( و در ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻼص‬3.1mph)5km/h
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 10
(‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬11
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ = ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ = ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ‬
‫اﻛﻨﻮن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮوﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻼً وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ اﻣﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ وزن ﺧﻮد‬،‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮار ﻣﻮاﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫دوﺑﺎره ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 12
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬،‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ 13
(‫( )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬BSS)
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬. ‫ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ‬3 ‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ داراي‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ‬
.‫ﮔﺮدد‬
‫در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم وﻗﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﺨﺶ »ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي‬، ‫ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮن روي آن ﺳﻮار ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري« را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ = ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ= ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم واﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم ﺑﺮ روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ روﺷﻦ‬-
‫ ﻋﺒﺎرت‬، ‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و در ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ در زﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬BSS-OFF ‫ﻳﺎ‬BSS-ON
(‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد )واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬، ‫در ﮔﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ در ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬4,3,2 ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي‬-
.‫ درﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻼص‬،‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
، (‫ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ آورﻳﻢ )دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬1 ‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻧﺪه را ﺗﺎ دﻧﺪه‬-
.‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ درﮔﻴﺮي ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
(‫واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ )ﺑﺪون ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر دﻧﺪه‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم ﺑﺮ روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ روﺷﻦ‬-
‫ ﻋﺒﺎرت‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و در ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ در زﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬BSS-OFF ‫ﻳﺎ‬BSS-ON
(‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد )واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬، ‫درﮔﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬،‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ از ﺣﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬-
.‫درﮔﻴﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
ً‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ از ﺣﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ )در ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ درﮔﻴﺮي‬،‫( ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬1.2mph) ً‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
.‫ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
26
Instrument panels
Cab post panel
14 Front working lights
Upper end of switch pressed in =
working lights by cab roof and lower
working lights switched on.
Switch in centre position = working
lights by cab roof switched on.
Lower end of switch pressed in = front
working lights switched off.
If the machine, as optional extra, is
provided with working lights, which
have a bulb of the HID type (High
Intensity gas Discharge lamp), see
page156.
There is a delay of up to 90 seconds
(depending on the ambient temperature)
before a bulb of the HID type reaches
full power. Therefore, do not switch off
the working lights more often than
necessary.
Control lamp on the front instrument
panel indicates that working lights are
switched on.
15 Rear working lights
Upper end of switch pressed in =
working lights in radiator casing and on
engine hood switched on.
Switch in centre position = working
lights in the radiator casing switched on.
Lower end of switch pressed in = rear
working lights switched off.
Control lamp on the front instrument
panel indicates that working lights are
switched on.
Working lights should be off when
operating on public roads.
16 Lights
Upper end of switch pressed in = travel
lights switched on.
Switch in centre position = parking and
instrument lighting switched on.
Lower end of switch pressed in = lights
switched off.
For headlight dipping, see page70.
Control lamp on the front instrument
panel indicates that the high beams are
switched on.
. .‫ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
27
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺟﻠﻮ‬14
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ = ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر‬
.‫روي ﺳﻘﻒ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ و ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ= ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر روي‬
.‫ﺳﻘﻒ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر‬
.‫ﺟﻠﻮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺿﺎﻓﻲ داراي ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ )ﻻﻣﭗ ﮔﺎزي ﺑﺎ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺪت ﺑﺎﻻ( اﺳﺖ‬HID ‫ﻻﻣﭗ‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬156
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻃﻮل ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﺪ )ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ دﻣﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ( ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ‬90 ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬.‫ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻮان ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬HID ‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻧﻮع‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺿﺮورت ﻧﺪارد از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻜﺮر ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺧﻮد‬
.‫داري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮاغ‬
.‫ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر روﺷﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﻋﻘﺐ‬15
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر‬
.‫روي ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر و روي ﻛﺎﭘﻮت روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ = ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﻋﻘﺐ‬
.‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮاغ‬
.‫ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر روﺷﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر‬،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎ‬16
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ = ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺣﺮﻛﺖ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ = ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎ و‬
.‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
70 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻧﺤﻮه ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن ﻧﻮر ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ‬
.‫را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮاغ‬
Instrument panels
Cab post panel
17 Rotating warning beacon
(optional equipment)
Upper end of switch pressed in = Rotating
warning beacon switched on, see also
page87.
Lower end of switch pressed in = Rotating
warning beacon switched off.
Control lamp on the front instrument panel
indicates that the warning beacon is
connected.
18 Electrically adjustable rear view
mirrors (optional equipment)
Select left or right rear-view mirror by
turning the button in the middle.
Adjust the mirror by pressing according to
the arrows, upward or downward, left or
right
19 Electrically heated rear view
mirrors
(optional equipment)
Upper end of switch pressed in = electric
heating activated.
Lower end of switch pressed in = electric
heating deactivated
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬ 17
(‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬87 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان‬
.‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻐﻞ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬ 18
(‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
‫آﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻐﻞ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ راﺳﺖ را‬، ‫ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪن دﻛﻤﻪ وﺳﻄﻲ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ‬،‫ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬،‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻫﺎ آﻳﻨﻪ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫راﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻐﻞ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬ 19
(‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن‬
‫ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
28
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪Cab post panel‬‬

‫‪20 Wiper and washer, rear window‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ و ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ و ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫‪NOTE! For wiping and washing to‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪take place, the windscreen wiper must‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪be switched on.‬‬
‫ﻓﻨﺮي(= ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر و ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Upper end of switch pressed in (spring‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ= ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪return) = washing and the wiper makes a‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪few strokes.‬‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﻴﺰ روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪Switch in centre position = rear window‬‬
‫ﭼﻮن دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس درﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ ،‬ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪wiper operates intermittently.‬‬
‫‪When the windscreen wiper is on at the‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮر ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪same time as the reverse gear is engaged,‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪ ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر و ﺑﺮف‬
‫‪the rear window wiper will be on‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪constantly.‬‬
‫در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺨﺰن آب ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪147‬‬

‫‪Lower end of switch pressed in = wiper‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺗﻲ اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪and washer turned off.‬‬

‫‪Washer reservoir for windscreen and rear‬‬

‫‪window, see page147.‬‬

‫‪ 23‬اﺳﺘﻮپ اﺿﻄﺮاري ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬

‫‪21 Hydraulic emergency stop‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎري(‬
‫)‪(optional equipment‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻮپ اﺿﻄﺮاري ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ دوران‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻮپ اﺿﻄﺮاري ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮان داده ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ را ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫‪Hydraulic emergency stop for rotating‬‬
‫‪attachment. The emergency stop turns off‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 122‬را‬
‫‪the power to the attachment and stops its‬‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪movement. See page122.‬‬

‫‪22 Ignition switch‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ ‫‪24‬‬

‫‪Ignition switch positions‬‬ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ‬

‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪Switched off (key-turn engine‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش )ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ (‬
‫)‪stop‬‬ ‫‪O‬‬
‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪Radio position‬‬ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ رادﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪Running position‬‬ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Starting position‬‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫‪29‬‬
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Cab post panel

23 Unassigned ‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ 25

‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮر ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي راﻫﻨﻤﺎي داﺧﻞ‬،‫رﺋﻮﺳﺘﺎ‬ 26

24 Rheostat, guide light in switches
Guide light in switches and lighting of
the climate control system panel
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ‬
Upper end of switch pressed in = the
light intensity increases
Lower end of switch pressed in = the
light intensity reduces.
NOTE! Dependent on lighting.
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻮر ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي راﻫﻨﻤﺎي داﺧﻞ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ و روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﻧﺪارد‬

(‫ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬ 27

25 Hand-throttle control (optional
equipment)
ƒ The accelerator position is transferred
electrically.
ƒ The accelerator position is altered by
turning the control. Turning clockwise
increases the speed.
ƒ Depending on previous adjustment, the
control may first have to be turned
counter-clockwise and then clockwise in
order to set the speed.
ƒ Disengagement takes place when
applying throttle pedal or brake pedal.
ƒ When starting the engine, the hand-
throttle is disengaged, regardless of
previous setting.
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد را ﺑﻪ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ‬ ƒ
‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬، ‫ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪن در ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬.‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
.‫را اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
،‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﺑﻮده اﺳﺖ‬ ƒ
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ در اﺑﺘﺪا ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ را‬
، ‫ﭘﺎدﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ آن‬
.‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ از ﻣﺪار‬،‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮدن ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز ﻳﺎ ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬ ƒ
.‫ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺪون ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ ƒ
‫ ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ در‬،‫ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻮده اﺳﺖ‬
.‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬

12V ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮق‬ 28

26 12 V power socket

30
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Rear cab wall ‫دﻳﻮاره ﻋﻘﺒﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

‫دﻳﻮاره ﻋﻘﺒﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

Rear cab wall

1 Power socket, 24 V 24V ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺑﺮق‬ 1

2 Hour recorder ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺷﻤﺎر‬ 2
3 VCADS Pro service socket VCADS pro ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ 3
(the cover for the electrical distribution
(‫)در ﭘﻮش روي ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
box has been removed)

Fuse test ‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻓﻴﻮز‬

It is possible to test fuses.
On the circuit board there is a mark FUSE
TEST.
To test whether a fuse has blown or not,
hold it against the contact surface under the
mark FUSE TEST.
If the fuse has not blown, the green light
emitting diode above the mark lights up.
.‫ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﺴﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ اﻳﻦ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
.‫ وﺟﻮد دارد‬FUSE TEST ‫ ﻋﺒﺎرت‬،‫روي ﺑﺮد ﻣﺪار‬
‫ آن را‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻮز ﺳﻮﺧﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‬
FUSE TEST ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در زﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺎرت‬
.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬
‫ دﻳﻮد ﻧﻮراﻧﻲ ﺳﺒﺰ رﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻋﺒﺎرت‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻓﻴﻮز ﻧﺴﻮﺧﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻳﺎدﺷﺪه روﺷﻦ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬

‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻓﻴﻮز‬

31
Instrument panels
Centre instrument
Centre instrument
By taking action in time, it is possible to prevent serious
damage to the machine. Therefore, look now and then at the
instrument panel where the operator is provided with
information should something happen that requires his or her
intervention. In order to be able to check the function of
instruments and controls, the current must be turned on and
the ignition switch in position 1 (running position).
The information to the operator is provided in different ways
depending on the function involved:
Amber central warning lamp flashes, if a function
needs to be kept under observation or whether a
function becomes engaged or disengaged. Information is
shown on the display unit. Action may be required
depending on which function is involved.
Red central warning lamp flashes if abnormal
operating values or faults occur. The warning lamp for
the function lights up at the same time and information
is shown on the display unit. Stop the machine
immediately and take action.
With some functions, the buzzer sounds at the same
time as the red central warning lamp flashes, see
page55.
The information symbol will indicate deviation of
some kind. When the symbol lights up, a message will
always be shown on the display unit.
The control lamps light when the respective functions
are engaged.
The warning lamps light in case of malfunctions such
as too high or too low pressure, temperature or level.
In addition to alarm texts the display unit also shows
starting sequence, operating information and settings,
see page37.
The gauges show fuel level, temperature of
transmission oil and temperature of the engine coolant.
Message is shown on the display unit if the fuel level is
too low or the temperature in the respective systems is
too high.
.
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از وارد ﺷﺪن آﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎي ﺟﺪي ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﺑﺎ وارد ﻋﻤﻞ ﺷﺪن ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫وﺟﻮد دارد ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ وﻗﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪازد‬
.‫ﭼﻮن ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر او ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﺜﻼً اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ اﻓﺘﺎده اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪاﺧﻠﻪ او دارد‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬
‫ )وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬1 ‫ و ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش اﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬.‫ﺑﺮق ﺑﺮ ﻗﺮار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﻮرد آن ﺑﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﻮد‬.‫ﺑﺎز( ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﺷﻴﻮه ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ وﺟﻮد دارد‬،
-
‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺸﺪار زرد رﻧﮓ وﺳﻂ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻧﻴﺎز داﺷﺘﻪ‬ -
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ زﻳﺮ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻛﺎري‬.‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﻗﺪاﻣﻲ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ‬
-
‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺸﺪار ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ وﺳﻂ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ -
‫ در ﻫﻤﺎن زﻣﺎن ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺸﺪار آن ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬.‫ﻋﺎدي ﻳﺎ ﻋﻴﺐ و ﻧﻘﺼﻲ ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻣﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻢ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﺮ روي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻓﻮراً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را‬
.‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻛﺎري اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺻﺪاي ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن ﻻﻣﭗ‬،‫ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎ‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬55 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﻫﺸﺪار ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ ﺷﻨﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﭼﺮاغ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎد‬.‫( ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از اﻧﻮاع ﺧﻄﺎ ﻫﺎ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬i) ‫ﻧﻤﺎد اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ -
-
.‫ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬. ‫روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎ ي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل وﻗﺘﻲ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ آن ﻻﻣﭗ اﻧﺠﺎم‬ -
- .‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه در ﻣﻮارد ﺑﺪ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﻫﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن ﻳﺎ‬ -
-
.‫ دﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﻓﺸﺎر‬
- ‫ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬، ‫ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ راه اﻧﺪازي‬،‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻴﺰ‬،‫ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬ -
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬37 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ و دﻣﺎي آب ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را‬،‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬،(‫ﮔﻴﺞ ﻫﺎ )درﺟﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ -
- ‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ دﻣﺎي ﻫﺮ‬.‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﻨﺪ‬
.‫ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬،‫ﻳﻚ از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
32
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Centre instrument ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬

Central warning lamps ‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬

1 Central warning (red) (‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺮﻛﺰي )ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ 1

2 Central warning (amber) (‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺮﻛﺰي )زرد‬ 2

3 Information symbol (green) (‫ﻧﻤﺎد اﻃﻼﻋﺎت )ﺳﺒﺰ‬ 3

Warning and control lamps ‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻫﺸﺪار‬

4 High beams (blue) (‫ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ )آﺑﻲ‬ 4
5 Rotating warning beacon (amber) (‫ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه )زرد‬ 5
6 Working lights (amber) (‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر )زرد‬ 6
7 Applied parking brake (red) (‫درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ )ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ 7
8 Battery charging (red) (‫ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي )ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‬ 8
9 Direction indicator, left (green) (‫ ﭼﭗ )ﺳﺒﺰ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ 9
10 Direction indicator, right (green) (‫ راﺳﺖ )ﺳﺒﺰ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ 10
11 Display unit ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ 11
12 Activated Boom Suspension System (green) (‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﻮدن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم )ﺳﺒﺰ‬ 12
13 Engaged differential lock (green) (‫درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻮدن ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ )ﺳﺒﺰ‬ 13
14 Activated lever steering (green) (‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﻮدن ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي )ﺳﺒﺰ‬ 14
Gauges (‫ﮔﻴﺞ ﻫﺎ )درﺟﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
15 Fuel level ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬ 15
16 Transmission oil temperature ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ 16
17 Coolant temperature ‫دﻣﺎي آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ 17

33
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Centre instrument‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺮﻛﺰي )ﻗﺮﻣﺰ(‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫)‪1 Central warning (red‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻣﺪن ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎدي ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ‬
‫‪The lamp flashes if abnormal operating‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻴﺐ و ﻧﻘﺼﻲ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم‬
‫‪values or faults arise. Alarm text is‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻗﺪام‬
‫‪shown on the display unit. The buzzer‬‬
‫‪will sound until the required action has‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﻧﮕﻴﺮد‪ ،‬ﺻﺪاي ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار ﻧﻴﺰ ﺷﻨﻴﺪه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪been carried out.‬‬

‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺮﻛﺰي )زرد(‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫)‪2 Central warning (amber‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪه‬
‫‪The lamp flashes when a function is‬‬
‫‪engaged/disengaged or when a function‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم آن ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ زﻳﺮ‬
‫‪needs to be kept under observation (e.g.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ( ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫‪clogged filter). Alarm text is shown on‬‬
‫‪the display unit. The buzzer sounds four‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺻﺪاي ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار ﭼﻬﺎر‬
‫‪times.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮش ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ رﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪3 Information symbol‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎد اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫‪Indicates deviation of some kind. Alarm‬‬
‫‪text is shown for three seconds on the‬‬
‫‪display unit. The buzzer sounds four‬‬
‫‪times.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﻲ از ﺧﻄﺎ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﻤﺪت ﺳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺮ‬
‫روي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﺪاي ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار ﭼﻬﺎرﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻮش ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ رﺳﻴﺪ‬

‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫‪4 High beams‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ روﺷﻦ‬
‫‪The lamp is alight when the high beams‬‬
‫‪are switched on, see page70.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 70‬را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه‬ ‫‪5‬‬

‫‪5 Rotating warning beacon‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه‬
‫‪The lamp lights when the rotating‬‬
‫روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 87‬را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪warning beacon is switched on. See‬‬
‫‪page87.‬‬

‫‪6 Working lights‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر‬ ‫‪6‬‬

‫‪The lamp lights when the working lights‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪه‬
‫‪are switched on, see page87.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 87‬را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪7 Applied parking brake‬‬ ‫درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪7‬‬

‫‪The lamp lights when the parking brake‬‬ ‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪is applied.‬‬
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﻬﺘﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺻﺪاي‬
‫‪The buzzer sounds and alarm text is‬‬
‫‪shown on the display unit, if a directional‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا در ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ و ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ در‬
‫‪gear is selected.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪34‬‬
Instrument panels
Centre instrument
8 Battery charging
If the lamp lights when operating, the
cause must be corrected as otherwise the
batteries may be damaged.
9 Left direction indicators
The lamp flashes when the left direction
indicators are on, see page70.
Uneven flashing pulses indicate a faulty
bulb, which then should be changed.
10 Right direction indicators
The lamp flashes when the right direction
indicators are on, see page70.
Uneven flashing pulses indicate a faulty
bulb, which then should be changed.
11 Display unit
In addition to alarm texts the display unit
also shows starting sequence, operating
information and settings, see page37.
12 Boom Suspension System (BSS)
The lamp lights with a fixed light when
the Boom Suspension System is
activated.
13 Differential lock
The lamp is alight when the differential
lock is engaged.
The foot switch for the differential lock is
positioned on the floor to the left of the
steering wheel column.
14 Lever steering
The lamp lights when the lever steering is
activated. It is possible to steer the
machine and select gears from the
armrest to the left of the operator seat.
NOTE! The ordinary gear selector
control should be in neutral.
Further instructions, see page93.
35
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي‬ 8
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ روﺷﻦ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﺖ آن را ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮف‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
‫ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ دﻳﺪ‬، ‫ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﭼﺮاغ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﭼﭗ‬ 9
‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮاغ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﭼﭗ روﺷﻦ‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬70 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﺑﻮدن ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن ﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از‬
.‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭼﺮاغ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي راﺳﺖ‬ 10
‫اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ زﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮاغ راﻫﻨﻤﺎي راﺳﺖ‬
‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬70 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻳﻜﻨﻮاﺧﺖ ﺑﻮدن ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن ﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از‬
.‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ 11
، ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ راه اﻧﺪازي‬،‫ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ را‬37 ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت را ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
(BSS) ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬12
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮر ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬،‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‬
.‫روﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬13
.‫ اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ درﮔﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﺮ روي ﻛﻒ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ در ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬
.‫ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻗﺮار دارد‬
‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي‬14
‫ اﻣﻜﺎن‬.‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه از روي زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
.‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
.‫ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬93 ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ را در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
Instrument panels
Centre instrument
15 Fuel level
When the pointer indicates at empty, the
warning lamp to the left of the gauge
lights up and a message is shown on the
display unit.
The machine should be refuelled as soon
as possible to avoid air entering the
system.
If the tank has been run dry and the fuel
system needs to be bled, see page144.
Capacity, fuel tank: 219 litres (57.8 US
gal)
16 Transmission oil temperature
If the gauge indicates into the red sector,
the warning lamp to the right of the
gauge lights up. As a precaution the
engine speed is at the same time limited.
Stop the machine and investigate the
cause.
The buzzer sounds if a directional gear is
selected and alarm text is shown on the
display unit.
17 Coolant temperature
If the gauge indicates into the red sector,
the warning lamp to the right of the
gauge lights up. As a precaution the
engine speed is limited at the same time.
Run the engine at low idling for a few
minutes. If the gauge continues to
indicate within the red sector, stop the
engine and investigate the cause.
The buzzer sounds if a directional gear is
selected and alarm text is shown on the
display unit.
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ 15
‫ ﻻﻣﭗ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ درﺟﻪ روي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ درﺟﻪ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم در‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
.‫ﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ از ورود ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪن رﺳﻴﺪه اﺳﺖ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬144 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫رﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻫﻮاﮔﻴﺮي دارد‬
(‫ ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬57/8) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬219 :‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺷﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ 16
‫ ﻻﻣﭗ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ درﺟﻪ وارد ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ درﺟﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ‬.‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ درﺟﻪ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎط در ﻫﻤﺎن زﻣﺎن دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺪود ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻋﻠﺖ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺻﺪاي ﺑﻮق‬.‫اﮔﺮ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﻬﺘﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا در ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ و ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫دﻣﺎي آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ 17
‫ ﻻﻣﭗ‬، ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ درﺟﻪ وارد ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ درﺟﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ‬.‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ درﺟﻪ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎط در ﻫﻤﺎن زﻣﺎن دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺪود ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي دﻗﺎﻳﻖ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎ دور در ﺟﺎي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ روﺷﻦ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎن ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ درﺟﻪ در ﺑﺨﺶ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ‬. ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻋﻠﺖ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺻﺪاي ﺑﻮق‬،‫اﮔﺮ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﻬﺘﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا در ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ و ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
36
Instrument panels
Display unit
Display unit
On the display unit are shown, current
operating information, vehicle messages and
alarm texts. With the aid of the keyboard on
the front instrument panel the operator may
also have information about the machine
status and make settings.
When the ignition key is turned to position 1,
a test programme starts to verify the system,
all control lamps light up for two seconds, the
pointers in the gauges then move to indicate
the correct value for fuel level and
temperature.
If the machine is equipped with anti-theft
device, the display unit will show a request
for the code to be entered, see page65. After
the correct code has been entered, the test
programme will start.
If another screen was shown, when the engine
was turned off last, this screen will be shown
at the next startup. Press ESC to return to the
Operating Information screen.
There are two different arrangements of the
Operating Information screen, Operating
Information screens 1 and 2. Use ARROW
UP/DOWN to select Operating Information
screen 1 or 2.
XX Travelling Speed
yyy Km/h/mph
Selected gear
N/F1/F2/F3/F4/R1/R2/R3/R4
Shows if another gear selector
zzz zzz control has been selected
CDC is shown if CDC lever
steering is activated
F/R is shown if the gear selector
control on the control lever carrier
is activated
vvv Engine rpm
ww Time, 24/12, AM/PM
ss Temperature, C/F
Fuel consumption, average value
since it was last set to zero.
tt (Shows remaining operating time
on the residual fuel, optional
equipment)
Symbols
Information available to be
retrieved, use key with this symbol
Vehicle message available to be
retrieved, use key with this
symbol..
Engine preheating activated by E-
ECU.
Lever lockout activated
Only if the machine has electrical
control lever lockout.
37
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
،‫ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ در ﺣﺎل اﻧﺠﺎم اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ و ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ در ﻣﻮرد وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آورد و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ را ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در‬.‫اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﺷﺮوع‬، ‫ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ‬،‫ )ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز( ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬1 ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎي درﺟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺷﺮوع‬.‫ﻣﺪت دو ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و دﻣﺎ را ﻧﺸﺎن‬
.‫دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ در اﻳﻦ راﺑﻄﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎم درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻛﺪ ورود ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬65
‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ‬،‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ وارد ﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ دﻳﮕﺮي را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
، ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اي ﻛﻪ در آﺧﺮﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ در آﻣﺪه‬
‫ را‬ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬. ‫در راه اﻧﺪازي ﺑﻌﺪي ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ در ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫دو ﻧﻮع ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎن ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺮاي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ وﺟﻮد‬
/ ‫ از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ‬. 2 ‫ و‬1 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬،‫دارد‬
‫ را‬2 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬1 ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
.‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
1 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬ --- ، ‫اﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﭘﻴﺪا ﻧﺸﻮد ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ XX
Km/h/mph yyy
‫دﻧﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬، ‫در ﺻﻮرت ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
R4/R3/R2/R1F4/F3/F2/F1/N
.‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
CDC ‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺒﺎرت‬CDC ‫اﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي‬
.‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬zzz zzz
‫اﮔﺮ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮ روي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي‬
2 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬ .‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬F/R ‫ ﻋﺒﺎرت‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
rpm ‫دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ vvv
12/24,AM/PM ‫زﻣﺎن‬ ww
C/F ‫دﻣﺎ‬ ss
‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﭼﻮن آﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر‬، ‫ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
.‫روي ﺻﻔﺮ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
tt
‫ زﻣﺎن ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه‬، ‫)ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه‬
(‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬،‫را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ داراي‬،‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺎزﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
،‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎزﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ داراي ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪه‬E-ECU ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﮔﺮم ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻟﻴﻮر‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
Keyboard for display unit ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
With the aid of the keyboard the operator may have
information ‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ درﺑﺎره وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آورد و‬، ‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
about the machine status and make settings. .‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ را ﻧﻴﺰ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬
Changing display screen is only possible if the speed is ‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮات در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ زﻳﺮ‬
below
20km/h ( 12.4mph). .‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬20km/h(12.4 mph)

Hydraulics Transmission Engine ESC

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ ESC

Vehicle
Electrical system Axles / Brakes
information
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬ ‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺎ‬/‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

Settings Service Vehicle

messages
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻫﺎي وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬

‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬

‫( ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آوردن اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ‬SELECT) ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬

The SELECT key is also used for obtaining more information
when one information or check message is shown
on the display unit.
The digit furthest down to the right on each key corresponds
to the digit that should be stated during different set
tings, e.g. the date. On machines equipped with anti-theft
device, the digits are used for entering the correct code
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎم اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ درﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮدن ﭼﻴﺰي در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻧﻴﺰ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫رﻗﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑـﺎ رﻗﻤـﻲ اﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻃـﻲ اﻧﺠـﺎم‬
‫ در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬. ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺜﻼً ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ اﻳﻦ ارﻗﺎم ﺑﺮاي وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻛـﺪ ﺻـﺤﻴﺢ ﻣـﻮرد اﺳـﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬

38
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
Information about the machine status is ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮان‬
obtainable by pressing the respective function .‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ در ﻣﻮرد وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آورد‬
key on the keyboard.
‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺮوه ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ )ﻣﻨﻮ (ﻣﻲ‬
Each function group consists of one or more
display screens (menus). .‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
An arrow pointing downward is shown on the ‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮوه ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ﻳﻜﻲ‬
right, if there are more screens under the ‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ‬،‫ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻬﺖ رو ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ در ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
function group.
.‫را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
To browse within the function group, press
arrow down or arrow up on the keyboard . ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮوه ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
Settings can be made in certain menus. The .‫ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ را از روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
text is then highlighted. ‫ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت در ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎي ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
To revert to the "Operating Information" .‫رﻧﮓ روﺷﻦ ﺗﺮي در ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‬
screen, press the ESC key.
‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر‬ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬،«‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ »اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
.
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬

Selected key ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬

Engine ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Coolant temperature ‫دﻣﺎي آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬

Shows coolant temperature, normal or high .‫ﻋﺎدي ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن دﻣﺎي آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬

.‫دور ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

Engine
Shows current engine speed. ‫دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
rpm

rpm
Oil pressure ‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ‬
.‫ﻋﺎدي ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
Shows oil pressure, normal or low.

‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا ﻧﺮﻣﺎل اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺪود‬

Shows whether the air filter is normal or
.‫ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
when clogged, a text message is shown. ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬
Air filter
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎل‬

39
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Display unit‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪Selected key‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬

‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از)‪ 0 °C (+32 °F‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪The hydraulic oil temperature must exceed‬‬ ‫‪Engine‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫‪0 °C (+32 °F) to make it possible to reverse‬‬ ‫اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺷﺪن ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪the cooling fan.‬‬ ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ رﻧﮓ ﻣﺘﻦ را روﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻫﺎي ﻻﻳﺖ ( اﻣﻜﺎن‬
‫‪New selection can be made when the text is‬‬
‫‪highlighted.‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺟﺪﻳﺪ وﺟﻮد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Shows that the cooling fan is not reversing.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻘﺪار ﺟﺪﻳﺪي ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫‪To select a new interval, press SELECT,‬‬ ‫‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ و از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم‬
‫‪Rev. cooling fan‬‬
‫‪use the arrow keys to make required‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺠﺪداً ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪SELECT‬‬
‫‪selection, then press SELECT.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬
‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ و دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Shows that reversing is selected and the‬‬
‫‪selected interval.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪت دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ را ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Shows the duration of the interval in‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻘﺪار ﺟﺪﻳﺪي ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫‪minutes.‬‬
‫‪To select a new interval, press SELECT,‬‬ ‫‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم‬
‫‪use the arrow keys to make required‬‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺠﺪداً ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫‪selection, then press SELECT.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬ ‫‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rev. cooling fan‬‬
‫‪Short‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﻣﺪت‬
‫‪For manual reversing make a new selection‬‬ ‫‪Interval‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر اﻧﺠﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﻚ‬
‫‪as above and select Manual.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺟﺪﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ و ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ دﺳﺘﻲ )‪ (Manual‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬

‫‪Rev. cooling fan mode‬‬
‫‪Short‬‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﻣﺪت‬
‫‪Long‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﺪت‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻠﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Move down one step with the arrow key.‬‬ ‫‪Manual‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Press SELECT.‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬
‫‪Rev. cooling fan‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫‪The cooling fan reverses.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻛﺎر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‬
‫‪Manual‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫‪Reversing ceases automatically.‬‬
‫‪Interval‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫"‪To revert to the "Operating Information‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ »اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ« ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را‬
‫‪screen, press the ESC key.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪40‬‬
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Display unit‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪Selected key‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Transmis‬‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫‪sion‬‬

‫‪Oil temperature‬‬
‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ‬

‫‪Shows oil temperature, normal or high.‬‬ ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬

‫‪Oil pressure‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ‬

‫‪Shows oil pressure, normal or low.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬

‫‪Oil filter‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ‬

‫‪Shows whether the oil filter is normal or when‬‬ ‫‪Normal‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎل‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ‬
‫‪clogged, a text message is shown.‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪن ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ از وﺿﻌﻴﺖ درﮔﻴﺮي‬

‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ، SELECT‬ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ را درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ از‬

‫‪Select with SELECT, engaged or disengaged‬‬ ‫‪ON‬‬ ‫روﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ درﮔﻴﺮي ﺧﺎرج ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪).‬رﻫﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﻛﻼج(‬
‫‪transmission disengagement (declutch).‬‬ ‫‪OFF‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬

‫‪41‬‬
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

Selected key ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
Hydraulics ‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ‬
Oil temperature ‫ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ‬، ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
Shows oil temperature, normal or high.

‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬

‫ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ‬
Oil level
‫ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬،‫ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
Shows oil level normal or low.
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬

.‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ آﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم درﮔﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‬
Shows whether the Boom Suspension Boom Susp. System
.System is engaged or disengaged ON ‫روﺷﻦ‬ .‫اﺑﺘﺪا ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮد‬
The Boom Suspension System must first be ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬
OFF
.activated with the switch

42
 Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

Selected key ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬

/‫ﻫﺎ‬ ‫اﻛﺴﻞ‬
Axles /
Brakes ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬،‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﺮﻣﺰ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

.Shows brake pressure, normal or low Brake pressure

‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬

Shows oil temperature, normal or high

‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ‬،‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

Oil temperature Front axle

.Shows oil temperature, normal or high ‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬

‫ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ‬، ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬

Oil temperature Rear axle

‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬

43
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬
Selected key
Electrical ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬
system
.Shows system voltage, low, normal, high
‫وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﻻ‬،‫ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل‬، ‫ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬، ‫وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

Voltage

Low High

‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬

44
 Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬
Selected key
‫اﻃﻼﻋـــــــﺎت‬
To see operational data, press the SELECT Vehicle
informati ‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ‬ .‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬SELECT‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺪن اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
.key
on
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
Operational Data

Shows operational data since previous
setting to zero
Vehicle
informati
Set operational data to zero with SELECT
on
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
Operational Data
Reset ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪد‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ‬،‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ را از زﻣﺎن آﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ روي ﺻﻔﺮ‬
.‫دﻫﺪ‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ و داده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ را روي‬SELECT‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Off ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬
Time h ‫زﻣﺎن‬
Distance km ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ‬
Cycles ‫ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
Operating time in hours
Travelling distance in km/mile km/mile ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﻃﻲ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
Avg. l/h ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
Number of cycles ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
Total l ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮع‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري‬
Average consumption litres / US gal per hour ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺼﺮف ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه ﺑﺮ‬
Resid.
Total consumption, litres / US gal h
time fuel ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻘﺪار‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﺮف ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Remaining operating time on residual fuel ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه‬
Instantan
(optional equipment) eous l/h ‫ﻟﺤﻈﻪ اي‬ (‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
Reset ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪد‬
Current consumption litres / US gal per hour ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺮف ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
Off

.To return to previous menu press ESC .‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ESC ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬

45
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

For information move downward with the ‫ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
arrow key.
.‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
Vehicle
informati ‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ‬
on

Operation ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
al Data h ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
See previous screen
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
Model Lxxxx ‫ﻣﺪل‬
Machine designation ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
xxxxx ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺮﻳﺎل‬
Machine serial number ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﺮﻳﺎل ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
mm ‫اﻧﺪازه ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
Tyre size ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري‬ ‫اﻧﺪازه ﺗﺎﻳﺮ‬
Machine
Total operating time of machine hours h ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ‫زﻣﺎن واﻗﻌﻲ‬
Real time Time xx:xx ‫زﻣﺎن‬
‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
Current date Date xxxxxxx .‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
Only accessible for service personnel HW/SW

To return to previous menu press ESC. ‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬

46
 Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬
Selected key ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻫﺎي‬
Vehicle
messages ‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ‬

Message is available for retrieval .‫اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎزﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد‬

47
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit ‫واﺣﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬

Selected menu ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬

Select but with arrow key, press SELECT Service ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ SELECT ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
.‫را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
Next service ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﻌﺪي‬
Central ‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
lubrication
Test ‫ﺗﺴﺖ‬
I/0-List I/O ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬

Selected menu Service ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮي اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬

Next service ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﻌﺪي‬

Resid. ‫زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﻗﻲ‬

Time h
‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪه‬
Shows residual time left to service from ‫زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﻌﺪي را از زﻣﺎن ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه‬
Interval h ‫دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
previously acknowledged service .‫ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
Confirm ‫ﺑﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Shows selected service interval yes .‫دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
service
To confirm service, press SELECT ‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬ .‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬SELECT ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
No

‫ را‬ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ و اﻧﺠﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬

To go back and make a new selection, press .‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
ESC
To go back to Operating Information screen, ‫ را دوﺑﺎر‬ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
press ESC twice .‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬

48
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮي اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬
Selected menu
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ ‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬. ‫دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
Shows the selected interval. To make a new
selection, press SELECT. The screen shows Service ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ‬. ‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬SELECT ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
an example ‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
.‫ﻣﺜﺎل را ﻧﺸﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد‬
Shows that there is sufficient lubricant in the Central lubrication
reservoir .‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ روﻏﻦ روان ﻛﺎري ﻛﺎﻓﻲ در ﻣﺨﺰن وﺟﻮد دارد‬
Interval ‫ﺳﺒﻚ‬
Light ‫دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
To go back and make a new selection, press ‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎل‬
Normal
ESC ‫ را‬ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ و اﻧﺠﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪار روﻏﻦ‬
To go back to Operating Information screen, .‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
press ESC twice ‫ را دو ﺑﺎر‬ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
.‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬

Selected key
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬

To change interval, press SELECT ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ ‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬SELECT ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
Service

Select interval by moving up or down with the Central ‫ دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ را‬، ‫ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
arrow keys. lubrication .‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Interval ‫دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬

Light ‫ﺳﺒﻚ‬
To confirm selection of interval, press ‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬SELECT ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
SELECT Normal ‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎل‬
Heavy ‫ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ‬
‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ESC ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
To return, press ESC ‫ را دوﺑﺎر‬ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
To go back to Operating Information screen,
press ESC twice .‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬

49
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Display unit ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫ﻣﻨﻮي اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬
Selected menu

Testing warning and control lamps in the ‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ و ﻫﺸﺪاري در ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
centre instrument .‫ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬95 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
Service

See also page,95. ‫ﺗﺴﺖ‬

‫( را‬on) ‫( ﻳﺎ روﺷﻦ‬off) ‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬SELECT ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
Test
Select Off or On with SELECT ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬ ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Off
To return, press ESC ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬
To go back to Operating Information Off
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻻﻣﭗ‬ .‫ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ESC ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزﮔﺸﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬
screen, press ESC twice Bulb test
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ را دو ﺑﺎر‬ESC ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬

50
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Display unit‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪Selected key‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ‬

‫‪Shows previous setting.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ از اﻳﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪه را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫‪Select row by moving up or down with the‬‬
‫‪arrow keys.‬‬ ‫از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ردﻳﻒ ﻣﻮرد‬
‫‪Settings‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت اوﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Date‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Shows set date‬‬

‫‪Shows set time‬‬ ‫‪Time‬‬ ‫زﻣﺎن‬ ‫زﻣﺎن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

‫‪Language‬‬ ‫زﺑﺎن‬ ‫زﺑﺎن اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

‫‪Shows selected language‬‬

‫‪Units‬‬ ‫واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬ ‫واﺣﺪ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

‫‪Shows set unit‬‬

‫‪Shows set clock option‬‬ ‫‪Clock options‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

‫‪Date format‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮه ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫‪Shows set date format‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ‪ ،‬واروﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺎدي‬

‫‪Shows set display, Inverted or Normal‬‬ ‫‪Display‬‬

‫ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر‬ ‫ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ‪ %‬ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Shows display light intensity in %‬‬ ‫‪Intensity‬‬

‫‪51‬‬
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Display unit‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت‬
‫‪Settings‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ‪،‬‬
‫‪To make a new setting, select row by moving up or down‬‬ ‫ردﻳﻒ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪with the arrow keys.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SETUP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪1 Press SETUP .‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻮي »‪«Date‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Date".‬‬
‫‪3 Press SELECT .‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪4 Enter the correct date with the aid of the keyboard.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬
‫‪5 Confirm with SELECT .‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬آن را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪.5‬‬
‫‪6 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬
‫‪7 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information screen.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.7‬‬

‫‪Time‬‬
‫زﻣﺎن‬
‫‪1 Press SETUP .‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SETUP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫"‪2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to highlight the "Time‬‬
‫‪menu.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮي »‪ «Time‬را ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ روﺷﻦ در‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪3 Press SELECT .‬‬ ‫آورﻳﺪ)ﻫﺎي ﻻﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪4 Use SELECT to shift between hours and minutes. Enter the‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪correct time with the aid of the keyboard.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ، SELECT‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬زﻣﺎن ﺻﺤﻴﺢ را ﺑﺎ‬ ‫‪.4‬‬
‫‪5 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings .‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information screen.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬ﺗﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬
‫‪1 Press SETUP .‬‬
‫‪2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the "Language" menu.‬‬ ‫زﺑﺎن‬
‫‪3 Press SELECT .‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SETUP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪4 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight language.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻮي »‪ «Language‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪5 Press SELECT to view the language alternatives.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪6 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the required language.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬زﺑﺎن را ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ روﺷﻦ درآورﻳﺪ‪) .‬ﻫﺎي ﻻﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪.4‬‬
‫‪7 Confirm with SELECT .‬‬
‫‪8 Press ESC to return to Settings .‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪9 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information screen.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ زﺑﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب را ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪.5‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ زﺑﺎن ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.6‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬آن را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.7‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.8‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.9‬‬

‫‪52‬‬
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Display unit‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪Units‬‬ ‫واﺣﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫‪1 Press SETUP .‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SETUP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the "Units" menu.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻮي »‪ «Units‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3 Confirm with SELECT .‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬آن را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight unit.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‪ ،‬واﺣﺪ را ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ روﺷﻦ درآورﻳﺪ )ﻫﺎي ﻻﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5 Select with SELECT the required unit.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬واﺣﺪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings .‬‬
‫‪7 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information screen.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮده ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫‪The following unit alternatives are available:‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از واﺣﺪﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮد‪:‬‬
‫‪- Metric system‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪- US system‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪Clock options‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪1 Press SETUP .‬‬
‫‪2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Clock‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SETUP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪options".‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻮي »‪ « Clock options‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫‪3 Press SELECT .‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight display alternative‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5 Select with SELECT the required display alternative.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮه ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ را ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ روﺷﻦ در‬
‫‪6 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings .‬‬
‫آورﻳﺪ‪).‬ﻫﺎي ﻻﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪7 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information screen.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ، SELECT‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫‪The following display alternatives are available:‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- am pm‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- 24 hr‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪am pm -‬‬
‫‪24 hr -‬‬

‫‪53‬‬
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬

‫‪Date format‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮه ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬

‫‪1 Press SETUP .‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SETUP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫"‪2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Date format‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻮي »‪ «Date format‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪3 Press SELECT .‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight display alternative‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﺤﻮه ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ را ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ روﺷﻦ درآورﻳﺪ‪).‬ﻫﺎي‬
‫‪5 Select with SELECT the required display alternative.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪6 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings .‬‬
‫‪7 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information screen.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪The following display alternatives are available:‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- year - month - day‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- month - day - year‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮد‪:‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺳﺎل‪ -‬ﻣﺎه‪ -‬روز‬
‫‪1 Press SETUP .‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻣﺎه‪ -‬روز‪ -‬ﺳﺎل‬
‫‪2 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Display".‬‬
‫‪3 Press SELECT .‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫‪Day / Night mode‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SETUP‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Day / Night‬‬
‫‪mode".‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻮي »‪ «Display‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5 Press SELECT .‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪6 Browse with ARROW DOWN in order to highlight mode.‬‬
‫‪7 Select with SELECT the required display alternative.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮد روز ‪ /‬ﺷﺐ‬
‫‪8 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings .‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻮي »‪ «Day/Night mode‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬
‫‪9 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information screen.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪The following display alternatives are available:‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- day‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻮد ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ را ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ روﺷﻦ درآورﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- night‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬ﻣﻮد ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Intensity‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪4 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the menu "Intensity".‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪5 Press SELECT .‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮد ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮد‬
‫‪6 Browse with ARROW DOWN to highlight intensity.‬‬ ‫‪ -‬روز‬
‫‪7 Press SELECT .‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﺷﺐ‬
‫‪8 Browse with ARROW UP/DOWN to the required intensity.‬‬
‫‪9 Confirm with SELECT.‬‬
‫ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر‬
‫‪10 Press ESC to confirm and return to Settings .‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻮي »‪ «intensity‬را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪11 Press ESC to return to the Operating Information screen.‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر را ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ روﺷﻦ در آورﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ را ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬آن را ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 11‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ESC‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﮔﺮدﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪54‬‬
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

Information
- The information symbol is shown. ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬
- The buzzer sounds four times. ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
- Alarm text is shown for three seconds and then changes to ‫( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬i) ‫ﻧﻤﺎد اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ -
Operating Information screen. .‫ﺑﻮق اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﭼﻬﺎر ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا در ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‬ -
- Rectify or contact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE for
‫ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﻤﺪت ﺳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ در ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ -
information.
.‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

The information to the operator is provided on the display
unit in the form of alarm texts, which are divided into three
classes: Warning, Check and Information. For all classes
applies that at speeds above 20 km/h (12.4 mph) the alarm
text is shown for three seconds and is then alternated with the
previous screen which is shown for three seconds. This
alternate showing of the two screens continues as long as the
error situation remains, or alternatively until a the alarm is
shown certain number of times.
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻞ را ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز را از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه‬ -
.‫ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آورﻳﺪ‬Volvo CE ‫ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮ روي‬
‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬،‫ ﻫﺸﺪار‬:‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
. ‫و اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
‫( ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﺳﻪ‬12.4 mph) 20km/h ‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از اﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ دﺳﺘﻪ در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﺮ از‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﺳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻲ در ﭘﻲ ﺗﺎ‬. ‫اي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از آن روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻮده اﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اداﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻄﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد و ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺎم اﻋﻼم‬
.‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺗﻜﺮار ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine

Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
Coolant output reduced
Check radiator ‫رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را وارﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Transmission

Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬

‫دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص‬
Gear selector
not in neutral ‫ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪارد‬

Machine speed too

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻗﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
Reduce speed before ‫ﭘﻴﺶ از دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ را‬ high for current gear
Downshifting ‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ زﻳﺎد اﺳﺖ‬

‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

Axles

Information ‫ﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬

Rear axle oil ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ در ﺣﺎل ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ در ﺣﺎل ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ‬
rising temperature Front axle oil
‫رﻓﺘﻦ اﺳﺖ‬ rising temperature ‫اﺳﺖ‬

55
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

Steering system
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬

Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬

Lever carrier not ‫ ﻓﻌـﺎل‬CDC . ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻧﻴﺴـﺖ‬ CDC . ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
activated ‫اﺳﺖ‬ Lever carrier deactivate ‫ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‬
CDC activated CDC activated

Miscellaneous
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬

Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬ Information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬

‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬
Brake to standstill Accelerate over 20 km/h 20 km/h ‫ﮔﺎز دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫ﺷﻮد‬

Low washer fluid level* ‫ﻣﻴﺰان آب ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬

.‫(ﻃﻲ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻣﻴﺰان آن ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﭼﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

Miscellaneous
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬

Brake test log ‫ﮔﺰارش ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬ Brake test ‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
2 Retardation
x.x m/s xx bar 1 x ms2 ‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ‬

x.x m/s2 xx bar 2 ‫ﻓﺸﺎر‬

Pressure xx bar

x.x m/s2 xx bar 3

56
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬
Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
- Red central warning lamp will be flashing. ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪار ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ زد‬
- The buzzer will sound until the required action has been carrie .‫ﺻﺪاي ﺑﻮق اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎن اﻧﺠﺎم اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﻻزم ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮش ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ رﺳﻴﺪ‬
out. .‫ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ در ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ‬،‫ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎن اﻧﺠﺎم اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﻻزم‬
- The alarm text will be shown until the required action has been ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻞ را ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼع ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴـﺪ‬
taken.
- Rectify or contact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE for .‫ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬Volvo CE
information.
Warning Warning
‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
Stop vehicle ‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻴﻠﻪ را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ Stop vehicle ‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻴﻠﻪ را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Turn Off Engine ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

These two warning are always followed by a further alarm
text. Follow the instructions on the screen and rectify or
contact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE. When a warning
is shown, the engine should be turned off and the ignition key
turned to position 1 in order to show the subsequent alarm
text.
‫ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي‬.‫اﻳﻦ دو ﻣﻮرد ﻫﺸﺪار ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ دﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ و ﻣﺸﻜﻞ را ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه‬.‫روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ را دﻧﺒﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬، ‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺸﺪار ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬.‫ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬volvo CE ‫ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ )ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز ( ﻗﺮار‬1 ‫را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش اﺻﻠﻲ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﻌﺪي را ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬

Engine
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬

High charge-air ‫دﻣﺎي ﻫﻮاي ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬
High coolant temperature
temperature ‫دﻣﺎي آب ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬
engine
engine

‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬ High engine oil

Low engine oil pressur temperature ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬

Engine failure ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ Coolant level low* 

‫آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﻛﻢ اﺳﺖ‬

High crankcase pressur ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﺎرﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬ High fuel temperature ‫دﻣﺎي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬

*) The level is checked continuously during operation. ‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪار در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﭼﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

Transmission
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬

Low transmission oil ‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬ High transmission oil ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬
pressure temperature

57
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

Brakes
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬

Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬

Applied parking brake Low brake pressure ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬

Parking brake NOT ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬

Brakes failure
applied

Axles
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬

High oil temperature ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬ High oil temperature ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬
rear axle front axle

Steering system
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬

Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬


Steering system failure ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬ Low steer pressure* ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻓﺮﻣﺎن دﻫﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
*) Applies only to machines equipped with secondary .‫ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد دارد‬
steering.

Hydraulics
‫ﺳﻴﺴﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬


High hydraulic oil ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﻢ اﺳﺖ‬
Low hydraulic oil level**
temperature


Low steer pressure* ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻓﺮﻣﺎن دﻫﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ‬ Attachment lock open ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎز اﺳﺖ‬

**) The level is checked continuously during operation. ‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﭼﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

Miscellaneous
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬

Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Warning ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬

Direction change at ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ را ﻛﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Reduce speed
too high speed

58
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Alarm texts‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬
‫‪Check‬‬ ‫ﻻﻣﭗ زرد رﻧﮓ ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ زد‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪- Amber central warning lamp will be flashing.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﭼﻬﺎر ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا در ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪- The buzzer sounds four times.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ SELECT‬را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي در ﻣﻮرد اﺷﻜﺎل ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻣﺪه‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪- Press SELECT to obtain more information about the fault.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آورﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪- Alarm text is shown until confirmation is done by pressing ESC‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ آن را ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ESC‬ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪- Rectify or contact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE for‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪information.‬‬
‫اﺷﻜﺎل را ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼع ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ‪ volvo CE‬ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫‪Check‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪Check‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬
‫‪Engine system failure‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ ‫‪Engine failure‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

‫‪Cooling fan reversal failure‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻦ‬ ‫‪Cooling fan system failure‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﭘﺮواﻧﻪ(‬

‫‪Fuel level sensor‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ ‫‪Clogged air filter engine‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

‫‪Fuel level low‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﻢ اﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪Preheating failure‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﮔﺮم ﻛﺮدن اوﻟﻴﻪ‬

‫‪High temp. starter motor‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت داغ ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪Low oil level engine‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻛﻢ اﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wait 5 min. before start‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺳﺘﺎرت زدن ‪ 5‬دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫*‪Check at next stop‬‬ ‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫‪High charge-air‬‬ ‫دﻣﺎي ﻫﻮاي ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫‪Hand throttle failure‬‬
‫‪temperature‬‬
‫‪engine‬‬
‫‪Injection system failure‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺰرﻳﻖ‬ ‫‪High coolant temperatur‬‬ ‫دﻣﺎي آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬
‫‪engine‬‬

‫‪Automatic‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ ‫‪Low engine coolant leve‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻛﻢ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Engine shutdown‬‬ ‫‪Check at next stop‬‬ ‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫‪High engine oil‬‬ ‫دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ‬

‫‪temperature‬‬

‫‪59‬‬
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

Electrical system
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ‬

Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬

Low system voltage ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ High system voltage ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻻدر ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬

ECC ECC ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در‬

failure

60
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫‪Alarm texts‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

‫‪Transmission‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

‫‪Check‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪Check‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬

‫‪Transmission oil filter‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫‪Transmission failure‬‬
‫‪clogged‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر ‪ F/N/R‬دﺳﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر ‪ CDC‬دﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫‪Gear sel. F/N/R failure‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬ ‫‪Gear sel. CDC failure‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
‫‪Check at next stop‬‬ ‫‪Check at next stop‬‬
‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر ‪ F/R‬دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫‪Gear sel. failure‬‬ ‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪Gear sel. F/R failure‬‬ ‫دﻧﺪه‬
‫‪Check at next stop‬‬ ‫‪Check at next stop‬‬
‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬
‫‪Reduced gearshift‬‬
‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪Reduced gearshift‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫‪function‬‬
‫‪function‬‬
‫‪No reverse gear‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪار روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻛﻢ اﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺴﻢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺿﻌﻴﻒ‬
‫‪Reduced gearshift function‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫‪Transmission oil level low‬‬
‫‪No forward gear‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻗﺪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ اﺳﺖ‬

‫‪Transmission oil‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫‪Sensor transmission oi‬‬
‫‪pressure‬‬
‫‪filter‬‬
‫‪sensor‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ ‫‪Transmission oil‬‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫‪Transmission failure‬‬ ‫‪temperature‬‬
‫‪sensor‬‬

‫‪61‬‬
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

Axles
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬

Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬

Temperature sensor axle ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر دﻣﺎي روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
oil Technical failure axles

Diff. lock failure ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬

Brakes
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻫﺎ‬

Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬

Brakes failure ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬ Technical failure brake ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
system
‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬
Parking brake failure
Check at next stop ‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Steering system
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬

Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬

Secondary steer pump ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
failure Steering system failure

Secondary steer failure ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ CDC failure CDC ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ‬

62
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

Hydraulics
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬

Attachment lock ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬ Hydraulic system failure ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ درﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
BSS ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و‬
Check attachment lock
BSS Failure and confirm* 
‫ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬

Return to dig failure ‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ در ﺣﻔﺎري ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬ Hydraulics failure ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
LS ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻓﺸﺎر‬ Temperature sensor ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر دﻣﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
LS press sensor failure
hydraulics
Hydraulic pump failure ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

*) Confirm with SELECT .‫ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬SELECT ‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬

63
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Alarm texts
‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬

Miscellaneous
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ‬

Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬ Check ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬

ECU network
Reduced Communication
‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
Central lubrication
failure
Rear wiper failure
Residual time XXX h

Next service YYYY h*
Accelerator pedal sensor
ECU ‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺷﺒﻜﻪ اي‬ ECU network ECU ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺷﺒﻜﻪ اي‬
Communication Interrupt
APS‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬ APS control
‫ﻧﻘﺺ در ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪار روﻏﻦ رواﻧﻜﺎري ﻛﻢ اﺳﺖ‬
Lubricant level low
Check at next stop ‫در ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻌﺪي آن را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬XXX ‫زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ در ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬yyy ‫ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﻌﺪي‬ Wiper failure
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز‬ Accelerator failure ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﻓﻨﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺎز‬

Limp Home ‫ﻧﻘﺺ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻮان‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺺ ﭘﺎراﻣﺘﺮ‬

Parameter failure
safety related failure
Ambient temperature ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر دﻣﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
sensor

*) XXX = number of hours remaining to next service, YYYY
= next service interval.
*) Computer malfunction between the ECUs. The machine
can only be operated in first or second gear. Only Operating
Information and Alarms are available on the display unit.
**) Contact a workshop authorised by Volvo CE for
information.

‫ = دوره زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬YYYY ، ‫ = ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﻌﺪي‬XXX
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﻌﺪي‬
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ دو ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬.‫ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ECU ‫ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻴﺎن‬ 
.‫ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري و اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮﻫﺎ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ دﻳﺪ‬.
.‫ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬volvo CE ‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺎز‬

64
Instrument panels ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Anti-theft device (optional equipment)
(‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬

Anti-theft device (optional ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬

equipment) ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ از ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي‬
The anti-theft device prevents theft of the :‫ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‬
machine as:
.‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬-
- the engine does not start
‫ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه ﻛﺎر ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬-
- the gear selector does not work
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ از درﮔﻴﺮي ﺧﺎرج ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬-
- the parking brake cannot be released.

When starting the engine ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
1 Turn the ignition key to position 1. 1 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را در وﺿﻌﺖ‬ 1
2 Wait until the following screen is shown on ‫)ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز ( ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
the display unit.
.‫ﺗﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪن ﺻﻔﺤﻪ زﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ روي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬ 5

‫ﻛﺪ را وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬


3 Enter the four-digit code on the keyboard.
- When the correct code has been entered, the
anti-theft device becomes deactivated and the
engine can be started.
- Use the ESC key to move the cursor to the left
to change an incorrectly entered digit.
- When the code has been entered, and one of th
digits is incorrect, the system automatically
returns to the position for the first digit. Enter
the code again.
.‫ﻛﺪ ﭼﻬﺎر رﻗﻤﻲ را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 6
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ از ﻛﺎر‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ وارد ﺷﻮد‬ -
.‫ﻣﻲ اﻓﺘﺪ و ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ روﺷﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ )ﻛﺮزر( را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ESC ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ -
، ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ رﻗﻤﻲ را ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎدرﺳﺖ وارد ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ‬
‫اﺻﻼح ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺪ وارد ﺷﻮد وﻟﻲ ﻳﻜﻲ از ارﻗﺎم آن‬ -
‫ﻧﺎﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺠﺪداً ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ اوﻟﻴﻦ رﻗﻢ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ‬
.‫ﮔﺮدد ﺗﺎ ﻛﺪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ را ﻣﺠﺪداً وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

ƒ The code can only be changed by a

workshop authorised by Volvo CE. ‫ ﻣﻲ‬volvo CE ‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺪ را ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
.‫ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻨﺪ‬
ƒ The engine can be restarted within 60
seconds after it was stopped without
having to enter the code. ‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺮاي روﺷﻦ‬60 ‫ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ ƒ
.‫ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺠﺪد آن ﺑﺪون وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻛﺪ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ دارﻳﺪ‬

65
‫‪Instrument panels‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري(‬

‫‪66‬‬
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Controls ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬

‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬

Other controls
Controls ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬

1 Lever steering, CDC (optional equipment) (‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬CDC ،‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي‬ 1

2 Parking brake ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ 2
3 Gear selector control, horn ‫ ﺑﻮق‬،‫دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬ 3
4 Brake pedal ‫ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬ 4
5 Differential lock ‫ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬ 5
6 Brake pedal ‫ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬ 6
7 Steering wheel adjustment (optional equipment) (‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻏﺮﺑﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬ 7
8 Headlight dipper / windscreen washer, direction ‫ ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺟﻠﻮ‬، ‫ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﺟﻠﻮ‬/ ‫ ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 8
indicators, windscreen wiper
9 Accelerator pedal ‫ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز‬ 9
10 Control lever carrier: working hydraulics, kick-down, ،‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬، ‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬، ‫ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬:‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬ 10
engine braking, control lever lockout, forward/reverse ‫ ﺑﻮق‬،‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬/ ‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬/‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
shifting, forward/reverse activation, horn
11 Arm rest ‫زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ 11

67
Other controls
Controls
1 Lever steering, CDC (optional
equipment)
The equipment consists of a folding
arm rest where three operating functions are
collected: steering, forward/reverse and kick-
down.
The functions are activated by folding
down the arm rest and pressing the
activating button.
When the system is activated, a control
lamp on the centre instrument panel is on.
Further instructions, see page93
2 Parking brake
ƒ The control lamp lights when the parking
brake is applied. If the parking brake is
applied when a directional gear is
selected, the red central warning lamp
begins to flash, the buzzer begins to
sound and alarm text is shown on the
display unit.
The catch on the switch prevents the
parking brake from being released
accidentally.
Application
- Move the gear selector to neutral.
- Press in the lower end of the switch. The
machine must be completely stationary before
application.
- Turn the ignition key to the "0" position.
If the engine is turned off without the
parking brake having first been applied,
it will be applied automatically.
Releasing
- Slide down the catch and press in the upper end
of the switch.
Releasing (if the parking brake has been
applied automatically):
- Press in the lower end of the switch.
- Slide down the catch and press in the upper end
of the switch.
NOTE! If a directional gear has been
engaged, the engine speed must be
increased to 1600 rpm to allow the
parking brake to be released (safety
function). This way of releasing the brake
must not be used instead of releasing it
with the aid of the switch.
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
(‫ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬CDC ،‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي‬ 1
‫اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻮ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ از‬ ƒ
،‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬:‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻋﻘﺐ و دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬/‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻢ ﻛﺮدن زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ و‬ ƒ
‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ﻓﺸﺮدن دﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎزي‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد ﻳﻚ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ‬ ƒ
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮﻛﺰي روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬93 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ 2
‫ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﺑﺎ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ ƒ
‫ اﮔﺮ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﻗﺮار‬.
‫ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ‬،‫ از ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬،‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
،‫ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﺮﻛﺰي ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا در ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ و ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم‬
.‫ﺧﻄﺮ در واﺣﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦ روي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ از آزاد ﺷﺪن ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ ƒ
.‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮه ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬ -
‫ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ -
.‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ -
.‫« ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬o»
‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺪون اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ اﺑﺘﺪا از ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ ƒ
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ درﮔﻴﺮ‬،‫را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦ را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ را ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر‬ -
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن )در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
(‫درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ را ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬ -
‫ﺿﺎﻣﻦ را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ و ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ را ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر‬ -
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﮔﺮ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﻳﻚ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ اﺟﺎزه‬1600 rpm ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي آزاد ﻛﺮدن‬.(‫)ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬. ‫آزاد ﺷﺪن داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ از اﻳﻦ روش آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
68
Other controls
Controls
3 Gear selector control
Shifting between the different speed
gears is done by turning the control.
NOTE! Never leave the machine with the
gear selector in forward or reverse, while
the engine is running.
Further instructions on gear shifting, see page
90.
Forward/Reverse
Lever in position F = Operating forward
Lever in position N = Neutral
Lever in position R = Operating rearward
Horn
Button pressed in = Horn
4 Brake pedal
(double on certain markets)
5 Differential lock
The differential lock only affects the
front axle.
It is engaged by depressing the foot
switch and it remains engaged as long as the
foot switch is kept depressed.
ƒ The control lamp on the centre
instrument panel is alight when the lock
is engaged.
IMPORTANT! The differential lock may
only be used when operating on slippery
ground.
ƒ When operating on firm ground,
particularly when turning, the lock must
be disengaged.
ƒ If there is danger of getting stuck, engage
the differential lock before the machine
has got stuck.
ƒ If the machine has become stuck and one
of the wheels is slipping, the wheel must
be stopped before engaging the
differential lock. Otherwise the drive
axle system may be damaged.
6 Brake pedal
(double on certain markets)
69
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬3
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي داراي ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪن‬ ƒ
.‫اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ و دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﺮك ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
90 ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ در ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه را در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬/‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫= ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ‬F ‫ﻟﻴﻮر در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫= ﺧﻼص‬N ‫ﻟﻴﻮر در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫= ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ‬R ‫ﻟﻴﻮر در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻮق‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ= ﺑﻮق زدن‬
‫ ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬4
(‫)در ﻣﻮارد ﻓﺮوش ﺧﺎص ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دوﺑﻞ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬5
‫ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ روي اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ƒ
‫اﻳﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﭘﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ درﮔﻴﺮ‬ ƒ
‫ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﻮد‬ ƒ
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮﻛﺰي روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺟﻬﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در زﻣﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻫﻨﮕﺎم دور زدن‬ ƒ
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ آزاد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻗﺒﻞ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻓﺮو رﻓﺘﻦ و ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وﺟﻮد دارد‬ ƒ
‫ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ را‬، ‫از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮو رﻓﺘﻪ و ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ و ﻳﻜﻲ از ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮو رﻓﺘﻪ و ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ‬ ƒ
‫ ﭘﻴﺶ از درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻗﻔﻞ‬،‫در ﺣﺎل ﺳﺮ ﺧﻮردن اﺳﺖ‬
‫ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ‬.‫دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﭼﺮخ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺻﻮرت ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮك آﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ دﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬6
(‫)در ﻣﻮارد ﻓﺮوش ﺧﺎص ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دوﺑﻞ اﺳﺖ‬
Other controls
Controls
7 Steering wheel adjustment
(optional equipment)
The control is positioned to the right under the
steering wheel.
Control upward = Adjustment of height
Control downward = Adjustment of steering
wheel inclination
8 Headlight dipper / windscreen
washer
Away from steering wheel = High beams
Neutral position = Low beams
Towards steering wheel = Headlight flasher
Direction indicator control / horn
Control forward = Left direction indicators
Control rearward = Right direction indicators
Windscreen wiper
Position 0 = Neutral position
Position --- = Intermittent wiper*
Positions I and II = Windscreen wiper (two
speeds)
*) It is possible to alter the length of the
interval.
The ignition key must be in position 1.
First turn the control to the intermittent
wiping position and allow the wipers to
operate for a while, then turn the control to
position 0 and wait for the period of time you
want the new interval to last and again turn
the control to the intermittent wiping position.
When the engine is turned off by turning the
ignition key to position 0, the duration of the
interval between the wiping actions returns to
the basic setting.
Windscreen washer
Button pressed in = Windscreen washer on
Accelerator pedal
The accelerator position is transferred
electrically.
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
(‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬ 7
.‫دﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل زﻳﺮ ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن در ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ آوردن دﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل = ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع‬
‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن دﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل = ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﺟﻠﻮ‬/ ‫ ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 8
‫دور ﻛﺮدن دﺳﺘﻪ از ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن = ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ = ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺮدﻳﻚ ﻛﺮدن دﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن= ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻي ﻟﺤﻈﻪ اي‬
‫ ﺑﻮق‬/‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ آوردن دﺳﺘﻪ= روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺐ آوردن دﺳﺘﻪ = روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن راﻫﻨﻤﺎي ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫= وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص‬0 ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ = ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ )ﺑﺎ ﻣﻜﺚ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ( ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ‬--- ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
(‫ = ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺟﻠﻮ )دو ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬11‫ و‬1 ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫( اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﻣﻜﺚ ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ )ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬1 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﺎز( ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﺑﺘﺪا دﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺮار‬
‫ ﺳﭙﺲ دﺳﺘﻪ را ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮ و اﺟﺎزه دﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎن ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮف‬
‫ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺠﺪداً دﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را‬،‫ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻜﺚ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ و در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎه ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪن ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﻣﻜﺚ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬،‫« ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﻮد‬o» ‫روي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﺒﻨﺎي ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪن دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ = روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز‬9
.‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
70
‫‪Other controls‬‬
‫‪Controls‬‬
‫‪10 Control lever carrier and control‬‬
‫‪functions‬‬
‫‪Lever (1) for the lifting function has three‬‬
‫‪positions: lifting, neutral and lowering.‬‬
‫‪Detent function, lifting / boom kick-out‬‬
‫‪Activation and selection of detent function‬‬
‫‪lifting or alternatively boom kick-out is done‬‬
‫‪with the switch. The control lever is then‬‬
‫‪moved to max. lifting position.‬‬
‫‪Detent function lifting = the control lever‬‬
‫‪remains in the lifting position even after the‬‬
‫‪lifting arms have reached the max. lifting‬‬
‫‪position, after which the control lever has to‬‬
‫‪be moved back to neutral by hand.‬‬
‫‪Boom kick-out = the control lever remains in‬‬
‫‪the lifting position until the lifting arms have‬‬
‫‪reached a predetermined height. Thereafter it‬‬
‫‪returns to neutral automatically.‬‬
‫‪Tilting lever (2) has three positions:‬‬
‫‪rearward, neutral and forward.‬‬
‫)‪Detent function tilting (bucket positioner‬‬
‫‪Activation of bucket positioner, is done with‬‬
‫‪the switch. Thereafter the control lever is‬‬
‫‪moved to max. rearward tilting position.‬‬
‫‪When the rearward movement of the‬‬
‫‪attachment reaches a predetermined position,‬‬
‫‪the control lever returns to neutral‬‬
‫‪automatically‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻮر )‪ (1‬ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن داراي ﺳﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺮدن‪ ،‬ﺧﻼص‪ .‬و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد داراي ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ‪ /‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎزي و اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد داراي ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺎي آن ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻮم ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎﻻ آوردن ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد داراي ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن= ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه ﺣﺘﻲ ﭘﺲ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺧﻢ ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫‪ A‬وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن‬ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﻲ رﺳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ B‬وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص‬ ‫‪ B‬وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص‬ ‫ﭘﺲ از آن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﺑﺎ دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص‬
‫‪ C‬ﺧﻢ ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬ ‫‪ C‬وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم= ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ارﺗﻔﺎع از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮﺳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ از آن ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﻮر )‪ (2‬ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻞ زاوﻳﻪ دادن داراي ﺳﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻘﺐ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼص و ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد داراي ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه زاوﻳﻪ دادن ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ )ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ( ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎزي ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮد ﺳﭙﺲ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ زاوﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ‪.‬‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات آﻧﻘﺪر ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه رﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬
Other controls
Controls
Control lever (3) for the 3rd hydraulic
function (optional equipment)
ƒ Double-acting hydraulic outlets are
used, if the machine, for example, is
equipped with a timber grapple.
May also be used for hydraulically
powered rotating attachments. When
such attachments are used, the control
lever may be equipped with detent
function. The detent function can
quickly be disconnected with an
emergency stop.
Control lever (4) for the 4th hydraulic
function (optional equipment)
ƒ Double-acting hydraulic outlets, are
used, for example, for a further function
in the timber grapple.
Kick-down (5)
ƒ The function can be selected from the
control lever carrier, the gear selector
control (see page92) and from the lever
steering (optional equipment), see page
93
Horn (6)
Engine braking / downshifting (7)
ƒ Is used to obtain an immediate downshift
when operating downhill, or to prevent
undesired upshifting, see also page
Directional gear F-N-R (8)
ƒ To be able to use the forward/reverse
function on the control lever carrier, the
activating button (10) must first be
depressed.
After activation F/R is shown: in front of the
selected directional gear on the display unit on
the Operating Information screen
Switch in the forward position = Operating
forward
Switch in centre position = Neutral
Switch in rearward position = Operating in
reverse
ƒ If the ordinary gear selector control by
the steering wheel is moved from neutral,
while operating with the F/R switch, the
gear selector at the steering wheel will
override the switch.
ƒ A new activation of the system requires
that the activating button (10) is pressed
again.
Control lever lockout (9)
ƒ Locks the control levers in neutral. The
control lever lockout is used in order to
avoid involuntary actuation of the control
levers, for example when servicing or
transporting the machine.
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
(‫( ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﺳﻮم )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬3) ‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
، ‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻼً ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ( ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ƒ
.‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ دوﺑﻞ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ دوار ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ي‬.‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬،‫روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﻮار ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد داراي ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﺑﺎ‬.‫داراي ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ اﺳﺘﻮپ اﺿﻄﺮاري ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ از ﺣﺎﻟﺖ درﮔﻴﺮي‬
.‫ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
(‫( ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﭼﻬﺎرم )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬4) ‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫از ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ دوﺑﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮدﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ƒ
.‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد اﺿﺎﻓﻲ درﮔﺮاﭘﻞ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮارﮔﻴﺮ(اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
(5)‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ دﺳﺘﻪ‬، ‫اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬ ƒ
‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ( و ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬92 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬92 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎري( اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮد‬
(6) ‫ﺑﻮق‬
(7)‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬/ ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﺳﺮازﻳﺮي ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻮري ﻳﺎ‬ ƒ
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮب و رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
.‫ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
(8)F-N-R ‫دﻧﺪه ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد و‬/‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ƒ
‫( را‬10) ‫ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎزي‬،‫روي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻗﺮار دارد‬
‫ ﻧﺸﺎن داده ﻣﻲ‬F/R ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺑﺘﺪا ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎزي‬
‫ در ﺟﻠﻮي دﻧﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در‬: ‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺮ روي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ = ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻂ = ﺧﻼص‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ = ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬، F/R ‫اﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬ ƒ
، ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﺎر ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن از وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ را ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‬، ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد اﻳﻦ دﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎزي ﻣﺠﺪد ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻨﺪ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺴﺎزي‬ ƒ
.‫( ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷﻮد‬10)
(9)‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‬
‫ ﻗﻔﻞ‬. ‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ƒ
‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﺟﺘﻨﺎب از ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي‬
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺜﻼً ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬

NOTE! On machines with a 4th hydraulic ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ‬، ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﭼﻬﺎرم‬
function, the control lever lockout is ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي‬.‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
electrical. Control lever lockout is achieved
with the switch, thus disengaging the ‫ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ از ﻛﺎر اﻓﺘﺎدن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ اﻳﻦ‬، ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬
hydraulic function of the control levers. .‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Activating directional gear (10)
NOTE! The ordinary selector control by
the steering wheel and the switch on the (10)‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن دﻧﺪه ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
control lever carrier must, when activating, ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻛﻨﺎر ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن و‬
be in neutral. The lever steering (optional
equipment) must not be activated. .‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ روي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﺌﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
If the ordinary gear selector .‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري( ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
control is operated, the gear- ‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬،‫اﮔﺮ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
shifting function of the CDC is lost
and the selection made with the ‫ اﻋﻤﺎل ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد و اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬CDC
ordinary gear selector control .‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ اﻋﻤﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
applies.

72
‫‪Other controls‬‬
‫‪Boom kick-out and bucket‬‬
‫‪positioner‬‬
‫‪Boom kick-out and bucket‬‬
‫‪positioner‬‬
‫‪Boom kick-out and bucket positioner causes‬‬
‫‪the bucket and the lifting arms automatically‬‬
‫‪to stop in predetermined positions. This will‬‬
‫‪result in shorter cycle times and reduces wear.‬‬
‫‪The adjustments of the required position for‬‬
‫‪the bucket or the required height when lifting‬‬
‫‪are done according to the instructions given‬‬
‫‪below.‬‬
‫‪Operation‬‬
‫ƒ‬ ‫‪When either of the control levers is‬‬
‫‪moved to lifting or tilting rearwards‬‬
‫‪(with switched on switches) the lever is‬‬
‫‪kept in the detent position and the‬‬
‫‪movement continues to a predetermined‬‬
‫‪position, whereafter the lever returns to‬‬
‫‪neutral.‬‬
‫‪Adjusting lift height‬‬
‫‪1 Raise the lifting arms to the required position.‬‬
‫‪2 Stop the engine, but leave the ignition key in‬‬
‫‪running position.‬‬
‫‪3 Slacken the nut for the bracket and move the‬‬
‫‪sensor to its rear position.‬‬
‫‪4 Switch on the switch for the boom kick-out.‬‬
‫‪5 Move the lifting lever to the rear detent‬‬
‫‪position.‬‬
‫‪6 Displace the sensor forward until the lifting‬‬
‫‪lever returns to neutral.‬‬
‫‪7 Tighten the nut for the bracket.‬‬
‫‪Adjusting tilting rearwards‬‬
‫‪1 Move the bucket to the required position.‬‬
‫‪2 Stop the engine, but leave the ignition key in‬‬
‫‪running position.‬‬
‫‪3 Slacken the nuts for the bracket and move the‬‬
‫‪sensor to its rear position.‬‬
‫‪4 Switch on the switch for the bucket positioner.‬‬
‫‪5 Move the tilting lever to the rear detent positio‬‬
‫‪6 Displace the sensor toward the rod until the‬‬
‫‪light emitting diode lights up.‬‬
‫‪7 Tighten the nuts for the bracket.‬‬
‫‪IMPORTANT! The distance (A) between‬‬
‫‪the sensors and the actuating part of the‬‬
‫‪machine should be 3-5 mm (0.12-0.20 in).‬‬
‫‪See the adjacent figure.‬‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ )ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ دﻫﻨﺪه( ﺑﺎﻛﺖ و ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻮم‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ )ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ دﻫﻨﺪه( ﺑﺎﻛﺖ و ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻮم‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻛﺖ و ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻮم ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ‪ ،‬و ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮ ﺷﺪن زﻣﺎن ﺳﻴﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎري و ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﻛﺖ و ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎﻻ آﻣﺪن ‪،‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮه ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫زاوﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ )در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫وﺋﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ( ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻟﻴﻮر ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ )ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه در ﻫﻤﺎن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺎ رﺳﻴﺪن‬
‫دﻫﻨﺪه( ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻮم‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ‪ ،‬اداﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺲ از آن ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ را ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬اﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش اﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺮه روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﻨﺴﻮر را ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮاﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻮم را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫روﺷﻦ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ داراي ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر را آﻧﻘﺪر ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻮم‬ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺮﮔﺮدد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺮه روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زاوﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬اﻣﺎ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺻﻠﻲ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺮه روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﻨﺴﻮر را ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮاﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫روﺷﻦ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ زاوﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ داراي‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر را آﻧﻘﺪر ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ دﻳﻮد ﻧﻮري‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ دﻫﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ ‫روﺷﻦ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺮه روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻨﺴﻮرﻫﺎ و ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‪(0.12- 3-5‬‬
‫)‪ 0.20 in‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Operator comfort ‫آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
Operator comfort ‫آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
Operator seat ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
The operator seat meets the requirements according to EN
‫ ﻣﻔﻬﻮم اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ‬.‫ اﺳﺖ‬EN ISO 7096:2000 ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر داراي ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
ISO 7096:2000. In short this means that the seat is designed
to minimise, in the best possible way, the whole body ‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻼﺻﻪ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻃﻮري ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن‬
vibrations to which the operator is exposed while operating ‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎﺗﻲ را ﻛﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض آن ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
the machine. The size of the vibrations depends on different
factors, many of which are not related to the construction of ‫ اﻧﺪازه اﻳﻦ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﺪاد زﻳﺎدي از آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
the machine, such as ground conditions, speed and operating ‫ ﻧﻜﺎت‬.‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ و ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬،‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ رﺑﻄﻲ ﻧﺪارد ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻣﻴﻦ‬
techniques. Bear the following in mind:
:‫زﻳﺮ را در ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
- Adjust the seat according to the operator's weight and height.
.‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻗﺪ و وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ −
- Keep the ground at the work site in good condition.
.‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر را در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬ −
- Apply the correct operating techniques and speed in relation to
existing conditions. .‫از ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻜﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري و ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ −
Correctly adjusted operator seat increases operator comfort ‫ ﻋﺪم‬.‫ آﺳﺎﻳﺶ و اﻳﻤﻨﻲ او را اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬،‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
and safety. Incorrectly adjusted seat may lead to injuries. The ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺷﻮد ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻮرت‬
settings which should be carried out are:
A Back-rest inclination :‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ از‬
B Lumbar support ‫زاوﻳﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬ A
C Inclination of and raising/lowering the seat cushion ‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﻛﻤﺮ‬ B
D Operator weight ‫زاوﻳﻪ دادن و ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن ﻛﻒ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬ C
E Longitudinal (leg room) ‫وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬ D
(The controls for the different adjustments may vary (‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ )ﺟﺎﭘﺎﻳﻲ‬ E
depending on seat model.)
‫)وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪل ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت‬
The operator seat attaching bracket has several holes for
attaching the seat. Thereby the operator seat can be moved on (‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
the attaching bracket, thus providing further adjustment ‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬.‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ زﻳﺮ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر داراي ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺳﻮراخ ﺑﺮاي اﺗﺼﺎل ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
possibilities longitudinally.
.‫ﻛﺮدن ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي ﺑﻬﺮه ﺑﺮد‬
Moving the operator seat should be carried out by authorised
Volvo workshop. ‫ ﺻﻮرت‬VOLVO ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬
NOTE! Do not adjust the seat while the machine is .‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮد‬
moving. .‫ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻧﭙﺮدازﻳﺪ‬، ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺣﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ اﺳﺖ‬
Mechanical seat ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬

A Back-rest inclination ‫ زاوﻳﻪ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬A

Pull the handle upward and adjust to the required inclination.
B Lumbar support
Turn the knob to the required setting (hard/soft).
C Height and inclination
Pull the handles upward to raise and downward to lower the
rear and front end of the seat.
Never adjust the height of the seat with the weight adjusting
wheel
D Adjusting for weight
Adjust the seat according to the relevant weight with the
adjusting wheel. While sitting in the seat try to adjust so that
the upward and downward movement ranges are equally
distributed.
Should not be used for adjusting height.
E Longitudinal (leg room)
Pull the bar upward and push the seat (forward/rearward).
F Electrically heated (optional equipment)
.‫دﺳﺘﻪ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ و زاوﻳﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﻛﻤﺮ‬B
(‫ ﻧﺮم‬/‫)ﺳﻔﺖ‬.‫دﺳﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ را ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ زاوﻳﻪ و ارﺗﻔﺎع‬C
.‫دﺳﺘﻪ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ رود‬
.‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﺗﻨﻈﺒﻢ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ وزن‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬D
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ روي‬.‫ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ آن را ﻃﻮري ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ داﻣﻨﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ و‬، ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ اﻳﺪ‬
.‫ از اﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬.‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
(‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ )ﺟﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻲ‬E
(‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ و ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ)ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
(‫ ﮔﺮم ﺷﻮﻧﺪﮔﻲ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬F

74
Other controls
Operator comfort
Air-suspended seat
The adjustments are carried out in the same
way as for the mechanical seat, except for
lumbar support and weight adjustments.
B Adjusting lumbar support
Using the buttons it is possible to fill and
empty the upper and lower lumbar supports
separately as required.
D Adjusting for weight
By pressing the button marked + for filling
and - for emptying, the seat suspension can be
adjusted according to the relevant operator
weight.
While sitting in the seat try to adjust so that
the upward and downward movement ranges
are equally distributed.
Should not be used for adjusting height.
Instructor seat (optional equipment)
Not available in the USA
The instructor seat makes it possible for an
instructor to travel temporarily on the
machine in order to instruct/train an operator
in how to operate and handle the machine in
the best possible way.
NOTE! THE INSTRUCTOR SEAT IS
NOT INTENDED FOR PASSENGERS.
Machines provided with Comfort Drive
Control, CDC, "Lever steering", or separate
left arm rest, cannot be provided with an
instructor seat.
When an instructor is travelling on the
machine, it must be driven with the greatest
care (low travelling speed) and on as level
ground as possible. The work site should then
in advance be tidied and bumps and holes be
levelled so as to avoid unnecessary shaking
and sudden movements.
Lap type seat belt, checking and
maintenance
ƒ Replace the belt if it is worn, damaged or
if the machine has been involved in an
accident where the belt had to take some
strain.
ƒ Changes to the belt or its mountings must
never be made.
ƒ The seat belt is intended for one grown
up person only.
ƒ Keep the belt rolled-up when not in use.
ƒ Replace the belt every third year
regardless of its condition.
ƒ When washing, use a mild soap solution.
Allow the belt to dry while it is fully
pulled out, before rolling it up. Make
sure the belt is installed in a correct way.
75
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﺎدي‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ از ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ وزن و ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﻛﻤﺮ‬
.‫ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﻛﻤﺮ‬B
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺮ و ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﺟﺪاﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه‬
‫ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬D
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن و دﻛﻤﻪ داراي‬+ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن دﻛﻤﻪ داراي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺮدن ﻫﻮا ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬-‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎ وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮد در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ روي ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻪ اﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ آن را ﻃﻮري ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ داﻣﻨﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫از اﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
(‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
‫اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن در آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺑﻲ اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎً ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﻳﻚ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ دﻫﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﻴﺎﻣﻮزد ﭼﻄﻮر ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت‬
.‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎرﻛﺮده و آن را اداره ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻮار ﻛﺮدن ﺳﺮﻧﺸﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
، CDC ، ‫در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ آﺳﺎن‬
‫»ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي« ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ داراي زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﺠﺰا در ﺳﻤﺖ‬
.‫ﭼﭗ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮد‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺮﺑﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر‬
‫دﻗﺖ ﺷﻮد )ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( و ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﺎﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎر را‬.‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﺻﺎف اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺮ آﻣﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺎ و ﺣﻔﺮه ﻫﺎ را ﺻﺎف ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﺑﺮوز‬،‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﺮده‬
.‫ﻟﺮزش ﻫﺎي ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮوري و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ وارﺳﻲ و ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬
‫ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪه‬، ‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻓﺮﺳﻮده ﺷﺪه‬ ƒ
‫ آن را‬،‫ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ در اﺛﺮ ﺳﺎﻧﺠﻪ ﻣﻘﺪاري ﻛﺶ آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﻮع ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ و ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي آن را ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺑﺰرﮔﺴﺎل در ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ƒ
.‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ از ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ آن را ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻏﻠﻄﻚ‬ ƒ
.‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺳﺎل‬،‫ﺑﺪون در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬ ƒ
.‫ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آن را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ در‬.‫ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺴﺘﻦ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ از ﻣﺤﻠﻮل ﺻﺎﺑﻮن ﻧﺮم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﻴﺮون ﻛﺸﻴﺪه اﻳﺪ اﺟﺎزه دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﻮد و ﭘﺲ از ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪن ﻛﺎﻣﻞ آن را ﺑﻪ دور‬
‫ از ﻧﺼﺐ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن‬.‫ﻏﻠﻄﻚ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﭙﻴﭽﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Operator comfort ‫آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬
Arm rest, adjusting ‫زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
The arm rests for control lever carrier and ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎري( و ﺧﻮد ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻃﻮري ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
lever steering (optional equipment) and the
control lever carrier can be adjusted to give ‫ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن در وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ آﺳﺎﻳﺶ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
the operator an as comfortable operating .‫را ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
position as possible.

Adjusting arm rest for control lever carrier ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
A Up/down ‫ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬/ ‫ ﺑﺎﻻ‬A
1 Loosen handle A and adjust to required height ‫ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ارﺗﻔﺎع و زاوﻳﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ‬A ‫ دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه‬1
and angle. .‫ﺧﻮد را اﻋﻤﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
2 Tighten the handle.
‫ دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2

Adjusting control lever carrier

B Forward/rearward ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
1 Loosen locking knob B and adjust to required ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬/‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬B
angle.
‫ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زاوﻳﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد را‬B ‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ‬1
2 Tighten locking knob.
.‫اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي‬

Adjusting arm rest for lever steering ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ از ﺑﻐﻞ‬C
C Adjusting sideways ‫ از ﺑﻐﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد را‬،‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬1
1 Loosen locking knob C and adjust sideways to
.‫اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
required position.
2 Tighten locking knob. .‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2
D Adjusting vertically
1 Loosen locking knob D and adjust vertically. ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮدي‬D
2 Tighten locking knob. .‫ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻮدي را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬D ‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ‬1
.‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2

Steering wheel adjustment (‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬

(optional equipment)
‫ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ زاوﻳﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻃﻮري‬
The steering wheel has to be adjusted to the
correct angle in relation to the seat to provide .‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮد ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ آن ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن راﺣﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
an operating position which is as comfortable ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ = ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع‬
as possible.
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﺳﺘﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ = ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زاوﻳﻪ ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
Control upward = Adjustment of height
Control downward = Adjustment of steering
wheel inclination

76
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Climate control system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

Climate control system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

1 Air nozzles, front ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬، ‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮا‬ 1

2 Panel, climate control system ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬،‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ‬ 2
3 Air nozzles, rear ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮا‬ 3
4 Temperature sensor for cab climate ‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر دﻣﺎي ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 4
NOTE! Make sure that the space in front of the ‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ از‬.‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻀﺎي ﺟﻠﻮي ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻫﻮا ﺧﺎﻟﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
temperature sensor is clear. Do not point an air nozzle
directly at the temperature sensor. .‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮا را ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺳﻨﺴﻮر دﻣﺎ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬

77
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Climate control system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

1 Air conditioning ‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬ 1

2 Cab ventilation / interval heating ‫ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي‬/‫ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 2
3 Fan control ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﻦ‬ 3
4 Temperature control ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎ‬ 4
5 Air distribution control ‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬1 ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا‬ 5

1 Air conditioning (optional

equipment
Press in the switch to switch on the air
conditioning.
The control lamp in the switch shows that the
function is switched on.
If the control lamp starts to flash, the air
conditioning has become turned off.
The cause may be clogged condenser, see
page166.
NOTE! (The switch is installed on
machines without this optional equipment,
but is then without any function.)
(‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬1
.‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع روﺷﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ داﺧﻞ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺮده‬
.‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬،‫اﮔﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زدن ﻛﺮد‬
.‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
،‫ﻋﻠﺖ اﻳﻦ اﺷﻜﺎل ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن ﻛﻨﺪاﻧﺴﻮر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬166 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! )در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع را ﻧﺪارد‬
(‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ وﺟﻮد دارد وﻟﻲ ﻛﺎري اﻧﺠﺎم ﻧﻤﻲ دﻫﺪ‬

78
Other controls
Climate control system
2 Cab ventilation / interval heating
(interval heating is optional
equipment)
Cab ventilation / interval heating takes place
with the aid of the cab fan at the same time as
the engine is turned off and the ignition key is
in position 0.
Works even when the ignition key has been
removed from the ignition switch.
The battery disconnect switch must be
switched on.
Activation:
Press in switch (2) to activate the cab
ventilation / interval heating.
Activation can be done max. 1 minute before,
or max. 15 seconds after the ignition key is
turned to position 0, thus turning off the
engine.
The control lamp in the switch is alight and
shows that the function is active.
Warm outdoor climate, cab ventilation:
The cab is ventilated while the machine is
parked.
Fan speed at position AUT is recommended.
The time is max. 2 hours.
Cold outdoor climate, interval heating
(optional equipment):
The engine coolant is circulated and thereby
provides the cab with heating.
The duration of the interval heating is as long
as the temperature of the coolant is
sufficiently high or up to 1 hour.
Fan speed at position AUT is recommended.
The temperature is adjustable with the
temperature control.
Deactivation is done or takes place:
With switch (2).
When the time has elapsed.
When the coolant temperature no longer is
sufficiently high, only interval heating
applies.
When the engine is started.
79
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي )ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬/‫ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬2
(‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي ﺟﺰء ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻓﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ در زﻣﺎن‬/ ‫ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش و‬
.‫« ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬0» ‫روﺷﻦ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي‬/‫ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬2
‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺣﺘﻲ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را از داﺧﻞ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در آورﻳﺪ ﻫﻢ‬
.‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎزي‬
‫ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬/‫( را ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬2) ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬
1 ‫ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺳﺎزي را ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬.‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ در‬15 ‫دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
.‫ اﻧﺠﺎم داد‬. ‫« ﻗﺮار داده ﺷﺪه و ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪ‬0» ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ داﺧﻞ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ روﺷﻦ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ و ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
.‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮاي ﺑﻴﺮون ﮔﺮم اﺳﺖ‬، ‫ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﭘﺎرك ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻫﻮاي داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬AUT ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﻦ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ اﺳﺖ‬2 ‫ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮاي ﺑﻴﺮون‬، (‫ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
:‫ﺳﺮد اﺳﺖ‬
‫آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮدش در ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ و ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﺪت ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ دوره اي ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ دﻣﺎي آب‬
‫رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺳﭙﺮي‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬AUT ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﻦ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫دﻣﺎي ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﺗﻔﺎق ﻣﻲ اﻓﺘﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ‬
.‫( ﺑﺮاي ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬2) ‫از ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬
.‫ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن آن ﺗﻤﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻣﺎي آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه‬،‫در ﻣﻮرد ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮي‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ ﺷﻮد‬
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Climate control system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﻦ‬ 3
3 Fan control ‫= ﻓﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش اﺳﺖ‬0 ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
Position 0 = fan turned off. ‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻠﻪ اي ﻓﻦ‬، ‫ = ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬AUT ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
Position AUT = automatic control, stepless ‫ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺮاي‬،‫ﻧﻮاﺣﻲ داراي ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ= ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ دﺳﺘﻲ‬
fan speed.
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﻦ‬
Marked area = manual setting, fixed positions
for fan speed.
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﮔﺮ درب ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﻦ روي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﻦ‬
NOTE! If the cab door is opened at the ‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻓﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ‬،‫ ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬AUT
same time as the fan control is in position .‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
AUT, the fan speed will automatically be
lowered in certain cases.

4 Temperature control ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎ‬ 4

Position upward = max. heating, red marking. ‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﻲ‬، ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ = داراي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ‬
Position left = selection of required ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭼﭗ= اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻣﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
temperature.
‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺮد ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﻲ‬، ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ = داراي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ آﺑﻲ‬
Position downward = max. cooling, blue
marking.

‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎ‬4

5 Air distribution control ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا‬ 5

Position AUT = automatic control.
Position left, towards the symbol = maximum
air recirculation.
Marked area = mixed, air recirculation -
ambient air.
Position right, towards the upper symbol =
maximum ambient air.
Position right = defroster, ventilation nozzles
at the windows open and directed towards the
windows.
‫= ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬AUT ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ روﺑﺮوي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ= ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺮدش ﻣﺠﺪد ﻫﻮاي‬،‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫داﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻮاﺣﻲ داراي ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ = ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﻮاي داﺧﻠﻲ در ﮔﺮدش و‬
‫ﻫﻮاي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا‬5
‫ روﺑﺮوي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ= ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ورود ﻫﻮاي‬،‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ درﻳﭽﻪ‬،‫ روﺑﺮوي ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ= ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬، ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﻨﺎر ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

Ventilation nozzles ‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬

Open the ventilation nozzles and adjust the ‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺟﻬﺖ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
direction of the air to obtain the best possible
air distribution. .‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮاي ﻣﻤﻜﻦ را ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آورﻳﺪ‬

‫ ﺑﺎز‬A
‫ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬B
‫ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻫﻮا‬C

80
Other controls ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
Climate control system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

Adjusting heating and ventilation ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ و ﻫﻮا ﻛﺶ‬

The instructions below are basic recommendations. Each
operator should experiment to achieve the best possible
working environment in the cab, i.e. the right temperature
without a draught.
For the best temperature control in the cab try to have as
many nozzles as possible open.
‫ ﻫﺮ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ‬.‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي اﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻤﻜﻦ را ﺑﺎ دﻣﺎي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ و ﺑﺪون ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮا ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آورد‬
‫ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن درﻳﭽﻪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎ را در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Maximum recirculation set with the air distribution
control
May be used as a setting for reducing the intake of bad-
smelling air. This also reduces the accumulation of dust in the
cab ventilation filters.
If the windows mist up, turn the control to Maximum ambient
air. When required check and clean or replace the cab
ventilation filters, see page 163.
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺮدش ﻣﺠﺪد ﻫﻮاي داﺧﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا‬
‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬.‫اﻳﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ورود ﻫﻮاي ﺑﺪ ﺑﻮ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﻧﺒﺎﺷﺘﮕﻲ ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك در ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را روي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻫﻮاي‬. ‫اﮔﺮ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺨﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
163 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬

.... ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آوردن دﻣﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬

How to achieve ...
... comfortable working temperature: .‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ ƒ
All nozzles fully open. .‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻫﻮاي ﺑﻴﺮون ﮔﺮم اﺳﺖ‬ ƒ
ƒ During warm outdoor climate - air conditioning switched
on. .‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬AUT ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻓﻦ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ƒ
ƒ Fan control in position AUT. .‫ روي دﻣﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬، ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل دﻣﺎي‬ ƒ
ƒ Temperature control set to required temperature.
.‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬AUT ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا روي وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ƒ
ƒ Air distribution control in position AUT.
... demisting all windows:
ƒ The front nozzles directed towards the windscreen. ‫ ﺑﺨﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ‬....
ƒ Floor nozzles under instrument panel closed.
.‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﺟﻠﻮ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬ ƒ
The rear nozzles should be directed towards the rear .‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ زﻳﺮ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ƒ
window / side window.
ƒ The air distribution control in defroster position, which .‫ ﺑﻐﻞ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬/ ‫درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺒﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ƒ
provides: ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ ƒ
- Maximum ambient air. :‫دارﻳﻢ‬
- Maximum heating. ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻫﻮاي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ -
- Maximum cooling, if the machine is equipped with air
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﻲ‬ -
conditioning.
.‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺮد ﻛﻨﻨﺪﮔﻲ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ -
- Highest fan speed.
When the required effect has been reached and the air ‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﻦ‬ -
distribution control is turned back to the required position, the ‫ ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﺪن ﭘﻴﭻ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺮ روي ﺑﺨﺎر ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‬
climate control system returns to selected temperature and
‫ دﻣﺎي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه و ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬،‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬،‫ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
selected fan speed. Open the floor nozzles.
.‫ درﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬. ‫ﻓﻦ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه را اﻋﻤﺎل ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬

.‫از ﻫﻮا ﻛﺶ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Provide for good ventilation
Do not operate the machine for long periods without
ventilation or with the cab fully closed without having the fan
turned on.
‫ﺑﺪون اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﻳﺎ در وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺴﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ و ﻓﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬
‫اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻢ ﺑﻮدن ورود ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
.(‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد )ﻛﻤﺒﻮد اﻛﺴﻴﮋن‬

Poorly ventilated air can cause tiredness (lack of oxygen).

81
Other controls
Climate control system
Rear vision system, black/white
(optional equipment)
The camera, together with the visual display
unit in the cab provide the operator with a
better view rearwards.
The lens on the rear vision camera should be
cleaned with a damp rag when required.
1 On and Off button. When the button is pressed
in, a rearward view is shown on the display
unit provided that the ignition key is in
position 1 (running position).
2 Contrast. Adjustment for weaker or stronger
image.
3 Light control. Adjustment of brighter or darker
image.
4 Light sensor.
5 Exposure button. Improves the image in strong
sun light or when it is dark. The button must
be kept pressed in. Therefore, do not make
any adjustments while operating.
6 Automatic light control takes place if the butto
is not pressed in. If the button is pressed in,
the light control has a fixed setting.
Rear vision system, colour
(optional equipment)
The camera, together with the visual display
unit in the cab provide the operator with a
better view rearwards.
The lens on the rear vision camera should be
cleaned with a damp rag when required.
1 SB / ON. With the button pressed in to the
"ON" position, the monitor is on all the time,
when the ignition key is in running position.
With the button in "SB" position, the monitor
will only be on when the gear selector is in
reverse. At the same time the distance
indicator is shown. This is recommended as
the normal position in order not to disturb
when operating forwards.
2 Switches between rear vision camera and
external signal, e.g. video.
3 Light control. Adjustment of brighter or darker
image.
4 Switches between camera one and camera two
if such a camera is installed.
5 Contrast. Adjustment for weaker or stronger
image.
6 Exposure button. Improves the image in strong
sun light or when it is dark. The button must
be kept pressed in. Therefore, do not make
any adjustments while operating.
7 Colour. Adjusting colour.
8 Light sensor. The sensor registers the brightne
around the monitor and adjusts the light
intensity automatically for best possible
image. Do not cover over the sensor.
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
(‫ ﺳﻴﺎه و ﺳﻔﻴﺪ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬، ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ دﻳﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮي از‬،‫دورﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮي داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم دورﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻘﺐ را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ دﺳﺘﻤﺎل‬
.‫ﻣﺮﻃﻮب ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ روﺷﻦ‬،‫ دﻛﻤﻪ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬1
‫ ﻗﺮار دارد )ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز( ﺑﺎ‬1 ‫و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮدن اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ روي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻮي ﺑﻮدن ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ‬. ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮاﺳﺖ‬ 2
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ روﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎرﻳﻚ ﺗﺮ ﺷﺪن ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﻮر‬ 3
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻧﻮر‬ 4
‫ ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ را در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻧﻮر ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‬، ‫دﻛﻤﻪ آﺷﻜﺎر ﺳﺎزي‬ 5
‫ دﻛﻤﻪ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬.‫آﻓﺘﺎب ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎرﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻬﺒﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ آن ﻫﻴﭻ‬.‫داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺮده ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻧﻮر‬ 6
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ‬.‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺮده ﻧﺸﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﻮر داراي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬،‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‬
(‫ رﻧﮕﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬، ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ دﻳﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮي از‬، ‫دورﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮي داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم ﻟﻨﺰ دورﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻘﺐ را ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ دﺳﺘﻤﺎل‬
.‫ﻣﺮﻃﻮب ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ در‬،‫ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ و ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ‬1
‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت داﺋﻢ‬،‫ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻗﺮار‬SB ‫ وﻗﺘﻲ اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬. ‫روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه در‬،‫دارد‬
‫ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن‬. ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺎ آن ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ در ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دوم ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي دﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎل ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ در ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ اﻳﺠﺎد‬
.‫اﺧﺘﻼل ﻧﺸﻮد‬
‫ اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ دورﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬2
.‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎل ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ وﻳﺪﺋﻮ را ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻋﻮض ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ روﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎرﻳﻚ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻮدن ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ‬،‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻧﻮر‬3
‫ و‬1 ‫ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ را ﺑﻴﻦ دورﺑﻴﻦ‬، ‫ در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد دو دورﺑﻴﻦ‬4
.‫ ﻋﻮض ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬2 ‫دورﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻮي ﺑﻮدن ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ‬، ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮاﺳﺖ‬5
‫ ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ را در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻧﻮر ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‬، ‫ دﻛﻤﻪ آﺷﻜﺎر ﺳﺎزي‬6
‫ دﻛﻤﻪ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬،‫آﻓﺘﺎب ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎرﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻬﺒﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ آن ﻫﻴﭻ‬. ‫داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺮده ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ رﻧﮓ‬،‫ رﻧﮓ‬7
‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻨﺴﻮر روﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ اﻃﺮاف ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ را ﺛﺒﺖ‬،‫ ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻧﻮر‬8
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺷﺪت ﻧﻮر را ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر‬
‫ روي اﻳﻦ‬. ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﺎوﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر را ﻧﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
82
Operating instructions
Operating instructions
This chapter contains rules which must be followed to make
working with the machine safe. However, these rules do not
relieve the operator from following laws or other national
regulations for traffic safety, industrial safety and labour
welfare.
To avoid the risk of accidents, alertness, judgement and
respect for applicable safety regulations is a condition.
Running-in instructions
During the first 100 hours, the machine should be operated
with particularly great care. During the running-in period it is
important to check oil and fluid levels often.
Wheel bolts should be check-tightened after eight hours
operation, see page.171
Engine protection - Software
The function informs the operator and limits the engine speed
and torque and also the travelling speed of the machine in
order to prevent any engine damage. Engine shutdown does
not take place until the speed has dropped to below 2 km/h
(1.2 mph). This makes it possible always to be able to move
the machine away from dangerous situations before engine
shutdown takes place.
The function is monitored by the engine control unit E-ECU
and depending on which component is causing the alarm any
of the following functions will be activated:
- reduction of engine torque
- limiting engine speed
- limiting travelling speed of machine
- engine shutdown
Auto engine shutoff
(optional equipment)
Engine shutoff takes place after a predetermined time.
The time is set with VCADS Pro service tool.
The conditions required for engine shutoff to take place are
that:
- The machine is stationary
- The engine is running at low idling
- The gear selector is in neutral position
- The hand-throttle is not actuated
When the conditions have been met and there is one minute
left of the predetermined time, a message is shown on the
display unit.
The count-down for the engine shutoff can then be interrupted
by actuating the accelerator pedal, hand throttle or gear
selector control.
When automatic engine shutoff has taken place:
- The parking brake is applied
- The ignition key remains in position 1, running position
Lights or other connected current consuming devices remain
connected
83
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ اﻟﺒﺘﻪ اﻳﻦ‬. ‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺣﺎوي ﻗﻮاﻋﺪي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را اﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻮاﻋﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮد ﻛﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر از ﭘﻴﺮوي از ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ و ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻛﺸﻮري در ﻣﻮرد اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
.‫ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ و آﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻐﻠﻲ ﻣﺒﺮا ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ و اﺣﺘﺮام ﺑﻪ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬،‫ ﻫﻮﺷﻴﺎري‬،‫ﺷﺮط اﺟﺘﻨﺎب از ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮوز ﺳﻮاﻧﺢ‬
‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ آب ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر زﻳﺎدي‬
‫ در زﻣﺎن آب ﺑﻨﺪي‬.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط زﻳﺎدي ﻛﺮد‬، ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ اول ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬100 ‫در ﻃﻮل‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺮراً ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻻت را ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﭘﺲ از ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﻫﺸﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻔﺘﻲ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬171
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ از ﻣﻮﺗﻮر – ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰاري‬
‫ اﻃﻼع رﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر و ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﺮدن دور و ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و‬، ‫وﻇﻴﻔﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ‬
2 km/h (1.2 mph) ‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ آن ﺑﻪ زﻳﺮ‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﻫﻤﻮاره اﻣﻜﺎن دور ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬.‫ اﺗﻔﺎق ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ اﻓﺘﺎد‬،‫ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ واﺣﺪ‬.‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك را ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ در ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ وﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺪام ﺟﺰء ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮوز ﺧﻄﺮ‬E-ECU ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
:‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﻋﻤﺎل ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ -
‫ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﺮدن دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ -
‫ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﺮدن ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ -
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ -
(‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﭘﺲ از ﮔﺬﺷﺖ زﻣﺎن از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اي ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬VCADS Pro ‫اﻳﻦ زﻣﺎن ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﺑﺰار ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
:‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ از‬
‫ﺑﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ -
.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ دور در ﺟﺎي ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ‬ -
.‫دﺳﺘﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ -
‫ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬ -
‫ ﺑﺮ‬، ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﻗﺮار ﺷﺪه و ﻳﻚ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن زﻣﺎن از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬
‫روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﻐﺎم ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻌﺪ از آن ﺷﻤﺎرش ﻣﻌﻜﻮس را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻮد‬،‫ ﮔﺎز دﺳﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ دﺳﺘﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه‬، ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز‬
:‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر رخ دﻫﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ درﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ -
.‫ )ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز(ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‬1 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش و روﺷﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ -
.‫ روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺼﺮف ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺮق‬ -
Operating instructions
Safety rules when operating
Safety rules when
operating
Operator duties
ƒ The machine operator must operate the
machine in such a way that the risk of
accidents is minimised both for the
operator, other road users and persons
present at the work site.
ƒ The machine operator must be
thoroughly familiar with how to operate
and maintain the machine and should
preferably undergo required training on
the machine.
ƒ The machine operator must follow the
rules and recommendations given in the
Operator's Manual, but also pay attention
to any statutory and national regulations
or specific requirements or risks that
apply at the work site.
ƒ The machine operator must be
thoroughly rested and must never operate
the machine under the influence of
alcohol, medicine or other drugs.
The machine operator is responsible
for the load of the machine both when
travelling on public roads as well as when
working on site.
- There must be no risk of the load falling off
while operating.
- Refuse to take a load which is an obvious safet
risk.
- Respect the rated load capacity of the machine
Note the effect of varying distances to the
centre of gravity and the effect of additional
units.
ƒ The machine operator must be in charge
of the working area of the machine.
- Prevent persons from walking or standing unde
raised lifting arms, unless they have been
made safe or supported.
- Prevent persons from entering or remaining in
the danger area, i.e. the area around the
machine and at least 7 m (23 ft) beyond the
maximum reach of the attachment. The
operator may allow a person to remain in the
danger area, but should then observe caution
and operate the machine only when the person
is visible or has given clear indications of
where he or she is.
ƒ The machine operator may only allow an
instructor on board, if there is an
approved passenger seat.
Accidents
Accidents and also incidents should
be reported to the site management
immediately.
ƒ If possible leave the machine in position.
ƒ Only take necessary action so as to reduce
the effect of damage, especially personal
injuries. Avoid action which may make an
investigation more difficult.
Wait for further instructions from the site
management.
WARNING!
An operator of and the management
for construction machine are
responsidle for the working area of
the machine and must turn away
any person who is not authorized to
be there when the machine is
operating.
The operator must keep a good look-
out forwards and rearwards to avoid
the risk of running into persons or
objects.
‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻣﺪﻳﺮت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮل ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺣﻀﻮر‬
‫اﻓﺮاد ﻣﺘﻔﺮﻗﻪ در آﻧﺠﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ‬
‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻫﻤﻮاره ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮاﻏﺐ ﺟﻠﻮ و‬.‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آورﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ از ﺑﺮﺧﻮرد ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ اﻓﺮاد و‬
.‫اﺷﻴﺎء ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ داﻳﺮه اي را ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك دور ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎر‬
‫( ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬23 ft) 7m ‫ﺷﻌﺎع‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
‫وﻇﺎﻳﻒ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮوز‬ ƒ
‫ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﺟﺎده اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ‬،‫ﺳﺎﻧﺤﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺧﻮد او‬
‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ و ﻛﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎر ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
.‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮه ﻛﺎر و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﺷﻨﺎ‬ ƒ
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً آﻣﻮزش ﻫﺎي ﻻزم را روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ دﻳﺪه‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از دﺳﺘﻮرات و ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه در‬ ƒ
‫ وﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ و‬.‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻛﺸﻮري و ﻳﺎ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت و ﺧﻄﺮات ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎر‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً آﻣﺎده و ﺳﺮ ﺣﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬ ƒ
‫ دارو و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺨﺪر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر‬،‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ اﻟﻜﻞ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر در ﻗﺒﺎل ﺑﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي‬ ƒ
.‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ و ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺌﻮل اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﻘﻮط ﺑﺎر ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻳﺪ‬ -
‫از ﭘﺬﻳﺮش ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎً ﺧﻄﺮات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ‬ -
.‫ﻫﻤﺮاه دارﻧﺪ ﺧﻮد داري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ اﺛﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎر روي‬.‫ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎر ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺟﺮم و اﺛﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در رأس ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ -
‫از راه رﻓﺘﻦ و اﻳﺴﺘﺎدن اﺷﺨﺎص زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ‬ -
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ اﺷﺨﺎص ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫از ورود و اﺳﺘﻘﺮار اﻓﺮاد در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬ -
‫ از ﻧﻮاﺣﻲ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ‬7 m(23 ft) ‫اي ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎع‬
‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ‬. ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ آورﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ اﺟﺎزه اﺳﺘﻘﺮار در ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك را‬
‫ﺑﺪﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﻛﻨﺪ و ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫را ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر اﻧﺪازد ﻛﻪ آن ﻓﺮد در ﻣﺤﺪوده دﻳﺪ او ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ واﺿﺤﻲ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ اﺳﺘﻘﺮار آن ﻓﺮد‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺳﺮﻧﺸﻴﻦ در ﻛﻨﺎر ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬ ƒ
‫ وي ﺗﻨﻬﺎ اﺟﺎزه دارد ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺑﻲ را ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ‬،‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
.‫ﺧﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮاﻧﺢ‬
‫ﺣﻮادث و ﺳﻮاﻧﺢ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻮراً ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر اﻃﻼع‬ ƒ
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را در ﻫﻤﺎن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺮك‬ ƒ
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﺿﺮوري را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﺛﺮات آﺳﻴﺐ‬ ƒ
‫دﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺟﺮاﺣﺎت اﺷﺨﺎص را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬
‫ از اﻧﺠﺎم اﻗﺪاﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ و ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ را ﻣﺸﻜﻞ‬. ‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﭘﺮﻫﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫در اﻧﺘﻈﺎر دﺳﺘﻮرات ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
84
 Operating instructions
Safety rules when operating
Machine operator safety
ƒ The machine must be operational, i.e.
faults which can cause accidents must be
rectified.
ƒ Suitable clothing for safe handling and a
hard hat should be worn.
ƒ A loose mobile telephone must not be
used, as it may interfere with important
electronics. The mobile telephone must
be connected to the electrical system of
the machine and have a fixed external
aerial installed according to the
instructions of the manufacturer.
Always sit in the operator seat when
starting the engine/machine.
ƒ Keep your hands away from areas where
there is a risk of crushing, e.g. covers,
door and window.
Always use the lap type seat belt or
the three-point belt, if the machine is
equipped with such a belt.
ƒ Use steps and handholds when entering
or leaving the machine. Use the three-
point grip, i.e. two hands and one foot or
two feet and one hand. Always face the
machine - do not jump!
ƒ The door must be closed.
ƒ Check that the attachment is properly
attached and locked.
ƒ The vibration (shaking) which arises
when operating may be harmful to the
operator. Reduce this by:
adjusting the seat and tightening the seal belt.
picking the smoothest operating surface for the
machine (levelling the surface when
necessary).
adapting the travelling speed.
ƒ The cab is for the protection of the
machine operator and it meets the
requirements for Roll Over Protective
Structures according to the testing
standard "ROPS". Therefore, hold firmly
onto the steering wheel if the machine
should roll over - Do not jump!
The cab is also designed to meet the
requirements for falling objects, the weight of
which agrees with testing methods according
to "FOPS".
ƒ The cab has two emergency exits, the
door and the right side window.
ƒ Only walk and stand on surfaces which
have slip protection.
ƒ Do not enter or leave the machine during
a thunderstorm.
If you are outside the machine, keep a good
distance away from the machine until the
thunderstorm has passed.
- If you are inside the cab, stay there with t
machine stationary until the thunderstorm has
passed. Do not touch any controls or anything
made of metal.
85
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﺎﻳﺼﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ‬ ƒ
.‫ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺮف ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮوز ﺳﺎﻧﺤﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﺎس ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﻼه‬ ƒ
.‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫از ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺟﺪا ﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد ﭼﻮن ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬ ƒ
‫اﻳﺠﺎد اﺧﺘﻼل در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻬﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬.‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و داراي ﻳﻚ آﻧﺘﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ روي ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬/ ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ ƒ
.‫ﺑﻨﺸﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫دﺳﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻮد را از ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ƒ
.‫ در و ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻟﻪ ﺷﺪن وﺟﻮد دارد ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎورﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ از ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬ ƒ
.‫اي )در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ آن ﻣﺠﻬﺰ اﺳﺖ( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ورود ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮوج از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه ﻫﺎ و ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ƒ
‫ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اي ﻳﻌﻨﻲ دو دﺳﺖ‬3 ‫ از وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫و ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ دﺳﺖ و دو ﭘﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻮاره رو ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻴﺮون ﻧﭙﺮﻳﺪ‬.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫در ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ƒ
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ وﺻﻞ و ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه‬ ƒ
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت )ﻟﺮزش ﻫﺎ( اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ƒ
‫ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻣﻴﺘﻮان ﺑﻪ‬. ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻀﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ داد‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ و ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي آن‬ -
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻫﻤﻮارﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )ﺻﺎف‬ -
(‫ﻛﺮدن زﻣﻴﻦ در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ دادن ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ -
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﺳﺎزه اي‬ ƒ
‫ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭼﭗ ﻛﺮدن را ﻃﺒﻖ‬
.‫« دارا ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ROPS» ‫آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﺎت اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ‬، ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ در ﺻﻮرت ﭼﭗ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
!‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن را ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ – ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻴﺮون ﻧﭙﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻘﻮط اﺷﻴﺎء ﻛﻪ وزن‬ ƒ
‫ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ را دارا‬FOPS ‫آﻧﻬﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ روش ﻫﺎي ﺗﺴﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ داراي دو ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻳﻜﻲ در و دﻳﮕﺮي‬ ƒ
.‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﺑﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ روي ﺳﻄﻮﺣﻲ راه ﺑﺮوﻳﺪ و ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻟﻐﺰش‬ ƒ
.‫وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وارد ﻳﺎ از آن ﺧﺎرج‬،‫در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم رﻋﺪ و ﺑﺮق‬ ƒ
‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬ .‫ﻧﺸﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ اﻳﺴﺘﺎدن ﺑﺮ روي ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ‫ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ دور‬،‫اﮔﺮ در ﺧﺎرج از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دارﻳﺪ‬ -
.‫از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ رﻋﺪ و ﺑﺮق ﺗﻤﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﭘﻠﻪ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎي‬،‫ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ‬،‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ )ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫اﮔﺮ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﺎن ﺟﺎ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻴﺪ و ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻫﻢ‬ -
‫( ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه دﻳﮕﺮي‬...‫ﺗﺨﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و‬
‫ ﻫﻴﭻ‬.‫ﺑﺪون ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ رﻋﺪ و ﺑﺮق ﺗﻤﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﺪم ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ‬
.‫ﻳﻚ از اﺑﺰارﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و اﺷﻴﺎي ﻓﻠﺰي را ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد ﻣﻤﻨﻮع اﺳﺖ‬
 Operating instructions
Safety rules when operating
Working within dangerous areas
Working within areas where there are
pipes, power lines or cables
ƒ It is the duty of the employer to know
and mark the position of pipes for gas,
water, sewage or power lines or cables
on the work site and to inform the
operator about these. Failure to do so
may have legal consequences. When
required, local authorities and/or
communication and power companies
should be contacted regarding maps,
drawings and advice.
ƒ Cables and power lines must be protected
against damage in a suitable way.
Electric cables should, if possible, have
the power turned off.
ƒ Information about where the gas and
water can be turned off should be made
available, so that they can be quickly
turned off, if they are ruptured.
NOTE! If digging has to be carried out
very close to cables, pipes or overhead
wires, it may be necessary to dig by hand.
High voltage overhead power line
Observe great care when working in the
proximity of high voltage overhead power
lines, as electrical flash-over may damage the
machine and injure the operator at fairly great
distances from the power line. Bear the
following in mind:
The distance sideways between machine and
power line must be:
at least 2 m (6.5 ft) in case of low voltage.
4 m (13 ft) in case of high voltage of at the most
40 kV (line normally supported on fixed
insulators).
6 m (20 ft) in case of high voltage above 40 kV
(line normally carried on suspended
insulators).
The distance vertically between machine and
overhead power line must be:
at least 2 m (6.5 ft) in case of low voltage.
4 m (13 ft) in case of high voltage.
The safety distances to a load must also be
kept. Limiting the lifting height with the
boom kick-out may be required. The boom
kick-out (lifting height) may have to be
adjusted.
Operating under ground
ƒ Special equipment, e.g. certified engine
is required within EU and EEA
countries. Talk to your dealer.
Working in confined areas
ƒ Check that there is sufficient room for
machine and load.
ƒ Move slowly.
ƒ Drive in the middle of a doorway which
is too narrow to allow two machines to
meet.
Working near danger areas
ƒ Observe great care near marked danger
areas.
Do not operate too close to the edge
of a quay, ramp etc.
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
‫ﻛﺎر در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك‬
‫ﻛﺎر در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺑﺮق‬
.‫وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ آب و‬،‫اﻳﻦ وﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ از ﻣﺤﻞ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺎز‬ ƒ
‫ﻓﺎﺿﻼب و ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺑﺮق در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر‬
‫اﻃﻼع داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و آن ﻫﺎ را ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬاري ﻛﻨﺪ و اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫ ﻋﻮاﻗﺐ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ را‬،‫ ﻗﺼﻮر در اﻧﺠﺎم اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر‬. ‫را ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ‬. ‫در ﭘﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻤﺎت و اﺑﺰارﻫﺎي ﻻزم ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ و ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬،
.‫ﻫﺎي ارﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎت و ﺑﺮق رﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﺑﺮق ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ از‬ ƒ
‫ در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮق ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬.‫آﺳﻴﺐ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻧﺤﻮه ﻗﻄﻊ ﮔﺎز و آب اﻃﻼع داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ در‬ ƒ
.‫ﺻﻮرت ﺷﻜﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﮔﺮ ﺣﻔﺎري را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﭼﺎر ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬.‫ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮاﻳﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم داد‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻲ ﺣﻔﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮط ﺑﺮق ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﻮي ﻫﻮاﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﻣﺠﺎورت ﺧﻄﻮط ﺑﺮق ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﻮي ﻫﻮاﻳﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر‬
‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﭼﻮن از ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً دور ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫رخ دﻫﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﺳﻴﺐ وارد ﻛﺮده و اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر را ﻣﺠﺮوح ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ را در ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
:‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﻮط ﺑﺮق از ﺑﻐﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬2m (6.5 ft) ‫در ﻣﻮرد وﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬ -
ً‫ )ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ‬40 kV ‫در ﻣﻮرد وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ‬ -
.‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬13 ft)4m، (‫داراي ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
ً‫ )ﺧﻄﻮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ‬40 kV ‫در ﻣﻮرد وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬ -
.‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬20 ft)6m، (‫روي ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺳﻮار ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
:‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺧﻄﻮط ﺑﺮق ﻫﻮاﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬6.5 ft) 2 m‫در ﻣﻮرد وﻟﺘﺎژ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬ -
.‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬13 ft) 4 m‫در ﻣﻮرد وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬ -
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺪود‬.‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺎر را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم )ارﺗﻔﺎع‬.‫ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮي ( اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﺎر در زﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات وﻳﮋه ﻣﺜﻞ‬EEA,EU ‫در ﻛﺸﻮرﻫﺎي ﻋﻀﻮ‬ ƒ
.‫ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻣﺸﻮرت ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬. ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎر در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺪود‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻀﺎي ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺑﺎر وﺟﻮد‬
.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻛﻢ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
‫در راﻫﺮوﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻘﺪري ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻋﺒﻮر‬ ƒ
.‫ از وﺳﻂ راﻫﺮو ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫دو ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺎر در ﻣﺠﺎورت ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك‬
‫ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر‬،‫ƒ در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﮔﺬاري ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ‬....‫ ﺳﺮاﺷﻴﺒﻲ و‬،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ اﺳﻜﻠﻪ‬ ƒ
.‫ﻧﺸﻮﻳﺪ‬
86
Operating instructions
Safety rules when operating
Travelling and operating
(working) on a public road
As a machine operator you are considered to
be a road user and therefore required to know
and follow local regulations and national
traffic regulations.
It is important to bear in mind that the
machine, in comparison with the rest of the
traffic, is a slow moving and wide vehicle,
which may cause obstruction. Bear this in
mind and pay attention to the traffic behind
you. Facilitate overtaking.
The use of SMV-plate (Slow Moving
Vehicle) is recommended. It should be placed
in a position at the rear on the machine where
it is clearly seen, not inside the rear window
or any other window. It should be positioned
at a height of 0.6-1.8 m (2-6 ft) above the
ground, measured from the lower edge of the
plate.
Travelling on public road
ƒ The attachment should be empty,
lowered to the carry position (30-40 cm
= 12-16 inches above the ground) and
tilted fully backward. The front end of
the material handling arm must be
marked with a red flag.
ƒ Lock the control levers with the control
lever lockout.
ƒ All working lamps and any rotating
warning beacon should be switched off.
ƒ Hazard flashers must not be used.
ƒ Attachments and buckets which obscure
the vision must not be used.
ƒ Make sure that large attachments/buckets
do not obscure the travelling lights.
According to traffic regulations the area
in front of the machine must be
sufficiently illuminated and visible.
ƒ Additional attachments such as buckets,
spades and iron bars must be thoroughly
secured with tensioning straps or chains.
If a trailer is to be pulled behind the
machine, follow national laws and
regulations, e.g. regarding requirements as to
brakes, steering, lights, approved towing
devices and the direction of forces permitted
on the towing devices on both machine and
trailer.
Operating (working) on a public road
ƒ Road signs, traffic restricting
arrangements and other safety devices,
which may be required when considering
traffic speed and intensity or other local
conditions, must be used.
ƒ When moving a machine with a
suspended load, special attention must be
observed. When required, a signal man
must be used.
ƒ Rotating warning beacon may be used:
- on vehicle during road maintenance work, e.g.
snow clearing
- on attached or connected implement, which is
wider than the vehicle itself.
- when the vehicle constitutes a hindrance or
danger to other traffic
- when working on or by the side of the
roadway.
87
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮدن و ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻨﺪه از ﺟﺎده‬، ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻮب ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻳﺪ و ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ از ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ و ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ‬
.‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ و راﻧﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺸﻮري آﮔﺎه ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ در ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در‬
‫ ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ رو و ﻋﺮﻳﺾ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬، ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ ﭘﺲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ راه را ﺳﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺧﻮدروﻫﺎ‬.‫ﺗﺮاﻓﻴﻚ ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻣﺪه در ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﺧﻮد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫اﺟﺎزه ﺳﺒﻘﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ آﺳﺎن را ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ‬.‫ )وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ رو( ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬SMV ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﭘﻼك‬
‫ﭘﻼك را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎدﮔﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
.‫دﻳﺪن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي‬.‫آن را ﭘﺸﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ ﻧﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬
‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪار از‬2-6 ft)0.6-1.8 m ‫اﻳﻦ ﭘﻼك از زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﭘﻼك اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫( ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬CDC) ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
.‫– از ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫( اﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬30-40 cm = 12-16) .‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬.‫از ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ( و آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﺑﺎزو ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﭼﻢ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ وﺻﻞ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ƒ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻟﻴﻮر‬
‫ƒ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻛﺎر و ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه را‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ از ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺸﻤﻚ زن اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ )ﻓﻼﺷﺮﻫﺎ( ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ و ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ را ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ دﻳﺪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرگ‬
‫ ﻃﺒﻖ‬.‫ﺟﻠﻮي ﻧﻮر ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺣﺮﻛﺖ را ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ و راﻧﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻓﻀﺎي ﺟﻠﻮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روﺷﻦ و‬
.‫داراي دﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي آﻫﻨﻲ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
.‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ از ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ و ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ‬،‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﻠﺮ را ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
،‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎ‬، ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬،‫ﻛﺸﻮري ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬
‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻜﺴﻞ و ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺠﺎز اﻋﻤﺎل ﻧﻴﺮوي ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
.‫ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺗﺮﻳﻠﺮ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن در ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎده ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎن درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻮدن ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ و ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺮاﻓﻴﻚ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
‫ ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪات ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗﺮاﻓﻴﻚ و‬،‫ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺟﺎده‬
.‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻗﺖ و‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ وﻳﮋه اي داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم از راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻳﻚ‬
.‫ﻧﻔﺮ ﻛﻪ در ﺑﻴﺮون از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻳﺴﺘﺎده اﺳﺖ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
:‫ƒ ﭼﺮاغ ﮔﺮدان اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ‬
ً‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﺑﺎزﺳﺎزي ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎ ﻣﺜﻼ‬ -
.‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺮف روﺑﻲ ﺟﺎده ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ﺑﺮ روي ادوات ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪه و اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ‬ -
‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎي آﻧﻬﺎ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ اﻳﺠﺎد‬ -
.‫ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در داﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺎر ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎن‬-
 Operating instructions
Measures before operating
Measures before operating
Carry out daily service, see page175. (Make sure that the
freezing point of the coolant is sufficiently low in cold
weather and that the lubricating oil is intended for winter
use.)
Clean/scrape the windows.
Check that there are no faulty/loose parts or leaks which can
cause damage.
Check that the battery disconnect switch is switched on.
Check that the frame joint lock has been disconnected.
Check that the wheels are not blocked.
Check that engine and access covers are closed and that the
radiator casing is closed and secured.
Check that there are no persons in the vicinity of the machine,
see page 84
Adjust the operator seat (see page74) and the steering wheel, if
the machine is equipped with this function, on page 70
0 Fasten the lap type seat belt or the three-point belt, if the
machine is equipped with such a belt.
11 Check that there is sufficient fuel in the tank.
After operating
ƒ Fill the fuel tank, as this will counteract the formation of
condensation water.
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬
‫)اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ در‬.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬175 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ روزاﻧﻪ را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬1
‫ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اﻧﺠﻤﺎد آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪو روﻏﻦ رواﻧﻜﺎري‬،‫ﻫﻮاي ﺳﺮد‬
.(‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﻓﺼﻞ زﻣﺴﺘﺎن در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ را ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2
‫ ﺷﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ و ﻧﺸﺘﻲ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ‬/ ‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ اي ﻣﻌﻴﻮب‬3
.‫آﺳﻴﺒﻲ ﺑﻮﺟﻮد ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬4
.‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ درﮔﻴﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬5
.‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺪود ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬6
‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﭘﻮت و ﻛﺎورﻫﺎي دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺑﺴﺘﻪ و‬7
.‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬84 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬8
‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ( و ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن را ﻫﻢ اﮔﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬74 ‫ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬9
.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ را دارد ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اي )در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ آن‬10
.‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ در ﺑﺎك وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬11
‫ﭘﺲ از ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﻛﺎر‬
‫ ﭼﻮن ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ از ﺷﻜﻞ ﮔﻴﺮي آب ﺣﺎﺻﻞ از ﻣﻴﻌﺎن‬، ‫ƒ ﺑﺎك ﺳﻮﺧﺖ را ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
88
 Operating instructions
Starting engine
Starting engine
WARNING!
The engine must only be stared with the
ignition switch in the cab.
If the machine is equipped with anti-theft
device, see page 65).
Place the gear selector to neutral.
Turn the key in the ignition switch to running
position (1) so that a system test can take
place, the duration of which is 4-5 seconds.
At the same time check that all lamps light up
and that the gauges indicate.
Turn the ignition key to starting position (2). If
the engine does not start, turn the key back to
the "0" position, before making a new starting
attempt.
Check that all control and warning lamps are
extinguished.
Check that the attachment is securely fastened
to the machine by pressing it against the
ground.
Sound the horn.
Release the parking brake.
Select gear position and increase the engine
speed.
Starting engine in cold weather
The preheating function is controlled by the
engine ECU.
Turn the ignition key to running position (1).
If there is a need of heating, the function will be
activated automatically.
A symbol lights up on the display unit that
shows that the preheating is connected, see
page 37
4 When the symbol is extinguished, the engine
can be started by turning the ignition key to
starting position (2).
ƒ Leave the engine running at low idling
for 30 seconds so that the oil in the
engine, transmission, hydraulic system
and axles has warmed up and become
sufficiently fluid to provide proper
lubrication.
ƒ To race the engine immediately after it
has been started may also endanger the
lubrication and cooling of the
turbocharger with great risk of bearing
seizure as a consequence.
89
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ روﺷﻦ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺿﺪ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ اﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ راﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬65
.‫ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬1
1 ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ را داﺧﻞ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و آن را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬2
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬4-5 ً‫)ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز ( ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪودا‬
.‫ﻃﻮل ﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ در ﻫﻤﻴﻦ زﻣﺎن ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ در‬3
.‫ﭘﺎﻧﻞ روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﮔﻴﺞ ﻫﺎ )درﺟﻪ ﻫﺎ( ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﺳﺘﺎرت زدن ﻗﺮار‬2 ‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬4
‫ ﭘﻴﺶ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ‬،‫ اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ روﺷﻦ ﻧﺸﺪ‬.‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ و‬0 ‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬، ‫اﺳﺘﺎرت ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﭙﺲ دوﺑﺎره اﺳﺘﺎرت ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي‬5
.‫ﻫﺸﺪاري و ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪه‬6
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﻮق را ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪا درآورﻳﺪ‬7
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را آزاد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬8
.‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ و دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬9
‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در ﻫﻮاي ﺳﺮد‬
.‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ECU ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﺮم ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ )ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز( ﻗﺮار‬1 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ 1
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﺮم ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ 2
.‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ 3
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﺮم ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬37
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ‬، ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪ‬ 4
‫ اﺳﺘﺎرت زده و ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را‬2 ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪن ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺎ دور در ﺟﺎي ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﺎر‬30 ‫ƒ اﺟﺎزه دﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ و‬،‫ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ روﻏﻦ داﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪه و ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
.‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ دور‬، ‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ اﻓﺘﺎدن روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري و‬،‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ و در ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ آن ﺧﻄﺮ ﮔﺮﻳﭙﺎژ ﻛﺮدن‬
.‫ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﺮم ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺑﺮاي روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن )ﻣﺜﻞ اﺗﺮ ( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Operating instructions
Gear shifting
Gear shifting
Manual gear shifting
ƒ Select position on the gear
shifting mode selector, see page 91
ƒ Select a suitable gear by turning the gear
selector control to the required gear
position and then select travelling
direction forward or rearward.
Directional gear
Lever in position N = Neutral
Lever in position F = Operating forward
Lever in position R = Operating rearward
Warning
The selector control must, for reasons of
traffic safety, under no circumstances be
moved to neutral when operating downhill -
no engine braking effect.
Never leave the machine with the selector in
forward or reverse while the engine is running
- there is a risk that the machine may begin to
move.
When changing from forward to reverse or
vice versa, the speed of the machine and of
the engine should be reduced as much as
possible, particularly if the machine is
working on firm ground.
Do not shift between Forward and Reverse at
higher speeds than 2nd gear.
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه دﺳﺘﻲ‬
،‫ƒ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ را روي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺮ ﻣﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
. ‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬91 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ اﺑﺘﺪا دﻧﺪه ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮد و‬، ‫ƒ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
.‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ دﻧﺪه‬
‫= ﺧﻼص‬N ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫= ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ‬F ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫= ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ‬R ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ دﺳﺘﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب‬، ‫ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻮر اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬.‫دﻧﺪه ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
.‫ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﻧﺠﺎم ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روﺷﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ‬.‫ ﺗﺮك ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه از وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬، ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻫﻴﺪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ روي زﻣﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ وﻋﻘﺐ را ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
.‫ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬2 ‫ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺳﺮﻋﺖ دﻧﺪه‬
90
Operating instructions
Gear shifting
Automatic shifting (APS)
(Gear selector in speed gear position 3 or 4)
The shift modulation allows the machine
operator to select different automatic shifting
programmes (modes) depending on the
operating conditions.
Operating in the APS position
ƒ Turn the gear selector control to gear
position 3 or 4.
ƒ Select operating programme with the
mode selector (position AUTO is
recommended)
ƒ Select directional gear.
ƒ Accelerate and the machine will start in
2nd gear (basic gear). If the machine is
already moving, it will engage 3rd gear
automatically.
ƒ Up- and downshifts are made between
2nd - 3rd - 4th gears forward, and
between 2nd - 3rd - 4th gears rearwards.
ƒ When the direction of travel has been
changed the machine will start off in 2nd
gear.
Downshifting to 1st gear, see "Fully
automatic downshifting" page 24or "Kick-
down function" on page 92
Positions L and M
Position "L" means that shifting will take
place at low engine speeds.
ƒ Position "M" means that shifting will
take place at slightly higher engine
speeds.
ƒ With the accelerator fully depressed,
upshifting takes place according to
position "H".
The best utilisation is obtained if the
accelerator is not depressed fully, as the
difference in upshifting speed between the
different modes (L, M and H) will be distinct.
ƒ Results in lower fuel consumption and
lower noise level.
Position H
ƒ The machine does not shift until higher
engine and travelling speeds have been
reached.
ƒ Preferably used in cases where the
machine changes gear when operating
uphill or when the rolling resistance is
great.
Position AUTO
ƒ The machine itself selects APS mode
according to current operating condition
to achieve best comfort and economy.
Position
ƒ After starting gear shifting is done
manually, see page 90.
The machine starts and operates in the selected
gear position. Upshifts and downshifts on the
move are controlled manually.
91
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
(APS)‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
(4 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬3 ‫)دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﻳﻦ اﺟﺎزه را ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎي )ﻣﻮدﻫﺎي( ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوﺗﻲ را ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﺪ‬
APS ‫ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬4 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬3 ‫ƒ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه را ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ روي دﻧﺪه‬
‫ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﺎري را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ƒ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺮ ﻣﺪ‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺮ ﻣﺪ‬ (‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬AUTO ‫)وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ƒ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ )دﻧﺪه ﭘﺎﻳﻪ( ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬2 ‫ƒ ﮔﺎز دﻫﻴﺪ و ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از ﻗﺒﻞ در ﺣﺎل ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر‬.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‬
.‫ را درﮔﻴﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‬3 ‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ دﻧﺪه‬
4‫ و‬3 ‫ و‬2 ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي‬4‫ و‬3 ‫ و‬2 ‫ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻋﻘﺐ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ وﻗﺘﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻋﻮض ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ)از ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ‬2 ‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه‬،(‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ »دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬، 1 ‫ƒ ﺑﺮاي دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ و رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬
«‫ ﻳﺎ »ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬24 ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ« در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬92 ‫در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
M ‫ و‬L ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬
‫« ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه از دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬L» ‫ƒ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫« ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه از دور‬M» ‫ƒ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻛﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬،‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز را ﺗﺎ آﺧﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫« اﻧﺠﺎم ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬H» ‫ﻃﺒﻖ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺮه وري زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭘﺪال ﮔﺎز ﺗﺎ‬
‫آﺧﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﻧﺸﻮد و ﺗﻔﺎوت ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫( آﺷﻜﺎر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬L,M.H) ‫ﻣﻮدﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ƒ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ آن ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺳﺮ و ﺻﺪا‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺑﻮد‬
H ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ و دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮي‬
.‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬،‫ﻧﺮﺳﺪ‬
‫ƒ از اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮد ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺳﺮ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﻏﻠﺘﺸﻲ زﻳﺎد اﺳﺖ‬
AUTO ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ را ﻃﺒﻖ‬APS ‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻮد‬
‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻃﻮري اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ راﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ و‬
.‫اﻗﺘﺼﺎدي ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم‬،‫ƒ ﭘﺲ از روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬90 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ‬، ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬. ‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
Operating instructions
Gear shifting
Kick-down function
Kick-down is obtained, if the mode selector is
within the automatic range, the gear selector
control is in either of positions 2, 3, or 4 and
either of the kick-down buttons is actuated.
ƒ When the kick-down button is pressed,
1st gear will be engaged if the travelling
speed already is below 8 km/h (6.2 mph)
or if the speed drops below 8 km/h (6.2
mph) within 8 seconds after the button
was depressed.
ƒ When 1st gear has been engaged the
buzzer will give off one short pip.
ƒ 1st gear will remain engaged unless the
kick-down function switch is actuated a
second time or if the engine speed
becomes extremely high (when the
switch is actuated a second time, 2nd
gear will be engaged).
ƒ If the direction of travel is changed, the
machine will start off in 2nd gear,
provided automatic shifting is selected.
NOTE! If the machine, as optional extra, is
equipped with lever steering (CDC) the
kick-down function is also available on the
arm rest.
Engine braking /
downshifting
With the aid of the button for engine braking /
downshifting it is possible to obtain an
immediate downshift one or two steps or to
prevent unwanted upshifting. In this way the
warming up of the axle oil is reduced.
ƒ One press of the button at higher speeds,
will result in a downshifting from 4th to
3rd gear.
ƒ One further press of the button at a lower
speed, will result in a downshifting to
2nd gear.
ƒ If the switch is kept in the pressed-in
position, upshifting to the next higher
gear is prevented, which can be used
when operating downhill or when
approaching a vehicle which is to be
loaded.
NOTE! If certain critical rotational speeds
and travelling speeds are exceeded,
upshifting takes place.
ƒ Under these circumstances, lower the
travelling speed, or select a higher gear
to reduce the engine speed.
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر ﻣﻮد در ﻳﻜﻲ از‬
‫ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه در ﻳﻜﻲ‬، ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻳﻜﻲ از دﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎي‬4 ‫ و‬3 ‫ و‬2 ‫از دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي‬
.‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻧﻴﺰ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ‬،‫ƒ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻛﻤﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﺸﺮده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬6.2 mph) 8km/h ‫ﻛﻪ از ﻗﺒﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ زﻳﺮ‬
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺲ از ﻓﺸﺮدن دﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬8 ‫ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ در ﻋﺮض‬
‫ درﮔﻴﺮ‬1 ‫ دﻧﺪه‬،‫( ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬6.2 mph)8km/h ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ زﻳﺮ‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﻳﻚ ﺗﻚ ﺑﻮق‬،‫ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪ‬1 ‫ƒ وﻗﺘﻲ دﻧﺪه‬
.‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ زد‬
‫ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬1 ‫ƒ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ دﻛﻤﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬A
‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﺑﺮاي دوﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎر ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ دور‬
‫)وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎدي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮود‬
.(‫ دﻧﺪه دوم درﮔﻴﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬.‫ﺑﺎر دوم ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺎ‬،‫ƒ در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
، (‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )از ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ‬
.‫ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‬2 ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس روي‬،‫( ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬CDC) ‫ﻟﻴﻮر ي‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻪ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬/ ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬/ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ دﻛﻤﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫آوردن ﻓﻮري ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ دو دﻧﺪه و ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن روﻏﻦ‬، ‫ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬.‫ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ƒ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺮدن اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
.‫ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬3 ‫ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬4 ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن دﻧﺪه از دﻧﺪه‬
‫ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬، ‫ƒ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺮدن اﻳﻦ دﻛﻤﻪ در ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‬
.‫ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬2 ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آﻣﺪن ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬
‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪه ﻧﮕﻬﺪاﺷﺘﻪ‬
،‫ از ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻦ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻌﺪي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﻪ از اﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﺳﺮازﻳﺮي ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ‬
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬،‫ﺷﺪن ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬/ ‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬A
.‫ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﮔﺮ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ از ﻳﻚ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺤﺮاﻧﻲ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮاي رﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺻﻮرت ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬،‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ از دﻧﺪه‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
92
Operating instructions ‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Steering ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬

‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬

Steering
The machine has articulated frame steering,
which is hydrostatically controlled.
Lever steering, CDC (optional
equipment)
‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن اﻫﺮﻣﻲ‬، ‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ‬
By alternating between using lever steering
and steering wheel steering the operator will
have a more varied pattern of movement.
The system consists of a folding arm rest
where three functions are concentrated, i.e.
steering, forward/reverse and kick-down
function. The system is activated with the
button on the arm rest (see the next page). The
arm rest must be lowered in order to be able
to activate the function.
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ دار اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬
.‫ﻫﻴﺪرو اﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
(‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬CDC ، ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ دو ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر‬
‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر اﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﻮع‬،‫ي و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
.‫ﺗﺮي در اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‬
3 ‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻮ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ داراي‬
‫ ﻋﻘﺐ رﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬/‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ دﻛﻤﻪ روي زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬. ‫اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ( اﻳﻦ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد آن ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ در ﭘﺎﻧﻞ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي درﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮﻛﺰي روﺷﻦ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي درﮔﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﺪار‬VCADS Pro ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ اﺑﺰار ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
.‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎري ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﺮد‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز‬

The control lamp in the centre instrument is .‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ داده ﺷﻮد‬VOLVO CE

alight, when the lever steering is engaged.
Maximum speed of the machine can be
limited to an optional speed with the aid of the
VCADS Pro service tool, when the lever
steering is engaged. !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
The speed can only be changed by a ‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي ﻣﻤﻨﻮع‬،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ در ﺟﺎده ﻫﺎي ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
workshop authorised by Volvo CE.
.‫ از ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي اﺟﺘﻨﺎب از ﺗﺼﺎدف ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ) ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫( در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎر ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ از‬20 km/h=12.4 mph ‫از‬
Warning
.‫ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
When travelling on a public road, it is
prohibited to have the lever steering
activated - use the steering wheel. ‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه از وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺧﺎرج‬
Also when travelling at high speeds ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ‬CDC ‫ﺷﻮد ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎي‬
(above 20 km/h = 12.4 mph) on a work
site, always use the steering wheel in .‫ﺷﺪ‬
order to avoid accidents.

‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ اﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﻻزم‬

‫ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ‬.‫اﺳﺖ‬
The CDC functions will be automatically ‫ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان‬.‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در آن ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
deactivated, if the gear selector control is
moved from neutral. ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﻳﺠﺎد ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻓﺮد وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻫﻤﻮاره ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
Small physical effort is required to operate the
lever steering. The distance the lever is moved
is proportional to the speed at which the
steering system reacts. This means that it is
possible to make very slight movements when
one wishes to do so.
The steering wheel always remains functional.

93
Operating instructions
Steering
Activating (CDC)
In order to be able to use the steering,
forward/reverse and kick-down functions
from the arm rest, the arm rest must be
lowered and the system activated with button
1.
To make it possible to activate the system, the
following steps must first be carried out:
- The arm rest must be lowered to its lowest
position.
NOTE! In certain positions the arm rest
must be moved to the right, in towards the
seat in order to reach its lowest position.
- The directional gear selector on the arm rest, th
ordinary gear selector control and at the
control lever carrier must be in neutral
position.
- The engine must be running, but the machine
must be stationary.
- When the system is activated, a green control
lamp is alight on the centre instrument panel
is on.
2 Steering lever
A small physical effort is required to operate
the lever steering in either direction and the
speed at which the steering system reacts is
proportional to the distance the lever is
moved. This means that it is possible to make
very slight steering movements when one
wishes to do so.
The steering wheel always remains functional.
3 Kick-down button
With the kick-down button pressed in = The
machine shifts down to 1st gear if the gear
selector control is in either of positions 2, 3 or
4.
Further instructions, see page.92
4 Directional gear selector
With the front end of the switch pressed down
= Forward drive.
With the rear end of the switch depressed =
Reverse drive.
There is a neutral position between the
forward and reverse positions.
NOTE! The ordinary gear selector control
always has priority, i.e. if the ordinary gear
selector control is actuated, the selection
made from the armrest is cancelled.
5 Adjusting arm rest, sideways
Loosen the locking knob and adjust the arm
rest sideways to the required position and then
tighten the locking knob.
6 Adjusting arm rest, vertically
Loosen the locking knob and adjust the arm
rest vertically to the required position and
then tighten the locking knob.
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
(CDC) ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن‬ 1
‫ ﻋﻘﺐ رﻓﺘﻦ‬/‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ روي دﺳﺘﻪ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬1 ‫ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آورده و ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﻛﻤﻪ‬
.‫را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺑﺘﺪا‬
‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن اﻫﺮﻣﻲ‬ :‫ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ زﻳﺮ را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬ -
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬
.‫راﺳﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬
‫ دﺳﺘﻪ‬،‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺟﻬﺖ دﻧﺪه ﺑﺮ روي زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ -
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ و آﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮ روي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻗﺮار‬
.‫دارد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ وﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺪون ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ -
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺳﺒﺰ رﻧﮓ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد‬ -
.‫در روي ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮﻛﺰي روﺷﻦ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬ 2
‫ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻟﻴﻮر ي در ﻫﺮ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ‬
‫اﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ و ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ در آن از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﻳﺠﺎد ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬.
.‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮاﺳﺖ ﻓﺮد وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻫﻤﻮاره ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬ 3
‫ﻓﺸﺮدن دﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس = در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه در‬
.‫ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ رﻓﺖ‬1 ‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬،‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬4 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬3 ‫ و‬2 ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬92 ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ را در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺟﻬﺖ دﻧﺪه‬ 4
‫ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺳﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ دﻛﻤﻪ = ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺳﺮ ﻋﻘﺒﻲ دﻛﻤﻪ = ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫در ﻣﻴﺎن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﻚ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮار‬
.‫دارد‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ اوﻟﻮﻳﺖ دارد ﻳﻌﻨﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ در ﺻﻮرت‬
‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬،‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‬
.‫ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ از ﺑﻐﻞ‬، ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ 5
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را از ﺑﻐﻞ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮرد‬
.‫ﻧﻴﺎز ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻮدي‬،‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ 6
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻋﻤﻮدي در‬
CDC ‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن‬ 1 .‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻮر ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬ 2
‫دﻛﻤﻪ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬ 3
‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺟﻬﺖ دﻧﺪه‬ 4
‫ از ﺑﻐﻞ‬، ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ 5
‫ ﻋﻤﻮدي‬، ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬ 6
94
Operating instructions ‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Braking ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﻴﺮي‬

Braking ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﻴﺮي‬

Brake smoothly. This is particularly important when
operating with a load and on slippery ground. If required
during certain operations, the power transmission can be
made to automatically disengage (declutch) when the brakes
are applied. Activating this function is carried out from the
keyboard, see page38.
Engine braking with the aid of the downshift button may be
advantageous, particularly when operating downhill. In this
way it is possible to reduce the warming up of the axle oil, see
page92.
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪه‬.‫ﺑﻪ آراﻣﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم ﺣﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان‬. ‫ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ را از درﮔﻴﺮي ﺧﺎرج ﻛﺮد )ﻛﻼج‬
‫ را‬38 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﺮدن اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬، (‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬
.‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ از ﻣﺰاﻳﺎي زﻳﺎدي ﺑﺮﺧﻮردار اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در ﺳﺮازﻳﺮي ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
.‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﺮد‬

Warning !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
The transmission disengagement function must not be ‫از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪن ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ از درﮔﻴﺮي ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻫﺎي ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
used during transport operation.
.‫ﻛﺮد‬

Brake test ‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬

(Checking service brakes)
The brake test is carried out with the aid of computer
software, which measures the average retardation of the
machine. The test can be carried out by the machine operator
from the display unit.
(‫)ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ اﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻧﺮم اﻓﺰار ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺷﺪن‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﺖ را اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬.‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬

Warning !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
Brake test and checking the parking brake must only be ‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﻧﺠﺎم داد ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺮوز ﺗﺼﺎدف‬
done within an area where it cannot cause accidents.
.‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬

Conditions ‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
1 Brake test must only be done within an area where it ‫ )ﺧﻄﺮ اﻳﻦ‬.‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﻣﺤﻠﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم داد ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺮوز ﺗﺼﺎدف ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬ 1
cannot cause accidents (risk of being run into from (...‫ﻛﻪ از ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺧﻮرد ﻛﻨﺪ و‬
behind etc.).
.‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺮاز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺳﻄﺢ آن اﺻﻄﻜﺎك ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ 2
2 The ground must be level and the surface have good
friction. .‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ داراي ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ 3
3 The machine must not be loaded. 12.4 )20 km/h ‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﺮﻣﺰ اﺻﻠﻲ‬ 4
4 The travelling speed of the machine must exceed 20 km/h .‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬mph
(12.4 mph) when the service brakes are applied.

Acceptable values can only be obtained if the test is

carried out on dry asphalt, dry concrete or other similar ‫ ﺑﺘﻮن ﺧﺸﻚ و ﻳﺎ‬،‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﺖ روي آﺳﻔﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺸﻚ‬
surfaces. .‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﻮح ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬

95
Operating instructions
Braking
Measuring procedure
Make sure that the prerequisites according to the previous
page are met.
1 Select SERVICE on the keyboard, see page38.
2 Select the sub menu with the arrow key.
3 Move off (gear selector position A).
When the speed exceeds 20 km/h (12.4 mph) there will be
a short pip signal and the display unit will show "0.0 m/s2
0.00 g", which means that the speed required for the test
has been reached.
4 If the display unit instead shows "X.X m/s2 X.XX g", the
speed is too low (below 20 km/h = 12.4 mph).
To obtain credible and useful test values, the brake
application must be carried out:
ƒ Without wheels locking or skidding.
ƒ With the brakes applied as hard as possible and without
letting up the brake pedal during the test.
Result and evaluation
The test result will be shown on the display unit when the
machine has stopped, i.e. the speed is 0 km/h, and remains on
the display until the speed again exceeds 10 km/h (6.2 mph).
In order to eliminate tests during which the wheels have
locked, brake applications where the retardation exceeds 8
m/s2 (0.82 g) are not registered.
In this case "X.X m/s2 X.XX g" will be shown on the display
unit.
Minimum value for brake test: 4.75 m/s 2 (0.48 g)
If the measured retardation is less than 4.75 m/s2
(0.48 g), a new test has to be carried out.
If this test too shows a value below 4.75 m/s2
(0.48 g), the brake system must be checked at
an authorised workshop.
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫روﻳﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
.‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬38 ‫ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬SERVICE ‫از روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ 1
.‫( را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬Submenu) ‫ زﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻮ‬، ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎي ﺟﻬﺘﻲ‬ 2
(‫ ﻗﺮار دارد‬A ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ 3
‫ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪاي ﺑﻮق ﻛﻮﺗﺎه‬،‫( ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬12.4 mph)20 km/h ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫"« را ﻧﺸﺎن ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ‬0.0 m/s20.00 g"» ‫ﺷﻨﻴﺪه ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ و ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
.‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﺴﺖ رﺳﻴﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬،‫" را ﻧﺸﺎن داد‬X.Xm/s2X.XXg" ‫ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬، ‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي آن‬ 4
.(‫(اﺳﺖ‬12.4 mph)20 km/h ‫ﺣﺪ ﻛﻨﺪ اﺳﺖ )ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آوردن ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮل و ﻣﻔﻴﺪ از ﺗﺴﺖ‬
:‫زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
. ‫ﺑﺪون اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺨﻮرﻧﺪ‬ ƒ
.‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ آورد و ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ رﻫﺎ ﺷﻮد‬ ƒ
‫ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ و ارزﻳﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺑﺮ روي‬،‫ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬0 km/h ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮد ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
10 km /h (6.2 ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ و ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺠﺪداً ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
.‫ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ‬mph)
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم آﻧﻬﺎ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﺣﺬف ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ ﺛﺒﺖ‬، ‫ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬8 m/s2 (0.82 g) ‫ﮔﻴﺮي ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮﻋﺖ در آﻧﻬﺎ از‬
.‫ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
2
.‫" ﺑﺮ روي ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ داده ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬X.X m/s X.XXg" ‫در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮارد‬
4.75 m/s2(0.48 g) :‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آﻣﺪه از ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
4.75 m/s2(0.48 g) ‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آﻣﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﻛﻨﺪ ﺷﺪن ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬ ƒ
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺴﺖ را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ آﻣﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻳﻚ‬4.75 m/s2(0.48 g) ‫اﮔﺮ در ﺗﺴﺖ دوم ﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺪاري ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
.‫ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﭼﻚ ﺷﻮد‬
96
Operating instructions
Stopping machine
Stopping machine
1 Lower the engine speed.
2 Apply the brakes and when the machine is
stationary, move the gear selector control
to neutral.
3 Lower the attachment to the ground.
4 Apply the parking brake after the machine
has come to a complete standstill.
5 To ensure lubrication and cooling of the
turbocharger.
Run the engine at idling speed for at least
30 seconds before it is turned off.
In case of encased (heat-insulated) type
turbocharger and manifold, it is important
that the engine, after it has been working
hard, is allowed to run at low idling for at
least two minutes before it is turned off.
6 Turn the ignition switch key counter-
clockwise so that the control lamps go out
and the engine stops.
Warning
When you are entering or leaving the
machine, always face the machine and
use the steps or hand holds to avoid
slipping. Always use the "three-point"
grip, i.e. both hands and one foot or both
feet and one hand, when entering or
leaving - Do not jump!
If the operator has to leave the cab with the
engine running, care has to be taken so that
the steering wheel is not turned inadvertently
as the operator leaves the cab. This applies
particularly if the steering wheel is provided
with a knob.
97
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬1
‫ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬،‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ و ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﺪ‬2
.‫دﻧﺪه را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺗﺎ زﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬3
‫ ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ اﻳﺴﺘﺎد ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را‬4
.‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ از روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري و ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ‬5
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ از‬30 ‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
‫ اﺟﺎزه دﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ دور در ﺟﺎ ﻛﺎر‬،‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﻨﻴﻔﻮﻟﺪ ﻫﺎ و ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژﻫﺎي ﺣﻔﺎظ دار )اﻳﺰوﻟﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
‫در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺣﺮارت( ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ از اﻧﺠﺎم‬
،‫ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي دﺷﻮار و ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎ دور در ﺟﺎي ﻛﻨﺪ‬2 ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت‬
.‫روﺷﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را در ﺧﻼف ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬6
‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪه و ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
.‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ورود ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮوج از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ روﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ و‬
‫از دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه ﻫﺎ و ﭘﻠﻪ ﻫﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺮ ﻧﺨﻮرﻳﺪ ﻫﻤﻮاره ﻫﻨﮕﺎم‬
‫ورود و ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮوج از روش ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اي ﻳﻌﻨﻲ دو دﺳﺖ و‬
!‫ﻳﻚ ﭘﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ دﺳﺖ و دو ﭘﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﻴﺮون ﻧﭙﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻧﺎﭼﺎر اﺳﺖ در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ‬
‫اﺳﺖ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺧﺮوج‬
ً‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ‬.‫ ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻧﺎ ﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﻧﭽﺮﺧﺪ‬، ‫از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ روي ﻏﺮﺑﻴﻠﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻳﻚ دﺳﺘﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ‬
Operating instructions
Parking
Parking
1 If possible, place the machine on level
ground. If this is not possible, block the
wheels so that the machine cannot start
rolling. Lower the attachment against the
ground.
2 Check that all switches and controls are
in the "off" position or in neutral.
3 Apply the parking brake after the
machine has come to a complete
standstill.
4 Remove the keys.
5 Turn off the current supply with the
battery disconnect switch, if the machine
is to be left unattended for some time.
6 Lock all covers, windows and the door.
Remember that the risk of theft and break-in
can be minimised if one:
- removes the ignition key when the
machine is left unattended.
- locks doors and covers after the end of
the working shift.
- turns off the current with the battery
disconnect switch and removes the
handle for the switch.
- avoids parking the machine in places
with high risk of theft, break-ins and
malicious damage.
- removes all valuable items from the cab,
e.g. mobile telephone, computer, radio
and bags.
- chains the machine to an immobile
object.
It is easier to identify stolen machines if PIN
number or registration number is etched onto
the windows.
Long-term parking
1 Carry out the measures as described above.
2 Wash the machine and touch up the paint
finish to avoid rusting.
3 Treat exposed parts with anti-rust agent,
lubricate the machine thoroughly and
apply grease to unpainted surfaces like
lifting and tilting cylinders etc.
4 Check the tyre pressure and protect the
tyres against strong sunlight.
5 Fill the fuel tank and the hydraulic oil tank
to the max. marks.
6 Cover the exhaust pipe (parking out-of-
doors).
7 Make sure that the freezing point of the
coolant is sufficiently low (in cold
weather).
Check after long-term parking
ƒ All oil and fluid levels.
ƒ Tension of all belts.
ƒ Air pressure
ƒ Air cleaner
‫دﺳﺘﻮر اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ‬.‫ در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را روي ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺮاز ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬1
‫ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ را ﻃﻮري ﻣﺴﺪود ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺗﺎ زﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آورﻳﺪ‬. ‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ و اﺑﺰارﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬2
.‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻳﺎ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ ﭘﺲ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﺪ‬3
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬4
،‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺸﻮد‬5
.‫ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
.‫ ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ و در را ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎورﻫﺎ‬6
‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ و داﺧﻞ ﺷﺪن اﻓﺮاد ﺑﻪ‬
:‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻣﻲ رﺳﺪ اﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ را‬، ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﺮك ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
‫ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﻛﺎورﻫﺎ و درﻫﺎ را ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﭘﺲ از ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺷﻴﻔﺖ ﻛﺎري‬ -
‫ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن را ﻗﻄﻊ‬، ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ -
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬
‫از ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ دزدي ﻳﺎ‬ -
‫داﺧﻞ ﺷﺪن اﻓﺮاد و ﻳﺎ آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﺎﻧﺪن ﺑﺪﺧﻮاﻫﺎﻧﻪ وﺟﻮد‬
.‫دارد اﺟﺘﻨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ رادﻳﻮ‬،‫ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬، ‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺷﻲ ارزﺷﻤﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه‬ -
.‫و ﻛﻴﻒ را از داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬ -
‫ و ﺷﻤﺎره ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را روي ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﻫﺎ ﺣﻚ ﻛﺮده‬PIN ‫اﮔﺮ ﻛﺪ‬
.‫ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻗﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺧﻴﻠﻲ راﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ‬
.‫ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﻓﻮق را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬1
‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬، ‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺸﻮﻳﻴﺪ و ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از زﻧﮓ زدﮔﻲ‬2
‫ﻫﺎﻳﻲ را ﻛﻪ رﻧﮓ ﺧﻮد را از دﺳﺖ داده اﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ رﻧﮓ ﻟﻜﻪ‬
.‫ﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
، ‫ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﻮاد ﺿﺪ رﻧﮓ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﺪون ﺣﻔﺎظ را ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬3
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﻄﻮح ﺑﺪون رﻧﮓ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
.‫ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪرﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ و زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻨﺪه را ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و آﻧﻬﺎ را از ﻧﻮر ﺷﺪﻳﺪ آﻓﺘﺎب‬4
.‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و ﻣﺨﺰن روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ را ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬5
.‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
(‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﮔﺰوز را ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ )ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن در ﻫﻮاي آزاد‬6
‫ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اﻧﺠﻤﺎد آب رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ‬7
(‫ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻫﺴﺖ )در ﻫﻮاي ﺳﺮد‬
:‫ﭘﺲ از ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻛﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ و ﺳﻴﺎل ﻫﺎ‬ ƒ
‫ﻛﺸﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ƒ
‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻫﻮا‬ ƒ
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬ ƒ
98
‫‪Operating instructions‬‬
‫‪Recovering/towing‬‬
‫‪Recovering/towing‬‬
‫‪warning‬‬
‫‪Before taking any steps in preparation for‬‬
‫‪recovering or towing, the parking brake‬‬
‫‪must be applied and the wheels blocked to‬‬
‫‪prevent the machine from rolling. The‬‬
‫‪greatest care must be taken in connection‬‬
‫‪with towing to avoid serious injury which‬‬
‫‪at worst could be fatal.‬‬
‫‪Measures‬‬
‫‪ƒ If possible, the engine should be running‬‬
‫‪to make the brakes and steering operational.‬‬
‫‪ƒ If it is not possible to start the engine or‬‬
‫‪for any other reason it is not possible to build‬‬
‫‪up pressure needed to release the parking‬‬
‫‪brake, it is possible to release it‬‬
‫‪mechanically, see page101.‬‬
‫‪NOTE! The coupling device on the‬‬
‫‪counterweight or the eyes on the rear‬‬
‫‪frame inside the rear wheels must not be‬‬
‫‪used when recovering or towing.‬‬
‫‪Recovering‬‬
‫ƒ‬ ‫‪Use a towbar or other suitable means for‬‬
‫‪pulling the machine to a suitable place‬‬
‫‪or trafficable road.‬‬
‫ƒ‬ ‫‪When recovering rearwards, use the‬‬
‫‪eyes under the counterweight, which are‬‬
‫‪intended for lashing the machine.‬‬
‫ƒ‬ ‫‪When recovering forwards, use the eyes‬‬
‫‪by the front axle attachment intended for‬‬
‫‪lashing the machine.‬‬
‫ƒ‬ ‫‪To avoid oblique loading, pull the‬‬
‫‪machine straight rearwards/forwards.‬‬
‫‪Try to distribute the load by connecting‬‬
‫‪to both eyes.‬‬
‫‪Towing‬‬
‫ƒ‬ ‫‪The towing vehicle or machine must‬‬
‫‪weigh at least as much as the machine to‬‬
‫‪be towed and must have sufficient‬‬
‫‪engine power and braking capacity to‬‬
‫‪pull and brake both machines on any up‬‬
‫‪or down hills.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Do not tow further than absolutely‬‬
‫‪necessary as otherwise the transmission‬‬
‫‪may be damaged.‬‬
‫‪ƒ When towing further than 10 km (6‬‬
‫‪miles) or when towing at a speed‬‬
‫‪exceeding 10 km/h (6 mph), both the‬‬
‫‪front and the rear propeller shafts must‬‬
‫‪be disconnected, see page100, or, as an‬‬
‫‪alternative, the machine must be‬‬
‫‪transported on a trailer.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Connect in a corresponding way as‬‬
‫‪when recovering.‬‬
‫‪NOTE! It is not possible to start the‬‬
‫‪engine by towing.‬‬
‫‪Follow national regulations where‬‬
‫‪required.‬‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن ‪ /‬ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن ‪ /‬ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار!‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎري ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ را ﻣﺴﺪود ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺮ ﻗﺮاري اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط‬
‫را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﺑﺮوز ﺟﺮاﺣﺎت ﺟﺪي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﺮگ آور ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت‬
‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ و‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ اﻣﻜﺎن اﻳﺠﺎد ﻓﺸﺎر ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي رﻫﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ وﺟﻮد‬
‫ﻧﺪارد‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ آزاد ﻛﺮد‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار!‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 101‬را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! از اﺑﺰار ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ روي وزﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﺎدل ﻳﺎ ﻗﻼب ﻫﺎي روي‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﺤﺪود ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﺑﻨـﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﻜﺴـﻞ ﻛـﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﻮارد اﺿﻄﺮاري و ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻘﺐ )وﺳﻂ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ( ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﻓﺮاد آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷـﻮد‪ .‬در‬
‫ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺮﻳﻠﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه)آﻣﺎده ﺳﺎزي دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺮدن(‬
‫ƒ از ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ و ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺸﻴﺪن‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎده ﻗﺎﺑﻞ رﻓﺖ و آﻣﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن از ﻋﻘﺐ ‪ ،‬از ﻗﻼب ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ وزﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎدل ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن از ﺟﻠﻮ ‪ ،‬از ﻗﻼب ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺎر ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
‫اﺳﺖ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻼب ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ وزﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﺎدل‬ ‫ƒ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺘﻌﺎدل وارد ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎر‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ دو ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺮو را‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺸﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻫﻢ وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﻛﺸﻴﺪه ﺷﻮد و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰي و‬
‫ﺗﻮان ﻣﻮﺗﻮري آن ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ ﻫﺮ دو ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻫﻢ در‬
‫ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ و ﻫﻢ در ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ و ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﺿﺮورت ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻮن در ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ آن آﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ دﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪6) 10 km‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻞ( ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ از ‪ (6 mph) 10k/h‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﻪ ﻗﻼب ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺎر ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﻫﺮ دو ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان ﺟﻠﻮ وﻋﻘﺐ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ 100‬را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي آن ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﻠﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﺜﻞ آﻧﭽﻪ در ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﻣﻜﺎن روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ ﻛﺸﻴﺪن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻛﺠﺎ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ از ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻛﺸﻮري ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
Operating instructions
Recovering/towing
Disconnecting propeller shafts
1 Place the machine in service position, see
page127.
2 Release all brakes.
3 Remove the propeller shaft bolts and detach
the propeller shafts from the drive axles.
After recovering / towing
Before the towbar or wire rope is removed,
the following safety measures should be
taken:
1 If possible place the machine on level
ground.
2 Block the wheels to prevent the machine
from rolling.
3 Restore the parking brake, if it has been
mechanically released.
NOTE! The parking brake will not have
any effect once the propeller shafts have
been disconnected. If the machine is left
without having restored the parking
brake, this must be indicated by a label on
the steering wheel with the information
that the parking brake has been disabled.
Towing device on counterweight
NOTE! The connecting device on the
counterweight must not be used when
recovering or towing.
Maximum temporary force on the towing
device (towbar) on the counterweight
including attachment bracket must not
exceed the following:
L60F, a horizontal force of 117 kN (26687
lbf) and a vertical force of 10 kN (2281 lbf).
L70F, a horizontal force of 120 kN (27371
lbf) and a vertical force of 10 kN (2281 lbf).
L90F, a horizontal force of 140 kN (31933
lbf) and a vertical force of 10 kN (2281 lbf).
The towing device may only be used
temporarily when transporting support
supplies intended for the machine at the work
site (attachments, tools, fuel, oil etc.) and
provided that brakes, steering, lights and the
direction of forces are adapted to both the
towing machine and that which is being
towed.
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه‬/ ‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان‬
‫ را‬127 ‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را در ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 1
.‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ را آزاد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 2
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان را از‬ 3
.‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺮك ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﮔﺎه‬/ ‫ﭘﺲ از ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت اﻳﻤﻨﻲ زﻳﺮ‬
:‫را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را روي ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺮاز ﻗﺮار‬ 1
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ را ﻣﺴﺪود ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ 2
.‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
،‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را اﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ آزاد ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬ 3
.‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان ﺟﺪا ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺪون اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺑﻪ‬. ‫دﺳﺘﻲ اﺛﺮي ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ‬،‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﺮك ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ ﺑﺮ روي ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺑﭽﺴﺒﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻃﻼع دﻫﺪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺎر‬
.‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫اﺑﺰار ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺮ روي وزﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﺎدل‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! از اﺑﺰار اﺗﺼﺎل روي وزﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﺎدل ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻏﻴﺮ داﺋﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺮ اﺑﺰار ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن )ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ( واﻗﻊ ﺑﺮ روي وزﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﺎدل ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات وارد ﻛﺮد‬
:‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ زﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ و ﻧﻴﺮوي‬117 kN(26687 Ibf) ‫ ﻧﻴﺮوي اﻓﻘﻲ‬L60F ‫ﻣﺪل‬
(2281 Ibf) 10 kN ‫ﻋﻤﻮدي‬
‫ و ﻧﻴﺮوي‬120 kN(27371 Ibf) ‫ ﻧﻴﺮوي اﻓﻘﻲ‬L70F ‫ﻣﺪل‬
(2281 Ibf) 10 kN ‫ﻋﻤﻮدي‬
‫ و ﻧﻴﺮوي‬140 kN(31933 Ibf) ‫ ﻧﻴﺮوي اﻓﻘﻲ‬L90F ‫ﻣﺪل‬
(2281 Ibf) 10 kN ‫ﻋﻤﻮدي‬
‫اﺑﺰار ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻮﻗﺘﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﻛﻤﻜﻲ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎر‬
. ‫( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬...‫ روﻏﻦ و‬،‫ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬،‫ اﺑﺰار آﻻت‬، ‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎ و ﺟﻬﺖ اﻋﻤﺎل ﻧﻴﺮو در ﻫﺮ دو ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬،‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
100
Operating instructions ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬

Recovering/towing ‫ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه‬/ ‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬

‫ آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬، ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬

Parking brake, mechanical release
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ دﻟﻴﻠﻲ‬
If it is not possible to start the engine or for
any other reason it is not possible to build up ‫ ﻣﻲ‬.‫اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
pressure needed to release the parking brake, .‫ﺗﻮان آن را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ آزاد ﻛﺮد‬
it is possible to release it mechanically.
NOTE! However, this is only allowed in
order to enable towing. Immediately after ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! وﻟﻴﻜﻦ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻛﺮدن اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
the towing has been completed, the ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬،‫ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن رﺳﻴﺪ‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
parking brake must be restored. .‫دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮداﻧﻴﺪ‬

warning
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
Always block the wheels before releasing
the parking brake to prevent the machine ‫ ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ را‬، ‫ﻫﻤﻮاره ﻗﺒﻞ از آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬
from rolling.
.‫ﻣﺴﺪود ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬

Releasing ‫درﭘﻮش را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

The parking brake is located externally on ‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن‬
the transmission. .‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ در ﺧﺎرج ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
Tools required for releasing the parking
‫اﺑﺰار آﻻت ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺮاي آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻛﻴﺖ‬
brake are included in the tool kit for the
machine, i.e. adjustable spanner, handle, ‫ دﺳﺘﻪ‬، ‫ آﭼﺎر ﻓﺮاﻧﺴﻪ‬: ‫اﺑﺰار آﻻت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ از‬
socket 13/16" and hexagon socket 5/16". . 15/16 " ‫ و ﺑﻮﻛﺲ‬13/16 " ‫ ﺑﻮﻛﺲ‬،‫ﺑﻮﻛﺲ‬

1 Remove the cover for the parking brake

.‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از آﭼﺎر ﻓﺮاﻧﺴﻪ درﭘﻮش ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 1
using the adjustable spanner.
2 Loosen the lock nut with the 13/16"
.‫ ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬13/16 " ‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﻮﻛﺲ‬ 2
socket.
3 Unscrew the adjusting screw approx. 2 .‫ دور ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2 ً‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ را ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬15/16 " ‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﻮﻛﺲ‬ 3
revolutions with the 5/16" hexagon
socket.

.‫ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Restoring ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﺪن ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬

!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
warning
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬، ‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺪون اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
If the machine is left without having
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ ﺑﺮ روي ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﺑﭽﺴﺒﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻃﻼع‬.‫را ﺗﺮك ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
restored the parking brake, this must be
indicated by a label on the steering wheel ‫ ﺗﺎ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز‬. ‫دﻫﺪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
with the information that the parking ‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮداﻧﺪه ﻧﺸﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬Volvo
brake has been disabled. The machine .‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
must not be used until the parking brake
has been restored, which must be carried
out at a workshop authorised by Volvo CE

.‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ را در ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬

101
‫‪Operating instructions‬‬
‫‪Transporting machine‬‬
‫‪Transporting machine‬‬
‫‪warning‬‬
‫‪If the machine is driven across from a‬‬
‫‪loading dock onto the platform of a truck or‬‬
‫‪trailer, make sure that this vehicle is securely‬‬
‫‪braked, i.e. the wheels blocked and that there‬‬
‫‪is no risk that the vehicle will tip or tilt in a‬‬
‫‪dangerous way as the machine is driven‬‬
‫‪across.‬‬
‫‪NOTE! To avoid air being forced down‬‬
‫‪the exhaust pipe when transporting, it‬‬
‫‪should be covered with suitable protection‬‬
‫‪(C) (not plastic). Otherwise the‬‬
‫‪turbocharger may be damaged.‬‬
‫‪On another vehicle‬‬
‫‪ƒ If the machine is lifted up onto another‬‬
‫‪vehicle, the frame joint must be locked.‬‬
‫‪- Use intended attaching points for lifting.‬‬
‫‪- Lock the frame joint.‬‬
‫‪ƒ If the machine is driven up onto another‬‬
‫‪vehicle, the frame joint must not be locked.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Tie down (lash) the machine.‬‬
‫‪Lashing‬‬
‫‪ƒ Block the wheels (B).‬‬
‫‪ƒ Tie (lash) the machine down using‬‬
‫‪attaching points (A) intended for this‬‬
‫‪purpose, so that it cannot tip or begin to roll.‬‬
‫‪Lifting‬‬
‫‪ƒ Lift the machine by the therefore‬‬
‫‪intended lifting eyes (see figure) and lock the‬‬
‫‪frame joint.‬‬
‫‪Across ramp‬‬
‫‪ƒ First check that the ramp is amply wide‬‬
‫‪enough and has the required strength and that‬‬
‫‪it will not be displaced.‬‬
‫‪In elevator or other narrow‬‬
‫‪space‬‬
‫‪1 Reverse the machine in.‬‬
‫‪2 Apply the parking brake and stop the‬‬
‫‪engine before starting the elevator.‬‬
‫‪Also follow national or state regulations.‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار!‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از روي ﻳﻚ ﺳﻜﻮي ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺮ روي ﻛﻒ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎرﻛﺶ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‪ ،‬اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً‬
‫در ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﻣﺤﻜﻢ اﻳﺴﺘﺎده اﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺪود‬
‫ﺷﺪه و ﺧﻄﺮ ﻛﺞ ﺷﺪن ﻳﺎ زاوﻳﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك آن ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮ روﻳﺶ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‪ ،‬وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ورود ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر زﻳﺎد ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﮔﺰوز‬
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﮔﺰوز را ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﺎظ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ(‬
‫‪ B‬ﻣﺴﺪود ﻛﺮدن ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﭙﻮﺷﺎﻧﻴﺪ ‪ .‬در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪن ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ وﺟﻮد‬
‫‪ C‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ روي ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﮔﺰوز‬ ‫دارد‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺮار دادن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ روي ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ دﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ آورده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﺑﺮ روي وﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ را ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫از ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ را ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺧﻮد روي وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲ رود ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ(‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ را ﻣﺴﺪود ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪(B).‬‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل )‪ (A‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر در‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﻬﺎر ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن‬
‫ﻛﺞ ﺷﺪن ﻳﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻗﻼب ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫)ﺷﻜﻞ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ( در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ اﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫از روي ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺐ دار‬
‫اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺐ دار ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ اﺳﺖ و داراي اﺳﺘﺤﻜﺎم ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫در ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎي ﺑﺎرﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ از ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ اﻳﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺸﻮري ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪102‬‬
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬

Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬

The following pages contain advice and instructions on how to ‫در ﺻﻔﺤﺎت ﺑﻌﺪي ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ و دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و‬
operate the machine and examples of how the most common
.‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺎﻳﻲ در ﻣﻮرد ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ي ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ آورده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
attachments are used. It is important that the correct operating
techniques are used to carry out the work in a safe and efficient ‫ﻛﺎر را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻳﻤﻦ و‬، ‫ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
way.
.‫ﻛﺎر آﻣﺪي اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
The machine is equipped with load-sensing hydraulics, which
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
means that the oil in the system is supplied proportionally
according to the position (deflection) of the control levers. If the ‫ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ‬. ‫روﻏﻦ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ و و ﺿﻌﻴﺖ )ﺧﻢ ﺷﺪن ( ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
control levers are in neutral position, consequently no oil is ‫ﻛﻪ ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻴﭻ روﻏﻨﻲ از ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
supplied from the pumps.
.‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
To utilise the system in the best way and at the lowest fuel
consumption, the engine speed should be kept low during all ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ وﺟﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﺰان ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
operations. .‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﺎه داﺷﺖ‬
Lifting speed and power are sufficient already at low engine ‫در دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻗﺪرت و ﺳﺮﻋﺖ"ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن" ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺖ اﺳﺖ و ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ آن ﻣﺼﺮف‬
speed, which will result in a lower fuel consumption, lower
sound level and higher comfort with maintained high .‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺳﺮ و ﺻﺪاي ﻛﻤﺘﺮ و راﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ و ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮدن ﺑﻬﺮه وري اﺳﺖ‬
productivity.

L60

L70

L90

(‫دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﻗﺘﺼﺎدي )ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮي‬

‫– ﺗﻮان‬
‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور‬...

103
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Whole body vibrations ‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﻛﻠﻲ‬

Whole body vibrations ‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﻛﻠﻲ‬

Whole-body vibration emissions on construction machinery are ‫ از‬،‫ﻧﺸﺮ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﻛﻠﻲ در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﻻت ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي ﻗﺮار دارد‬
affected by a number of factors, such as the working mode,
. ‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ و ﻏﻴﺮه‬، ‫ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻣﻴﻦ‬،‫ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻣﻮد ﻛﺎري‬
ground conditions, speed, etc.
‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻴﺰان واﻗﻌﻲ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت را ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻗﺮار دﻫﺪ زﻳﺮا‬
To a large extent the operator can influence the actual vibration
levels, because the operator controls the speed of the machine, .‫ را ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬...‫ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ آن و‬، ‫ ﻣﻮد ﻛﺎري آن‬، ‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬، ‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
its working mode, the travel path, etc.
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮوز ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت در ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮع ﻳﻜﺴﺎن از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
Therefore, this may result in several different vibration levels .‫ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬XXX.241 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ را در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
for the same type of machine. For cab specifications, see page
XXX 241
‫رﻫﻨﻤﻮدﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻴﺰان ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ‬

Guidelines for reducing vibration levels on .‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬

earthmoving machines ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎر ﻣﺸﺨﺺ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮع و ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬ ƒ
ƒ Use the proper type and size of machine, with optional .‫و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي ﻻزم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
equipment and attachments for a certain application. .‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ داراي ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ اﺳﺖ‬ ƒ
ƒ Make sure that the ground is kept in good condition.
.‫ﻣﻮاﻧﻊ و ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرگ را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬ -
- Remove larger stones and obstacles.
- Fill in any ditches and holes. .‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻔﺮه ﻫﺎ و ﮔﻮدال ﻫﺎ را ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
- Provide equipment and schedule time for maintaining ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻔﻆ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري از زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ‬ -
terrain conditions. .‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
ƒ Adjust the machine speed and chose a suitable travel path ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ را ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ رﺳﺎﻧﺪن‬ ƒ
to minimise the vibration level.
.‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
- Travel around obstacles and uneven ground.
- Reduce the speed when it is necessary to go over rough .‫از ﻛﻨﺎر ﻣﻮاﻧﻊ و ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮاري ﻫﺎي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﻮر ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
terrain. ‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﻮر از زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮار ﺿﺮوري اﺳﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ‬ -
ƒ Maintain machines according to the manufacturer's .‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
recommendations.
.‫ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ ƒ
- Tire pressures.
‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬ -
- Brake and steering systems.
- Controls, hydraulic system and linkages. ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻓﺮﻣﺎن و ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬ -
ƒ Make sure that the operator seat is maintained and ‫اﻫﺮم ﺑﻨﺪي ﻫﺎ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ -
correctly adjusted: ‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺗﺤﺖ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و‬ ƒ
- Adjust the seat and its suspension according to the
.‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
operator weight and height.
.‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ آن را ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس وزن و ﻗﺪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
- Inspect and maintain the operator seat suspension and
adjustment mechanism. .‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬ -
- Use the seat belt and adjust it correctly. .‫از ﻛﻤﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و آن را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
ƒ Steer, brake, accelerate, shift gears, and move the ‫ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ ﮔﺎز دادن‬، ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬، ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن دادن‬ ƒ
attachments smoothly.
.‫ﻫﺎ را ﺑﻪ آراﻣﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬

104
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Whole body vibrations ‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﻛﻠﻲ‬

‫ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت‬، ‫در ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﺪت ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﻤﻮدن ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ‬ ƒ
ƒ Minimise vibrations during long work cycle or long
distance travelling. .‫را ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
- Use Boom Suspension System about the machine is ‫ از اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬، ‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم ﻣﺠﻬﺰ اﺳﺖ‬ -
equipped with such a system. .‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
- If the machine is not equipped with Boom Suspension ‫ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ دﻫﻴﺪ‬، ‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ -
System, lower the speed to avoid bouncing.
.‫ﺗﺎ از ﺟﻬﺶ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
- Transport machines when there are long distances between
worksites. ‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺣﻤﻞ‬، ‫ زﻳﺎد اﺳﺖ‬، ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻴﺎن ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ -
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Back pain associated with whole-body vibrations may be caused
by other risk factors. ‫ﻛﻤﺮدرد ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻋﻮاﻣﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ آﻓﺮﻳﻦ‬
. ‫دﻳﮕﺮي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫رﻫﻨﻤﻮدﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ رﺳﺎﻧﺪن ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮوز ﻛﻤﺮ درد ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
The following guidelines can be effective to minimise risks of
back pains: .‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﺗﺎ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
- Adjust the seat and controls to achieve good posture. . ‫آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ را ﻃﻮري ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎزي ﺑﻪ ﺧﻢ ﺷﺪن ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬ -
- Adjust the mirrors to minimise twisted posture. .‫ در ﻛﺎر وﻗﻔﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﻨﺪ‬، ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﺸﺴﺘﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﺪت‬ -
- Provide breaks to reduce long periods of sitting.
.‫از ﺑﻴﺮون ﭘﺮﻳﺪن از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﺟﺘﻨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
- Avoid jumping down from the machine.
.‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻜﺮر اﺷﻴﺎء ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬ -
- Minimise repeated handling and lifting of heavy objects.
- Maintain reasonable weight and physical condition. .‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ و وﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺧﻮد را ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -

105
‫‪Operating techniques‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬

‫‪Attachments‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪Attachments‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺟﻬﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎر ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﻣﻠﻲ‬
‫‪Using the correct attachment for a particular‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻧﻴﺰ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪job is a deciding factor when it comes to the‬‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻢ داراي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ آن‬
‫‪capacity of the machine.‬‬
‫‪The machines have either direct-mounted‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻫﻢ داراي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ روي‬
‫‪attachments or attachments mounted in a‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ( ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻮار ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ اﻳﻦ‬
‫‪bracket which allows rapid changes of‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪attachments.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ آن‬
‫‪When choosing attachments, follow the‬‬
‫‪recommendations‬‬ ‫‪in‬‬ ‫‪the‬‬ ‫‪Attachment‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎ و راﻫﻨﻤﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Volvo CE‬ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪Catalogue or other documentation issued by‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺗﻨﻮع زﻳﺎد اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ از ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮد ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮاد و‬
‫‪Volvo CE. Because of great variations in for‬‬
‫‪example usage, material and environment,‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ و ‪ ...‬اﻣﻜﺎن دارد ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫‪these recommendations may have to be‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻼف داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮارد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫‪deviated from. In such cases, the Volvo CE‬‬
‫‪distributor must first be contacted for further‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ و ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪﻳﻪ را ﻛﺴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻮد ﺷﻤﺎ در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪information and approval. You are yourself‬‬ ‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺌﻮل ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ .‬و‬
‫‪responsible for the safety regarding the‬‬
‫‪combination of machine - attachment and‬‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت اﻳﻤﻨﻲ را ﻃﺒﻖ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻛﺸﻮر ﻣﻬﻴﺎﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪also that the national safety requirements are‬‬
‫‪met.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﻻت اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎﻳﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎن‬ ‫‪−‬‬
‫‪ CE‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﭘﻼك ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ‪ ،‬روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وﺟﻮد‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪According to the EU Machine Directive‬‬
‫‪the CE marking must be shown on the‬‬ ‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬اﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎن ﻛﻠﻴﻪ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫‪machine product plate. This marking‬‬ ‫‪ Volvo CE‬ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫‪therefore also covers the attachments‬‬
‫‪which are designed by Volvo CE, as they‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻮن اﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺴﻮب ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫‪are an integrated part of the machine and‬‬ ‫و ﺑﺎ آن ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ دارﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ‪ Volvo CE‬در راﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪adapted to the machine. Volvo CE is not‬‬
‫‪responsible‬‬ ‫‪for‬‬ ‫‪attachments‬‬ ‫اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ ي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪manufactured by other companies. Such‬‬ ‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻲ ﻧﺪارد‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬
‫‪attachments must be CE marked and‬‬
‫‪accompanied by a Declaration of‬‬ ‫داراي ﻧﺸﺎن ‪ CE‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﮔﻮاﻫﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ و‬
‫‪Conformity and user instructions.‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﻨﺞ ﻧﻮع ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺑﺪون دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ )ﻣﻮاد ﻧﺮم ‪،‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻪ‪،‬ﺧﺎك‪ ،‬ﻛﻮد(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮﺗﺨﺖ داراي دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ )ﻣﻮاد ﺳﻔﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺷﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎك رس‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺪن ﺳﻄﺢ (‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮد ﺑﺪون دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ )ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻔﻮذ دارﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻨﮕﻬﺎ و ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر رﻳﺰ ﺧﻮرد‬
‫ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮد داراي دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ )ﻣﻮاد ﺳﻔﺖ و‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﮕﻼﺧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷﻦ ﺳﻔﺖ و ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻮرد ﺷﺪه (‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻛﻨﺪن ﻇﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﺧﺎك ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ و ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺴﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺎ و ﺻﺎف ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻄﺢ(‬

‫‪106‬‬
Operating techniques
Attaching and disconnecting attachments
Attaching and disconnecting
attachments
IMPORTANT! When changing to another attachment, the
holes for the lock pins in the new attachment should be
cleaned and lubricated.
warning
Never use an attachment until you have checked that it is
securely fastened and that the attachment including
hydraulic hoses, connections and similar are undamaged -
your safety is involved.
‫ج‬
Make sure that the hydraulic oil in the attachment, which is to be
connected, is not contaminated (foreign particles, water etc.) and
that it is of the same quality as that of the machine itself.
warning
Check that the attachment is properly locked by pressing the
front edge of the attachment against the ground, so that the
front end of the machine begins to rise slightly, see the figure
below.
NOTE! On machines with Boom Suspension System and
single-acting lifting function, these functions must be
deactivated with the switches in order to be able to carry out
the check that the attachment is properly locked.
If you are uncertain as to whether the attachment is securely
locked, you must visually check that the locking pins of the
attachment bracket are in the locked position.
107
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺳﻮراخ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ در اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬، ‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ‬
. ‫را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ و روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﭘﻴﺶ از اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه و در اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ ي‬
‫ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ و اﺗﺼﺎﻻت و اﻣﺜﺎل آﻧﻬﺎ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﻳﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬، ‫داراي ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از آﻧﻬﺎ اﻗﺪاﻣﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬ ƒ
‫( ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ آن‬... ‫ آب و‬، ‫ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ )ذرات ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬، ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﺜﻞ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺧﻮد ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪن درﺳﺖ و ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ را ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ را ﺑﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﺟﻠﻮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ آﻫﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ آﻣﺪن ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬،
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم و ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﻛﺮدن ﺟﻚ ﻟﻴﻔﺖ )ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ( ﻣﺠﻬﺰ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪن درﺳﺖ و ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
.‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي آﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪن ﻣﺤﻜﻢ و ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬
.‫ﭼﺸﻤﻲ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
Operating techniques
Attaching and disconnecting attachments
Separate attachment locking
Connecting
1 Release the locking pins by pressing the
switch.
2 Tilt the attachment bracket forward
approx. 15° and align the upper attaching
points of the bracket with the upper
attaching points on the attachment.
3 Raise the lifting arms until the attachment
rests in the bracket and tilt the bracket
rearward until the attachment is level.
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮدن اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ‬
4 Lock the attachment with the switch.
Check that the attachment is properly locked by
pressing the front edge against the ground. If it
is locked, the front wheels will begin to rise.
warning
When connecting attachments, the operator
should make sure that the expected effect is
obtained when moving the control levers. An
unexpected movement may possibly result in
an accident.
Always check the function before the
machine is put to work and that hydraulic
hoses etc. for the attachment can move freely
and are sufficiently long throughout the
whole working range of the lifting arms and
the tilting function. Extension hoses are
available - contact an authorised dealer
workshop.
Disconnecting
1 The attachment should be in a level
position on the ground.
2 Release the locking pins by pressing the
switch.
3 Lower the lifting arms so that they
disengage from the attachment.
4 Reverse away from the attachment.
warning
The switch for attachment locking must only
be actuated in connection with the changing
of attachments. Otherwise the pressure may
be lost and as a consequence the attachment
may work loose and cause injuries.
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮدن اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ ي ﻣﺠﺰا‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
.‫ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ را آزاد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬ 1
‫ درﺟﻪ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ و‬15 ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﺣﺪود‬ 2
‫ﻧﻘﺎط اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﭘﺎﻳـﻪ را ﺑـﺎ ﻧﻘـﺎط اﺗﺼـﺎل ﺑـﺎﻻﻳﻲ اﻧﭽﻤﻨـﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ‬ 3
‫ﻛﻨﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳـﻪ دﻫﻴـﺪ ﺗـﺎ اﻧﭽﻤﻨـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺷﻮد‬
. ‫ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ را ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬ 4
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪن درﺳﺖ و ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ را ﺑـﺎ ﻓﺸـﺎر دادن ﻟﺒـﻪ ﺟﻠـﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫آن ﺑﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ اﮔﺮ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻲ ﻗﻔـﻞ ﺷـﺪه ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
.‫ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ آﻣﺪن ﺧﻮاﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﺮد‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮدن اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﺎن ﻋﻜﺲ اﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻛـﻪ اﻧﺘﻈـﺎرش را‬، ‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮه ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬. ‫دارد واﻗﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺮوز ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜـﺮد اﻧﭽﻤﻨـﺖ را‬، ‫ﻫﻤﻮاره ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺑﻪ ﻛـﺎر اﻧـﺪاﺧﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﺷـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ آﻳـﺎ ﺷـﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫـﺎي ﻫﻴـﺪروﻟﻴﻚ و ﺳـﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫اﺟﺰاي اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ آزاداﻧﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ و ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛـﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪﻛﻪ ﻛﻞ داﻣﻨﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ و ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺮد زاوﻳـﻪ‬
.‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ را ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑـﺎ ﻛﺎرﮔـﺎه ﻓـﺮوش‬-‫ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﻮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎي ﻣﺴﻄﺢ در روي زﻣـﻴﻦ ﻗـﺮار‬1
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را آزاد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮدن ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬2
‫ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ را ﻃﻮري ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ ﻛـﻪ از درﮔﻴـﺮي ﺑـﺎ‬3
. ‫اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ از اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬4
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ را ﺗﻨﻬﺎ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت اﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﻪ وﺟـﻮد‬
‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ آﻣﺪ و در ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻟﻖ ﺑﺰﻧـﺪ و ﻣﻮﺟـﺐ‬
.‫ﺑﺮوز ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
108
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Attaching and disconnecting attachments ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮدن و ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﻫﺎ‬

Attachment bracket locking pins in Tilt forward approx. 15° and hook the Lift, tilt rearward until level and lock with
unlocked position bracket into the upper attaching points on the locking pins of the attachment bracket
the attachment

‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﻗﻔﻞ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﭘﺎﻳﻪ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ و ﭘﺎﻳﻪ را داﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﺎط‬15° ‫ﺣﺪود‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﺮاز ﺷﻮد و‬
. ‫ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ اﺗﺼﺎل روي اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ ﮔﻴﺮ دﻫﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ اﻧﭽﻤﻨﺖ را ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Pressure release ‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺎر‬

Residual pressure in the hoses makes it very difficult to part or ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه در ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮدن‬
join up the quick-action coupling halves.
.‫ﻓﻴﺘﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
This is facilitated, by releasing the pressure in the hydraulic
system, when, for example, you want to disconnect a hydraulic ‫ آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺎر داﺧﻞ‬، ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺜﻼً ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
hose: .‫ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را ﺧﻴﻠﻲ آﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬، ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
1 1 Stop the engine. ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 1
2 Ignition switch in position 1.
.‫( )ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز ( ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬1) ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش و روﺷﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ 2
3 The control levers for the function in question are moved
forward and rearward several times. ‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه را ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ و ﻋﻘﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ 3
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
The pressure in hoses from timber grapples can be released in the
following way: ‫ﻓﺸﺎر داﺧﻞ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ) ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮرﮔﻴﺮ( را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ‬
1 Close the clamping arm fully. : ‫آزاد ﻛﺮد‬
2 Make a quick movement with the lever in the opposite . ‫ﺑﺎزوي ﮔﻴﺮﺷﻲ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬ 1
direction.
.‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ درﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬ 2
The hoses become "slack" when the pressure is released.
.‫ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ " ﺷﻞ" ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬، ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر آزاد ﺷﻮد‬

The attachment should always rest on the ground when

releasing the pressure. .‫ﻫﻤﻮاره ﻫﻨﮕﺎم آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬

Excess pressure in a hydraulic attachment can be released by ‫ﻓﺸﺎر اﺿﺎﻓﻲ داﺧﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ ﺷﻞ ﻛﺮده ﻣﻬﺮه ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
slackening the lock nut between the hose and the hydraulic pipe ‫ آزاد ﻛﺮد در ﺿﻤﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ‬، ‫ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ و ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺠﺪد آن‬
and then tightening it again. Meanwhile watch the attachment.
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬

Collect the surplus oil.

.‫روﻏﻦ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ را ﺟﻤﻊ آوري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

109
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Buckets ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‬

Buckets ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‬

When the machine is used with a bucket, a working load of
50% of the tipping load for a fully steered machine is
permissible. Depending on application and/or machine size the
manufacturer often recommends a utilisation lower than 50%.
For information regarding weight, capacity, load, edge
savers, etc., see the Attachment Catalogue.
Bucket teeth, replacing (Volvo tooth system) see page172.
warning
The bucket must not be used for transporting or lifting
people - as this might lead to accidents
NOTE! Excavating or surface stripping must not be carried
out at high speed, if the bucket is tilted more than 15°, and
a fully tilted bucket must be avoided.
‫ ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎري ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ‬، ‫در زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﺑﺎر واژﮔﻮﻧﻲ اﺳﺖ‬50% ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ‬... ‫ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ و‬، ‫ ﺑﺎر‬، ‫ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ در زﻣﻴﻨﻪ وزن‬
.‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬172 ‫( ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬Volvo ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ اي‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫از ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ و ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن اﻓﺮاد ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد ﭼﻮن ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮوز‬
.‫ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺧﺎك ﺑﺮداري و ﻛﻨﺪن ﺳﻄﺢ را‬، ‫ اﺳﺖ‬15° ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ زاوﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫)ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ آﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ‬.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ و ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻫﻢ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
(‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬

Choosing bucket ‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬

ƒ The choice of bucket is dependent on the condition of the
material (hard/loose), its density (heavy/light) and on the
tipping load of the machine.
ƒ A too large bucket relative to the density of the material and
the tipping load of the machine will give the impression that
the machine is weak and unstable and will not increase the
productivity.
For guidance on the choice of bucket, see the Attachment
Catalogue.
IMPORTANT! Check-tighten the bolted joints at the edge
savers and segments to prescribed torque after approx. four
hours of operation. Thereafter check the torque now and
then.
Tightening torque for edge savers and segments with
bolted joints (bolt grade 10.9)
‫ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ( و ﺑﺎر‬/ ‫ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ آﻧﻬﺎ )ﺳﺒﻚ‬، (‫ ﺳﻔﺖ‬/‫ƒ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮاد )ﻧﺮم‬
.‫واژﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد‬
‫ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﺑﺰرگ ﺑﻮدن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻮاد و ﺑﺎر واژﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻳﻦ‬ ƒ
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ را ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ و ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪار ﺷﺪن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻋﺪم اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﺑﻬﺮه وري‬
.‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ رﻫﻨﻤﻮدﻫﺎي ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻬﺮه ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬، ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري‬4 ‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﭘﺲ از ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﺣﺪود‬
‫ ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺳﻔﺖ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﭼﻨﺪ وﻗﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﮔﺸﺘﺎور را ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ آﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ داراي اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻣﻬﺮه اي‬
(10.9 ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ)ﻣﻬﺮه ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﻳﺪ‬

Tightening torque ‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن‬ Size ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺰ‬

275±45 Nm(203±33 Ibf ft) M16

540±90 Nm(398±66 Ibf ft) M20

900±140 Nm(664±103 Ibf ft) M24

2160±345 Nm(1593±245 Ibf ft) 1 1/4˝

Bucket operation ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬

To obtain efficient and safe operation it is important to bear the
following points in mind:
ƒ Select the correct bucket.
ƒ Level the ground at the work site as far as possible and
make sure the ground is firm.
ƒ Avoid wheel spin by adapting the engine speed and by
transferring as much weight onto the front wheels as
possible. This is achieved by slightly raising the bucket
after it has begun to enter the material.
ƒ Work with a straight machine against the material to obtain
the greatest penetrating ability. This also contributes to
reduced tyre wear.
: ‫ﺟﻬﺖ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﭘﺮ ﺑﺎزده و اﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ را در ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ را در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎري ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
. ‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ از ﺑﻜﺲ ﺑﺎد )در ﺟﺎ‬، ‫ƒ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ وزن ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
،‫ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ اﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬.‫ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪن( ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ اﻧﺠﺎم داد‬، ‫ﭘﺲ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ وارد ﺷﺪن در ﻣﻮاد ﻧﻤﻮد‬
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ اﺳﺖ در‬، ‫ƒ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ دﺳﺖ آوردن ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻧﻔﻮذ‬
‫ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﻮد وارد ﺷﻮﻳﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر در ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ‬

110
 Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Buckets ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‬

Gravel and heap loading ‫ﺧﺎك ﺑﺮداري ﺗﭙﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻨﻲ‬

1 1 Adjust the bucket so that it is level and
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﻃﻮري ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺮاز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )زاوﻳﻪ ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ‬ 1
lower it to the ground just in front of the
gravel heap. . ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( و در ﺟﻠﻮي ﺗﭙﻪ ﺷﻨﻲ آن را ﺗﺎ زﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻮاد را وارد‬،‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼوه دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس اﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬2 ‫ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه‬ 2
2 Enter the material in 2nd gear + kick- ‫ ﻫﺮ زﻣﺎن ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ رﺳﻴﺪن ﻧﻴﺮوي‬.‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
down. When the machine has nearly
come to a standstill because the ‫ ﺷﺮوع‬،‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺣﺎل ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪن ﺑﻮدن‬، ‫ﻛﺸﻨﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
maximum tractive effort of the machine ‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ آن ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن‬
has been reached, begin to raise the
bucket while at the same time tilt .‫ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻢ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
backward with short control lever
movements. ‫در ﺻﻮرت اﻣﻜﺎن ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن از زاوﻳﻪ دادن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬
If possible avoid tilting the bucket forward ‫ ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن ﻟﻴﻮر ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﻜﺲ‬.‫ﺟﻠﻮ ﺧﻮد داري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
when filling it. Exaggerated lever movements
causes wheel spin. Never move into the ‫ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬.‫ﺑﺎد ﻛﺮدن )در ﺟﺎ ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪن( ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
material at a high speed. .‫ﺑﺎﻻ وارد ﻣﻮاد ﻧﺸﻮﻳﺪ‬

Straight bucket with or

Suitable bucket: ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪون دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ‬ : ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
without teeth.
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 2 or 4 4 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬2 ‫دﺳﺘﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
Mode selector: AUTO-position AUTO ‫در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ :‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮد‬
BSS: Gear-dependent position ‫در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬ :BSS

warning !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﻋﺪم اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ‬.‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﻘﻮط ﻣﻮاد ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Pay attention to the risk of falling material. . ‫ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺮوز ﺣﻮادث ﺟﺪي وﺟﻮد دارد‬، ‫ﻫﺎي ﻻزم‬
Falling material can cause severe accidents if
due care is not taken
‫ﺧﺎك ﺑﺮداري‬
Excavating ‫ﺧﺎك ﺑﺮداري و ﺻﺎف ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻄﺢ را در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ زاوﻳﻪ‬ ƒ

ƒ When excavating and surface stripping, .‫ درﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺷﺮوع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2-3 ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺣﺪود‬
start by angling the bucket 2-3° downward. ‫ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻳﻚ و دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ƒ
ƒ Operate in 1st gear and at low engine
.‫ ﺗﺪرﻳﺠﺎً دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ دﻫﻴﺪ‬، ‫آوردن آﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
speed. Gradually increase the engine speed
at the same time as you raise the bucket ‫اﮔﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺲ ﺑﺎد ﻣﻲ‬ ƒ
slightly.
.‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪ از ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
ƒ If the ground conditions are poor and the
wheels tend to spin, use the differential ƒ
lock. ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﺮﮔﺰ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ در ﺣﺎل ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪن اﺳﺖ‬
NOTE! You must never engage the ‫ ﮔﺎز را ﻛﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ از‬.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ را درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
differential lock when one of the wheels is .‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
spinning. Let up the accelerator until the
wheel stops.

‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪون دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي‬

Suitable bucket: Straight with or without ‫آن از ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ : ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
teeth (alt. levelling bucket)
(‫ﻛﺮد‬
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 1 ‫دﺳﺘﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه ﻳﻚ‬ : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
Mode selector: AUTO-position AUTO ‫در وﺿﻌﺖ‬ :‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮد‬
BSS: Not activated ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل‬ :BSS

111
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Buckets ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‬

Rock loading ‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻨﮓ‬

ƒ Correct engine speed is of great importance
- too high engine speed causes wheel spin.
ƒ Drive into the material head on to avoid
oblique stresses which can harm the lifting
arm system.
ƒ The edge of the bucket must find its way
under and between the stones, which means
that you must watch the bucket carefully as
it enters the material.
ƒ If a stone has become wedged, try a new
angle of approach, but avoid exerting
pressure on the corner of the bucket.
ƒ Avoid driving up into the material, as there
is then a great risk of damage to the tyres by
the sharp blasted pieces of rock. Also
remove stones that have fallen out of the
bucket.
‫ƒ دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ از اﻫﻤﻴﺖ زﻳﺎدي ﺑﺮﺧﻮردار اﺳﺖ –دور‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﻜﺲ ﺑﺎد ﻛﺮدن ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ از وارد ﺷﺪن ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎزوي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ آﺳﻴﺐ وارد ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮش را در زﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم وارد ﺷﺪن‬
. ‫ ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ آن ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ در ﻣﻮاد‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ زاوﻳﻪ دﻳﮕﺮ را‬،‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﺗﻜﻪ ﺳﻨﮕﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺷﺪ‬
.‫اﻣﺘﺤﺎن ﻛﻨﻴﺪ اﻣﺎ از اﻋﻤﺎل ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺮﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﭘﺮﻫﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻي ﻣﻮاد ﻫﻨﮕﺎم داﺧﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ در‬
‫ ﭼﻮن ﺷﺪﻳﺪاً ﺧﻄﺮ آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬،‫ﻣﻮاد اﺟﺘﻨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬.‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻜﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻮرد ﺷﺪه و ﺗﻴﺰ ﺳﻨﮓ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ را ﻛﻪ از ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﻴﺮون اﻓﺘﺎده اﻧﺪ از ﺳﺮ راه ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬

Suitable bucket: Spade-nose bucket with or ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮ ﮔﺮد ﺑﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺪون دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ‬ : ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
without teeth.
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 2 ‫دﺳﺘﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه دو‬ : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
Mode selector: AUTO-position AUTO ‫دروﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ :‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮد‬
BSS: Gear-dependent position ‫در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬ :BSS

Transporting load (loading - (‫ ﺣﻤﻞ‬-‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﺎر)ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮداري‬

carrying) ‫ƒ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ و در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
ƒ The bucket should be fully tilted backward ‫ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ‬30-40 cm (12-16 in) ، ‫ﺣﻤﻞ‬
and kept in the carrying position 30-40 cm .‫دارﻳﺪ‬
(12-16 in) above the ground.
ƒ Keep the transporting road even and free ‫ƒ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ را ﻫﻤﻮار و ﻋﺎري از ﺳﻨﮓ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﺷﻴﺎء ﻧﮕﻪ‬
from stones and other objects. There is ‫ ﻣﻮاد ﺑﻴﺮون ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ‬، ‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ از ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﭘﺮ‬. ‫دارﻳﺪ‬
always spillage from a too full bucket.
ƒ Even out the road on the way back if . ‫رﻳﺨﺖ‬
necessary. .‫ در راه ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ را ﻫﻤﻮار ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم‬

Suitable maximum speed: Approx. 15 km/h (9.3 mph) 15 km/h (9.3 mph) ‫ﺣﺪود‬ : ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position A A ‫دﺳﺘﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
Mode selector: AUTO position AUTO ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ :‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮد‬
BSS: Gear-dependent position ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه‬ :BSS

When operating where gear-shift hunting H ‫ ﻣﻮد‬،‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻜﺮراً رخ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
arises, select the H mode as the machine then ‫را اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
must reach a higher travelling speed before
.‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮي ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬
upshifting takes place.
Example: When operating up long inclines ‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺠﺎم ﺑﺎر ﺑﺮداري و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر در ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻫﺎي‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎل‬
during loading/carrying work. .‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ‬

NOTE! Remember that the stability of a heavily ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎر زﻳﺎدي‬
loaded machine changes when it is steered.
.‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪن ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد‬

112
 Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Buckets ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﺎ‬

Dumping load ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎر‬

warning !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
If visibility is limited by the load or the ‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎر ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات دﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺤﺪود ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
attachment, great care must be taken. Walk ‫ در اﻃﺮاف ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬، ‫ ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر‬.‫ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬،
around the machine before starting and ‫ﻗﺪم ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻧﻪ ﻛﺴﻲ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ و ﻧﻪ‬
make sure that no persons remain in or enter
the working area of the machine. If you are ‫ اﮔﺮ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺎر را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬.‫ﻛﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ آن وارد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
uncertain, raise the load and check the ‫و ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎر را ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎر را ﻫﻢ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
conditions in the operation area by looking
under the load and operate at low speed. If ‫ در ﺻﻮرت‬.‫ﻧﻈﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ و ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
necessary, arrange for a signalling person to ‫ﻟﺰوم از ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ را ﺑﭙﺬﻳﺮد و‬
take charge and to help the operator under
"tricky" circumstances. Great care must be ‫در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ دﺷﻮار ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ از‬
taken to prevent injuries and damage to ‫ﺑﺮوز ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ و آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ اﻣﻮال و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي‬
property.
ƒ If you are working on an incline, try to .‫ﺷﻮد‬
arrange so that the load can be dumped ‫ƒ اﮔﺮ در ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺷﻴﺐ دار ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ دﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮان‬
uphill. This affects the stability of the ‫ﺑﺎر را رو ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺮد اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺑﺮ روي ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري‬
machine in a positive way.
ƒ Keep the bucket as close to the platform or . ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ دارد‬
bin as possible to achieve a smooth ‫ƒ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر ﮔﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻠﻮ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
dumping and better control of the
positioning of the load. ‫ﺑﻪ آراﻣﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﮕﻴﺮد و ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎر را ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
ƒ When loading rock, try to fill the first .‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
bucket with as fine material as possible in
order to soften the impact of subsequent ‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎر ﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻨﮓ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را‬
larger pieces. ‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاد رﻳﺰﺗﺮ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﺛﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرﮔﺘﺮ‬
Positioning of transporting .‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
vehicle ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
ƒ The positioning of the hauler (transporting
vehicle) is of great importance for making ‫ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎرﻛﺶ‬، ‫ƒ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺮ ﺑﺎزده ﺑﻮدن ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي‬
the loading operation efficient. .‫)وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر( از اﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺰاﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮردار اﺳﺖ‬
ƒ The operator should indicate where the
transporting vehicle is to stand, suitably by ‫ƒ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﻛﺠﺎ‬
"pointing" with the bucket. Having done so ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ در دﺳﺘﺮس ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
the operator is then responsible for that the
place is safe. .‫اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر در ﻗﺒﺎل اﻣﻦ ﺑﻮدن آن ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺴﺌﻮل اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻛﺮدن‬
Levelling ‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ƒ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺖ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻣﻮاد وﺟﻮد‬، ‫ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در داﺧﻞ و در ﺟﻠﻮي ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
ƒ The bucket should lie flat against the .‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻔﺮه ﻫﺎ را ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
ground. To be able to fill any hollows you
should have material in and in front of the ‫ƒ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﭘﺮداﺧﺖ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ در ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻛﺮدن ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
bucket when operating forwards. ‫را اﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ و در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﻛﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ‬
ƒ To finish off the levelling operation, keep
the edge of the bucket slightly downward . ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
and reverse while pressing the bucket lightly ... ‫ ﺑﺮف روب ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎرو و‬، ‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺑﻮﻟﺪوزر‬
against the ground.
ƒ If a dozer blade, snow plough or sweeper ‫ درﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﻮدن ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻳﻜﻄﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي‬، ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
etc. is used, it may advantageous to have the ‫زﻳﺮا وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺷﻨﺎور اﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬.‫ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺳﻮدﻣﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
single-acting lifting function engaged. This
allows the attachment to follow any .‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮاري ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ را از ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮد‬
unevenness in the ground by "floating". This ‫اﻳﻦ ﺑﺪان ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﭘﺬﻳﺮي و ﺗﻮان ﻛﺸﺸﻲ‬
means that steering ability and traction ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ‬.‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
power is maintained. The attachment returns
to preset position, see page26 (‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬26 ‫ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﮔﺮدد‬

‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺳﺮ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺑﺪون دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي آن‬

Suitable bucket: Straight without teeth (alt. ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
levelling bucket)
(‫ﻛﺮد‬
‫دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ‬
Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 1 or 2 : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫دﻧﺪه دو‬
Mode selector: AUTO-position AUTO ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ :‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮد‬
BSS: Not activated ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل‬ :BSS

113
Operating techniques
Timber grapples
Timber grapples
There are five different timber grapples:
A Unloading grapple has short tines which
makes it easier to fill the grapple when
unloading a transporting vehicle.
B Sorting grapple has relatively long fork
tines, which can be placed in parallel with
the ground. This facilitates filling the
grapple when taking from a stack and a
sorting bin.
C General purpose ` has longer fork tines
than the sorting grapple and can be used for
handling whole trunks when sorting or
grabbing single trunks.
Tree-length grapple is a wide grapple which
also can handle single trunks. This grapple too
has slightly longer tines than the sorting
grapple.
Tropical grapple also is wide and has two
separate clamping arms in order to get a secure
grip on large, heavy logs.
The CEN standard EN 474-3 applies within the
EU, which means that nominal operating load is
expressed as a percentage of the tipping load. In
accordance with this, Volvo CE have chosen to
adapt its internal standard for stating the
capacity of timber grapples.
The recommended maximum loads apply for
combinations of timber grapples and wheel
loaders which are equipped with approved
counterweights for timber handling.
Any equipment added to the attachment reduces
the rated operating load.
In countries outside the EU and EEA other
safety requirements may apply, therefore,
always observe local regulations.
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
(‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ‬
(‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ)ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ‬
:‫ﭘﻨﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ( ﻣﻮﺟﻮد اﺳﺖ‬
‫ داراي ﻧﻮك ﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬،‫ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎر‬A
.‫ﭼﻨﮕﻚ ﻫﺎ را ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر آﺳﺎن ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‬
.
‫ داراي ﻧﻮك ﻫﺎي ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً ﺑﻠﻨﺪي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ‬،‫ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي‬B
‫ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮازي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﭼﻨﮕﻚ را در‬
. ‫اﻧﺒﺎر ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺗﺐ و ﻗﻔﺴﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه آﺳﺎن ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ داراي ﻧﻮك ﻫﺎي دوﺷﺎﺧﻪ ي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺗﺮي‬، ‫ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﺎره‬C
‫ و از آن ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ‬. ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺪه در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روي ﻫﻢ ﭼﻴﺪن و ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﺮدن و ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ‬
. ‫ﺑﺮاي ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ‬،‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ درﺧﺘﺎن ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺪه را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﺪ اﻳﻦ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ داراي ﻧﻮك ﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﻲ‬
.‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺗﺮ از ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ دﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﮔﺮم ﺳﻴﺮي ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ اﺳﺖ و داراي دو‬
‫ﺑﺎزوي ﮔﻴﺮﺷﻲ ﻣﺠﺰا اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرگ و ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ را ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ‬
. ‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ در داﺧﻞ اﺗﺤﺎدﻳﻪ اروﭘﺎ‬EN 474-3 ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره‬CEN ‫از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﻃﺒﻖ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎري ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬.‫درﺻﺪي از ﺑﺎر واژﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ از اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد داﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬Volvo CE
.‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ و ﻟﻮدر داراي‬
‫ﭼﺮخ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ وزﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﺎدل ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده اﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
.‫ ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎري ﻧﺎﻣﻲ را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داد‬،‫اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت اﻳﻤﻨﻲ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻧﻴﺰ‬EEA ‫ و‬EU ‫در ﻛﺸﻮرﻫﺎي ﺧﺎرج از‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﻮاره ﺑﻪ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬، ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
. ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
114
 ‫‪Operating techniques‬‬
‫‪Timber grapples‬‬
‫‪Working with timber grapples‬‬
‫‪Unloading vehicle‬‬
‫‪Take great care when filling the grapple so as‬‬
‫‪not to damage the load stakes on the bunks of‬‬
‫‪the vehicle.‬‬
‫‪1. 1 Approach the vehicle which is to be‬‬
‫‪unloaded with a raised and fully open‬‬
‫‪grapple.‬‬
‫‪2. Tilt the grapple forward and lay it down‬‬
‫‪over the load.‬‬
‫‪Close the clamping arm and begin to tilt‬‬
‫‪slightly upward. Then repeat alternate closing‬‬
‫‪and upward tilting of the grapple until it is full.‬‬
‫‪NOTE! Take great care when unloading a‬‬
‫‪vehicle, particularly when there are only a‬‬
‫‪few logs left. If the grapple should grip‬‬
‫‪round the far edge of the platform this could‬‬
‫‪lead to damage.‬‬
‫‪Loading vehicle with timber grapples‬‬
‫‪1. 1 Make sure that each log lies correctly in‬‬
‫‪the grapple to avoid "crows nest".‬‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪Approach the vehicle to be loaded while‬‬
‫‪at the same time raising the attachment so‬‬
‫‪that the logs clear the stakes.‬‬
‫‪3 Lower the grapple until it is level on the‬‬
‫‪bunks or the platform and deposit the‬‬
‫‪bundle against the stakes on the far side.‬‬
‫‪4 Open the clamping arm fully and carefully‬‬
‫‪reverse out.‬‬
‫‪Stacking‬‬
‫‪For machines with Boom Suspension System it‬‬
‫‪is recommended that speed-dependent function‬‬
‫‪should be selected. The precision increases and‬‬
‫‪the risk of "crows nest" reduces.‬‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪Keep the grapple as near the stack as‬‬
‫‪possible to prevent logs falling down.‬‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪Tilt the grapple slightly forward.‬‬
‫‪3.‬‬ ‫‪Carefully open the clamping arm fully so‬‬
‫‪that the logs can roll out of the grapple.‬‬
‫‪4.‬‬ ‫‪Reverse carefully and at the same time‬‬
‫‪lower the grapple and hold it close to the‬‬
‫‪load to prevent logs from falling.‬‬
‫‪ƒ When using a grapple with heel/kick-out,‬‬
‫‪there is no need to tilt the grapple forward.‬‬
‫‪The lifting height of the machine is better‬‬
‫‪utilised and one can build higher stacks. The‬‬
‫‪heel kick-out can also be used as a counter‬‬
‫‪hold when handling single logs.‬‬
‫‪Basic rule: Make sure that the logs leave the‬‬
‫‪grapple without falling.‬‬
‫‪Suitable gear:‬‬ ‫‪Gear selector in position A‬‬
‫‪Mode selector:‬‬ ‫‪AUTO position‬‬
‫‪BSS:‬‬ ‫‪Speed-dependent position‬‬
‫‪115‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ)ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻫﺎ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ ﻫﺎي اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎر از وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي دﻳﻮاره‬
‫وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ آﺳﻴﺒﻲ ﻧﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮده و ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد ‪ ،‬ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ و آن را روي ﺑﺎر ﺑﺨﻮاﺑﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﮔﻴﺮﺷﻲ را ﺑﺒﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ آراﻣﻲ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ زاوﻳﻪ دادن ﭼﻨﮕﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺴﺘﻦ و زاوﻳﻪ دادن ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ را آن ﻗﺪر ﺗﻜﺮار‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﭘﺮ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻳﻚ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر دﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﻤﻲ از ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪه اﻧﺪ‪ .‬در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ دور ﻟﺒﻪ دورﺗﺮ ﻛﻔﻲ را ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ‬
‫آن وﺟﻮد دارد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ‬
‫اﻟﻮارﮔﻴﺮ(‬
‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻲ در ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ از ) روي ﻫﻢ اﻓﺘﺎدن ( آﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ اي ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎرﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫و ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ از‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ رد ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﻒ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ دﺳﺘﻪ اﻟﻮارﻫﺎ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ دﻳﻮاره ﻃﺮف دورﺗﺮ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎزوي ﮔﻴﺮﺷﻲ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫اﻧﺒﺎﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﻮد در اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت دﻗﺖ‬
‫اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﺧﻄﺮ ) روي ﻫﻢ اﻓﺘﺎدن ( ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮده اﻟﻮارﻫﺎ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫از ﺳﻘﻮط ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬اﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﺑﺎزوي ﮔﻴﺮﺷﻲ را ﺑﺎز ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺪه‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ از داﺧﻞ آن ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﻐﻠﺘﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻫﻢ زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ آن ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را‬
‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ و آن را ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﺳﻘﻮط ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ƒ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫دﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺎزي ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺗﻮده‬
‫ﻫﺎي اﻟﻮار ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮي اﻳﺠﺎد ﻛﺮد ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ از ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮان ﺑﺮاي ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻦ اﻟﻮار در ﺟﻠﻮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﻮار ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮرت ﺗﻜﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮن ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪ :‬اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪن از‬
‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺳﻘﻮط ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪A‬‬ ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ‪:‬‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪AUTO‬‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮد‪:‬‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪:BSS‬‬
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Timber grapples (‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ )ﭼﻨﮕﻚ اﻟﻮار ﮔﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ اﻟﻮار از روي ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮده‬

Picking up from a stack
Low stack:
1 Keep the grapple tines flat against the ground with the
grapple fully open.
2 Enter the grapple into the stack and close the clamping
arm as far as possible.
3 Carefully reverse while closing the grapple further.
High stack:
1 Begin as high as possible and tilt the grapple tines slightly
forward with the grapple fully open.
2 When the grapple is well into the stack, close it.
3 Follow through with the grapple so as to avoid logs falling
down under the grapple.
If logs fall between the grapple tines, carefully lower the
load to the ground, reverse and try to pick up the load
again. Make sure not to damage the logs.
A heel/kick-out makes it possible to stack the logs higher and
to keep the ground in front of the wheels of the machine clear
of logs.
‫ﺗﻮده ﻫﺎي ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬
‫در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ ﻧﻮك ﻫﺎي آن را ﺗﺨﺖ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار‬ 1
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را وارد ﺗﻮده اﻟﻮار ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن داﺧﻞ رﻓﺘﻪ و آن را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬ 2
.‫ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻫﻢ زﻣﺎن ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬ 3
‫ﺗﻮده ﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرگ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن از ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺷﺮوع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز‬ 1
.‫ﻛﺮده اﻳﺪ ﻧﻮك ﻫﺎي آن را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﻛﻤﻲ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﺧﻮب وارد ﺗﻮده اﻟﻮارﻫﺎ ﺷﺪ آن را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬ 2
.‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ از زﻳﺮ آن ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻘﻮط ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‬ 3
‫ ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط ﺑﺎر را ﺑﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ از ﻣﻴﺎن ﻧﻮك ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﻓﺘﺎدﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻪ و دوﺑﺎره ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎر را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﺎر ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ اﻳﻦ اﻣﻜﺎن را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ را ﺗﺎ ارﺗﻔﺎع‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮي روي ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ آن ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي رﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه در ﺟﻠﻮي ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

Operating with whole trunks ‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺪه‬

ƒ Pay special attention to that the centre of gravity of the
‫ƒ دﻗﺖ ﻧﻈﺮ وﻳﮋه اي داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺟﺮم ﻛﻨﺪه ﻫﺎ در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﻗﺮار‬
timber is correctly positioned so as to maintain a
satisfactory side-stability of the machine. .‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از ﺑﻐﻞ داراي ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
ƒ When operating with a restricted view, use a signalling
‫ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر دﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺪودي دارﻳﺪ از ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
person, see page123.
.‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬123
warning
The large clearance radius when handling round timber, ! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
means that the operator must take great care not to hit ‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬، ‫در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد ﺷﻌﺎع ﺧﻼﺻﻲ زﻳﺎد ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﻮارﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﮔﺮد‬
anyone or anything in the vicinity of the machine. ‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ اﻓﺮاد و اﺷﻴﺎء اﻃﺮاف ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺮﺳﺪ‬

116
‫‪Operating techniques‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫‪Pallet forks‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك‬

‫‪Pallet forks‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك‬

‫‪IMPORTANT! Only pallet forks approved‬‬
‫‪for the machine by Volvo CE may be used.‬‬
‫‪Pallet forks are only to be used for intended‬‬
‫‪purpose:‬‬
‫‪Must, for example, therefore not be used as‬‬
‫‪a crowbar for prizing loose a tree stump,‬‬
‫‪large stone or similar.‬‬
‫‪Must not be overloaded or loaded obliquely.‬‬
‫‪Must not be used as lifting equipment‬‬
‫‪together with chains or slings for lifting‬‬
‫‪objects.‬‬
‫ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ‬
‫‪Fork tine back frame and fork tines must be‬‬
‫‪dimensioned to withstand loads which the‬‬
‫‪lifting capacity of the machine permits.‬‬
‫‪Pallet forks and fork retainer must be kept free‬‬
‫‪from dirt and rust and be well greased for best‬‬
‫‪possible function.‬‬
‫‪The fork arms are dimensioned according to‬‬
‫‪ISO 2330 and are classified together with the‬‬
‫‪machine according to the norms in force.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﻓﻘﻂ از ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك ﻛﻪ از ﻃﺮف ‪VolvCE‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻘﺎﺻﺪ زﻳﺮ در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از اﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان دﻳﻠﻢ ﺑﺮاي ﻟﻖ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫رﻳﺸﻪ درﺧﺖ ﻳﺎ اﻫﺮم ﻛﺮدن زﻳﺮ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺰرگ و اﻣﺜﺎل آﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‪ .‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎر وارد ﻛﺮد و‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از اﻋﻤﺎل ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻮد داري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از اﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از زﻧﺠﻴﺮ و ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن اﺟﺴﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﻧﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ و ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﭘﺸﺖ آن در‬
‫‪ A‬زاوﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮي ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﻨﺠﻴﺪه ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ B‬ﮔﻴﺮه ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك و ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه آن ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ و‬
‫‪ C‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫زﻧﮓ زدﮔﻲ دور ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ و ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد را‬
‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎ را ﻃﺒﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ‪ ISO 2330‬ﻣﻲ ﺳﻨﺠﻨﺪ‬
‫و آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻣﻌﻴﺎر ﻧﻴﺮوي دﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻬﻢ! اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﺳﺘﻮپ ﻫﺎ )‪ (D‬ﺑﻪ درﺳﺘﻲ در ﻣﺤﻞ‬

‫‪IMPORTANT! Make sure that stops (D) are‬‬
‫ﺧﻮد ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ و از ﺑﻴﺮون ﻟﻐﺰﻳﺪن ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ از داﺧﻞ‬
‫‪properly located, thus preventing the fork‬‬
‫‪arms from sliding off the fork frame.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺳﻲ آن ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺄﻟﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫‪Particularly important when the fork arms‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ ‪ .‬اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن‬
‫‪are moved sideways manually. Make sure‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫‪that the fork arms are locked against the‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪن از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ‬
‫‪fork retainer. The locking prevents the fork‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪arms from moving sideways inadvertently.‬‬ ‫‪ D‬اﺳﺘﻮپ‬

‫ƒ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك را از ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺎً ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪ƒ Check the pallet forks regularly as‬‬
‫‪regards wear. It is particularly important‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﻳﮋه ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺎﺷﻨﻪ ﻧﻴﺶ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ از اﻫﻤﻴﺖ زﻳﺎدي‬
‫‪to check the heel of the fork tine.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﻮدار اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Check that stops (D) for the fork arms are‬‬ ‫ƒ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﺳﺘﻮپ ﻫﺎي )‪ (D‬ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ در‬
‫‪properly located.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Check that the fork arms are locked‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪against the fork frame.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪار!‬ ‫ƒ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎزو ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ آن ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه‬
‫‪ƒ The fork tine should not be used any‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك از‬
‫‪more if:‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻳﺪار ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺮ روي‬ ‫ƒ ﻧﻴﺶ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ اﮔﺮ داراي ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬دﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫‪- the fork tine has been worn down to 90% of‬‬
‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‪:‬‬
‫‪its original thickness‬‬
‫ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻧﻴﺶ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﻪ ‪ 90%‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ اوﻟﻴﻪ آن ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪the angle between fork tine and shank has‬‬
‫‪become greater than 93°.‬‬ ‫زاوﻳﻪ ﻣﻴﺎن ﻧﻴﺶ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ و ﺳﺎق آن از ‪ 93°‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪- the attaching lugs are worn or cracked.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮه ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل ﻓﺮﺳﻮده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮك ﺑﺨﻮرﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ƒ Cracks or wear must not be made good‬‬ ‫ƒ ﺗﺮك ﻫﺎ و ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻫﺎ را ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري‬
‫‪by welding.‬‬ ‫اﺻﻼح ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fork tine extensions‬‬ ‫دﻧﺒﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻴﺶ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ‬
‫‪Fork tine extensions are used when handling‬‬ ‫از دﻧﺒﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻴﺶ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻮاد ﺳﺒﻚ ﺑﺎ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻢ‬
‫‪light material with low density and it is marked‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و روي آﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪with maximum load.‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬاري‬
‫(‬
‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر اﻋﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﺶ )ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﮔﺮم (‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺟﺮم ﺑﺎر ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻴﻠﻤﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻧﻴﺶ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫(اﻳﻦ را ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎر ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪل ﻟﻮدر اﺷﺘﺒﺎه ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪117‬‬
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Pallet forks ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك‬

Operating with pallet forks ‫ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك‬

The most important points for work with pallet
forks are: ‫ﻧﻜﺎت ﻣﻬﻢ در ﻣﻮرد ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك ﻋﺒﺎرﺗﻨﺪ‬
ƒ The operator should have suitable : ‫از‬
training.
‫ƒ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
ƒ The operator is responsible for that
permissible load values are not exceeded. ‫ƒ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر در ﻗﺒﺎل ﻋﺪم ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﺴﺌﻮل اﺳﺖ‬
ƒ The fork makes a semicircular movement ‫ƒ دوﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎﻻ آﻣﺪن ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺷﺒﻪ داﻳﺮه اي اﻧﺠﺎم‬
when it is raised. Therefore, start raising
the fork a little bit away from the place ‫ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺷﺎﺧﻚ را اﻧﺪﻛﻲ دور از ﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬
where the load is to be placed. .‫ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎر ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﺷﺮوع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
ƒ The fork must not be raised other than
when stacking or depositing pallets. ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ را ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روي ﻫﻢ ﭼﻴﺪن ﻳﺎ اﻧﺒﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ƒ
ƒ When operating without a load in the .‫ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬
fork, the tines should be held low and
tilted upward. ‫ƒ وﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺎري روي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪارد آن را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ و‬
ƒ When stacking material, the fork tines .‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
should be kept horizontal.
‫ ﻧﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬،‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روي ﻫﻢ ﭼﻴﺪن اﺟﺴﺎم‬
ƒ Choose the most suitable travel path with
the smoothest surface or, when required, .‫اﻓﻘﻲ ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ‬
rectify by levelling off the ground.
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ را ﻛﻪ داراي ﻫﻤﻮارﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ‬
ƒ The travelling speed should be adapted to
the ground conditions. ‫اﺳﺖ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻮار ﻛﺮدن زﻣﻴﻦ‬
ƒ For increased stability, when working .‫آن را آﻣﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
with pallet forks, it is important that the
tyre pressure is correct according to ‫ƒ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
recommendations. ‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري‬
ƒ With a wide load it may be advantageous
to move the fork arms out on the fork ‫اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ را ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
frame to obtain increased stability of the .‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
load. Also make sure that the load is
centred sideways with regard to the ‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺮض زﻳﺎدي دارﻧﺪ‬
centre of gravity. ‫ﻃﺮف ﺑﻴﺮون ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ روي ﺷﺎﺳﻲ آن‬
ƒ When operating downhill with a heavy
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري ﺑﺎر ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ در ﺿﻤﻦ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن‬
load it may be better to reverse the
machine. ‫ از ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ در‬، ‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺟﺮم آن‬
.‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ در ﺳﺮ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ دﻧﺪه‬
NOTE! For heavy work which require great .‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
break-out force, e.g. breaking out tree
stumps and carrying marble blocks - use
attachments approved by Volvo CE. ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي درﮔﻴﺮي‬
‫زﻳﺎدي دارﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ از رﻳﺸﻪ در آوردن درﺧﺖ و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﻠﻮك ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬Volvo CE ‫ﺳﻨﮕﻲ از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬

Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 4. 4 ‫دﺳﺘﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه‬ : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
Mode selector: AUTO-position AUTO ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ :‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮد‬
Speed-dependent position or ‫در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل‬ :BSS
BSS:
not activated

118
Operating techniques
Pallet forks
Picking up a load
ƒ Choose fork tines with a correct length so
that they do not protrude outside the load.
Previously deposited pallet or goods may
be damaged as the penetrating force of
the fork tines is very great.
ƒ Place the load as close to the vertical
shank of the fork as possible.
ƒ Lift the load with the least possible
inclination of the pallet fork.
ƒ There may be deviations from the
complete parallel movement (see the
Specifications) and this may affect the
use of the fork.
Operating with a load
ƒ Keep the load low 30-40 cm (12-16 in)
above the ground to achieve the best
possible stability and vision.
ƒ Tilt the load rearward to hold it more
secure.
ƒ If the load obscures the vision, reverse
the machine to the place where the load is
to be deposited.
ƒ Adapt the speed to the existing conditions.
ƒ When handling high loads, use a special
load support.
Combi-forks
The combination grapple is a good alternative
when handling material that require a certain
amount of holding. Here a special combi-fork
back frame is used where standard fork tines
are installed.
The combi fork is suitable for:
ƒ Palletised goods and round timber.
ƒ Within the pulp industry and on building
sites, where both palletised goods and
compressed material (waste paper,
packaging material etc.) are handled.
warning
When detaching pallet forks from the
machine, stabiliser legs should be placed
against the ground.
Approval and legal provisions
The permissible rated operating load capacity
according to CEN standard EN 474-3 is given
as a percentage of the tipping load.
The percentage values, which must not be
exceeded, are as follows:
Uneven ground: 60 % of tipping load
Firm and even ground: 80 % of tipping load
It must be possible to control and handle the
load hydraulically in all likely positions at the
same time as all other hydraulic circles are
actuated. The maximum permissible load
capacity is determined either by the stability of
the machine or its hydraulic capacity
whichever is less.
In countries outside the EU/EEA other
regulations may apply. Therefore, always
check which local rules apply.
119
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك‬
‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ﻧﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ را ﻃﻮري اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻃﻮل ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ƒ
‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و از ﺑﺎر ﺑﻴﺮون ﻧﺰﻧﻨﺪ در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻧﻔﻮذ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎد ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻻﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﭼﻴﺪه ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎر را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎق ﻋﻤﻮدي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻗﺮار‬ ƒ
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎر ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ زاوﻳﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ‬ ƒ
.‫ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﻮازي ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ )ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ را‬ ƒ
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(و اﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺷﺎﺧﻚ را ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
.‫ﻗﺮار دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎر‬
30-40 cm ‫ﺑﺎر را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آورده و در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اي ﺣﺪود‬ ƒ
‫( از زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ دارﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬12-16 in)
. ‫ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري و دﻳﺪ ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺑﺎر را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺗﺮ ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬ ƒ
‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺎﻧﻊ دﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬ ƒ
.‫ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎر را ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ را ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد وﻓﻖ دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي داراي ارﺗﻔﺎع زﻳﺎد از ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎر‬ ƒ
.‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮص اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬
‫ﮔﺮاﭘﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ دارﻧﺪ در اﻳﻦ ﺟﺎ از ﻧﻮع ﺧﺎﺻﻲ از ﺷﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺖ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺶ ﻫﺎي ﺷﺎﺧﻚ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ƒ ﻛﺎﻻﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه و اﻟﻮارﻫﺎي داراي ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﮔﺮد‬
‫ƒ در ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺳﺎزي و ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻢ‬
،‫ﻛﺎﻻﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه و ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮاد ﻓﺸﺮده )ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﺑﺎﻃﻠﻪ‬
.‫( ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬.... ‫ﻣﻮاد ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه و‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺘﺮاك از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
. ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺪار ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﻮﺑﺎت و ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬
EN 474-3 ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره‬CEN ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎري ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﻃﺒﻖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت درﺻﺪي از ﺑﺎر واژﮔﻮﻧﻲ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
: ‫درﺻﺪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪداز آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎوز ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﺎر واژﮔﻮﻧﻲ‬60% : ‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮار‬
‫ ﺑﺎر واژﮔﻮﻧﻲ‬80% : ‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻔﺖ و ﻫﻤﻮار‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻛﻨﺘﺮل و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ در ﻫﺮ‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ و ﻫﻢ زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺑﻮدن ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺪارات ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ دﻳﮕﺮ‬
. ‫وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫از ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ آن ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪام ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ در ﻛﺸﻮرﻫﺎي‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز را ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻧﻴﺰ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬EU/EEA ‫ﺧﺎرج از‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﻮاره ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ اي را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Operating techniques
Material handling arm
Material handling arm
IMPORTANT! Only a material handling
arm approved by Volvo CE for use with the
machine, may be used.
Maximum permissible load for the machine
using a material handling arm is shown in an
"Operating Load Table" on the attachment. Do
not exceed the given limits.
The rated operating load capacity given applies
when the machine is operated on firm and level
ground and is, at the most, half of the tipping
load. When operating on uneven ground, the
load must be adapted to the ground conditions.
A mounting check must be carried out every
time the attachment has been mounted to check
that the attachment is locked.
Check that the attachment is locked by
pressing it against the ground.
In certain countries it is a legal requirement
that regular checks are carried out by an
authorised person, who should also keep a
special inspection diary over these checks.
Positioning of machine
It is important that the ground where the
machine is to be placed is level and firm. If the
ground is soft, contact the management so that
necessary action can be taken.
Loading
ƒ Apply the load table to the actual
extension of the material handling arm.
ƒ Make sure that the pressure in the front
tyres are according to the
recommendations, if the maximum
permissible load is utilised frequently.
Do not lift until you know:
- where the load is to go.
- that it can be placed there.
- that the correct lifting device is used (wire,
chain, etc.).
- that the sling is connected to the load in a
correct way.
- that you have been given the signal to lift, if
a signal man is assisting.
NOTE! The material handling arm must not
be used for a heavier load than has been
specified for the particular arm extension.
warning
The moving or lifting of personnel with the
aid of the material handling arm is not
permitted - risk of injuries.
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎزوي‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﻓﻘﻂ از‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬VolvoCE
‫ﺣﺌﺎﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ داري ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
‫اﺳﺖ در »ﺟﺪول ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎري« ﺑﺮ روي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ از ﺣﺪود ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬. ‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎري ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر ﺑﺮ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﻔﺖ و ﻫﻤﻮار داده‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر در زﻣﻴﻦ‬.‫ﺷﺪه و ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺑﺎر واژﮔﻮﻧﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻫﺮ دﻓﻌﻪ‬. ‫ﻧﺎﻫﻤﻮار ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪود ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺼﺐ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
.‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
. ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﻪ زﻣﻴﻦ از ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪن آن ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫در ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻛﺸﻮرﻫﺎ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ﺑﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ داراي ﻣﺠﻮز وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ‬
.‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت روزاﻧﻪ ﺑﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻈﺎرت دارد‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺖ و ﻫﻤﻮار ﺑﻮدن ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در آﻧﺠﺎ ﻗﺮار‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺣﺎﺋﺰ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ اﺳﺖ اﮔﺮ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺮم ا ﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻳﺮت ﻣﺤﻞ‬
.‫ﻛﺎر ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﻻزم را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎر ﮔﻴﺮي‬
" ‫ƒ ﻃﻮل ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر را ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ "ﺟﺪول ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز‬
.‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً از ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﻬﺮه ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺎ آﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ دارد‬
.‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ از ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ آﮔﺎﻫﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﺎر را ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎر ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﺮود‬ -
.‫ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎر در آﻧﺠﺎ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬ -
‫از وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ آووردن ﺑﺎر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه‬ -
(...،‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬،‫)ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻴﻢ‬.‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬ -
‫در ﺻﻮرت اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻛﻤﻚ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ وي ﺑﺎ‬ -
.‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ دﺳﺖ اﺟﺎزه ي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن را ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ داده ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! از ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎي ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ از آﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮاي دﻧﺒﺎﻟﻪ آن ﺑﺎزو ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دادن ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن اﻓﺮاد ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ‬
.‫ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮوز ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ وﺟﻮد دارد‬-‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﻤﻨﻮع اﺳﺖ‬
120
 Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Material handling arm ‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬

Operating with material ‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬

handling arm
‫ƒ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
ƒ Remember that a small movement at the
attachment bracket becomes a large ‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺰرگ در اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺑﻴﺮوﻧﻲ ﺑﺎزوي‬
movement at the outer end of the material
.‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
handling arm.
ƒ Operate the machine and the material ‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت را ﺑﻪ آراﻣﻲ و ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط‬
handling arm with gentle and careful
movements, so that the load does not start .‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ دﻫﻴﺪ ﻃﻮري ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎر ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎب ﺧﻮردن ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬
to swing. ‫ƒ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ از ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺗﺠﺎوز‬
ƒ Never exceed the maximum permissible
load of the material handling arm. .‫ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
A load table is displayed on one side of the ‫ ﺟﺪول ﺑﺎر ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬، ‫در ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮف ﺧﻮد ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
attachment itself.
ƒ When transporting on, for example, a ‫اﺳﺖ‬
public road, the material handling arm ‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﺜﻼً در ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎده ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎزوي‬
should be fully retracted and the front end
should be tilted rearward. ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً داﺧﻞ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ و اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ آن‬
ƒ Extending or shortening the arm length .‫را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
should be done manually (be aware of the
risk of pinching). ‫ƒ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﻛﺮدن ﻃﻮل ﺑﺎزو را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت دﺳﺘﻲ‬
NOTE! If the length of the material (‫اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ)از ﺧﻄﺮ ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن آن ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
handling arm has been changed, check that
the pins at the ends of the respective sections ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﮔﺮ ﻃﻮل ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺮده‬
have been locked in a secure way (special ‫اﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي اﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
locking pins).
ƒ Only use lifting attachments which are ( ‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ )ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص‬
approved and which do not overload the ‫ƒ ﻓﻘﻂ از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و‬
machine.
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻴﺶ از اﻧﺪازه ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬
Operating with a load ‫ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎر‬
warning
Remember that the stability of the machine !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
when straight is reduced when turning. ‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺪاري اي ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم‬
ƒ When moving with a suspended load,
keep the material handling arm as low as .‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻮدن دارد در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪن ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
possible. The speed should be limited to 6 ‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﻤﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻌﻠﻖ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎزو ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
km/h (3.7 mph). ‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬3.7 mph)6 km/h ‫ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﺤﺪود ﺑﻪ‬
ƒ Use slings to stabilise and to prevent the
load from swinging. ‫ƒ از ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎر و ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺗﺎب‬
ƒ A lift should not be carried out when the .‫ﺧﻮردن آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
force of the wind and the bulk of the load
are such that the load cannot be handled ‫ƒ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﺑﺎر و ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﺎر ﻃﻮري اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن‬
with safety. . ‫اﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر را ﻓﺮاﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎر را ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺪام ﭼﺸﻤﺘﺎن ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﺮ زﻣﺎن ﻧﺘﻮاﻧﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﺎر را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از‬
ƒ Keep your eyes on the load at all times.
If, at any time, you cannot see the load, a ‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر از ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺨﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
signal man must be called in before (‫ را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬123 ‫ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
starting the job. (See page123).
ƒ Operate the material handling arm as .‫ƒ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت آرام ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
smoothly as possible. ‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﻛﺎر آﻧﻬﺎ و ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺳﻜﻮﻧﺘﺸﺎن‬، ‫ƒ ﺑﺎر را از ﺑﺎﻻي ﺳﺮ اﻓﺮاد‬
ƒ Do not move a load above persons, office
and personnel huts. ‫ﻋﺒﻮر ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬
ƒ Under no circumstances should the ‫ƒ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ از ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎﻻ‬
material handling arm be used for pulling
‫ﻛﺸﻴﺪن ﺗﺨﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ اﻟﻮارﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺦ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
up boards or planks which have been
nailed down. Pulling obliquely must not . ‫ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﭼﻴﺰي را ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‬
be done.

‫دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ دﻧﺪه‬

Suitable gear: Gear selector in position 4. : ‫دﻧﺪه ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
4
Mode selector: AUTO-position AUTO ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ :‫ﺳﻠﻜﺘﻮر اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻣﻮد‬
Speed-dependent position or ‫در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎل‬ :BSS
BSS:
not activated

121
 Operating techniques
Rotating attachments
Rotating attachments
Hydraulically powered, rotating
attachments
warning
A machine with a hydraulically powered
attachment must be provided with an
emergency stopping device inside the cab.
The stopping device turns off the power to
the attachment and stops its movement.
For the position of the emergency stop, see
page 23
If the machine is used with hydraulically
powered, rotating working parts, e.g. brush,
bush clearer, sand spreader, the following
general safety rules must be followed:
ƒ The fitting of such attachment for the first
time must only be done by a trained
person.
ƒ Read, understand and follow the
instructions supplied with the attachment.
ƒ Always stop (turn off the hydraulic
supply) the rotating/moving part of the
attachment before you leave the cab.
ƒ When servicing or maintaining the
attachment or in case of the working parts
having come to a standstill while
operating, the hydraulic hoses to the
attachment must be disconnected in order
to prevent accidental engagement of the
hydraulic power, which might result in an
accident.
Check that the attachment in question is CE
marked, if the attachment is not made by Volvo
CE.
Make sure that the dealer has written the
attachment into the " Declaration of
Conformity " for your machine as being an
approved attachment.
warning
To avoid accidents, always find out from the
manufacturer what instructions for safe
handling apply BEFORE you fit and start
using a hydraulically powered attachment.
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي دوار‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي دوار‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ‬، ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي دوار‬
‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ داراي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ اﺳﺖ و ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻳﻚ اﺳﺘﻮپ اﺿﻄﺮاري‬
‫ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺘﻮپ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺪرت ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬.‫در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
. ‫را ﻗﻄﻊ و ﺣﺮﻛﺖ آن را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ در‬. ‫ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬23 ‫ﻣﺤﻞ اﺳﺘﻮپ اﺿﻄﺮاري را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻛﺎري دوار ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺑﺮس و ﻣﺎﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻛﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬
: ‫ﻣﻘﺮرات اﻳﻤﻨﻲ زﻳﺮ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
ً‫ƒ ﺟﺎ زدن اﻳﻦ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي اوﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎ‬
.‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ درك و اﺟﺮا‬،‫ƒ دﺳﺘﻮرﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬/ ‫ƒ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺗﺮك ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت دوار‬
(‫)ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬.‫را ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﻳﺎ در‬
‫ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎﻧﻲ وﻗﻔﻪ ﻣﻲ اﻓﺘﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ از وارد ﺷﺪن اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ‬
.‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ از و ﺑﺮوز ﺣﺎدﺛﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬Volvo CE ‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
‫ را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬CE ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن‬
‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه در »اﻇﻬﺎر ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ« ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات را ﺑﻪ‬
. ‫ﻋﻨﻮان ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ذﻛﺮ ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﭘﻴﺶ از ﻧﺼﺐ و راه‬، ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﭘﺮﻫﻴﺰ از ﺑﺮوز ﺳﻮاﻧﺢ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ‬، ‫اﻧﺪازي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ اﻳﻤﻦ‬
.‫ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ آﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‬
122
 Operating techniques
Signalling diagram
Signalling diagram
If the operator's view is restricted because
of, for example, an obscuring load, a signal
man must be used.
The faster lifting or lowering movements that
are required or the faster the machine should
move, the more lively should the signal man's
movements be carried out. If two or more
operators make use of the same signal man,
there should be an agreement beforehand how
the lift is to be carried out and how the signals
are to be given to the respective operator.
START
Both arms are extended horizontally with
the palms facing forward
‫ﺷﺮوع‬
‫ﻫﺮ دو دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪه و ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
RAISE
Right arm pointing upward with the palm
facing forward and the hand slowly
making a circle
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬. ‫دﺳﺖ راﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫آﻫﺴﺘﮕﻲ دﺳﺖ ﺣﻮل ﻳﻚ داﻳﺮه ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
MOVE FORWARD
Both arms bent with the palms turned
upward and the forearms slowly moving
toward the body several times
‫ﺟﻠﻮ آﻣﺪن‬
‫ دﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻢ ﻣﻲ‬، ‫در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎﻻ ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪه‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر ﺳﺎﻋﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺑﺪن آﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
123
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ دادن‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ دادن‬
‫درﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻳﺪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ دﻻﻳﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻌﺖ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﺑﺎر ﻣﺤﺪود‬
. ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ از ﻛﻤﻚ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬،‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻗﺪر ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫و ﻳﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎل ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﮔﺮ دو اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن از ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ راﻫﻨﻤﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮاﻓﻖ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ در ﻣﻮرد ﻧﺤﻮه ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن دﺳﺖ و ارﺳﺎل‬
.‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از اﭘﺮاﺗﻮرﻫﺎ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
STOP
END
Right arm pointing upward with the palm
Both hands are clasped at chest height
facing forward
‫اﻳﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎن‬
‫دﺳﺖ راﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ اﺳﺖ و ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ اﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ دو دﺳﺖ در ﺟﻠﻮي ﺳﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮ روي ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮار داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
LOWER
Right arm pointing downward with the VERTICAL DISTANCE
palm facing forward and the hand slowly The hands indicate the relevant distance
making a circle
‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ آوردن‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻤﻮدي‬
‫دﺳﺖ راﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ اﺳﺖ و‬ .‫دﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﻪ آﻫﺴﺘﮕﻲ دﺳﺖ ﺣﻮل ﻳﻚ داﻳﺮه ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
MOVE REARWARD
Both arms bent with the palms turned DANGER (EMERGENCY STOP)
downward and the forearms slowly Both arms pointing upward with the palms
moving downward away from the body facing forward
several times
‫ﻋﻘﺐ رﻓﺘﻦ‬ (‫ﺧﻄﺮ )اﺳﺘﻮپ اﺿﻄﺮاري‬
‫ دﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ‬، ‫در ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻒ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪه‬ ‫ ﻛﻒ ﻫﺮ دو دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﺟﻠﻮ ﻗﺮار‬، ‫ﻫﺮ دو دﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ رﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻢ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ و ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر ﺳﺎﻋﺪ در ﺟﻬﺖ دور ﺷﺪن از ﺑﺪن‬ .‫ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫آﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
Operating techniques ‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
Signalling diagram ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ دادن‬

OPERATE IN INDICATED DIRECTION OPERATE IN INDICATED HORIZONTAL DISTANCE

The arm extended horizontally with the palm
facing downward and the arm making small
slow movements to the right
‫ﻛﺎر)ﺣﺮﻛﺖ( در ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬
‫دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪه ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮد و ﺑﺎزو ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف راﺳﺖ آﻫﺴﺘﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ‬
.‫دﻫﺪ‬
DIRECTION The hands indicate the relevant distance
The arm extended horizontally
with the palm facing downward
and the arm making small slow
movements to the left
‫ﻛﺎر )ﺣﺮﻛﺖ(در ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫دﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪه و ﻛﻒ دﺳﺖ‬ .‫دﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ را ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد و ﺑﺎزو ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭼﭗ آﻫﺴﺘﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ‬
.‫دﻫﺪ‬

124
 Operating techniques
Lifting attachments
Lifting attachments
Lifting equipment, such as chain, load
platform, lifting fork and clamping scissors,
must:
ƒ be clearly marked with information about
the highest permissible load.
ƒ correspond to the rules about dimensions
which apply according to local and/or
national regulations.
Regarding regular checks, see the text below.
warning
Never attach a lifting device (chain, sling
or similar) around the teeth on the bucket
when lifting. If a tooth should break, there
is a risk of serious injury.
Running checks of lifting
attachments
Continuous supervision should be carried out
at regular intervals by a knowledgeable and
experienced person and arranged by the
employer. Should wear, cracks or other
deficiencies, which may jeopardise the safety
of the machine or the lifting equipment, be
noticed during the running checks, the machine
or the lifting equipment must not be used.
Other attachments
ƒ Attachments which are only used for
specific purposes often have special safety
instructions. Never start operating with a
special attachment, without first having
found out which regulations apply.
ƒ Find out how the attachments should be
fitted and used and that they are approved
for use with your machine (according to
the Declaration of Conformity ).
Slinging
Boards, planks, reinforcing irons or similar
should have the sling arranged so that they
cannot fall out.
When lifting girders, a pair of girder scissors
should preferably be used.
Place for example cut-up air hoses between the
sling and sharp edges.
The sling should be well tightened.
125
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﻧﺪه‬
‫ ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ و‬، ‫ ﻛﻔﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬، ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ از ﻗﺒﻴﻞ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
: ‫زﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺳﻜﻮي ﺑﺎر ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮ روي آﻧﻬﺎ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪه‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه و اﺑﻌﺎد ﻃﺒﻖ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻛﺸﻮري و ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻣﺘﻦ زﻳﺮ را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﺳﻴﻢ‬، ‫ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن )زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬، ‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﭼﻴﺰي‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ‬. ‫ﺑﻜﺴﻞ و اﻣﺜﺎل آﻧﻬﺎ ( را دور دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻧﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬
. ‫ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮوز ﺟﺮاﺣﺎت ﺟﺪي وﺟﻮد ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﻧﺪه‬
‫ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ در دوره ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮد‬
‫آﮔﺎه و ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎرﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ داده ﺷﻮد در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ‬
‫ ﺗﺮك و‬، ‫ﻛﻪ ﺣﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺎﻳﺺ دﻳﮕﺮي ﻛﻪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮه‬
‫ﻣﻲ اﻧﺪازد ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﺷﻮد ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮاي اﻫﺪاف ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ وﻳﮋه اي دارﻧﺪ‬،‫ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ آن‬،‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺪون آﮔﺎﻫﻲ از ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
.‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ از ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ و ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮرد‬
‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﻮدن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از آﻧﻬﺎ در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ )ﻃﺒﻖ اﻇﻬﺎر ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
.‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ( آﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ زﻧﺠﻴﺮ‬
‫ آرﻣﺎﺗﻮر ﻫﺎ و اﻣﺜﺎل آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺮﺗﺐ‬، ‫ اﻟﻮارﻫﺎ‬،‫ﺗﺨﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
.‫و ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺘﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﺮﻳﺰﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﺗﻴﺮ آﻫﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ از ﻳﻚ ﺟﻔﺖ اﺑﺰار ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن‬
.‫ﺗﻴﺮآﻫﻦ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻗﻴﭽﻲ( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ و ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻴﺰ ﻣﺜﻼً ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ از ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻮاي‬
.‫ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ را ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬.‫ﺑﻪ درد ﻧﺨﻮر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪Operating techniques‬‬
‫‪Getting stuck‬‬
‫‪Getting stuck‬‬
‫‪What to do if the machine gets‬‬
‫‪stuck‬‬
‫‪If the machine has got stuck, it is usually best‬‬
‫‪to reverse out. If you cannot reverse or drive‬‬
‫‪forward, try the following:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﭘﺎﻳﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ را درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1. Engage the differential lock with the foot‬‬
‫‪switch.‬‬
‫‪2. Select a low gear (1st or 2nd).‬‬
‫‪3. Reverse and steer the machine fully to‬‬
‫‪the left and then to the right alternately‬‬
‫‪(like a duck's waddle).‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ ﻓﺮو رﻓﺘﻪ و ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮده اﺳﺖ ﻳﻜﻲ از راه‬
‫‪If only the front wheels have got stuck proceed‬‬
‫‪in either of the following ways:‬‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪Lift the front wheels, supporting the‬‬
‫‪machine on the bottom of a flat bucket‬‬
‫‪and reverse.‬‬
‫‪2.‬‬ ‫‪Steer to the right or to the left, press the‬‬
‫‪bucket against the ground, lift up the‬‬
‫‪front wheels and steer the other way,‬‬
‫در ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮده و دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫‪raise the bucket slightly and reverse.‬‬
‫‪3.‬‬ ‫‪Lift up the front wheels using the‬‬
‫‪bucket. Manually fill the holes under the‬‬
‫‪wheels with branches, pieces of wood or‬‬
‫‪similar and reverse.‬‬
‫‪4.‬‬ ‫‪If the machine needs to be recovered,‬‬
‫‪see page99.‬‬
‫‪You must never engage the differential lock‬‬
‫‪when one of the wheels is slipping. Lower‬‬
‫‪the engine speed until the wheel has stopped.‬‬
‫‪Then engage the differential lock.‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ﻓﺮو رﻓﺘﻦ و ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﻓﺮو رﻓﺘﻦ و ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮو رﻓﺖ و ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﺮد ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﺮد‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺮو رﻓﺘﻪ و ﮔﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد ‪.‬‬
‫در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﺘﻮاﻧﺴﺘﻴﺪ از آن وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ دﻧﺪه ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ )‪ 1‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (2‬اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﻋﻘﺐ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﺮده ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻓﺮﻣﺎن را ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻃﺮف ﭼﭗ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ و ﭘﺲ از آن ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف راﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪).‬ﺷﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺞ راه رﻓﺘﻦ اردك(‬
‫ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ را ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ دادن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻒ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﺗﺨﺖ ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮ را ﺑﺎﻻ آورده و دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف ﭼﭗ ﻳﺎ راﺳﺖ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻃﺮف زﻣﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻻ آﻳﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن را‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻫﺎي درﺧﺘﺎن و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﭼﻮب و اﻣﺜﺎل آﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ دﺳﺖ زﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ را ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ دﻧﺪه ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺎ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﮔﺎه ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ‪،‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 90‬را ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﭼﺮخ ﻫﺎ در ﺣﺎل ﻟﻴﺰ ﺧﻮردن اﺳﺖ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ را درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭼﺮخ‬
‫از ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻗﻔﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ را درﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪126‬‬
Safety when servicing
Safety when servicing
Safety when servicing
This section deals with the safety rules which
must be followed when checking and servicing
the machine. Volvo CE disclaim all
responsibility if other tools, lifting devices or
working methods are used than those described
in this publication.
Further safety rules and information and
warning texts are given within the respective
sections.
NOTE! Lifting with a jack must only be
carried out by trained personnel.
Service position
BEFORE you begin service work the machine
must be placed on level ground and prepared as
shown below.
AFTER you have completed the service, any
guard plates must be re-installed and all engine
covers are to be closed and locked.
1 1 The attachment should be resting on the
ground.
2 Apply the parking brake.
3 Stop the engine and take out the ignition
key. (Does not apply when checking oil
level in transmission).
4 Carefully release the pressure in pressure
lines and pressure vessels to avoid risks.
5 Attach a black and yellow label to the
steering wheel.
6 Connect the frame joint lock.
7 Block the wheels in a suitable way
(with, for example, wedges).
8 Allow the machine to cool.
127
warning
If work has to be carried out on
the machine before it has cooled
down, care must observed with
regard to hot liquids and hot
machine partsris of burns.
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺧﻨﻚ ﺷﺪن‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت داغ و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت داغ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻳﻦ‬
.‫ﻛﺎر ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ اﺣﺘﻴﺎط اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ در ﻣﻮرد رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺣﺎل ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ وﻟﻮو ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻲ در ﻗﺒﺎل‬.‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺟﻜﻬﺎ و روش ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ در اﻳﻦ ﻛﺘﺎب ذﻛﺮ‬،‫اﺑﺰارآﻻت دﻳﮕﺮ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﻧﺪارد‬
‫ و اﻃﻼﻋﺎت و ﻫﺸﺪارﻫﺎ در ﺑﺨﺶ‬، ‫ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬،‫در اداﻣﻪ‬
.‫ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﻚ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ‬
.‫ﺷﺨﺺ آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬
(‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻘﺮار )ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ‬
. ‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد و ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ زﻳﺮ آﻣﺎده ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن رﺳﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ دوﺑﺎره ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎورﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﺠﺪداً ﺑﺴﺘﻪ و ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﺎري )اﺟﺰاء ﻛﺎر ﺳﺎز( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬1
.‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2
.‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ را ﺧﺎرج ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬3
‫)زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ را ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬
(‫را ﺧﺎرج ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺮاي رﻋﺎﻳﺖ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط ﭘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر را ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬4
.‫ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ ﺳﻴﺎه و زرد را روي ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬5
.‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ را وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬6
ً‫ ﭼﺮﺧﻬﺎ را در وﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ )ﻣﺜﻼ‬7
(‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﮔﻮه‬
‫ ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺧﻨﻚ ﺷﻮد‬8
‫‪Safety when servicing‬‬ ‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫‪Before service read‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺨﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬

‫‪Before service read‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺨﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬

‫‪Prevent personal injuries‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺻﺪﻣﺎت ﻓﺮدي‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺑﺎزدﻳﺪ دوره اي ﻛﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ‬
‫‪ƒ Read the Operator's Manual before‬‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺧﻮاﻧﺪن‬
‫‪beginning any service work. It is also‬‬ ‫و ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻪ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت و دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ روي ﺑﺮ‬
‫‪important to read and follow the‬‬ ‫ﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ و ﺻﻔﺤﺎت روي ﻗﻄﻌﺎت اراﺋﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪information and instructions given on‬‬
‫ƒ از ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪن ﻟﺒﺎس ﻫﺎي ﮔﺸﺎد و ﺟﻮاﻫﺮ آﻻت ﺧﻮد داري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪plates and decals.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Do not wear loose-fitting clothes or jewellery,‬‬ ‫زﻳﺮا ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻣﻴﺎن ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﮔﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫‪which may catch and lead to injury.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Always wear a hard hat, protective‬‬ ‫ƒ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ از ﻛﻼه اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ‪ ،‬دﺳﺘﻜﺶ‪ ،‬ﻛﻔﺶ‬
‫‪goggles, gloves, protective shoes and‬‬ ‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ و دﻳﮕﺮ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪other protective articles when required.‬‬ ‫ƒ در ﺟﺎﻫﺎي ﺳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ وﺟﻮد‬
‫‪ƒ Make sure that there is sufficient ventilation‬‬ ‫دارد‪.‬‬
‫‪when starting the engine indoors.‬‬
‫ƒ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Do not stand in front of or behind the‬‬
‫‪machine while the engine is running.‬‬ ‫ƒ اﮔﺮ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺟﻜﻬﺎي ﻟﻴﻔﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪،‬‬
‫‪ƒ If service work has to be carried out‬‬ ‫ﻧﺨﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد )اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي اﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪under raised lifting arms, these must first‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ و ﻟﻴﻮر ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﻟﻴﻮر را در‬
‫‪be made safe. (Engage the control lever‬‬ ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﻌﺎل ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ و ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪lockout and apply the parking brake, if‬‬ ‫ƒ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ روي رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬
‫)‪the machine is equipped with such.‬‬
‫و از اﻳﻦ دﺳﺖ ﻛﺎورﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Stop the engine before opening engine‬‬
‫‪hoods, radiator casing and similar covers.‬‬ ‫ƒ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻫﻨﻮز ﻣﻘﺪاري ﻓﺸﺎر در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪ƒ When the engine has been stopped, there‬‬ ‫ﭘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وﺟﻮد دارد‪ .‬اﮔﺮ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر‪،‬‬
‫‪is still accumulated pressure in the‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎز ﺷﻮد ﻣﺎﻳﻊ درون آن ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎد ﺑﻴﺮون‬
‫‪pressurised systems. If a system is opened‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 109‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪without having first released all pressure,‬‬ ‫ƒ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ از ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪liquid under high pressure will jet out, see‬‬
‫ﺳﺨﺖ ﺗﺮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و از دﺳﺖ ﺧﻮد ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫‪page 109.‬‬
‫‪ƒ When looking for possible leaks, use a piece‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪of paper or stiff board, not your hand.‬‬ ‫ƒ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ رﻛﺎب ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬دﺳﺘﮕﻴﺮه ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﺣﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪ƒ Make sure that stepping surfaces,‬‬ ‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً از روﻏﻦ ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ‪ ،‬آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ و‬
‫‪handholds and slip protected surfaces are‬‬ ‫ﻳﺦ ﭘﺎك ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ وﺟﻪ روي ﺳﻄﻮﺣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺎ‬
‫‪free from oil, diesel fuel, dirt and ice.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻦ و ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﻛﺮدن ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪه اﻧﺪ ﭘﺎ ﻧﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Never step on surfaces on the machine‬‬ ‫ƒ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و اﺑﺰار آﻻت ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪that are not intended for this.‬‬
‫‪ƒ It is important that correct tools and‬‬ ‫اﺑﺰار آﻻت ﺧﺮاب ﻳﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪equipment are used. Faulty tools or‬‬ ‫اﺑﺰار ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪defective equipment must be repaired or‬‬
‫‪replaced.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﻳﺪن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ از آن را از زﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫‪Prevent machine damage‬‬
‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫‪ƒ When lifting or supporting the machine‬‬
‫‪or parts of the machine, make sure that‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺑﺎر را دارﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪the equipment you are using has‬‬ ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ را وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫‪sufficient lifting capacity.‬‬ ‫‪.‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻧﻈﺎرت اﻓﺮاد آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه‬
‫‪ƒ When lifting the machine, the frame joint‬‬ ‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 102‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪must be locked and the machine lifted at the‬‬ ‫اﺑﺰار ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ )ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻞ و‪ ، (...‬آﭼﺎرﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬روﺷﻬﺎي ﻛﺎري‪،‬‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫‪eyes intended for this purpose, see page102.‬‬
‫رواﻧﺴﺎزﻫﺎ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮر ﻛﻪ در‬
‫‪ƒ Lifting devices, tools, working methods,‬‬
‫‪lubricants and spare parts prescribed in‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎرﺑﺮي ذﻛﺮ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﻮرد‬
‫‪the Operator's Manual must be used.‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻨﺼﻮرت ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫‪Volvo CE will not accept any‬‬ ‫وﻟﻮو ‪ CE‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻮع ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻲ در ﻗﺒﺎل آﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪responsibility if this is not followed.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻧﻜﺮدن از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ رﺳﺪ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ƒ Make sure that no tools or other objects,‬‬ ‫ﻧﺨﻮاﻫﺪ داﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪which may cause damage, are left inside‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ اﺑﺰار وﻳﺎ ﺷﻲ اي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫‪or on the machine.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Release the pressure in the hydraulic‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ داﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺟﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻧﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪system before beginning service work.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ را‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫‪ƒ Never adjust a reducing valve to a higher‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪pressure than what is recommended by‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ وﺟﻪ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﻓﺸﺎر را روي ﻓﺸﺎري ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ﺣﺪ‬ ‫ƒ‬
‫‪the manufacturer.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮار ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪128‬‬
Safety when servicing
Before service read
ƒ Machines, which are used within a
contaminated or in any other way
unhealthy area, must be equipped for
such work. Special safety regulations
apply when servicing such a machine.
ƒ When installing two-way radio, mobile
telephone or similar equipment, the
installation must be carried out according
to the instructions from the manufacturer
in order to eliminate interference with the
electronic system and components
intended for the function of the machine,
see page10.
ƒ Measures during electric welding, see
page155.
ƒ Make sure that all covers on the machine
are in position before starting the engine
and putting the machine to work.
ƒ Use the three-point method (two feet and
one hand) when cleaning or scraping the
windscreen.
Prevent environmental influence
Be conscious of the environment when
carrying out service and maintenance. Oil and
other liquids dangerous to the environment and
released into the environment will cause
damage. Oil degrades very slowly in water and
sediment. One litre of oil can destroy millions
of litres of drinking water.
NOTE! In common for all points below is
that all waste is to be handed over to a
treatment and disposal firm approved by
the authorities.
ƒ When draining, oils and liquids must be
collected in suitable vessels and steps
taken to avoid spillage.
ƒ Used filters must be drained of all liquid
before they are passed on as waste. Used
filters from machines which work in
environments with asbestos or other
dangerous dust, must be placed in the bag
supplied with the new filter.
ƒ Batteries contain substances dangerous to
the environment and health. Used
batteries must therefore be handled as
waste dangerous to the environment.
ƒ Consumables, e.g. used rags, gloves and
bottles may also be contaminated with
oils and liquids dangerous to the
environment and must in that case be
treated as waste dangerous to the
environment.
129
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺨﻮاﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻜﺎن ﻫﺎي آﻟﻮده ﻳﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫دﻳﮕﺮ از آﻧﻬﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬. ‫ﻛﺎرﺑﺮي ﻫﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﺎ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻲ‬،‫ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات از اﻳﻦ دﺳﺖ‬،‫ƒ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪه ﺑﻲ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ و راه اﻧﺪازي ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ اﺣﺘﻤﺎل ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬10 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻫﺎ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻧﻴﻜﻲ از ﺑﻴﻦ رود‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در ﻃﻮل ﻣﺪت ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺑﺮق رﻋﺎﻳﺖ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬155 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎم در ﭘﻮش ﻫﺎ‬
.‫و ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن و ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از روش ﺳﻪ‬
.‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اﺗﻜﺎ )دو ﭘﺎ و ﻳﻚ دﺳﺖ( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از اﺛﺮات ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ رواﻧﺴﺎزﻫﺎ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت اﮔﺮ ﺑﺮاي‬. ‫اﻃﺮاف ﺧﻮد ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ اﻃﺮاف ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ و رﻫﺎ ﻛﺮدن آﻧﻬﺎ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ روﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ اﻃﺮاف ﺷﻮد‬
‫آﻫﺴﺘﮕﻲ در آب رﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و رﺳﻮب ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮن ﻫﺎ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ آب آﺷﺎﻣﻴﺪﻧﻲ را ﻣﺴﻤﻮم‬
.‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ذﻛﺮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ از ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺿﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري و از ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮدن ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﺠﺎت ﺑﺎزﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻮرد‬
.‫ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ داده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ƒ روﻏﻦ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻲ ﻣﺮاﺣﻠﻲ در ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺟﻤﻊ‬
.‫آوري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ از ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﻪ دور اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻦ از ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﭘﺮ از ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر‬.‫ﻣﺎﻳﻌﻲ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫و ذرات ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ در‬
.‫ﻛﻴﺴﻪ ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎي ﺣﺎوي ﻣﻮادي ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ و ﺳﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﺪه ﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﺰ ﺿﺎﻳﻌﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫وﺳﺎﻳﻞ و ﻟﻮازم ﻣﺼﺮف ﺷﺪه ﻣﺜﻞ ﭘﺎرﭼﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻬﻨﻪ دﺳﺘﻜﺸﻬﺎي‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ و ﺑﻄﺮي ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ روﻏﻦ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت آﻟﻮده ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ و ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺿﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك‬
. ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﻓﻊ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
Safety when servicing
Fire protection
Fire protection
warning
If a machine is used in an environment, where the risk of
fire is particularly high, e.g. in explosive environment,
special equipment is required.
There is always a risk of fire. Find out which type fire
extinguisher that is used at your place of work and how it is
used.
If the machine is to be provided with a hand-held fire
extinguisher, it should be of the ABE (in North America
ABC) type. The designation ABE means that it is possible to
extinguish fires in both solid and liquid organic material and
that the fire extinguishing compound does not conduct
electricity. The efficiency class I means that the time the
extinguisher is effective must not be less than 8 seconds, class
II at least 11 seconds and class III at least 15 seconds.
A hand-held fire extinguisher ABE I normally corresponds to
an extinguishing powder content of 4 kg (8.8 lb) (EN-grade
13A89BC), the EN 3-1995 standard, parts 1, 2, 4 and 5.
Preventive fire protection
ƒ Do not smoke and make sure that there is no open flame
near the machine when filling with fuel or when the fuel
system has been opened and in contact with the
surrounding air.
ƒ Diesel fuel is flammable and must not be used for
cleaning. Use car care products intended for cleaning or
degreasing. Also bear in mind that certain solvents may
cause skin rash, damage the paint finish and constitute a
fire hazard
ƒ Keep the place where the service is to be carried out clean.
Oil and water may make the floor slippery and are also
dangerous in connection with electrical equipment or
electrical tools. Oily or greasy clothes are a serious fire
hazard.
ƒ Check daily that the machine and the equipment, e.g.
underbody plates are free from dust and oil. In addition to
that the risk of fire is reduced it will be easier to detect
faulty or loose components.
ƒ .‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
NOTE! Observe great care when using high-pressure
wash when cleaning. Electrical components and electrical
cables may be damaged even at moderately high pressure
and temperature. Protect electrical leads in an
appropriate way.
ƒ Take extra care when cleaning a machine that is used in a
fire-sensitive environment, e.g. sawmill and refuse dumps.
The risk of spontaneous combustion can be further
reduced by, for example, installing insulation around the
silencer guard,137.
ƒ It is important that the fire extinguisher is maintained so
that it works when it is required.
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ اﺣﺘﻤﺎل آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي زﻳﺎد اﺳﺖ‬
‫ از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل در ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮاد ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮه وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ از ﻃﺮز ﻛﺎر و ﻧﻮع وﺳﺎﻳﻞ و ﻛﭙﺴﻮل ﻫﺎي آﺗﺶ‬،‫ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﻫﻤﻮاره وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ و ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎر ﺧﻮد اﻃﻼع دﻗﻴﻖ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ اﮔﺮ در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﭙﺴﻮل آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ دﺳﺘﻲ‬
.‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ABC ‫ )و در آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎي ﺷﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬ABE ‫ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ از اﻧﻮاع‬
‫ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان آﺗﺶ را ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت و ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻣﺪاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ از‬ABE ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫ ﻛﻼس‬.‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮد‬،‫ﺟﻨﺲ آﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ رﺳﺎﻧﺎي ﺟﺮﻳﺎن اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬8 ‫ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪت ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻣﻮاد ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬I ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
.‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬15 ‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬III ‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ و در ﻛﻼس ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬11 ‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬II ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ درﻛﻼس ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎدي ﺣﺎوي ﭘﻮدر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬I ‫ درﺟﻪ‬ABE ‫ﻛﭙﺴﻮل آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ دﺳﺘﻲ‬
EN3- ‫( اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬EN-grade 13A89BC) (8/8 Ib) ‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﮔﺮم‬4 ‫اي ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
.5,4,2,1 ‫ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎي‬. ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1995
‫ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪات ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻴﮕﺎر ﻧﻜﺸﻴﺪ و ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﮔﻴﺮي و ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻫﻮا در ارﺗﺒﺎط اﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﻌﻠﻪ اي در ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ‬
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪارد‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ دﻳﺰل ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺷﺘﻌﺎل اﺳﺖ و ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن از آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد از ﻣﻮاد‬
‫ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻨﺪه و ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن روﻏﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻮاره ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎد‬
‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻼل ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ آﺳﻴﺐ و ﺑﻪ رﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﺳﻴﺐ‬
.‫ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ و ﻫﻤﻮاره ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي را در ﭘﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮار اﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در آﻧﺠﺎ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺷﻮد را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ آب و روﻏﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ را ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ و در ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ و ﻟﻮازم ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﺎز ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﭘﺎرﭼﻪ ﻫﺎي روﻏﻨﻲ و ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺟﺪاً ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻛﻲ آﺗﺶ زا ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﺮ روز ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات آﻧﺮا ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل ﭘﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ‬،‫از روﻏﻦ و ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك ﭘﺎك ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮزي را ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺷﻞ و ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ راﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ از آب ﭘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ و ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺮق رﺳﺎﻧﻲ در دﻣﺎ و ﻓﺸﺎر ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ از وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬. ‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎ ي ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺎﻻي‬.‫ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ دﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﭼﻮب ﺑﺮي ﺑﺎ اﻧﺒﺎر ﺿﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي در اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل ﻋﺎﻳﻖ در اﻃﺮاف‬
.‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ اﮔﺰوز ﻛﺎﻫﺶ داد‬
‫ƒ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري از ﻛﭙﺴﻮل آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ در ﻣﻮاﻗﻊ ﺿﺮوري‬
.‫ﻛﺎراﻳﻲ ﻻزم را داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
130
Safety when servicing
Fire protection
ƒ Check that fuel lines, hydraulic and brake hoses and
electrical cables have not been damaged by chafing or are
not in danger of being damaged in that way because of
incorrect installation or clamping. This applies particularly
to unfused cables, which are red and marked R (B+) and
routed:
- between the batteries
- between battery and starter motor
- between alternator and starter motor
Electrical cables must not lie directly against oil or fuel lines.
ƒ Do not weld or grind on components which are filled with
flammable liquids, e.g. tanks and hydraulic pipes. Exercise
care with such work in the proximity of such places. A fire
extinguisher should be kept near to hand.
Actions in case of fire
If the circumstances permit and your own safety is not
endangered, take the following steps at the slightest sign of
fire:
1 Drive the machine to a safe place to prevent the fire from
spreading.
2 Lower the attachment to the ground.
3 Turn the ignition switch key to the stop position.
4 Leave the cab.
5 Turn off the battery disconnect switch.
6 Try to extinguish the fire. If necessary call the fire
brigade.
Actions after fire
When handling a machine which has been damaged by
fire or been exposed to other intense heat, the following
protective steps must under all circumstances be taken:
ƒ Use protective goggles and thick protective gloves made
of rubber.
ƒ Never touch burnt components with your bare hands to
avoid contact with melted polymers. First wash thoroughly
with plenty of lime water (a solution of calcium
hydroxide, i.e. slaked lime in water).
ƒ Handling of heated fluoro-carbon rubber, see page133.
131
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي‬
‫ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي روﻏﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و ﻫﻴﺪر وﻟﻴﻚ و ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي‬،‫ƒ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎن‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﺶ و ﻳﺎ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻧﺎدرﺳﺖ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮرد اﻏﻠﺐ‬.‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻧﺪﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﺧﻄﺮ آﻓﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ دارﻧﺪ و در اﺗﺼﺎل‬R(B+) ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎي ﺟﺪا ﺷﺪه ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ رﻧﮓ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ و ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
:‫ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ در ذﻳﻞ آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي ﻫﺎ‬ -
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي و ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ -
‫ﺑﻴﻦ آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر و ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ -
.‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺮق رﺳﺎن ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً در ﻣﻌﺮض روﻏﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ وﺟﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ اي را ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮ از ﻣﻮاد آﺗﺶ زاﺳﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل ﺗﺎﻧﻚ ﻫﺎ و ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﻮاره در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن در ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬.‫ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﻛﭙﺴﻮل آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ و در دﺳﺘﺮس ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬. ‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
ƒ
‫ﻛﺎرﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم داد‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ و ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت زﻳﺮ را در‬
:‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ اﻣﻦ ﺑﺮاﻧﻴﺪ و از ﺷﻴﻮع آﺗﺶ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬ 1
.‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬ 2
.‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 3
.‫از ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬ 4
.‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬ 5
.‫ اﮔﺮ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ آﺗﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻲ را ﺧﺒﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬.‫ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ آﺗﺶ را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 6
.‫ﻛﺎرﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ از آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻪ در اﺛﺮ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪه ﻳﺎ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﮔﺮﻣﺎي ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺮار‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺣﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ زﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺳﺮ و ﻛﺎر دارﻳﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ و دﺳﺘﻜﺶ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻔﺖ از ﺟﻨﺲ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺑﭙﻮﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﺳﻮﺧﺘﻪ را ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎ دﺳﺖ ﺧﻮد ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا اﻣﻜﺎن ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاد ﭘﻠﻴﻤﺮي‬
‫ اﺑﺘﺪا ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎ را ﺑﺎ آب آﻫﻚ ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ دﻫﻴﺪ )ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻃﻲ از‬.‫ﻣﺬاب وﺟﻮد دارد‬
(‫ آﻫﻚ داﺧﻞ آب‬،‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮاي رﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ در آن ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻓﻠﻮﺋﻮرﻛﺮﺑﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺣﺮارت ﻗﺮار‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬133 ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
 Safety when servicing
Handling hazardous substances
Handling hazardous substances
Heated paint
warning
All paint decomposes when heated and forms compounds,
which may cause irritation and in case of prolonged or
repeated exposure be very health-impairing.
When heated, paint gives off poisonous gases. Therefore, the
paint must be removed from an area of at least 10 cm (4 in)
from the spot where welding, grinding or gas cutting is to be
carried out. In addition to the health hazard, the weld will be of
inferior quality and strength, which in the future may cause the
weld to break.
Methods and precautionary measures when removing paint
ƒ Blasting
− use respirator and protective goggles
ƒ Paint remover or other chemicals
use a portable air extractor, respirator and protective gloves
ƒ Grinding machine
− use a portable air extractor, respirator and protective
gloves and protective goggles
Painted parts that have been discarded must never be burnt.
They must be taken care of by an approved refuse handling
plant.
Rubber and plastics which have been heated
Polymer materials can, when heated, form compounds which
are dangerous to health and environment and must therefore
never be burned when scrapped.
If gas cutting or welding is to be carried out near such
materials, the following safety instructions must be
followed:
− Protect the material from heat.
− Use protective gloves, protective goggles and an approved
respirator.
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮاد ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﺎز‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮاد ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﺎز‬
‫رﻧﮓ ﺣﺮارت دﻳﺪه‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎم رﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺣﺮارت ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ اﺟﺰاي ﺧﻮد ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻳﻦ اﺟﺰاء ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ و ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺷﺪن زﻣﺎن ﺣﺮارت ﻳﺎ ﺗﻜﺮار اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮه اﻓﺘﺎدن ﺳﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬
. ‫وﻗﺘﻲ رﻧﮓ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺣﺮارت ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد از ﺧﻮد ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي ﺳﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ اﻳﻨﭻ( از ﻣﺤﻞ‬4) ‫ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‬10 ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ رﻧﮓ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ ﻋﻼوه ﺑﺮ ﺗﻬﺪﻳﺪ‬. ‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎري و ﻳﺎ ﻫﻮا ﺑﺮش ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬،‫ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري‬
‫ﺳﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ و اﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺖ ﺟﻮش ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ در آﻳﻨﺪه‬
.‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻦ ﺟﻮش ﺷﻮد‬
.‫راﻫﻜﺎرﻫﺎ و ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎي اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﺮاي زدودن رﻧﮓ‬
(‫ƒ ﺑﻼﺳﺖ ﻛﺮدن )اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺷﺎت ﺑﻼﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻨﺪ ﺑﻼﺳﺖ‬
.‫ از ﻣﺎﺳﻚ و دﺳﺘﻜﺶ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-
‫ƒ رﻧﮓ ﺑﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎت ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ‬
.‫ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ و دﺳﺘﻜﺶ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ از ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﺳﻴﺎر‬-
‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺮاﺷﻜﺎري‬
.‫ دﺳﺘﻜﺶ و ﻋﻴﻨﻚ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ‬،‫از ﻫﻮاﻛﺶ ﺳﻴﺎر‬ -
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎي رﻧﮓ ﺷﺪه اي ﻛﻪ از رده ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻮزاﻧﺪه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ و‬
.‫ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﻃﺮﺣﻲ ﻣﺼﻮب ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ و ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮارت دﻳﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮاد ﭘﻠﻴﻤﺮي ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮارت دﻳﺪن اﺟﺰاي ﺧﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻼﻣﺖ و ﻣﺤﻴﻂ اﻃﺮاف ﺑﺴﻴﺎر‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ از رده ﺧﺎرج ﻣﻲ‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻲ دﻫﻨﺪ ﺳﻮزاﻧﺪه ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫اﮔﺮ در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮاد ﻫﻮا ﺑﺮش ﻳﺎ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
:‫ﻫﺎي اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻮاد را دور از ﺣﺮارت ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬ -
.‫ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ و ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﻮي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫از دﺳﺘﻜﺶ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ‬ -
132
Safety when servicing
Handling hazardous substances
Fluoro-carbon rubber which has been heated
warning
Certain seals, which are intended to withstand high
operating temperatures, e.g. in engines, control valves,
hydraulic motors and pumps, may be made from fluoro-
carbon rubber. When heated to high temperatures, fluoro-
carbon rubber decomposes to hydrogen fluoride and
hydrofluoric acid, which is very corrosive to skin and
respiratory tracts.
When handling a machine which has been damaged by
fire or been exposed to other intense heat, the following
protective steps must under all circumstances be taken:
ƒ Use thick, gloves made of rubber and wear protective
goggles.
ƒ Discard gloves, rags etc. that been in contact with heated
fluoro-carbon rubber after having first washed them in
lime water (a solution by calcium hydroxide, i.e. slaked
lime in water)
ƒ The area around a part that has been very hot and which
may be made of fluoro-carbon rubber must be
decontaminated through thorough and ample washing with
lime water.
ƒ As a precautionary measure all seals (O-rings and other oil
seals) must be handled as if they were made from fluoro-
carbon rubber.
ƒ The hydrofluoric acid may remain on the machine parts for
several years after a fire.
ƒ If swelling, redness or a burning sensation occurs and one
suspects that the cause may be contact with heated fluoro-
carbon rubber contact a medical doctor immediately.
Symptoms may not appear until after several hours
without any previous warning.
ƒ The acid cannot be rinsed or washed away from the skin.
In stead treat with Hydrofluoric Acid Burn Jelly or similar
before contacting a doctor.
Refrigerant
NOTE! All types of service of the air conditioning unit
must be carried out at accredited workshops by, or under
the supervision of, a person in a position of authority with
certified competence.
warning
The refrigerant R134a easily causes frost-bites, when it
comes into contact with bare skin. When heated gases are
formed and these may be harmful to lungs and the
nervous system.
The air-conditioning unit of the machine is filled with
refrigerant R134a at the factory. R134a has no damaging
effect on the ozone layer of the atmosphere, however, it
contributes to the greenhouse effect and must therefore never
purposely be released into the open air.
IMPORTANT! R134a must never be mixed with any other
kind of refrigerant, e.g. R12, as this will cause the unit to
fail.
133
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮاد ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﺎز‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻓﻠﻮرو ﻛﺮﺑﻦ ﺣﺮارت دﻳﺪه‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
، ‫آب ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر در دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ آب ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي درون ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ از ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ‬، ‫ ﻫﻴﺪرو ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﭘﻤﭙﻬﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬،‫ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل‬
‫ﻓﻠﻮرو ﻛﺮﺑﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺣﺮارت ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻓﻠﻮرو ﻛﺮﺑﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﺪروژن ﻓﻠﻮرﻳﺪ و ﻫﻴﺪرو ﻓﻠﻮرﻳﻚ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ در ﭘﻮﺳﺖ و‬
.‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺗﻨﻔﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ را ﻛﻪ دﭼﺎر آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و ﻳﺎ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﮔﺮﻣﺎ و ﺣﺮارت‬
‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ در ﻫﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت اﻳﻤﻨﻲ زﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻮرت‬،‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫ƒ از دﺳﺘﻜﺶ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻛﻠﻔﺖ و ﻋﻴﻨﻚ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ دﺳﺘﻜﺸﻬﺎ و ﭘﺎرﭼﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻠﻮرو ﻛﺮﺑﻦ در ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﻮده اﻧﺪ را اﺑﺘﺪا ﺑﺎ آب و آﻫﻚ‬
‫ آﻫﻚ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط در آب( ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ داده ﺳﭙﺲ دور‬،‫)ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻃﻲ از ﻫﻴﺪروﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﺴﻴﻢ‬
.‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪازﻳﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ اﻃﺮاف آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﺑﺴﻴﺎر داغ اﺳﺖ و ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻠﻮرو ﻛﺮﺑﻦ آﻟﻮده‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ آب و آﻫﻚ ﻓﺮاوان ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ آن را از ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮود‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮاي ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮي از ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻤﺎم آب ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﺟﻨﺲ ﻓﻠﻮرو ﻛﺮﺑﻦ ﻓﺮض‬
( ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )اورﻳﻨﮓ و دﻳﮕﺮ آب ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ƒ اﺳﻴﺪ ﻫﻴﺪرو ﻓﻠﻮرﻳﻚ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺳﺎل ﻫﺎ ﭘﺲ از آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﻫﻢ در ﻗﻄﻌﺎت‬
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺷﺪﮔﻲ و اﺣﺴﺎس ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ در ﻓﺮدي روﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻓﺮد‬،‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﺗﻮرم‬
‫ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ‬.‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﻠﻮرو ﻛﺮﺑﻦ ﺗﻤﺎس داﺷﺘﻪ و ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ رﺳﺎﻧﺪه ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ از ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺪون ﻫﻴﭻ ﻋﻼﺋﻤﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻗﺒﻞ از رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﭘﺰﺷﻚ‬. ‫ƒ اﺳﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ و آﺑﻜﺸﻲ از روي ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﭘﺎك ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ از ژل ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ اﺳﻴﺪ ﻫﻴﺪروﻓﻠﻮرﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺳﺮد ﺳﺎز‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﺗﻤﺎم ﻗﻄﻌﺎت و ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
.‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ و ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺷﻮد‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﻴﺪا ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﺮ ﻣﺎزدﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و‬R134a ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬
‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﺣﺮارت ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد از ﺧﻮد ﮔﺎزﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ‬
.‫ﺷﺶ ﻫﺎ و دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻋﺼﺒﻲ اﺛﺮات زﻳﺎﻧﺒﺎر ﻣﻴﮕﺬارد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ اوزون‬R134a. ‫ ﭘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬R134a ‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ از‬
‫آﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﻤﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﺪ وﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪ اﺛﺮ ﮔﻠﺨﺎﻧﻪ اي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در‬
.‫ﻓﻀﺎي آزاد رﻫﺎ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ از ﻛﺎر‬R12 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭽﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ دﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺜﺎل‬R134a !‫ﻣﻬﻢ‬
. ‫اﻓﺘﺎدن دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Safety when servicing
Handling hazardous substances
In case of contact with escaping refrigerant, the following
actions must be taken:
ƒ The gases, which are formed when refrigerant is heated
may have seriously harmful effects on lungs and the
nervous system even at low concentrations and when no
smell is detectable. High concentrations have a narcotic
effect. An exposed person must be moved out of the
danger area out into the open air. Seek medical advice if
there are remaining symptoms.
ƒ In liquid form, the refrigerant may cause frost-bite.
Carefully heat the injured area with lukewarm water or
warm clothes. Seek medical advice, if there are remaining
symptoms.
ƒ Seek medical advice, if liquid refrigerant has come into
contact with someone's eyes.
ƒ If a leak is suspected, leave the dangerous area and contact
an accredited workshop to obtain information about what
action should be taken.
Batteries
warning
Batteries contains sulphuric acid, which is very corrosive to
skin.
ƒ Do not smoke near batteries, as these give off explosive
gases.
ƒ Make sure that metal objects, e.g. tools, rings and watch
straps, do not come into contact with the battery pole
studs.
ƒ Make sure that the battery pole stud protections always are
in place.
ƒ Do not tilt a battery in any direction. Battery electrolyte
may leak out.
ƒ Do not connect a discharged battery in series with a fully
charged battery. Risk of explosion.
ƒ When removing a battery, disconnect the ground cable
first and when installing, connect the ground cable last to
reduce the risk of sparks.
ƒ Discarded batteries must be taken care of according to
current national regulations.
Charging batteries, see page153.
Starting with booster batteries, see page154.
‫اﻳﻤﻨﻲ در ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ و ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻮاد ﺧﻄﺮ ﺳﺎز‬
.‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﺸﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺮون رﻳﺨﺘﻦ ﻣﺒﺮد اﻳﻦ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﮔﺎزﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در اﺛﺮ ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن ﻣﺒﺮد ﻣﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ اﺛﺮات‬
‫زﻳﺎﻧﺒﺎري ﺑﺮ ﺷﺶ ﻫﺎ و دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻋﺼﺒﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻮارض ﺣﺘﻲ در زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻴﺎل ﻛﻢ اﺳﺖ و ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﻮﻳﻲ از آن اﺳﺘﺸﻤﺎم ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻮﺟﻮد‬
‫ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﻌﺮض ﮔﺎز‬. ‫ در ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ زﻳﺎد ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﻮاب آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬.‫آﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﺎد ﺷﺪه ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ از ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﻤﻮم ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﺮده ﺷﻮد و در ﻫﻮاي آزاد‬
‫ اﮔﺮ اﺛﺮات ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎن اداﻣﻪ داﺷﺖ و ﻣﺸﻬﻮد ﺑﻮد از اﻣﺪادﻫﺎي ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ‬.‫ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
.‫ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ƒ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺒﺮد ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎن ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺗﻤﺎس ﻳﺎﻓﺖ از اﻣﺪاد ﻫﺎي‬
.‫ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ƒ اﮔﺮ در دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﻧﺸﺘﻲ وﺟﻮد داﺷﺖ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك را ﺗﺮك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ و در ﻣﻮرد اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﺑﻌﺪي اﻃﻼع ﻛﺴﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮي ﻫﺎ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮي ﻫﺎ ﺣﺎوي اﺳﻴﺪ ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻮرﻳﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ƒ در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي ﻫﺎ از اﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل دﺧﺎﻧﻴﺎت ﺧﻮد داري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا ﺑﺎﻃﺮي از ﺧﻮد‬
.‫ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﻣﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻠﺰي ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎي‬،‫ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ‬، ‫ƒ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ وﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻠﺰي ﻣﺜﻞ اﺑﺰار‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮي ﺗﻤﺎس ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ƒ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﻔﺎظ روي ﻗﻄﺒﻬﺎي ﺑﺎﻃﺮي ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﺸﺎن ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫ƒ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي را ﺗﻜﺎن ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا آب ﺑﺎﻃﺮي ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮون ﻧﺸﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺪه را ﻫﻴﭻ وﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺳﺮي ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي ﻛﺎﻣﻼً د ﺷﺎرژ‬
.‫وﺻﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا ﺧﻄﺮ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ اﺑﺘﺪا ﺳﻴﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺪﻧﻪ را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و در‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺼﺐ دوﺑﺎره آن در ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺳﻴﺴﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺪﻧﻪ را وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ زدن‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
.‫ƒ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي ﻫﺎي ﺧﺎرج از رده ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻲ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻛﺸﻮري ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬153 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﻃﺮي ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬154 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺑﺮاي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺑﺎﻃﺮي ﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬
134
Service and maintenance
Service and maintenance
Lubrication and service chart
The section "Lubrication and Service Chart"
describes the maintenance work, which the
operator can carry out. If certain operations
require trained workshop personnel and special
equipment, this will be indicated. See page174.
Service schedule
After each completed service at an authorised
dealer workshop, the Service History should be
filled in, see page244. The Service History is a
valuable document, which can be referred to
when for example selling the machine.
Arrival and Delivery Inspection
Before the machine leaves the factory, it is
tested and adjusted. The dealer must also, if the
warranty is to apply, carry out "Arrival and
delivery inspections" according to applicable
form, which must be signed.
Delivery Instructions
When handing the machine over, the dealer
must give the buyer "Delivery instructions"
according to applicable form, which must be
signed, if the warranty is to apply.
Service programme
The Service Programme should be used in
connection with warranty inspections and
during maintenance carried out by an
authorised dealer workshop.
The intervals recommended between checks,
oil changes and lubrication apply provided that
the machine is used under normal
environmental and operating conditions.
Warranty Inspection
Two Warranty Inspections should be carried
out at an authorised dealer workshop. The first
within 100 operating hours and the second at
the latest at 1000 operating hours.
The carrying out of these warranty inspections
is a condition for the warranty to apply.
During these inspections, oil and other liquids
have to be changed before the end of the
regular intervals.
Maintenance
Regarding intervals for other maintenance, see
the Service Programme or the Lubrication and
Service Chart in this section.
135
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ‬.‫ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮدازد ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎرﺑﺮ ﻗﺎدر ﺑﻪ اﻧﺠﺎم اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎرﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﮔﺎه و اﻓﺮاد ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮارد ﻟﺤﺎظ‬،‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺧﺎص ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬174 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬. ‫ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﺗﻤﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ‬
244 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺮ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺳﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮي اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل‬. ‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺮاي آﮔﺎﻫﻲ از زﻣﺎن ﻓﺮوش ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻪ آن ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﻓﺮم ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ و درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ را ﺗﺮك ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺖ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮد ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ اﮔﺮ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻨﻮز ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ »ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ و درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ « را ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
.‫آﻧﺮا در آﺧﺮ اﻣﻀﺎء ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮم ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ داده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺮم ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ اﻣﻀﺎء‬
‫ﺷﺪه را ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﺮﻳﺪار ﺑﺘﻮاﻧﺪ از ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ارﺗﺒﺎط ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و در‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ و‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬،‫ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي وارﺳﻲ ﻣﺠﺪد‬
‫ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري و روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس‬، ‫روﻏﻦ‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻧﺮﻣﺎل و ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ‬
‫دو ﻧﻮع ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه و ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز اراﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
1000 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري و ﻧﻮع دوم در ﭘﺎﻳﺎن‬100 ‫ ﻧﻮع اول‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎري اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﻟﺤﺎظ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺟﺰء ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ‬
.‫اﺳﺖ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻃﻲ اﻳﻦ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺪون در ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺪت ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ روﻏﻦ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ وﺟﻮد دارد ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼع‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ رﻳﺰي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻳﺎ و ﺟﺪول ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
.‫در ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ رﺟﻮع ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Service and maintenance
Cleaning the machine
The machine should be cleaned regularly with conventional car
care products in order to eliminate the risk of damage to the paint
finish and other surfaces on the machine.
IMPORTANT! Avoid using strong cleaning agents or
chemicals in order to minimise the risk of damage to the
paint finish.
NOTE! Daily clean the areas on the machine where dust,
chips and similar may collect in order to minimise the risk of
fire, see page137.
Recommendations for cleaning the machine
ƒ Place the machine in a place intended for cleaning.
ƒ Follow the instructions supplied with the car care product.
ƒ The water temperature must not exceed 60 °C (140 °F).
ƒ If high-pressure wash is used, keep a distance of at least
20-30 cm (8-12 in) between nozzle and machine surface.
Too high push and too short distance may cause damage.
Protect electrical leads in an appropriate way.
ƒ ‫ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﻗﻄﻌﺎت اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬. ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
IMPORTANT! If you are using a high-pressure wash, take
care so that the decals do not loosen.
ƒ Use a soft sponge.
ƒ Finish by rinsing the whole machine with only water.
ƒ Always lubricate the machine after washing.
ƒ Touch-up the paint finish when required.
Paint finish maintenance
ƒ Machines which are used in corrosive environment are
more prone to rusting than others. As a preventive
measure it is recommended that the paint finish should be
maintained every sixth months.
ƒ At first clean the machine.
ƒ Apply Dinol 77B (or corresponding transparent waxy anti-
rust agent) at a thickness of 70-80 .
ƒ A protective layer of underseal Dinol 447 (or
corresponding) may be applied under the mudguards
where mechanical wear is expected.
Touch-up painting
ƒ Check if any areas of the paint finish are damaged.
ƒ At first clean the machine.
ƒ Rectify any damage to paint finish in a professional way.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻت ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري وﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬
. ‫ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ رﻧﮓ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﻮح ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ رود‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! از ﻣﺼﺮف ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻗﻮي و ﻣﻮاد ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﻮد داري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮآﺳﻴﺐ‬
.‫دﻳﺪﮔﻲ رﻧﮓ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺧﺮده ﭼﻮب و از اﻳﻦ دﺳﺖ‬، ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﺮ روز ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻛﻪ از ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬،‫ﻣﻮاد ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ وارد ﺷﺪه ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬137 ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
. ‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را درﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ƒ
.‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬60 °C(140 °F) ‫ƒ درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت آب ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬
30 ‫ اﻟﻲ‬20 ‫ƒ اﮔﺮ از آب ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﻮي ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫ ﻓﺸﺎر زﻳﺎد زﻳﺎد آب و‬.‫ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﺷﻴﺮ و ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻬﻢ! اﮔﺮ از آب ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﻮي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ƒ از ﻳﻚ اﺳﻔﻨﺞ ﻧﺮم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ƒ در اﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ آب ﺑﺸﻮﻳﻴﺪ‬
.‫ƒ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﭘﺲ از ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را روان ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ƒ رﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﻫﺮ زﻣﺎن ﻛﻪ ﻻزم ﺑﻮد ﻟﻜﻪ ﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري از رﻧﮓ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮارد ﺧﻮرﻧﺪه وﺟﻮد دارﻧﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ƒ
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ‬.‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺎه ﻳﻜﺒﺎر اﻳﻦ رﻧﮓ ﻣﻮرد‬6 ‫ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮاﻧﻪ در ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺮﺳﻮدﮔﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
.‫ƒ در اﺑﺘﺪا ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
70 ‫ )ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﺪون رﻧﮓ ﺿﺪ زﻧﮓ ( را ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬77B ‫ƒ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ دﻳﻨﻮل‬
.‫ روي رﻧﮓ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬µ 80 ‫ﺗﺎ‬
‫ )ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ آن را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﺮاي زﻳﺮ ﮔﻞ ﮔﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬77B ‫ƒ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ دﻳﻨﻮل‬
.(‫ﻛﺮد اﻣﺎ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻨﺪ ﻟﺒﺎس ﻛﺎر اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻪ ﮔﻴﺮي‬
.‫ƒ رﻧﮓ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻧﻘﺎط آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪه آن را ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ اﺑﺘﺪا ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ƒ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ رﻧﮓ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪه را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺣﺮﻓﻪ اي ﻟﻜﻪ ﮔﻴﺮي و اﺻﻼح ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
136
 ‫‪Service and maintenance‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬

‫‪Cleaning, engine compartment‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎري اﺗﺎﻗﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

‫‪Machines operating in dusty environment or‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫‪environment exposed to fire hazards e.g.,‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي در آﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﭼﻮب ﺑﺮي‬
‫‪wood-processing, woodchip handling or grain‬‬
‫‪handling and animal feed industries require‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺧﺎك اره ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ داﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻏﺬاﻳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺧﻮراك داﻣﻲ‬
‫‪daily attention and cleaning of the engine‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ ﺳﺮ ﻛﺸﻲ و ﻣﺮاﻗﺒﺖ روزاﻧﻪ و ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫‪compartment and surrounding areas.‬‬
‫اﺗﺎﻗﻚ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﻣﺤﻴﻂ اﻃﺮاف آن ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪When operating in other environments,‬‬ ‫وﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺟﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ از اﻳﻦ دﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﻫﺎ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫‪inspection and cleaning is required at least‬‬
‫‪once a week.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن و ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ اي ﻳﻜﺒﺎر اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬

‫‪For areas that require to be checked and‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻛﺮدن‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺎن ﻫﺎﺋﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫‪cleaned, see figures.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ روﺑﺮو ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪warning‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪار!‬
‫‪The engine must not be running when‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﺪ زﻳﺮا ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
‫‪cleaning as rotating parts may cause‬‬
‫‪injuries.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت در ﺣﺎل ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ ﺑﺪن ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻻي ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺳﺒﻚ را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺎد ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Loose material is removed with for example‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺶ ﻫﻮا‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮر )آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮا‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻛﺎري ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺷﻴﻔﺖ ﻛﺎري و ﻗﺒﻞ از‬
‫‪compressed air.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻨﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد(‬ ‫ﭘﺎرك ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪Cleaning should preferably be carried out at the‬‬ ‫داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎورﻫﺎي دو ﻃﺮف ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫از ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎري ﻛﺮده و ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
‫‪end of the working shift before the machine is‬‬ ‫روي ﻛﺎور ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و دﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﻄﻮح ‪،‬‬
‫‪parked.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﻳﮋه ﺳﻄﻮح داغ ﻣﺜﻞ اﮔﺰوز‪ ،‬ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺗﺎ روي ﺑﺎك ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و اﻃﺮاف ﺑﺎك اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪Begin with the highest areas and end with the‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﮔﺰوز ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻨﻔﻮﻟﺪ اﮔﺰوز ‪ ،‬اﻟﻤﻨﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪lowest on top of the fuel tank and areas near‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻣﻜﻦ و آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر ‪.‬‬ ‫از وﺳﺎﻳﻞ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ دﺳﺘﻜﺶ و ﻋﻴﻨﻚ و ﻣﺎﺳﻚ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
‫‪the fuel tank.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﺎرت ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Use personal protective equipment such as‬‬ ‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫‪protective goggles, gloves and respirator.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎزرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺎري ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮع ﻧﺸﺘﻲ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﻤﺎم ﻛﺎور ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪After cleaning, check and rectify any leaks.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻀﺎي ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫و ﻛﺎﭘﻮت ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺒﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Close all covers and hoods.‬‬ ‫داﺧﻞ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ ‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺗﺎﻧﻚ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و اﻃﺮاف آن‬ ‫‪7‬‬

‫)ﻧﻤﻮدار ﻛﻠﻲ(‬
‫)ﻧﻤﻮدار ﻛﻠﻲ(‬
‫‪ .5‬اﻟﻤﻨﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬
‫‪ .1‬اﮔﺰوز‬
‫‪ .6‬آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﮔﺰوز‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻣﻨﻴﻔﻮﻟﺪ اﮔﺰوز‬

‫‪137‬‬
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Service points ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺑﺎزدﻳﺪ‬
Service points ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺑﺎزدﻳﺪ‬

‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ 15 ‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬،‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ اي‬ 1
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ 16 ‫ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ و روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬، ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬ 2
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ آﺑﮕﻴﺮ‬ 17 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬ 3
‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮي‬ 18 ‫ﻣﻜﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬ 4
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي‬ 19 ‫ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬، ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬ 5
‫ﺗﺎﻧﻚ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط‬ 20 ‫ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬، ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬ 6
(‫ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ )در ﺟﻌﺒﻪ اﺑﺰار‬، ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬ 21 ‫ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬،‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ اي‬ 7
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن وﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ 22 ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ 8
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬ 23 ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ 9
‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮي‬ 24 ‫ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬، ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬ 10
‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬،‫ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬،‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ واﺗﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎن‬،‫ﺗﺴﻤﻪ )آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر( ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
25 ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬، ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬ 11
(‫ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
‫ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ 26 ‫ﮔﻴﺞ ارﺗﻔﺎع روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ 12
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ 27 ‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬، ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ‬ 13
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ 14

1 Level sight glass, hydraulic oil 15 Filling point for engine oil
2 Breather filters, transmission and hydraulic oil 16 Secondary fuel filter
3 Air cleaner 17 Primary fuel filter and water trap
4 Air filter intake 18 Battery
5 Filling point, fuel 19 Battery disconnect switch
6 Breather filter, front axle 20 Expansion tank
7 Level sight glass, transmission 21 Filling point, washer fluid (in the tool-box)
8 Filling point, transmission 22 Filling point and return oil filter, hydraulic system
9 Draining, hydraulic oil 23 Ventilation filters, cab
10 Breather filter, rear axle 24 Battery
Alternator belt, right side
11 Breather filter, fuel system 25 Belt for coolant pump and fuel feed pump, left side
Compressor belt, left side (optional equipment)
12 Oil dipstick, engine 26 Suction strainer, transmission
13 Oil filter, engine 27 Oil filter, transmission
14 Draining, engine oil and coolant

138
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Engine ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Engine
Engine oil, checking
Check the oil level every 50 hours.
ƒ When checking the machine should
stand on level ground.
ƒ The check should be carried out when
the oil is cold and has had time to run
down to the bottom of the sump.
The level should be within the marks on the
oil dipstick.
Engine oil, changing
Change oil every 500 hours or at least once a
year.
The conditions for the 500 hour interval
between oil changes are that:
− the oil filter is replaced every time the
oil is changed.
− the oil filter is a genuine Volvo filter.
− the correct oil viscosity for the ambient
air temperature is selected according to
diagram, see page185.
− the oil is of a certain quality grade, see
the table below.
NOTE! Interval shorter than 500 hours also
means shorter interval for replacing fuel
filters, see page142.
Follow recommended interval between
changes given in the table according to the
quality grade of the oil and the sulphur
content of the fuel.
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬50 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﺮدن روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺳﻄﺢ‬
.‫ﺻﺎف ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﻛﻪ روﻏﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺳﺮد ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن در‬
.‫ﻣﺨﺰن را داﺷﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه روي ﮔﻴﺞ‬
.‫ارﺗﻔﺎع روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎل ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر‬500 ‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺞ ارﺗﻔﺎع روﻏﻦ‬A .‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬B ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮح‬500 ‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
:‫زﻳﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻢ زﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬ -
.‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ وﻟﻮو ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ -
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب وﻳﺴﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ )ﻟﺰﺟﺖ( ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس دﻣﺎي ﻫﻮاي‬ -
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬185 ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ از روي ﻧﻤﻮدار اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬500 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺗﺮ از‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺷﺪن ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬142 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫در ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺮ‬
‫اﺳﺎس درﺟﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻲ روﻏﻦ و ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻮر ﻣﻮﺟﻮد از ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
.‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﻃﺒﻖ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت اﻳﻦ ﺟﺪول ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻮر ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ ‫درﺟﻪ روﻏﻦ‬

> 0.5 % 0.3-0.5 % < 0.3%
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اوﻟﺘﺮا دﻳﺰل وﻟﻮو‬
VDS-3
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬125 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬250 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬500 VDS-2 plus ACEA-E7
VDS-2 plusAOI CI-4
VDS-2 plus EO-N Premium plus
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬75 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬125 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬250 VDS-2
VDS-2 plusACEA-E3
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬50 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬75 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬125 ACEA:E7,E5,E4
API:CI-4,CH-4,CG-4
Sulphur content of the fuel
Oil grade < 0.3 % 0.3-0.5 % > 0.5 %
Oil change interval
Volvo Ultra Diesel Engine oil
VDS-3
VDS-2 plus ACEA-E7 500 hours 250 hours 125 hours
VDS-2 plus API CI-4
VDS-2 plus EO-N Premium plus
VDS-2 250 hours 125 hours 75 hours
VDS plus ACEA-E3
ACEA: E7, E5, E4 125 hours 75 hours 50 hours
API: CI-4, CH-4, CG-4

139
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Engine ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Draining ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

warning !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
Take care when changing oil, as hot oil can ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ روﻏﻦ داغ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ‬
cause burns to unprotected skin. .‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬

Drain the oil while the engine is still warm.

1 The draining points for engine oil and
coolant are positioned under the machine,
inside the rear left wheel.
2 Unscrew the protecting cover for the engine
oil draining point, connect the draining
‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬A
hose and drain into a suitable vessel.
Remove the hose and re-install the
protecting cover.
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page129.
Filling
Fill with oil through filler pipe (B).
Oil capacity when changing:
Approx. 20 litres (5.3 US gal) including
filter.
Oil quality grades, see page185.
.‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﻮر ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﮔﺮم اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎط ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 1
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺎر ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ در ﻋﻘﺐ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
.‫اﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻛﺎور ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ‬ 2
‫را ﺑﻪ آن وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و در ﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ روﻏﻦ را ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
.‫ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ را ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺎﻻت درون ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬/‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ‬/‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬129 ‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺮﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن روﻏﻦ‬
.‫ وارد ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫روﻏﻦ را از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
. ‫( ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬5.3 US gal) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬20 ً‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
185 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼع از درﺟﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻲ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

140
 Service and maintenance
Engine
Engine oil filters, replacing
Replace the oil filter every time the oil is
changed.
The oil filter is of the disposable type, i.e. it
cannot be cleaned, but must be replaced.
ƒ Removing
− Use a filter clamp or loosen the centre
bolt (depending on filter type).
ƒ Installing
− Fill the filter with oil and apply oil to the
gasket.
− Screw on the filter until the gasket just
touches the sealing surface. Then tighten
a further half of a turn by hand.
− Start the engine and check that the
gaskets seal. If it does not, remove the
filter and check the sealing surface.
Usually it does not help to tighten
harder.
NOTE! After replacing oil filters, the engine
must run at low idling for at least one
minute to make sure that the engine is
lubricated before the machine is put to
work.
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page129.
IMPORTANT! It is important that the
filter is filled with oil before it is
installed. This is to ensure lubrication of
the engine immediately it is started.
141
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﻋﻮض‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻣﺼﺮف و ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﺪن ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﺧﺎرج ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﭗ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﻴﭻ ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬ -
(‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ آﻧﺮا ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ )ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮع ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ دارد‬
‫ƒ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﭘﺮ از روﻏﻦ ﻛﺮده و ﺑﻪ اورﻳﻨﮓ آب ﺑﻨﺪي‬ -
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ .‫)ﮔﺴﻜﺖ( ﻧﻴﺰ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ اورﻳﻨﮓ آب ﺑﻨﺪي)ﮔﺴﻜﺖ( روي‬ -
‫ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﻴﻢ دور دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ دﺳﺖ‬.‫ﺳﻄﺢ آب ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
.‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ و ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
(‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ اورﻳﻨﮓ آب ﺑﻨﺪي ) ﮔﺴﻜﺖ‬-
‫ اﮔﺮ درﺳﺖ ﻧﺒﻮد ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﺑﻴﺮون آورده و‬.‫را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﻴﺶ از‬. ‫ﺳﻄﺢ آﺑﻨﺪ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺣﺪ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﻳﻚ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ‬
‫دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ دور ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻗﺒﻞ از‬
.‫ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬/‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ‬/‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬129 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬. ‫آﺳﻴﺒﻲ ﻧﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ از روﻏﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮدن آن ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ روﺷﻦ‬. ‫اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺷﺪن روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮد‬
‫‪Service and maintenance‬‬
‫‪Fuel system‬‬
‫‪Fuel system‬‬
‫)‪Fuel tank (available‬‬
‫‪Clean fuel is essential for trouble-free running‬‬
‫‪of the diesel engine.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Carefully clean around the filler cap‬‬
‫‪before removing it.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Avoid spillage when filling. Spilt fuel‬‬
‫‪attracts dirt and is a fire hazard if it is‬‬
‫‪spilt on hot surfaces.‬‬
‫‪ƒ During the cold season keep the fuel‬‬
‫‪tank full to prevent water condensing in‬‬
‫‪the tank.‬‬
‫‪Fuel tank capacity, 224 litres (59.2 US gal).‬‬
‫‪Fuel quality, see page186.‬‬
‫‪Fuel filters‬‬
‫‪Fuel filter, replacing‬‬
‫‪Replace fuel filters (primary and secondary‬‬
‫‪filters) every 500 hours, or when replacing the‬‬
‫‪engine oil filter, which may mean a shorter‬‬
‫‪interval.‬‬
‫‪NOTE! If the filters become clogged earlier,‬‬
‫‪they must be replaced.‬‬
‫‪The fuel filters are positioned inside the engine‬‬
‫‪cover on the left side of the machine.‬‬
‫‪The primary fuel filter and the water trap are‬‬
‫‪integrated to form one unit. In the filter head‬‬
‫‪there is a hand pump which is used when‬‬
‫‪bleeding the system. The primary fuel filter‬‬
‫‪works as a prefilter for the feed pump.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ آﺑﮕﻴﺮ‬
‫‪When installing the filters, they should only be‬‬
‫‪tightened by hand.‬‬
‫‪The fuel system must be bled after filter‬‬
‫‪replacement.‬‬
‫‪The way the fuel flows is:‬‬
‫‪tank - hand pump - primary fuel filter - with‬‬
‫‪water trap - feed pump - secondary fuel filter -‬‬
‫‪common rail - injectors - cylinders‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫‪The feed pump is belt-driven. The belt is in‬‬
‫‪common with the coolant pump. For checking‬‬
‫‪and adjusting belt tension, see page150.‬‬
‫‪Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an‬‬
‫‪environmentally safe way, see page129.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ )در دﺳﺘﺮس(‬
‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﭘﺎك ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺪون ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر دﻳﺰل اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ در ﭘﻮش ﭘﻮرت ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ دور آﻧﺮا ﻛﺎﻣﻼً‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﮔﻴﺮي از رﻳﺨﺘﻦ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺧﻮد داري‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺪه و در ﺻﻮرﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ داغ ﺑﺮﻳﺰد ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﺗﺶ‬
‫درﭘﻮش ﺗﺎﻧﻚ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻮزي ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ƒ در ﻓﺼﻠﻬﺎي ﺳﺮد‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ را ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ از ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ آب در ﺗﺎﻧﻚ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺎﻧﻚ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ‪ 224‬ﻟﻴﺘﺮ )‪ 59/2‬ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﺷﺪن از ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 186‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ را )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ( ﻫﺮ ‪ 500‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ در زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر را ﻧﻴﺰ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬اﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮي ﻫﻢ ﺻﻮرت ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! اﮔﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ زودﺗﺮ از ﻣﻮﻋﺪ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ درون ﻛﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و در ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮار دارد‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ آﺑﮕﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ را ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ دﻫﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫در ﺳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻤﭗ دﺳﺘﻲ وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫از آن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ در واﻗﻊ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ‬
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺼﺐ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ دﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻧﺼﺐ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮي ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻧﻚ – ﭘﻤﭗ دﺳﺘﻲ – ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ – ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ آﺑﮕﻴﺮ‪ -‬ﭘﻤﭗ‬
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‪ -‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ – رﻳﻞ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‪ -‬اﻧﮋﻛﺘﻮر – ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪرﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺧﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻛﺎري ﻣﺸﺘﺮك اﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮاي اﻣﺘﺤﺎن ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﺶ)ﺷﻞ و‬
‫ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن(ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 150‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 129‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪142‬‬
 Service and maintenance
Fuel system
Water trap
Take care of fuel spillage by using a vessel
or a plastic hose.
Drain the water trap every 250 hours.
Draining water from the fuel has to be done by
hand.
A non-return valve in the filter head prevents
the fuel from running back to the tank.
Proceed as follows:
− Place the end of the hose in a collecting
vessel
− Loosen the draining nipple until fuel
runs out through the hose.
− Tighten the draining nipple after
draining is completed.
143
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ آﺑﮕﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺧﺎرج ﻛﺮدن آب ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
.‫آﺑﮕﻴﺮ از رﻳﺨﺘﻦ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬250 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ آﺑﮕﻴﺮ را ﻫﺮ‬
‫وﺟﻮد ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ در ﺳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ از ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﺗﺎﻧﻚ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
:‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ زﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ را در ﻣﺨﺰن ﺟﻤﻊ آوري ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬ -
.‫ﻧﻴﭙﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ وارد ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﺷﻮد‬ -
.‫ﭘﺲ از ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻴﭙﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬ -
‫ ﻧﻴﭙﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ و ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ‬A
Service and maintenance
Fuel system
Fuel system, air bleeding
Take care of fuel spillage by using a vessel or a
plastic hose.
− First, make sure that there is sufficient
fuel in the fuel tank.
− Press in and turn the hand pump counter-
clockwise until it is in a working
position.
− Pump with the hand pump until a
resistance becomes noticeable, 150-200
strokes.
− Lock the hand pump by pressing it in
and turning it clockwise.
− Start the engine and leave it running at
low idling for at least 10 minutes to
purge the system of any remaining air.
− If the engine is difficult to start, again
pump with the hand pump until a
resistance is felt.
− After start, check that there are no leaks.
NOTE! The hand pump must not be used
when the engine is running.
Breather filter, fuel system
Replace the filter every 2000 hours.
The filter is positioned inside the engine cover
on the left side of the machine.
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page129.
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ – ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻮاﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫اﺑﺘﺪا ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ در ﺗﺎﻧﻚ‬ -
.‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر داده و ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ -
.‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮد ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺗﺎ‬150 ‫ﺑﺎ دﺳﺖ ﭘﻤﭙﺎژ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﭘﻤﭗ – ﺣﺪوداً ﺑﺎ‬ -
.‫ دﻓﻌﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻛﺮدن – ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬200
‫ﭘﻤﭗ را ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮد‬ -
.‫ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ و آﻧﺮا ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ دور ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬10 ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬ -
.‫ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪه ﻫﻮاي آن ﻧﻴﺰ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ اﺳﺘﺎرت ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮرد دوﺑﺎره ﺑﺎ ﭘﻤﭗ‬ -
.‫دﺳﺘﻲ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ از روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ‬ -
‫ ﭘﻤﭗ دﺳﺘﻲ روي ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬A .‫ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﭘﻤﭗ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم روﺷﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬، ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2000 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ درون ﻛﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬/ ‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ‬/‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬129 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬
144
 Service and maintenance
Fuel system
Turbocharger
The turbocharger is lubricated and cooled
through the engine lubrication system.
Important for the function of the
turbocharger is that:
ƒ lubrication and cooling is safeguarded
by
− not racing the engine immediately after
it has been started.
− allow the engine to run at low idling for
at least 30 seconds before it is turned off.
− in case of encased (heat-insulated) type
turbocharger and manifold, it is
important that the engine, after it has
been working hard, is allowed to run at
low idling for at least two minutes
before it is turned off.
ƒ engine oil is changed and oil filters are
replaced at prescribed intervals.
ƒ the air cleaner is serviced regularly and
that the exhaust system and lubricating
oil lines do not leak.
In case jarring noises can be heard, or if the
turbocharger vibrates, it must be reconditioned
or replaced immediately.
Only authorised dealer workshops should
carry out work on the turbocharger.
145
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ‬
‫ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري و‬
.‫ﺧﻨﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
:‫از ﻧﻜﺎت ﻣﻬﻢ در ﻣﻮرد ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺗﻮرﺑﻮﺷﺎرژ اﻳﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫رواﻧﻜﺎري ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻫﻮا‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري و ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎ رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ‬
.‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎراﻳﻲ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻣﻲ رﺳﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﻌﺪ از روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻓﻮراً دور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ -
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن اﺟﺎزه دﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬30 ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬ -
.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ دور ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ و در دور درﺟﺎ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫در ﻣﻮرد ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژﻫﺎ و ﻣﻴﻨﻔﻮﻟﺪ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺷﺪه ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در‬ -
‫ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺳﺨﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم داده اﺳﺖ آن را ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ در دور در ﺟﺎ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را‬2 ‫ﻣﺪت‬
.‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً در ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺷﻮد و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫اﮔﺰوز و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ رواﻧﻜﺎري را ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
.‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﻧﺪارد‬
‫در ﻣﻮاردي ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪاي ﻟﺮزش ﺷﻨﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ‬
‫ﺷﺎرژ در ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﻟﺮزش دارد ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ را ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﻳﺎ‬
‫ ﺧﻂ ورود دود‬A
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﮔﺰوز‬B
‫ ورودي ﻫﻮا‬C ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻫﺎي ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﺋﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﻫﻮاي ﻓﺸﺮده ﺷﺪه‬D .‫ﺗﻮرﺑﻮ ﺷﺎرژ را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻨﺪ‬
Service and maintenance
Air cleaner
Air cleaner
Engine, air cleaner
The degree of engine wear depends largely on
the cleanliness of the induction air. The air
cleaner prevents dust and other impurities from
entering the engine. Therefore, it is very
important that the air cleaner should be
checked regularly and maintained correctly.
Primary filter, maintenance
and replacement
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬
When the alarm text for clogged engine air
filter is shown or every 1000 hours, the
filter should be replaced or cleaned. The
period of operation between filter
replacements varies depending on the
working environment of the machine. In
certain environments the filter needs to be
replaced more often.
The filter can be cleaned according to
instructions obtainable from an authorised
dealer workshop. However, after the filter has
been cleaned five times or if it is damaged, it
must be replaced.
NOTE! Make a mark on the decal at the end
of the secondary filter every time the
primary filter is replaced or cleaned.
ƒ In connection with replacing the filter,
the cover for the air cleaner should also
be cleaned as this works as a container
for particles which have not been
trapped in the filter.
ƒ Check that all hose and pipe connections
from the air cleaner to the engine
induction manifold are tight. Check-
tighten hose clips.
ƒ If the alarm text remains after replacing
the primary filter, also the secondary
filter must be replaced, see page146.
Do not, under any circumstances, run the
engine without a filter or with a damaged
one.
Always have a spare filter at hand and keep
the filter well protected from dirt.
Secondary filter
Replace the filter every 2000 hours or when
the main filter has been replaced three times.
The filter cannot be cleaned, but must be
replaced.
The secondary filter works as a protective filter
if the main filter is damaged.
Never remove the secondary filter unless it
is to be replaced.
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page129.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ زﻳﺎدي ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰي ﻫﻮاي‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا از ورود ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬.‫ورودي ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ دارد‬
‫آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻫﺎ و ﻧﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﺼﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬.‫ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري و ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬،‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎه ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﻲ ر اﻧﺴﺪاد ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا ﺑﺮ روي‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮد ﭼﺮاغ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬1000 ‫ﻫﻮا روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪ و ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ از‬
‫ ﻣﺪت زﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از‬.‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬،
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ از ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ دارد ﻛﻪ‬
‫ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در آن ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ زودﺗﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان آﻧﺮا از ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ‬،‫ﻣﺠﺎز ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﺮد ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮد‬
‫از ﭘﻨﺞ ﺑﺎر ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﺪن و ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﻳﺪن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺟﺒﺎري‬
.‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! روي ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر‬
.‫ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬
،‫ﻛﺎور ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ƒ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫زﻳﺮا اﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪن ذرات و آﻟﻮده ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
.‫ﻫﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺟﺬب ﻧﻜﺮده اﺳﺖ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي راﺑﻂ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺴﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ‬. ‫ﻣﻨﻴﻔﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﻜﺶ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬ .‫را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﻮز ﭘﺎ ﺑﺮ‬،‫ ﺑﻌﺪ از ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬،‫ƒ اﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ اﻋﻼم ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺎ اﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﺎر ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬146 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺪون ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
.‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ دﻳﺪه ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻧﻴﺎﻧﺪازﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻳﺪك ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ و آﻧﺮا ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬
.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ﻳﺎ وﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺎر‬2000 ‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬
.‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﺪن ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ در زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬
.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ اﻓﺘﺪ‬، ‫دﻳﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ را ﺧﺎرج ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮاﻫﻴﺪ آﻧﺮا‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬، ‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬129 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫زﻳﺴﺖ را آﻟﻮده ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‬
146
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Oil bath air cleaner (optional equipment) (‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻫﻮا )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬

Oil bath air cleaner (‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻫﻮا )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬

(optional equipment) ‫ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ‬،‫وﻗﺘﻲ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻫﻮا ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺧﺸﻚ در‬
When working in a particularly dusty
environment, we recommend that an oil-bath ‫ اﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺳﻴﺐ‬.‫ﺗﺼﻔﻴﻪ ﻫﻮا ﻛﻤﻚ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
air cleaner should be installed in series with the .‫رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
existing dry-filter air cleaner. This will provide
‫ ﻛﻪ در‬. ‫ اﺳﺖ‬95% ‫ ﺗﺎ‬90 ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺟﺬب ذرات در ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ‬
further safety against damage to the engine.
The particle-retaining ability of the oil-bath air ‫واﻗﻊ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻫﻮا ﭘﺲ از ﻧﺼﺐ اﻳﻦ‬
cleaner is between 90 and 95 %, which in ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻛﺮد و زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ اﻳﻦ‬
practice, means that the standard dry-filter air
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ رﺳﻴﺪ‬2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ)ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺧﺸﻚ( ﺑﻪ دو ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
cleaner will act as a secondary filter, with a
replacement interval which is twice as long, i.e. ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري از ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻫﻮا‬
2000 hours.
.‫ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ را ﻫﺮ روز ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Oil bath air cleaner,
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻫﻮا‬ .‫ ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ( اﺳﺖ‬1/5) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬5/5 ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﻠﻲ روﻏﻦ‬
maintenance
‫ƒ روﻏﻦ را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺮده و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻓﻠﺰي ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ و‬
Check the oil level daily.
‫ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬،‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ را در ﺻﻮرت ﺑﺮوز ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ‬
The total oil capacity is 5.5 litres (1.5 US
gal). :‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
ƒ Change oil and clean lower and upper .‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺜﻴﻒ و ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ -
steel mesh filter if:
‫در ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻓﻠﺰي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ رﺳﻮب ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪه‬ -
− the oil is dirty and viscous.
− there are sludge deposits or dry spots on ‫ روي آن ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه‬، ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻜﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪه‬
the underside of the lower steel mesh .‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
filter.
‫ƒ روﻏﻦ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻓﻠﺰي ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺎزوﺋﻴﻞ‬
ƒ The oil bowl, the lower and upper steel
mesh filters should be washed in diesel .‫ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
fuel. ‫ƒ از ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺷﻮﻳﻨﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا اﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪار‬
ƒ Avoid using petrol (gasoline) for ‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪاً ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را‬،‫ﻛﻤﻲ ﻫﻢ از ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‬
cleaning, as any remaining petrol can
.‫روﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻟﺮزش ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
cause the engine to surge when it is
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ از روﻏﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ‬
started later.
ƒ When filling or changing oil use oil with ‫وﻳﺴﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ )ﻟﺰﺟﺖ( روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
the same viscosity as in the engine. .‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻓﻠﺰي داﺧﻠﻲ را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2000 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
Clean the steel mesh filters inserts every
2000 hours.

‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺷﻮﻳﻨﺪه ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺷﻮﻳﺪه درون ﺟﻌﺒﻪ اﺑﺰار در ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار‬
.‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
Washer fluid reservoir, front ‫ƒ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻳﺦ زدﮔﻲ وﺟﻮد دارد ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
and rear windows . ‫ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺿﺪ ﻳﺦ در ﻣﺨﺰن وﺟﻮد دارد‬
.‫ƒ ﻫﺮ زﻣﺎن ﻛﻪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻣﺨﺰن را ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the ‫ƒ از اﻳﻨﻜﻪ درب ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و درون‬
tool-box on the right side of the machine.
ƒ Make sure that there is sufficient anti- .‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺗﻤﻴﺰ اﺳﺖ اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
freeze in the washer fluid when there is
a risk of frost. ‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺷﻮﻳﻨﺪه‬
ƒ Top up when necessary.
ƒ Make sure that the cap on the reservoir
is securely tightened and that the
reservoir is clean on the inside.

147
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Cooling system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬

Cooling system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬

Coolant ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
The cooling system is filled with Volvo ‫درﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري وﻟﻮو‬
Coolant VCS, which is in accordance with the
highest requirements regarding anti-freeze, ‫(اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﺧﻮاص ﻣﻬﻤﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬VCS )
anti-corrosion and anti-cavitation properties. ‫ﻋﺪم ﺧﻮرﻧﺪﮔﻲ و ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻛﺎوﻳﺘﺎﺳﻴﻮن‬، ‫داﺷﺘﻦ ﺿﺪ ﻳﺦ‬
To avoid damage to the engine, is it very
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺳﻴﺐ‬.‫)ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺣﺒﺎب ( را دارا ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
important that Volvo Coolant VCS is used
when topping up or when changing coolant. ‫رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن و ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
Volvo Coolant VCS is yellow and a decal at ‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬VCS ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري از ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري وﻟﻮو‬
the point of filling shows that the system is
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
filled with this coolant (see figure).
‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ ‫ زرد رﻧﮓ اﺳﺖ و ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ‬VCS ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري وﻟﻮو‬
‫ وﻟﻮو‬VCS ‫در ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن وﺟﻮد دارد ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ اﻳﻦ‬
IMPORTANT! Volvo Coolant VCS must
not be mixed with another coolant or .‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
corrosion protection, as this may cause
engine damage. ‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻻت‬VCS ‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري وﻟﻮو‬
If concentrated Volvo Coolant VCS and clean ‫ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺿﺪ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﺷﻮد زﻳﺮا ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
water (see page187) is used, the table below
shows the approximate amount of concentrated .‫اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺻﺪﻣﻪ وارد ﻛﻨﺪ‬
coolant that is required to achieve freeze ‫ ﻏﻠﻴﻆ و آب ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬VCS ‫اﮔﺮ از ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري وﻟﻮو‬
protection. The amount of Volvo Coolant VCS
must never be less than 40 % of the total ‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺪار‬178 ‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
mixture. ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻳﺦ زدﮔﻲ را‬
When there is doubt as to the quality of the ‫ در ﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﻠﻮل‬VCS ‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬. ‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‬
water, ready-mixed Volvo Coolant VCS, which
contains 40 % concentrated coolant, must be .‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬% 40 ‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
used. ‫ از ﻣﺨﻠﻮط آﻣﺎده‬، ‫اﮔﺮ در ﻣﻮرد ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ آب دﭼﺎر ﺗﺮدﻳﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‬
IMPORTANT! If the ready-mixed Volvo % 40 ‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎوي‬VCS ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري وﻟﻮو‬
Coolant VCS is used, it must not be mixed
.‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
with any other ready-mixed coolants, as this
may cause damage to the engine. ‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ‬VCS ‫ﻣﻬﻢ! اﮔﺮ از ﻣﺨﻠﻮط آﻣﺎده ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﺷﻮد ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ از اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﻫﺎي‬
‫ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﺷﻮد زﻳﺮا اﻳﻦ اﻣﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ آﺳﻴﺐ رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬، ‫آﻣﺎده‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

Content of concentrated coolant Freeze protection down to

‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻏﻠﻴﻆ‬ ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ دﻣﺎي اﻧﺠﻤﺎد‬
40% -25 °C (-13 °F)
50% -35 °C(-31 °F)
60% -46 °C(-51 °F)

Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an ‫ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬، ‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬،‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬

environmentally safe way, see page. .‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬129 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫زﻳﺴﺖ را آﻟﻮده ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬

148
 Service and maintenance
Cooling system
Coolant, checking
Check the coolant level every 50 hours.
The level should stand between the Max. and
Min. marks on the expansion tank.
Coolant, changing
Change coolant every 6000 hours or at least
every fourth year.
IMPORTANT! Volvo Coolant VCS must
not be mixed with any other coolants or
corrosion protection agents, as this may
cause engine damage.
Cooling system capacity when changing:
Approx. 30 litres (7.9 US gal)
warning
There is a risk of scalding when the
expansion tank cap or radiator cap are
removed because of the excess pressure in a
hot cooling system.
‫درﭘﻮش ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط‬
Draining
1 Remove the cap on the expansion tank,
positioned on top of the engine hood.
2 The draining points for engine oil and
coolant are positioned under the machine,
inside the rear left wheel.
3 Unscrew the protecting cover for the coolant
draining point, connect the draining hose
and drain into a suitable vessel. Remove the
hose and re-install the protecting cover.
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page129.
‫ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬،‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
149
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري را ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬50 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪارﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ و ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ‬
.‫روي ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر و ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻫﺮ‬6000 ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري را ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﭼﻬﺎر ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ از‬VCS ‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري وﻟﻮو‬
‫اﻧﻮاع ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري و ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺿﺪ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط‬
.‫ﺷﻮد – زﻳﺮا ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط‬
: ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻴﺎل‬
(‫ ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ‬7/9) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬30 ً‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن در ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط و ﻳﺎ در رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﻴﺮون‬
‫ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪن ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ دﻟﻴﻞ آن وﺟﻮد ﻓﺸﺎر اﺿﺎﻓﻲ در‬
.‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
‫درﭘﻮش ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط را ﻛﻪ روي ﻛﺎﭘﻮت ﻗﺮار دارد ﺑﺮ‬ 1
.‫دارﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ و ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري در زﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬ 2
.‫ﻛﻨﺎر ﭼﺮخ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻋﻘﺐ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
‫ﻛﺎور ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري را ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮده‬ 3
‫ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ را وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و در ﻣﺨﺰن ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ را ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ را ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮده و ﻛﺎور را ﻣﺠﺪداً ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ‬. ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬، ‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬129 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬. ‫زﻳﺴﺖ را آﻟﻮده ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬
Service and maintenance
Cooling system
Filling
IMPORTANT! To avoid damage to engine
and cooling system different coolants or
corrosion protection must not be mixed, see
page148.
Filling with coolant is done through the
expansion tank.
− The engine should not be running and
the temperature control set to warm.
− Fill with coolant to the maximum mark
on the expansion tank.
− Run the engine until it is warm and top
up the coolant level until all air has been
removed from the system.
− The level should be checked after the
engine has been run warm and then
allowed to cool.
NOTE! The system can also be filled
through the draining nipple.
IMPORTANT! Never fill a hot engine with
cold coolant, as this may cause the cylinder
block or the cylinder head to crack.
Failure to change coolant will cause clogging
of the cooling system and the risk of engine
damage.
Coolant pump
Check the belt tension every 500 hours.
warning
The engine must be stationary when
checking the belt tension - rotating parts can
cause injuries.
‫در ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط‬
Belt tension, checking and adjusting
The belt also drives the fuel feed pump for the
fuel system.
Loosen the bolts (A and B). The belt is
adjusted with the aid of the oblong hole by bolt
B. At correct tension, it should be possible to
deflect the belt approx. 15 mm (0.6 in)
applying a fairly hard pressure. Then tighten
down the bolts.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي وارد ﺷﺪن آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺎﻻت ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري و ﻣﻮاد ﺿﺪ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬، ‫ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬148 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ‬
.‫ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮده و درﺟﻪ ﺣﺮارت را روي ﮔﺮم ﻗﺮار‬ -
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ اﻧﺒﺴﺎط را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻛﺜﺮ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ از ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﭘﺮ‬ -
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮم ﺷﻮد و ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري را‬ -
. ‫ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻮا ﻛﺎﻣﻼً از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ را ﭘﺲ از آﻧﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﮔﺮم و دوﺑﺎره ﺳﺮد ﺷﺪ‬ -
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري را ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ )ﻧﻴﭙﻞ( ﺑﻮﺷﻦ‬
.‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ! ﻫﺮﮔﺰ در ﻣﻮﺗﻮر داغ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺳﺮد ﻧﺮﻳﺰﻳﺪ زﻳﺮا‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﺮك ﺧﻮردن ﺑﻠﻮك ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر ﻳﺎ ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر‬
‫ ﻧﻘﺺ در ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬. ‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري و ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
(‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري )واﺗﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻛﺸﻴﺪﮔﻲ )ﺷﻞ و ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن(ﺗﺴﻤﻪ را‬500 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
، ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﮔﻲ )ﺷﻞ و ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن(ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﺪ زﻳﺮا ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﮔﻲ )ﺷﻞ و ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن(ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ را‬. ‫اﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ اﻧﺪازد‬
B ‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﻴﺎر ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮارﮔﻴﺮي ﭘﻴﭻ‬.(A,B) ‫ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ وﻗﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻛﺸﺶ ﻗﺮار‬.‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
15 mm ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ اﻣﻜﺎن ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻛﺮدن آن ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان‬، ‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
.‫ اﻳﻨﭻ( ﺑﺎ وارد ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺎر ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً زﻳﺎدي وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬0.6)
.‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎ را ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
150
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Cooling system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬

Radiator, cleaning ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬

The radiator should be cleaned at regular
intervals in order to safeguard the cooling of
the engine. When operating under especially
dusty conditions, the radiator should be
checked daily.
‫ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮد ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮان‬،‫رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ در ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮد‬.‫از درﺳﺖ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺷﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺑﻮد‬
.‫و ﺧﺎك زﻳﺎد وﺟﻮد دارد رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﻫﺮ روز ﺑﺎﻳﺪ وارﺳﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

warning !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
The engine must not be running when
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﻴﺸﻮد ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ زﻳﺮا‬
cleaning the radiator as rotating parts may
cause injuries. .‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

NOTE! The radiator core can be easily ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﺷﺒﻜﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ دﻗﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻧﺸﻮد ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘﻲ آﺳﻴﺐ‬
damaged if not handled carefully.
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ‬

Radiator, cleaning ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬

.‫ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 1
1 Open up the radiator casing. .‫ﻛﺎورﻫﺎي ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 2
2 Open the engine covers.
.‫ﻛﺎورﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺎري ﻓﻦ را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 3
3 Open the side covers by the cooling fan.
‫ )از ﺳﻤﺖ ﻓﻦ‬.‫رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﻮاي ﻓﺸﺮده ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 4
4 Blow the radiator clean with compressed
air from the inside, (cooling fan side). ( ‫ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
‫ﻛﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ A
5 Check and clean the outside of the .‫ﺑﻴﺮون رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 5
radiator. ‫ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ B
.‫ﺗﻤﺎم ﻛﺎورﻫﺎ را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ و ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬ 6
6 Close all covers and lower the radiator ‫ﻓﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ C
casing. ‫ﻛﺎور ﻛﻨﺎري‬ D ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﺷﺒﻜﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ دﻗﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎ ﻧﺸﻮد ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘﻲ آﺳﻴﺐ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ‬
NOTE! The radiator core can be easily
damaged if not handled carefully.

‫ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه دو ﺟﻬﺘﻪ‬

Reversible cooling fan,
(optional equipment)
In very dirty environments it may be a good
idea to clean the radiator often. If the machine
is equipped with a reversible cooling fan, the
fan can be made to temporarily change
direction to blow the radiator clean at set
intervals.
To check the setting of the reversible cooling
fan, see menu on the display unit, page39.
Setting is carried out with the keyboard under
menu Engine, page38.
(‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
‫در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر آﻟﻮده ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬. ‫رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺗﺮي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻓﻦ در زﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎي ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬، ‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﻦ دو ﺟﻬﺘﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
. ‫ﺟﻬﺖ داده و رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻨﻮي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ آن را‬،‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﻦ دو ﺟﻬﺘﻪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬39 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﺑﺮ روي ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬، ‫ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬،‫اﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ در ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬38 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

151
Service and maintenance
Electrical system
Electrical system
Check the travelling lights and control
lamps daily.
Battery disconnect switch
The battery disconnect switch is located inside
the cover on the radiator casing. If the machine
is to be left unattended for some time, the
battery disconnect switch should be turned off.
Batteries
The batteries are two 12 V batteries which are
connected in series providing a system voltage
of 24 V.
Check the electrolyte level every 250 hours
(more often at temperatures above +15 °C =
+59 °F).
ƒ The level should be approx. 10 mm (0.4
in) above the cell plates.
ƒ Top up with distilled water when
required.
ƒ Check that the cable terminals and pole
studs are clean, well tightened and
coated with petroleum jelly or similar.
The state of charge of the batteries is checked
with a hydrometer. When there is a risk of
frost, it is very important that the batteries do
not become discharged as the electrolyte in a
discharged battery is more likely to freeze and
so destroy the battery.
Batteries, rules
ƒ Never smoke near batteries, as these
give off explosive gases.
ƒ Do not connect a discharged battery in
series with a fully charged battery. The
current surge can cause the batteries to
explode.
ƒ Make sure that metal objects (such as
tools, rings, watch straps etc.) do not
come into contact with the battery pole
studs. Protections should be installed
over the battery pole studs, as otherwise
there is a risk of injuries and fire.
ƒ Never tilt a battery in any direction.
Battery electrolyte may leak out.
ƒ When removing a battery, disconnect the
ground cable first.
ƒ When installing a battery, connect the
ground cable last. The risk of sparks,
which ca cause fire, is reduced.
ƒ When charging batteries, follow the
instructions on page153.
ƒ When using a spare battery to aid
starting, follow the instructions on
page154.
Batteries contain substances dangerous to
health and the environment. They must
therefore be disposed of according to local
and/or national regulations.
Remember that battery electrolyte is
corrosive.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺣﺮﻛﺖ و ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﻫﺮ روز‬
.‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎور و روي ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬. ‫اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬
‫ وﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺳﺮي‬12 ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ دو ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
.‫ وﻟﺘﻲ را ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻨﺪ‬24 ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ و ﻳﻚ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻣﻴﺰان اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )در‬250 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
‫ ﻓﺎر ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬+59° : ‫ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﮔﺮاد‬15° ‫دﻣﺎﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻي‬
(.‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮي ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي‬ (0.4) ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‬10 ‫ƒ ﻣﻘﺪار اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒ ًﺎ‬
.‫اﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺎﻻي ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ƒ در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را از آب ﻣﻘﻄﺮ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ‬،‫ƒ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ و ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ و ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻪ ﺑﻪ آن ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ‬. ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻫﻴﺪرو ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻳﺦ زدن وﺟﻮد دارد ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬
‫دﺷﺎرژ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ اﻣﻜﺎن ﻳﺦ زدن اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ و ﺑﻪ ﺗﺒﻊ آن‬
.‫ﺧﺮاب ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎﺗﺮي در ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي دﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺪه ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ از‬، ‫ƒ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ ﺳﻴﮕﺎر ﻧﻜﺸﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﻣﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﺎﻣﻼً د ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺪه را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺳﺮي ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
‫ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬. ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺷﺎرژ وﺻﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ ﮔﺮدد‬
،‫ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎ‬، ‫ƒ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﺷﻴﺎء ﻓﻠﺰي )ﻣﺜﻞ اﺑﺰار آﻻت‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ﻏﻴﺮه( ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي در ﺗﻤﺎس‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ دور ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻗﻄﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻧﺼﺐ‬،‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ در ﻏﻴﺮ اﻳﻦ ﺻﻮرت ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﺼﺪوﻣﻴﺖ و‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬. ‫ƒ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را در ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﻬﺘﻲ ﻛﺞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮون ﻧﺸﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ اﺑﺘﺪا‬
.‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ‬،‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻪ‬، ‫ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ‬. ‫را در آﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي ﺷﻮد ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
153 ‫ ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ƒ در زﻣﺎن ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
.‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن‬
154 ‫ از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ ﺣﺎوي ﻣﻮادي ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻲ و ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻛﺸﻮري و ﻳﺎ‬. ‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬.‫ﻣﺤﻠﻲ از ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮوﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
152
 Service and maintenance
Electrical system
Batteries, charging
warning
When a battery is being charged an
explosive mixture of oxygen and hydrogen is
formed. A short circuit, an open flame or a
spark in the neighbourhood of the battery
can cause a powerful explosion. Always turn
off the charging current, before the charging
lead clips are removed. Ventilate well,
especially if the battery is charged in a
confined space.
The battery electrolyte contains corrosive
sulphuric acid. Electrolyte spilled on bare
skin must be removed immediately. Wash
with soap and plenty of water. If you get
splashes of electrolyte in your eyes or on any
other sensitive part of your body, at once
rinse with plenty of water and seek medical
advice immediately.
153
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي در ﺣﺎل ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺪن اﺳﺖ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﻔﺠﺎري‬
‫ ﺷﻌﻠﻪ ﻳﺎ‬،‫ اﺗﺼﺎل ﻛﻮﺗﺎه‬.‫از اﻛﺴﻴﮋن و ﻫﻴﺪروژن ﺑﻮﺟﻮد ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺟﺮﻗﻪ در ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻳﻚ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر‬
‫ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎي‬.‫ﺑﺰرگ ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﮔﺮ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را ﺷﺎرژ‬.‫ﺷﺎرژ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ داﺧﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﺣﺎوي اﺳﻴﺪ ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻮرﻳﻚ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ روي ﭘﻮﺳﺖ رﻳﺨﺖ‬.‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺧﻮرﻧﺪﮔﻲ دارد‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ از روي ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﭘﺎك ﺷﻮد و ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ آب زﻳﺎد و‬
‫ اﮔﺮ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ داﺧﻞ ﭼﺸﻢ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪه ﺷﺪ و‬.‫ﺻﺎﺑﻮن ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻳﺎ روي ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎي ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﺪن رﻳﺨﺖ ﺑﺎ آب زﻳﺎد آن ﻗﺴﻤﺖ را‬
.‫ﺑﺸﻮﻳﻴﺪ و ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً از اﻣﺪادﻫﺎي ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
Service and maintenance
Electrical system
Starting with booster batteries
warning
Due to current surge, batteries can explode
causing injury, if a fully charged battery is
connected to a completely discharged one.
Check that the booster batteries or any other
power source has the same voltage as the
ordinary batteries.
Proceed as follows:
1 1 Move the gear selector to neutral.
2 Apply the parking brake.
3 Connect one of the jump leads from (+) on
the booster battery, to (+) on the battery,
which is connected nearest to the starter
motor.
4 Connect the other jump lead from (-) on the
booster battery, to for example the lifting
eye on the cylinder head.
‫ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي ﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬B
5 Make sure that the battery disconnect
switch is switched on.
6 Start the engine from the cab with the
ignition key.
warning
Do not under any circumstances disconnect
the leads from the ordinary batteries.
7 Leave the batteries connected for 5-10
minutes after starting the engine.
8 If the ordinary batteries are greatly
discharged, it may happen that the
alternator does not provide any charging
current. Therefore, switch on a number of
devices, which consume a lot of current, in
order to initiate the charging, e.g. travel
lights, working lights and preheating.
9 First remove the jump lead between (-), e.g.
the lifting eye on the cylinder head and (-)
on the booster battery.
10 Then remove the jump lead from (+) on the
battery, which is nearest to the starter motor
and (+) on the booster battery.
11 Re-install the insulating caps on the battery
terminals.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﺎﻣﻼً د ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺪه‬
‫وﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد در اﺛﺮ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
.‫ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺷﺪه و ﻣﻮﺟﺐ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮوي دﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮرد‬
.‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد وﻟﺘﺎژي ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ زﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه را روي ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻼص ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬ 1
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‬ 2
(+) ‫( ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ‬+) ‫ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺟﺮﻳﺎن را از‬ 3
.‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺗﺮ اﺳﺖ وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ‬، ‫( ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬-) ‫ﺳﻴﻢ دﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن را از‬ 4
.‫ﻗﻼب ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺑﺎﻻ ﻛﺸﻴﺪن روي ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
. ‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ 5
(‫)دﻳﺎﮔﺮام ﻛﻠﻲ‬
.‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ از داﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﺎرت ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬ 6
‫ ﺑﺎﻃﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬A
‫ ﺑﻠﻮك ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر‬C
‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬D
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ را ﻗﻄﻊ‬
.‫ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﭘﺲ از روﺷﻦ ﺷﺪن‬10-5 ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬ 7
.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در ﻫﻤﺎن ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﺗﺼﺎل رﻫﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
،‫اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ ي ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺧﻴﻠﻲ زﻳﺎد د ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ 8
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر ﻫﻴﭻ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه اي ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﺪادي از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن زﻳﺎدي ﻣﺼﺮف‬،‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬.‫ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري و ﭘﻴﺶ‬،‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
.‫ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﺶ را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﺮوع ﺷﻮد‬
‫( ﻗﻼب ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺑﺎﻻ ﻛﺸﻴﺪن‬-) ‫اﺑﺘﺪا ﺳﻴﻢ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺑﻴﻦ‬ 9
.‫( ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ را ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-) ‫روي ﺳﺮ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر )ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﺜﺎل( و‬
‫( روي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻧﺰدﻳﻜﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬+) ‫ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬10
.‫( ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻛﻤﻜﻲ را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬+) ‫اﺳﺘﺎرت و‬
‫ ﺳﭙﺲ درﭘﻮش ﻫﺎي ﻋﺎﻳﻖ روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را دوﺑﺎره وﺻﻞ‬11
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
154
 Service and maintenance
Electrical system
Alternator
Check the belt tension every 500 hours.
warning
The engine must be stationary when
checking the belt tension - rotating parts can
cause injuries.
Belt tension, checking and adjusting
Loosen bolts (B) and adjust with adjusting
screw (A) until the correct belt tension is
obtained. At correct tension, it should be
possible to deflect the belt approx. 15 mm (0.6
in) applying a fairly hard pressure. Then lock
with bolts (B).
The alternator installation is sensitive to
faulty connection, therefore always follow
the instructions below:
Disconnecting battery
ƒ Turn off the battery disconnect switch.
ƒ Battery and alternator cables must not be
disconnected while the engine is
running. This can damage the alternator.
ƒ Disconnect and insulate the battery
cables before carrying out any work on
the alternator equipment.
Battery connection
ƒ Turn off the battery disconnect switch.
ƒ The connecting terminals on the
batteries must under no circumstances
be confused. The respective pole studs
have a stamped-in + or - sign. If the
cables are wrongly connected, the
alternator rectifier is destroyed
immediately.
Electric welding
ƒ Before electric welding is carried out on
the machine or attachment, turn off the
battery disconnect switch.
ƒ Because of the sensitivity of the
electrical system, the ECUs must be
disconnected before welding. Contact an
authorised dealer workshop.
ƒ Connect the welding equipment ground
lead as close to the welding point as
possible.
See also page131.
155
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر‬500 ‫ﻛﺸﻴﺪﮔﻲ )ﺷﻞ و ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن( ﺗﺴﻤﻪ را ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﮔﻲ )ﺷﻞ و ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن( ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫روﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ زﻳﺮا ﻗﻄﻌﺎت ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﮔﻲ )ﺷﻞ و ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن ( ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫( ﺗﺴﻤﻪ را روي اﻧﺪازه‬A) ‫ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬B ‫ﭘﻴﭻ‬
‫ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان‬. ‫ﻛﺸﺶ )ﺷﻞ و ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن( ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ اﻋﻤﺎل‬،‫ﻛﺸﺶ )ﺷﻞ و ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن( ﺗﺴﻤﻪ درﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
(‫ اﻳﻨﭻ‬0.6) ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‬15 ‫ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪود‬، ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً زﻳﺎدي‬
.‫( را ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬B) ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻴﭻ‬.‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ارﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻧﺼﺐ آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺺ در اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺣﺴﺎس اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻫﻤﻮاره ﻃﺒﻖ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ زﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
.‫ƒ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي و آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬.‫در ﺣﺎل ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن اﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت روي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر‬
.‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮده و آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫وﺻﻞ ﻛﺮدن ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
.‫ƒ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي اﺗﺼﺎل ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ وﺟﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﺮ روي ﻫﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻗﻄﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻳﻚ‬.‫ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ اﺷﺘﺒﺎه ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ اﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﻲ‬،‫ ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬+ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ – ﻳﺎ‬
.‫وﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد ﻳﻜﺴﻮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر ﻓﻮراً ﺧﺮاب ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻴﺶ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ روي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش‬،‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﻗﺮر دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﺎ‬ECU، ‫ƒ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻮدن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﺎر ﺑﺎ‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺳﻴﻢ اﺗﺼﺎل زﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ اﻣﻜﺎن‬
.‫در ﻧﺰدﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎري ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬131 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
Service and maintenance
Electrical system
z
Relays and fuses
Relays and fuses are positioned in the electrical
distribution box behind the operator seat and
become accessible after the cover for the
electrical distribution box has been opened. A
decal on the inside of the cover shows which
current consuming device is connected to the
respective relay and fuse.
Never install a fuse with a higher rating than
that given on the decal (there is a risk of
damage or fire on the circuit board).
If a fault should arise in one of the relays, this
can be temporarily remedied by replacing the
faulty relay with another relay which has a less
important function.
Working lights by cab roof,
HID
If the machine as an option is equipped with
working lights which have a bulb of the HID
type (High Intensity gas Discharge lamp), the
following applies:
warning
The bulb stores energy after it has been
switched off. To avoid electrical shocks and
possible injury, the bulb must not be
touched until it has been switched off for at
least five minutes.
Replacing light bulb, HID
Replacement of bulbs or other work on the
working lights should be carried out at an
authorised dealer workshop.
NOTE! The bulb contains mercury. When
replaced, it should therefore be taken care
of according to local regulations for
dangerous waste.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ‬
‫رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ و ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ داﺧﻞ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮق در ﭘﺸﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ و ﭘﺲ از ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﺎور ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺒﻲ روي ﻗﺴﻤﺖ داﺧﻠﻲ ﻛﺎور وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ‬.‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﻌﻤﻮل ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده و رﻟﻪ و ﻓﻴﻮز ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ را‬
.‫ﻧﺸﺎن ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺎه ﻓﻴﻮزي ﺑﺎ درﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ از آﻧﭽﻪ روي ﺑﺮ ﭼﺴﺐ ﻧﺸﺎن داده‬
‫ﺷﺪه ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ )ﺧﻄﺮ اﻳﺠﺎد آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻳﺎ آﺗﺶ ﺳﻮزي‬
.(‫روي ﺑﺮد ﻣﺪار وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان آن را ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت‬،‫اﮔﺮ رﻟﻪ ﺧﺮاﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ از رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻛﻢ اﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺗﺮي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺮد‬
HID ، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري روي ﺳﻘﻒ‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﺧﺘﻴﺎري ﺑﺎ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ داراي‬
‫ )ﻻﻣﭗ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﮔﺎز ﺷﺪت ﺑﺎﻻ( ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬HID ‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﻧﻮع‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ را ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي‬.‫ﻻﻣﭗ ﭘﺲ از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن اﻧﺮژي ذﺧﻴﺮه ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺎي اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮ اﺛﺮ ﺷﻚ‬
‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﭘﺲ از ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺷﺪن ﻻﻣﭗ‬5 ‫ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺗﺎ‬،‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ آن دﺳﺖ زد‬
HID ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻻﻣﭗ ﭼﺮاغ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮ روي ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد‬
، ‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﭘﺲ از ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬، ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻻﻣﭗ ﺣﺎوي ﺟﻴﻮه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ زﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك‬
.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﺷﻮد‬
156
 ‫‪Service and maintenance‬‬
‫‪Electrical system‬‬
‫‪Headlamps, adjusting‬‬
‫‪The headlight adjustment is of great‬‬
‫‪importance in order to avoid dazzling on-‬‬
‫‪coming traffic. The headlights are of the‬‬
‫‪asymmetrical type, which means that one has‬‬
‫‪to take extra care when adjusting.‬‬
‫‪Place the machine, which must not be loaded,‬‬
‫‪on level ground at right angles to a wall or‬‬
‫‪similar.‬‬
‫‪Adjust the upper boundary (H) of the low‬‬
‫‪beams at a distance of (L) from the headlamps.‬‬
‫‪Check the distance (Y) between the centres of‬‬
‫‪the beams with the high beams switched on.‬‬
‫‪The distance should be the same as between‬‬
‫‪the headlamps on the machine.‬‬
‫‪157‬‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭼﺮاغ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭼﺮاغ ﺟﻠﻮ از اﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻮردار اﺳﺖ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮري‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﭼﺸﻢ راﻧﻨﺪﮔﺎن ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺧﻮدروﻫﺎ را اذﻳﺖ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ از ﻧﻮع ﻧﺎ ﻣﺘﻘﺎرن )آﺳﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﻜﺎل( ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ دﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر دﻗﺖ ﻛﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﺑﺎر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ روي ﻳﻚ‬
‫زﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺮاز و ﻣﺴﻄﺢ و روﺑﺮوي ﻳﻚ دﻳﻮار ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ آن ﻗﺮار‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻي )‪ (H‬ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ را در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ )‪ (L‬از ﭼﺮاغ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ را روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮده و ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ )‪ (Y‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮاﻛﺰ ﻧﻮر‬
‫دو ﭼﺮاغ را ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ درﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫اﻧﺪازه ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ روي ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ در ﻣﺪل ‪L60F‬‬
‫)‪L=5000 mm(16 ft 4.8 in‬‬
‫) ‪H=0.85 ¯ (1290 mm(4 ft 2.8 in)+R‬‬
‫)‪Y=1765 mm (5 it 9.5 in‬‬
‫)‪X=1290 mm (4 ft 2.8 in‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ از ﻛﻒ ‪ /‬زﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻮﭘﻲ ﭼﺮخ ﺟﻠﻮ=‪R‬‬
‫اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ در ﻣﺪل ‪L70F‬‬
‫)‪L=5000 mm(16 ft 4.8 in‬‬
‫) ‪H=0.85 ¯ (1280 mm(4 ft 2.4 in)+R‬‬
‫)‪Y=1820 mm (5 it 11.7 in‬‬
‫)‪X=1280 mm (4 ft 2.4 in‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ از ﻛﻒ ‪ /‬زﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻮﭘﻲ ﭼﺮخ ﺟﻠﻮ=‪R‬‬
‫اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ در ﻣﺪل ‪L90F‬‬
‫)‪L=5000 mm(16 ft 4.8 in‬‬
‫) ‪H=0.8¯ (1350 mm(4 ft 5.1 in)+R‬‬
‫)‪Y=1990 mm (6 it 6.3 in‬‬
‫)‪X=1350 mm (4 ft 5.1 in‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ از ﻛﻒ ‪ /‬زﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻮﭘﻲ ﭼﺮخ ﺟﻠﻮ=‪R‬‬
‫‪Service and maintenance‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫‪Transmission‬‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

‫‪Transmission‬‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫‪Transmission oil level, checking‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ در ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

‫‪Check the oil level when the machine is‬‬

‫‪warm every 500 hours.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ را ﻫﺮ ‪ 500‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر و زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﮔﺮم‬
‫‪When checking, the machine should stand on‬‬ ‫اﺳﺖ ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪level ground, with the gear selector in neutral‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪position and applied parking brake.‬‬
‫‪When checking the oil with the engine running‬‬ ‫و دﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪه روي ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻼص ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪and the machine at working temperature, the‬‬ ‫دﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺸﻴﺪه ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪level should stand between the markings High‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر روﺷﻦ اﺳﺖ و ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در دﻣﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻗﺮا دارد‬
‫‪and Low in the lower part of the glass.‬‬
‫اﮔﺮ روﻏﻦ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ)‪(High‬و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ)‪ (Low‬در ﺑﺨﺶ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‪.‬‬

‫‪Transmission oil, changing‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫‪Change oil every 2000 hours .‬‬ ‫روﻏﻦ را ﻫﺮ ‪ 2000‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪warning‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺪار!‬
‫‪Take care when changing oil, as hot oil can‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ روﻏﻦ را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا روﻏﻦ‬
‫‪cause burns to unprotected skin.‬‬
‫داغ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ روي ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺑﺪون ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬

‫‪The oil is drained at the drain plug.‬‬

‫روﻏﻦ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ درﭘﻮش ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬

‫‪Fill with oil through the filler pipe.‬‬

‫روﻏﻦ را از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Oil capacity when changing:‬‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ روﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن‪:‬‬

‫)‪L60F/L70F, approx. 20 litres (5.3 US gal‬‬ ‫در ﻣﺪل ﻫﺎي‪ L60F/L70F,‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً )‪ 5.3‬ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ(‬
‫)‪L90F, approx. 21 litres (5.5 US gal‬‬ ‫در ﻣﺪل‪ L90F,‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ 21‬ﻟﻴﺘﺮ )‪ 5.5‬ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ(‬
‫ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺪن رده ﺑﻨﺪي ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺘﻲ روﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 185‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫‪Oil quality grades, see page185.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ‬
‫را آﻟﻮده ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 129‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an‬‬
‫‪environmentally safe way, see page129.‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻓﻲ را ﻫﺮ ‪ 2000‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Suction strainer‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪Clean the strainer every 2000 hours.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻛﺎور را ﺧﺎرج ﻛﺮده و ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪The suction strainer is positioned at the bottom‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻳﻚ واﺷﺮ آب ﺑﻨﺪي) ﮔﺴﮕﺖ( ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎور و ﻫﻮزﻳﻨﮓ‬
‫‪of the transmission housing.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪1. 1 Remove the cover and clean.‬‬ ‫‪ A‬در ﭘﻮش ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ارﻳﻨﮓ روي ﻟﻮﻟﻪ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2. Install a new gasket between cover and‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻛﺎور ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ‬
‫‪ 4‬روﻏﻦ را ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪transmission housing.‬‬
‫‪3. Also replace the O-ring on the suction‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪strainer connecting pipe.‬‬
‫‪4. Fill oil.‬‬
‫‪5. Check that there are no leaks.‬‬

‫‪158‬‬
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Transmission ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Transmission, replacing oil filter ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺘﻘﺎ ل ﻗﺪرت‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬2000 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺮ‬
Replace the filter every 2000 hours.
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ از اﻧﻮاع ﭘﻴﭽﻲ اﺳﺖ و در ﻗﺴﻤﺖ زﻳﺮ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
The oil filter is of the "spin on" type and is
accessible from underneath on the left side of ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬.‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
machine. .‫ﺷﻮد‬
The filter cannot be cleaned, but must be
replaced.

‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ در ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Transmission, breather filter
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺘﻘﺎ ل ﻗﺪرت‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬
Replace the filter every 2000 hours.
‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺨﺰن روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻳﻚ‬
The filter is combined with the filter for the
hydraulic oil tank. .‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ اﺳﺖ‬

.‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬

The filter cannot be cleaned, but must be
replaced.
‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬،‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬129 ‫زﻳﺴﺖ را آﻟﻮده ﻧﻜﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page129.

159
‫‪Service and maintenance‬‬
‫‪Front and rear axles‬‬
‫‪Front and rear axles‬‬
‫‪Axles, changing oil‬‬
‫‪Change oil every 1000 hours.‬‬
‫!‪Warning‬‬
‫‪Take care when changing oil, as hot oil can‬‬
‫‪cause burns to unprotected skin.‬‬
‫‪ƒ Operate the machine for a few minutes‬‬
‫‪and check the oil level again. Topping‬‬
‫‪up may be required.‬‬
‫‪Draining‬‬
‫)‪Drain the oil from axle (B) and hub (C‬‬
‫‪respectively.‬‬
‫‪Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an‬‬
‫‪environmentally safe way, see page129.‬‬
‫‪Axles, capacities‬‬
‫‪L60F‬‬
‫‪Oil capacity front axle when changing, 24‬‬
‫‪litres (6.3 US gal) (incl. differential carrier‬‬
‫‪assembly and hubs).‬‬
‫‪Oil capacity rear axle when changing, 24‬‬
‫‪litres (6.3 US gal) (incl. differential carrier‬‬
‫‪assembly and hubs).‬‬
‫‪L70F/L90F‬‬
‫‪Oil capacity front axle when changing, 35‬‬
‫‪litres (9.2 US gal) (incl. differential carrier‬‬
‫‪assembly and hubs).‬‬
‫‪Oil capacity rear axle when changing, 27 litres‬‬
‫‪(7.1 US gal) (incl. differential carrier assembly‬‬
‫‪and hubs).‬‬
‫‪Oil quality grades, see page185.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺒﻲ و ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺒﻲ و ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫روﻏﻦ را ﻫﺮ ‪ 1000‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪار!‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ روﻏﻦ را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا روﻏﻦ‬
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫داغ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ روي ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺑﺪون ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‪.‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ و ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬ ‫ƒ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﺮاي ﭼﻨﺪ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻴﻨﺪازﻳﺪ و ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ‬
‫‪ B‬ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز روﻏﻦ را ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫روﻏﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ از اﻛﺴﻞ )‪ (B‬و ﺗﻮﭘﻲ )‪ (C‬ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫زﻳﺴﺖ را آﻟﻮده ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 129‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪L60F‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ در ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن ‪ 24 ،‬ﻟﻴﺘﺮ ) ‪6.3‬‬
‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ(‬
‫‪ A‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ و ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬
‫)ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ و ﺗﻮﭘﻲ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫‪ B‬ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ در ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن ‪ 24 ،‬ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬
‫) ‪6.3‬ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ( )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ و ﺗﻮﭘﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺎ(‬
‫‪L70F/L90F‬‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ در ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن ‪ 35 ،‬ﻟﻴﺘﺮ ) ‪9.2‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ(‬
‫)ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ و ﺗﻮﭘﻲ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ در ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن ‪ 27 ،‬ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬
‫) ‪7.1‬ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ(‬
‫)ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ و ﺗﻮﭘﻲ ﻫﺎ(‬
‫ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺪن رده ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺘﻲ روﻏﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 185‬ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪160‬‬
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Front and rear axles ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺒﻲ و ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ‬

Breather filter, front axle ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬

Replace filters every 2000 hours. .‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ درون ﻛﺎور ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ در ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
The front axle breather filter is positioned
.‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
inside the front cover on the left side of the
machine.

‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬

Breather filter, rear axle ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬

.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
Replace filters every 2000 hours. ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ درون ﻛﺎور ﻣﻮﺗﻮر در ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
The rear axle breather filter is positioned inside .‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
the engine cover on the right side of the
machine.

‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬

Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an ‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬،‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
environmentally safe way, see page129. ‫آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬

Lubrication of propeller shafts ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان‬

Lubricate the shafts every 500 hours , see ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬. ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان ﺑﺎﻳﺪ روان ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮد‬500 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
page173.
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬173

161
Service and maintenance
Brake system
Brake system
The brake system is all hydraulic and uses the
same oil tank as the working hydraulics and the
steering system.
Regarding checking and changing oil, see
page168.
Before opening the system or check-tightening
leaking couplings and connections, the
pressure in the brake system must be released.
This is done by turning off the engine and
pressing down the brake pedal repeatedly (30-
40 times).
Warning!
Even if the engine has been stopped, there is
still an accumulated pressure in the system.
Even if the engine has been stopped, there is
still an accumulated pressure in the system.
If the system is opened, without having first
released the pressure, oil under high
pressure will jet out and this could cause
injuries.
ƒ Discarded accumulators should be
taken care of by a workshop and
"punctured".
ƒ There is a risk of explosion if an
accumulator is heated.
Brake discs, checking
The wear of the brake discs should be
checked every 1000 hours.
- Start the engine to charge the brake
system.
- Stop the engine and apply the brake.
NOTE! The brake must be applied during
the entire wear check.
- Remove the cap nut on the wear indicator
and press in the pin against stop. The
position of the flat face on the pin
indicates how much the brake disc is worn.
If the face is level with the flat face on the
nipple, the brake disc is worn out and must
be replaced by an authorised workshop.
- Install the cap nut on the wear indicator
and carry out the same check of the other
brake discs.
Brakes, air bleeding
If bleeding of the brake system is necessary,
this should be done by an authorised dealer
workshop.
Brake test, checking service brakes, see
page95.
Parking brake, checking
Warning!
Brake test and checking the parking brake
should only be done within an area where it
cannot cause accidents.
1. 1 Apply the parking brake with the switch.
2. With 3rd gear engaged and engine at full
speed, the machine should remain
stationary.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ اﺳﺖ و از ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﺎري ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬168 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ از ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻮدن ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر‬.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ آزاد ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﻧﺸﺘﻲ و اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬
‫از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮدن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﻓﺸﺎر دادن ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ( ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬40-30) ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ و رﻫﺎ ﻛﺮدن آن‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎز ﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺪاري ﻓﺸﺎر داﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎز ﺷﻮد‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮون ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ƒ اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر )اﻧﺒﺎره( ﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻫﺎ‬
.‫ي ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و از رده ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
.‫ƒ ﮔﺮم ﻛﺮدن اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر ﺧﻄﺮ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر را ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه دارد‬
‫ﻣﻬﺮه در ﭘﻮش روي ﭘﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫دﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬1000 ‫ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺲ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺮدن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-
.‫ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﺮده و ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬-
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺪت ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬
.‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻬﺮه در ﭘﻮش روي ﭘﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ دﻳﺴﻚ را‬-
‫ﺑﺎز ﻛﺮده و ﭘﻴﻦ را آن ﻗﺪر ﺑﻪ داﺧﻞ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﻦ‬
‫ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻃﺮف ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﻣﻘﺪار‬.‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ اﮔﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ‬.‫ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ اﺳﺖ‬
ً‫ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‬،‫ﻃﺮف ﻣﺴﻄﺢ روي ﺑﻮﺷﻦ)ﻧﻴﭙﻞ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﻮده ﺷﺪه و ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﻬﺮه در ﭘﻮش را روي ﭘﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺎن دﻫﻨﺪه ﻓﺮﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ و‬-
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎي اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪه را در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﺎﻳﺮ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
.‫اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻮا ﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬،‫در ﺻﻮرت ﻟﺰوم ﻫﻮاﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
.‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬59 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎي اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ و ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ در ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم‬
.‫ﺷﻮد ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ وﻗﻮع ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﺼﺎدﻓﻲ ﻧﮕﺮدد‬
.‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ‬1
‫ اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ وﺟﻮد ﺣﺪﻛﺜﺮ دور‬3 ‫ در ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ روي دﻧﺪه‬2
.‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ در ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ و ﺣﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‬، ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
162
 Service and maintenance
Cab
Cab
Cab, ventilation filters
The cab ventilation filters consist of prefilter
and main filter. The clogging up of the filters is
entirely dependent on the working environment
of the machine, but the filters should be
checked once a week.
The main filter should be replaced every
2000 hours and the prefilter every 1000
hours.
NOTE! The interval between filter
replacements can be increased or reduced
depending on how dusty the working
environment is.
NOTE! The cab filters are only intended to
separate particles (dust) from the air. Any
dangerous gases are not trapped by the
filters.
Cleaning
1 Use a respirator (face mask).
2 Open the side cover and remove the filters.
3 Carefully shake the filters without damaging
them. Avoid using compressed air, vacuum
cleaner or water.
Asbestos filter (optional equipment)
The filter is especially intended for use in
environments where there may be asbestos
dust, but it is of course effective against all
other kinds of dust when the operator needs
highly filtered air in the cab.
Testing: The filter meets the requirements
according to DOPMIL standard 282 and
thereby also the requirements of the National
Swedish Board of Occupational Safety and
Health regulations Asbestos AFS 1996:13.
It also meets the requirements according to EN
1822:1 filter class H13. Pay attention to any
national regulations issued for work in
hazardous environments.
Asbestos
Advice for operating in environments where
dust / asbestos dust is present
ƒ It is important that the cab is kept free
from dust / asbestos dust as far as
possible:
- Enter and leave the machine in a place away
from the asbestos contaminated area.
- Keep clothes and shoes clean from dust.
- Tidy and vacuum-clean the cab often and
use personal protective equipment, for
instance respirator (dust mask) intended
for asbestos contaminated areas.
- Make sure that the cab door is kept closed
while operating.
ƒ The cab should be ventilated through its
ventilation system, which also provides
excess pressure in the cab.
ƒ Replace filters (main filter and prefilter)
every 1000 hours or more often when
necessary and be careful with the new
filter, so that it is not damaged. When
installing, check that the filter edge
forms a tight seal.
ƒ With regard to risks to health and
environment, used filters must be placed
in the sealable plastic bag which is
supplied together with new filters. The
bag with the used filter should then be
deposited at a place authorised to take
care of asbestos waste.
163
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ از ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ و ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬،‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ اﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻮرت ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬،‫دارد ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در آن ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬1000 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر‬
.‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮر ﺟﺪا ﻛﺮدن ذرات ﻣﻌﻠﻖ در‬
‫ﻫﻮا )ﻏﺒﺎر( از ﻫﻮا ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﮔﺎزﻫﺎي ﺧﻄﺮﺗﺎك را ﺗﺼﻔﻴﻪ‬
.‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن‬
(‫ از ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺻﻮرت‬1
.‫ ﻛﺎور ﻛﻨﺎري را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ را ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬2
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ را ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ و ﺑﺪون رﺳﺎﻧﺪن آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ آﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﺎن‬3
.‫ ﺟﺎرو ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻳﺎ آب اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ از ﻛﻤﭙﺮس ﻫﻮا‬. ‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬A
(‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ )در داﺧﻞ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ‬B (‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز)آز ﺑﺴﺖ( )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
‫ وﻳﮋه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ در آﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﺒﺎر ﭘﻨﺒﻪ‬،‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫اﻣﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ‬.‫ﻧﺴﻮز)آز ﺑﺴﺖ( وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ﻫﻮاي ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺗﻤﻴﺰ در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ اﺳﺖ در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﻧﻮاع ﻏﺒﺎرﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺛﺮ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ داراي ﺷﺮاﻳﻄﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬: ‫اﻣﺘﺤﺎن ﻛﺮدن‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻻزم‬DOPMIL 282
AFS ‫اﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻠﻲ ﺳﻮﺋﺪ و ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻗﻮاﻧﻴﻦ ﺳﻼﻣﺖ‬
.‫ را ﻧﻴﺰ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1996:13
‫ ﻣﺮوط ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬EN 1822:1 ‫ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻘﺮرات ﻣﻠﻲ وﺿﻊ‬.‫ را ﻧﻴﺰ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬H 13 ‫ﻛﻼس‬
.‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎر در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
:(‫ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮر )آزﺑﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻻزم ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺎرﻛﺮدن در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮد و‬
.‫ ﻏﺒﺎر ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز )آزﺑﺴﺖ(در آﻧﻬﺎ وﺟﻮد دارد‬/ ‫ﺧﺎك‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻣﻬﻢ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ ƒ
.‫ ﻏﺒﺎر ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز)آزﺑﺴﺖ( دور ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ‬/ ‫از ﮔﺮد و ﺧﺎك‬
‫ ورود و ﺧﺮوج از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ دور از ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي‬-
.‫آﻟﻮده ﺑﻪ ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز)آزﺑﺴﺖ( اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﻟﺒﺎس ﻫﺎ و ﻛﻔﺶ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺘﺎن را از ﻏﺒﺎر ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬-
‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ را ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎر ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺗﻤﻴﺰ و ﺑﺎ دﻗﺖ ﭘﺎك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و از وﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬-
(‫ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ )ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر‬، ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي آﻟﻮده ﺑﻪ ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز)آزﺑﺴﺖ( اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ درﻫﺎي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻛﺎر ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬-
.‫ƒ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫اﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺸﺎر اﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ وﺟﻮد ﻣﻲ آورد‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ ( را ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ و ﻳﺎ در‬
‫ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺗﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻻزم ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و‬
. ‫ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻧﺒﻴﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر‬
.‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ درز ﮔﻴﺮي ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‬،‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻲ و ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در ﻳﻚ ﻛﻴﻒ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺪون ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﻴﻒ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ‬.‫ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬، ‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺮاي ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري از ﺿﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﭘﻨﺒﻪ‬
.‫ﻧﺴﻮز ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ داده ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
Service and maintenance
Air conditioning (optional equipment)
Air conditioning
(optional equipment)
Get an authorised dealer workshop to check the air
conditioning once a year.
Refrigerant (R134a)
The pressurised system contains HFC - refrigerant
R134a. It is illegal to purposely release refrigerant into
the open air. Any service, refilling or emptying of the
refrigerant circuit must only be carried out by a trained
and accredited person.
The air-conditioning unit of the machine is filled with
refrigerant R134a at the factory. This refrigerant has been
developed as an alternative to the earlier refrigerant R12
(Freon), as the R134a has less environmental impact.
R134a has, in difference to R12, no potentially depleting
properties that will affect the ozone layer of the
atmosphere, but as R134a is a so called greenhouse gas, it
must never intentionally be released into the open air.
NOTE! R134a must never be mixed with R12, as this
would cause the air-conditioning unit to fail.
Warning!
Refrigerant R134a easily causes frost-bite, if it comes
into contact with bare skin. When heated, gasses are
formed, which can be harmful to the lungs and nervous
system even at low concentrations, when no smell is
apparent. The symptoms may arise several hours (up to
24 hours) after exposure to the gas.
Suspected leakage
The system is pressurised and the refrigerant can
unintentionally leak out. Never disconnect hoses and never
remove the filler plug from the compressor.
If a leak is suspected, the system must not be topped up
- leave the area where the leak has taken place and
contact your authorised dealer workshop for action to
be taken.
First aid measures
In case of accidental contact with escaping refrigerant,
take the following measures:
- Refrigerant in gas form and when heated can, in low
concentrations, have an effect, particularly on the
nervous system. At high concentrations, the gas has a
narcotic effect. In both cases move personnel from the
danger area out into the fresh air. If someone is
seriously affected, seek medical advice.
- If large amounts of liquid refrigerant has come into
contact with unprotected skin, the injured area should
be carefully warmed with lukewarm water or warm
clothes. Seek medical advice if there are remaining
symptoms.
- If liquid refrigerant has come into contact with
someone's eyes, seek medical advice.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
(‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬
(‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
(R 134a) ‫ﻣﺒﺮد‬
‫ آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﻋﻤﺪي‬.‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬R1 34a ‫ – ﻣﺒﺮد‬HFC ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺣﺎوي‬
‫ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺮدن‬، ‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬.‫ﻣﺒﺮد در ﻫﻮاي آزاد ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺒﺮد ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ آﻣﻮز ش دﻳﺪه ﺻﻮرت ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ اﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺮد‬. ‫ ﭘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬R134a ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ از ﻣﺒﺮد‬
‫ آﺳﻴﺐ‬R134a ‫ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ‬،‫ )ﻓﺮﺋﻮن( ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‬R12 ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺒﺮد‬
.‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮي ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻲ رﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ اﺳﺘﺨﺮاﺟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻻﻳﻪ ازون‬، R12 ‫ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻼف‬R134a
،‫ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺎز ﮔﻠﺨﺎﻧﻪ اي ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬R1340 ‫ اﻣﺎ‬،‫ﺟﻮ آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ ﻧﺪارد‬
.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎز رﻫﺎ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﻮد زﻳﺮا اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮاب‬R12 ‫ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ‬R134a !‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
.‫ﺷﺪن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺳﺮﻣﺎ زدﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ‬R134a ‫ﻣﺒﺮد‬
‫ ﮔﺎزﻫﺎﻳﻲ اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻛﻢ آن‬،‫ در ﺻﻮرت ﺣﺮارت دﻳﺪن‬. ‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫)ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮﻳﻲ ﻫﻢ از آﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺎم ﻧﺮﺳﺪ( ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺶ ﻫﺎ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺼﺒﻲ آﺳﻴﺐ‬
24 ‫ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ در ﻣﻌﺮض اﻳﻦ ﮔﺎز ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺗﺎ‬. ‫ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
.‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ( ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﻫﺎي اﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ‬
. ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر اﺳﺖ و ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﺧﻮاﺳﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ در آن وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ را ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ و ﻫﺮ ﮔﺰ در ﭘﻮش ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر را ﺑﺮﻧﺪارﻳﺪ‬
. ‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﻈﻨﻮن ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ را ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﭘﺮﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ در آن ﺻﻮرت ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺮك ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻻزم ﺑﺎ‬
. ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز ﺧﻮد ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت ﻛﻤﻜﻲ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫در ﻣﻮارد ﺗﻤﺎس اﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺒﺮد ﻧﺸﺖ ﻛﺮده در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت زﻳﺮ را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻛﻢ آن ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ روي‬،‫ﻣﺒﺮد در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮔﺎزي و ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮم ﺷﻮد‬ -
.‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺼﺒﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬارد و ﻣﻘﺪار زﻳﺎد آن ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺧﻮاب آور دارد‬
‫در ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮرد ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ را از ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﺧﺎرج ﻛﺮده و در ﻣﻌﺮض ﻫﻮاي ﺗﺎزه‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺟﺪي در ﻣﻌﺮض ﮔﺎز ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮد ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي‬.‫ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ را اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻣﻘﺪار زﻳﺎدي ﻣﺒﺮد ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺑﺪون ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﻴﺪا‬-
،‫ﻛﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻴﺴﻪ آب ﮔﺮم ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎرﭼﻪ ﮔﺮم‬
‫ اﮔﺮ ﻋﻼﺋﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ از ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬.‫ﮔﺮم ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫اﮔﺮﻣﺒﺮد ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺸﻢ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺗﻤﺎس ﭘﻴﺪا ﻛﻨﺪ از ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺰﺷﻜﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ -
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
164
 Service and maintenance
Air conditioning (optional equipment)
Compressor
Check the belt tension every 500 hours.
Warning!
The engine must be stationary when
checking the belt tension - rotating belts can
cause injuries.
Belt tension, checking and
adjusting
Loosen bolts (B) and adjust with adjusting
screw (A) until the correct belt tension is
obtained. At correct tension, it should be
possible to deflect the belt approx. 15 mm (0.6
in) applying a fairly hard pressure. Then lock
with bolts (B).
In order to prevent leakage and to safeguard
the lubrication of the seals in the air-
conditioning compressor, the air conditioning
should be run for at least five minutes once a
month.
At temperatures below freezing, 0 °C (+32
°F), the unit must be run indoors, as the
power supply to the compressor lead is
switched off by the thermostat whenever the
evaporator temperature is below +1 °C (+34
°F).
NOTE! Make sure that the exhaust gases
are extracted or removed by ventilation in a
suitable way.
165
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
(‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
‫ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ‬500 ‫ﻛﺸﻴﺪﮔﻲ)ﺷﻞ و ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن(ﺗﺴﻤﻪ را ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﮔﻲ)ﺷﻞ و ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن( ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﺪ زﻳﺮا ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﺤﺮك ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
.‫ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬
‫ را ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ در‬A ‫ را ﺷﻞ ﻛﺮده و ﭘﻴﭻ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬B ‫ﭘﻴﭻ‬
‫ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬.‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺸﺶ)ﺷﻞ و ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن( ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ‬15 ‫ﻛﺸﺶ)ﺷﻞ و ﺳﻔﺖ ﺑﻮدن( ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ اﻳﻨﭻ( ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ارﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﻋﻤﺎل ﻓﺸﺎر ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً ﺑﺎﻻ‬0.6) ‫ﻣﺘﺮ‬
.‫ را ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬B ‫ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻬﺮه‬.‫داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از ﻧﺸﺘﻲ و ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ روان ﻛﺎري آﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر‬
‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬5 ‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع در ﻫﺮ ﻣﺎه ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬،‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬
.‫ﻛﺎر ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫( ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺳﺮ‬+32 °F) ‫در دﻣﺎي زﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه راه اﻧﺪازي ﺷﻮد ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻧﻴﺮوي ﻣﺤﺮك ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر‬
، ‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬+1 °c(+34 °F) ‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ دﻣﺎي اواﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
.‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎت ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ دود اﮔﺰوز در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺳﺮ‬
.‫ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد‬
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Air conditioning (optional equipment) (‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬

Condenser ‫ﻛﻨﺪاﻧﺴﻮر‬
Cleaning ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن‬

NOTE! High-pressure wash must not be .‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از آب ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﻮي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
used.
Clean the condenser at regular intervals as
follows: .‫ﻛﻨﺪا ﻧﺴﻮر را در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ زﻳﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
1 Open up the radiator casing. .‫ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 1
2 Blow the condenser clean from underneath .‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﻮاي ﻓﺸﺮده ﻛﻨﺪاﻧﺴﻮر را از ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 2
‫ ﻛﻨﺪاﻧﺴﻮر‬A
with compressed air. .‫ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر را ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‬ 3
3 Close the radiator casing.

،‫اﮔﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﻛﻨﺪاﻧﺴﻮر ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮود‬

If the pressure in the system becomes too
high because of a clogged condenser, the air ‫ ﻗﺒﻞ از روﺷﻦ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺠﺪد ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬.‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
conditioning will cut out. The condenser ‫ﻛﻨﺪاﻧﺴﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮد‬
must first be cleaned before the system is
restarted with the switch.
(‫ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه )اواﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
Evaporator ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن‬
Cleaning .‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ از آب ﻓﺸﺎر ﻗﻮي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﺮد‬

NOTE! High-pressure wash must not be ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن اواﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
used! ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﺳﺎده و اﺑﺘﺪاﻳﻲ اواﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ راﺣﺘﻲ در ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
Clean the evaporator at regular intervals. A ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﻧﺠﺎم اﺳﺖ‬
simple cleaning is done with the evaporator in
position. A simpler cleaning can be done with .‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎي اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﻮاي ﻓﺸﺮده از ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮس ﻧﺮم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
the evaporator in place. Use a soft brush, not ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن اواﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ از ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ اش ﺑﺎز‬
compressed air.
‫ﺷﺪه و از ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮد وﻟﻲ اﻳﻦ ﻛﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز‬
For a more thorough cleaning, the evaporator
.‫اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
must be loosened from its mountings and
cleaned from the rear. Therefore this ought to
be done by an authorised workshop.

166
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Operator seat, lubrication ‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ راﻧﻨﺪه‬

Operator seat, lubrication ‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ راﻧﻨﺪه‬

If squeaking noises arise, the seat should be ‫اﮔﺮ ﺻﺪاي ﺟﻴﺮ ﺟﻴﺮ از ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ زﻳﺮ‬
lubricated as shown below: .‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮد‬
(A) ‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ را ﺑﺎز ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 1
(B) ‫روي ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬ 2
1 Remove bolts (A).
.‫( را در ﻫﺮ دو ﻃﺮف روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬C) ‫راﺑﻂ ﻫﺎ‬ 3
2 Fold up seat (B).
3 Lubricate linkage (C) on both sides with oil. .‫( را ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬D) ‫اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎ‬ 4
4 Lubricate spring ends (D) with grease.

Remove the four plastic plugs retaining the

rubber bellows and push down the bellows,
Lubricate linkages (E) on both sides with oil.
6 Lubricate slide rails (F) on both sides with
grease
‫در ﭘﻮش ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ را ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺘﻜﻬﺎي ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ را ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﻲ‬ 5
‫( را از ﻫﺮ دو ﻃﺮف ﺑﺎ روﻏﻦ‬E) ‫دارﻧﺪ ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻪ و راﺑﻂ ﻫﺎ‬
.‫روان ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
(F) ‫رﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ را از ﻫﺮ دو ﻃﺮف ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 6

167
Service and maintenance
Hydraulic system
Hydraulic system
The same hydraulic oil tank is used for
working hydraulics, brake and steering
systems.
Any work on the system requires great
demands on cleanliness. Even very small
particles can cause damage or clog up the
system. Therefore, wipe areas in question clean
before any work is carried out.
The pressure-limiting valves for the hydraulic
system are set to the correct value at the
factory. If the valves are altered by any person
other than service personnel from an authorised
workshop, the guarantee from the manufacturer
will be void.
Hydraulic oil
NOTE! If the machine is provided with
biologically degradable hydraulic oil, the
same type of oil must be used when topping
up and when changing hydraulic oil.
Different types of biologically degradable
hydraulic oils must not be mixed. Mineral
oil must not be used together with
biologically degradable hydraulic oil. When
changing from mineral oil to biologically
degradable hydraulic oil, contact an
authorised dealer workshop.
Hydraulic system, checking oil
level
Check the oil level every 250 hours. The
level should stand between the Max. and
Min. marks on the level sight glass
(positioned on the left side of the machine).
NOTE! The oil level should be checked
when the lifting arms are in their lowest
position and with the attachment flat on the
ground.
Filling is done from the top of the hydraulic
tank.
Hydraulic system, changing oil
(Working hydraulics, brake and steering
systems)
Change oil every 4000 hours if the system is
filled with mineral hydraulic oil or Volvo
Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil 46.
Change oil every 2000 hours, if the system is
filled with any other biologically degradable
hydraulic oil.
NOTE! When using attached external
hydraulic equipment, e.g. road sweeper,
drill, snow blower or similar, the oil should
be changed at shorter intervals, i.e. every
1000 hours.
Oil capacity of the hydraulic tank when
changing: approx. 90 litres (23.8 US gal).
Oil quality grades, see page185.
Warning!
Take care when changing oil, as hot oil can
cause burns to unprotected skin.
‫ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬C
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و ﻓﺮﻣﺎن از‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﺎري ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
.‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﺰن روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﺸﺘﺮك اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت روي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰي ﺑﺴﻴﺎر زﻳﺎدي اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ذرات ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ‬.
‫ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ را ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬
.‫ﻛﺎري ﻛﺎﻻً ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺪود ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﻓﺸﺎر ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ در ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
.‫ﺑﺮ روي ﻓﺸﺎر ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﭘﺮﺳﻨﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز‬
.‫ ﮔﺎراﻧﺘﻲ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬،‫دﺳﺖ ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ از روﻏﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن دوﺑﺎره ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ دوﺑﺎره‬
‫ اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ از ﻫﻤﻴﻦ روﻏﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ روﻏﻦ‬.‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺮدن روﻏﻦ از روﻏﻦ‬. ‫ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز‬
.‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ‬. ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬250 ‫ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ و ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ روي ﺷﻴﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
.‫)ﻛﻪ در ﻃﺮف ﭼﭗ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار دارد( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎ ي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ در ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﻦ وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺮ روي ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ ﻗﺮار‬
.‫دارد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن از ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
(‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬،‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﺎري ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ از روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺮ‬، ‫ وﻟﻮو ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬46 ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬4000
‫اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ از ﺳﺎﻳﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر روﻏﻦ را ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2000 ‫ ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪه‬
، ‫ ﺑﺮف روب ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ اﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬،‫ درﻳﻞ‬،‫ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺟﺎروي ﺟﺎده‬، ‫ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر‬،‫روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺗﺮي ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬1000 ‫ﻣﺜﺎل ﻫﺮ‬
90 ً‫ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬:‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ روﻏﻦ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬
(‫ ﮔﺎﻟﻦ آﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎﻳﻲ‬23.8) ‫ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬185 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪه رده ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺘﻲ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ روﻏﻦ را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ زﻳﺮا روﻏﻦ‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬A .‫داغ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ اﻳﺠﺎد ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ روي ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺑﺪون ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ روﻏﻦ‬B
168
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Hydraulic system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Draining ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
NOTE! Use the same hose as is used for ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! از ﻫﻤﺎن ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮕﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر رﻓﺘﻪ‬
draining the engine oil. !‫اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Temporarily replace the rubber hose with a
3/4" inside diameter hose sufficiently long to ¾ ‫ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ داﺧﻠﻲ‬
reach the collecting vessel. .‫اﻳﻨﭻ و ﻃﻮل ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮاي رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
The draining point is positioned behind the side ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ در ﭘﺸﺖ ﭘﻠﻴﺖ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ در ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
plate on the left side.
.‫اﺳﺖ‬
1 Operate the machine until the oil reaches
normal working temperature. ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪازﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ روﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ دﻣﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻧﺮﻣﺎل‬ 1
2 Stand the machine on level ground with the .‫ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‬
bucket (attachment) lowered to the ground.
(‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﺻﺎف ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ و ﺑﺎﻛﺖ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬ 2
3 Stop the engine and release the pressure in
the brake system by depressing the brake .‫را ﺗﺎ روي زﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
pedal several times. Drain the hydraulic oil ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﻓﺸﺎر ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ را ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر‬ 3
via the draining point.
.‫ﻓﺸﺎر دادن و رﻫﺎ ﻛﺮدن ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻚ را از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
Hydraulic system, draining sludge
Drain sludge and condensation water from the
hydraulic oil tank via the draining point every ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ رﺳﻮﺑﺎت ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
1000 hours .
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻟﺠﻦ و آب ﻧﺎﺷﻲ از ﻣﻴﻌﺎن را از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬1000 ‫ﻫﺮ‬

Filling .‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

1 Fill with oil to correct level.
2 Start the engine and operate the lifting and ‫ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬
tilting cylinders to both end positions.
.‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺻﺤﻴﺢ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺮﻳﺰﻳﺪ‬ 1
3 Top up with oil when required.
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را روﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و ﺟﻚ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ و زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻨﺪه را‬ 2
Check that there are no leaks.
.‫ﺗﺎ اﻧﺘﻬﺎي ﻛﻮرس ﻛﺎري ﺷﺎن ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﺮ زﻣﺎن ﻛﻪ ﻻزم ﺑﻮد روﻏﻦ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 3
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an
environmentally safe way, see page129. .‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ وﺟﻮد ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ و ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ‬،‫ﻣﺮاﻗﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬

Hydraulic system, return oil ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬A .‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬129 ‫را آﻟﻮده ﻧﻜﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
filter ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ‬B
‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬C ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ در ﺗﻨﻔﺲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
Replace return oil filter every 2000 hours.
1 Remove the cover. ‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
2 Lift out and take apart the filter insert. .‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬2000 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ را ﻫﺮ‬
3 Remove the filter which is of the disposable
type and install a new filter. Check the seal
rings when installing. ‫ﻛﺎور را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ‬ 1
.‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ داﺧﻠﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ را ﺑﻴﺮون ﻛﺸﻴﺪه و ﺟﺪا ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 2
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ از رده ﺧﺎرج را ﺑﻴﺮون آورده و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻧﻮ را ﻧﺼﺐ‬ 3
.‫ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎي آﺑﻨﺪي را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﺼﺐ‬.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
Hydraulic system, breather
filter ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
The filter should be replaced every 2000 .‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬2000 ‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ‬
hours.
.‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬
The filter cannot be cleaned, but must be
replaced. .‫اﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ در ﻳﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
The filter is combined with the filter for the
transmission.

169
Service and maintenance
Accumulators, releasing pressure
Accumulators, releasing
pressure
The pressure in the accumulators for brake
system, Boom Suspension System and servo
system is released as shown below:
Warning!
Even if the engine has been stopped, there is
still an accumulated pressure in the system.
If the system is opened, without having first
released the pressure, oil under high
pressure will jet out and this could cause
injuries.
Even retightening of leaking couplings and
unions should not be done until the pressure
in the system has been fully released.
Brake system
1 Stop the engine.
2 Depress the brake pedal several times (30-40
times).
Boom Suspension System (BSS)
1 If there is a need to release the pressure in
the accumulators for the Boom Suspension
System, please contact an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Servo system
1 Stop the engine.
2 Ignition switch in position 1.
3 Move the control levers forward and
backward several times.
Warning!
Discarded accumulators must not be thrown
away unless they first have been taken care
of by a workshop and carefully
"punctured".
If a pressurised accumulator is heated, there
is a risk that it may explode.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
(‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺎر اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر )اﻧﺒﺎﺷﺘﮕﺮ‬
(‫آزاد ﻛﺮدن ﻓﺸﺎر اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر )اﻧﺒﺎره‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬،‫ﻓﺸﺎر اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮرﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
:‫ﺳﺮو ﺑﻪ روش زﻳﺮ آزاد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎز ﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺪاري ﻓﺸﺎر داﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺪون ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎز ﺷﻮد‬
‫روﻏﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺮون ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد و ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺟﺮاﺣﺖ ﮔﺮدد‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ دوﺑﺎره اﺗﺼﺎﻻت و ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﺎ‬
.‫زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر داﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻧﺸﺪه اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 1
‫ﭘﺪال ﺗﺮﻣﺰ را ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر ﻓﺸﺎر داده رﻫﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر آن‬ 2
(‫ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ‬30-40) ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
‫اﮔﺮ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر درون اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر ﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ 1
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﻮد ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز وﻟﻮو ﺗﻤﺎس‬
.‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮو‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 1
«1» ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺻﻠﻲ روﺷﻦ و ﺧﺎﻣﻮش ﻣﻮﺗﻮر را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ 2
.‫)ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺑﺎز( ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻮرﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل را ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ 3
.‫دﻫﻴﺪ‬
! ‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ ﺧﻄﺮ اﻧﻔﺠﺎر‬،‫ ﺣﺮارت داده ﺷﻮد‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر ﭘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫ اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮرﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﻴﻮب ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ دور اﻧﺪاﺧﺘﻪ‬.‫آن وﺟﻮد دارد‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ اﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎرﮔﺎه ﻣﺠﺎز ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و از رده‬
.‫ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
170
 Service and maintenance
Tyres
Tyres
Inflating tyres
Recommended air pressure should normally be
followed. Special handling operations may
require an adjustment of the air pressure. In
such cases follow the instructions from the tyre
manufacturer and do not exceed the maximum
permissible air pressures according to
recommendation.
The tyre pressure may have been raised before
the machine was delivered from the factory.
Therefore, check and adjust the tyre pressure
according to recommendations, before putting
the machine to work for the first time.
Warning!
Repair work on tyres and rims must be
carried out by personnel who have been
especially trained for this and have the
correct equipment.
The instructions stated below apply to an
inflated tyre where the pressure needs to be
increased. If the tyre has lost all pressure, a
trained service engineer should be called in.
- When checking the air pressure, the tyre
should be cold and the machine be without
a load.
- Ask all other persons to leave the danger
area (in front of the rim).
- Stand by the tyre tread as shown in the
figure. Tyre installed on a split rim may
explode causing injury or in the worst case
death.
- Use a long air hose (with a self-attaching
air chuck) which allows you to stand
outside the danger area.
- Tyres on stored wheels (spare wheels)
should be kept in a lying down position
and only be inflated sufficiently to keep
the rim parts in position.
- Do not re-inflate a tyre, if the machine has
been operated with a tyre pressure that has
been below 80% of the lowest
recommended tyre pressure according to
the specifications, or if the tyre and/or rim
are obviously damaged or are suspected of
being damaged.
- Never attempt to force back into position,
or in any other way reposition, rim parts or
lock ring which have worked loose, while
there still is air pressure left in the tyre.
Wheel bolts, check-tightening
After having changed a tyre or if the wheel has
been removed and installed for any other
reason, the wheel bolts must be check-
tightened after eight hours of operation.
Tightening torque: 600 N m (443 lbf ft)
171
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎد ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ‬.‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻧﺮﻣﺎل رﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ در‬. ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻫﺎي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻮاردي از دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﺎﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺮوي ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫و از ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎد ﻣﺠﺎز ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
.‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه ﺗﺠﺎوز ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
!‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
‫ﻛﺎر ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ و رﻳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر‬
‫اﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﻳﻨﻜﺎر آﻣﻮزش دﻳﺪه و ﺑﺎ اﺑﺰار ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﻧﺠﺎم‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
‫دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ زﻳﺮ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺎد ﻛﺮدن ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻻزم اﺳﺖ ﺑﺎد‬
‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬، ‫آن اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
.‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻬﻨﺪس ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮات ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺳﺮد‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد را ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺑﺎري ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫از ﺳﺎﻳﺮ اﻓﺮاد ﺑﺨﻮاﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ را ﺗﺮك ﻛﻨﻨﺪ )در‬ -
.(‫ﺟﻠﻮي رﻳﻨﮓ‬
.‫در ﻛﻨﺎر ﺗﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻴﺪ و ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ دﺳﺘﻮراﻟﻌﻤﻞ زﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ -
‫ ﺗﻜﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬2 ‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮي ﻛﻪ روي رﻳﻨﮓ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺷﻮد و ﻣﻮﺟﺐ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ و در ﺑﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
.‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺮگ ﺷﻮد‬
‫از ﻳﻚ ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﺎد )ﻛﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻈﺎم آن ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬ -
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد( ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ اﺟﺎزه ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺧﺎرج از ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
.‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎك ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي ﻳﺪك )ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ زاﭘﺎس( ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در‬ -
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺧﻮاﺑﻴﺪه ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ و ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺎد ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
.‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺪرﺳﺘﻲ روي رﻳﻨﮓ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ‬80% ‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬ -
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮده‬
‫ ﻳﺎ اﮔﺮ ﺗﺎﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ رﻳﻨﮓ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر واﺿﺤﻲ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪه‬، ‫اﺳﺖ‬
‫اﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻮك ﺑﻪ آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ را ﻫﺮﮔﺰ‬
.‫ﺑﺎد ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﻮز ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎد دارﻧﺪ آﻧﻬﺎ را‬ -
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎي ﺧﻮد ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺤﻮي ﺟﺎي‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﺮدن رﻳﻨﮓ را ﻛﻪ از ﺟﺎي‬
.‫ﺧﻮد ﺧﺎرج ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ درﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻮدن ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ‬
‫ﭘﺲ از ﻋﻮض ﻛﺮدن ﺗﺎﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ اﮔﺮ ﭼﺮخ را ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ دﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﺮون‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺳﻔﺖ ﺷﺪن ﭘﻴﭻ‬، ‫آورده و دوﺑﺎره ﺑﺴﺘﻴﺪ‬
،‫ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﻫﺸﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭘﺲ از ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
(443 Ibft)600 N m :‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺑﺴﺘﻦ‬
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Bucket teeth, replacing (Volvo tooth system) (‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ وﻟﻮو‬

Bucket teeth, replacing ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬

(Volvo tooth system) (‫)ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ وﻟﻮو‬
Warning! !‫ﻫﺸﺪار‬
Use protective goggles, gloves protective ‫ ﻛﻔﺶ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ و‬،‫ دﺳﺘﻜﺶ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﻼﻣﺖ ﺧﻮد از ﻋﻴﻨﻚ‬
shoes and respirator for your personal
safety. .‫ﻣﺎﺳﻚ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
A special tool may be ordered to facilitate ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻳﻚ اﺑﺰار ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺳﻔﺎرش داد ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎر ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ‬
replacement of teeth. The tool are available in ‫راﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد اﻳﻦ اﺑﺰار ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮل دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ در اﻧﺪازه‬
different sizes depending on tooth size. Contact ‫اﺑﺰار ﻣﺨﺼﻮص‬
your dealer for further information. ‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ‬. ‫ﻫﺎي ﻣﺘﻔﺎوت ﻗﺎﺑﻞ دﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
.‫ﻓﺮوﺷﻨﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬

Removing tooth ‫ﺑﻴﺮون آوردن دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ‬

1 Lower the bucket to the ground and angle it
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ را ﺗﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ زﻣﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎورﻳﺪ و آﻧﺮا ﻛﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮف‬ 1
slightly upward.
.‫ﺑﺎﻻ زاوﻳﻪ دﻫﻴﺪ‬
2 Clean the opening for tooth adapter locking .‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ورودي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص اﺑﺰار ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 2
device. ‫ﺑﻪ اﺑﺰار ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻜﺶ و اﺑﺰار ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻴﺰ‬ 3
3 Knock out the locking device with a hammer
.‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ دﻳﮕﺮي ﺿﺮﺑﻪ وارد ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
and the tool or other suitable drift.
4 Remove tooth. .‫دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ را ﺧﺎرج ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ 4
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ زدن ﺑﻪ اﺑﺰار ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬

Installing tooth ‫ﻧﺼﺐ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ‬

1 Clean the front part of the tooth adapter ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮي ﻣﺒﺪل دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ و ﺳﻮراخ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ اﺑﺰار ﻗﻔﻞ‬ 1
and the hole for the locking device.
.‫ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
2 Install the tooth so that the guide lugs fit in ‫دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ را ﺟﻮري ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎرﻫﺎي راﻫﻨﻤﺎي روي‬ 2
the tooth adapter recesses. .‫ﻣﺒﺪل دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ داﺧﻞ ﺷﻴﺎرﻫﺎ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
3 Replace lock retainer (B) with a new part.
4 Install the locking device so that the .‫( را ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﻧﻮ ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬B) ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﻗﻔﻞ‬ 3
chamfered part points downward and the ‫اﺑﺰار ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اي ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺦ‬ 4
lock retainer points forward.
5 Knock down the locking device with a ‫ﺧﻮرده ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫اﺑﺰار ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه‬
hammer until it is level with the upper part ‫ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻜﺶ روي اﺑﺰار ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﻜﻮﺑﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ 5
‫ ﭘﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻻدي‬A
of the tooth adapter.
.‫ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻي ﻣﺒﺪل دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ در ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
6 Knock down the locking device further ‫ ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﻗﻔﻞ‬B
with a hammer and the tool or other ‫اﺑﺰار ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه را ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻜﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ اﺑﺰار ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ 6
suitable drift until the upper part is just ‫دﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻي آن زﻳﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪه در‬
below the scored line in the hole.
.‫ﺳﻮراخ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻜﻮﺑﻴﺪ‬

NOTE! Replace the steel pin in connection

with replacement of tooth adapter. .‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ! ﭘﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻻدي را ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

‫اﺑﺰار ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ درﺳﺖ زﻳﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬

.‫ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

172
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Greasing bearings (‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ وﻟﻮو‬

Greasing bearings ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ‬

The service life of bushings and pivot pins can
be extended considerably, if the machine is
greased regularly and in the correct way.
The greasing of bearings has two main
purposes:
- Add grease to the bearing to reduce
friction between pin and bushing.
- Replace old grease which may contain
dirt. The grease in the space inside the
outer seal collects dirt and prevents dirt
and also water from penetrating into the
bearing.
‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺻﺤﻴﺢ و ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮد ﻋﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎرﻛﺮد ﺑﻮش ﻫﺎ و ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮدان ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ اي‬
.‫اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
:‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ دو ﻫﺪف اﺻﻠﻲ دارد‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از اﺻﻄﻜﺎك ﺑﻴﻦ‬ -
.‫و ﭘﻴﻦ و ﺑﻮش ﻫﺎ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻛﺜﻴﻒ ﺷﺪه‬ -
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﻓﻀﺎي ﺑﻴﻦ آب ﺑﻨﺪ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ آﺷﻐﺎل‬.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺬب ﻛﺮده و از ﻧﻔﻮذ آﺷﻐﺎل و آب ﺑﻪ درون ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن‬

Therefore, grease the bearing until new, clean .‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬

grease is forced out through the outer seal. For
recommended grease, see page186.
Between 10 and 15 strokes with a normal
hand-held grease gun is required to grease one
of the bearings for the lifting arms.
Wipe off grease nipples and grease gun
before greasing, so that dirt and sand is not
introduced through the grease nipples.
‫ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ از آب‬،‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ را ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺪن ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ﺑﻴﺮون ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬186 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ دور ﺗﻠﻤﺒﻪ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري دﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن‬15‫ ﺗﺎ‬10 ‫ﭘﻴﻦ‬
.‫ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻧﻴﭙﻞ و ﺗﻠﻤﺒﻪ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري را ﻗﺒﻞ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر و ﺳﻨﮓ رﻳﺰه داﺧﻞ ﻧﻴﭙﻞ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮد‬

Symbol key ‫ﻧﻤﺎد ﻫﺎي ﻛﻠﻴﺪي‬

These standard symbols have been used in the ‫اﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد در ﻧﻤﻮدار ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و روان ﻛﺎري در‬
"Lubrication and Service Chart" on page174.
.‫ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﻧﺪ‬174 ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬ Lubrication ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ Engine

‫ﻧﻴﭙﻞ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬ Grease nipple ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬ Transmission

‫روﻏﻦ ﺳﻴﺎل‬ Oil/liquid ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪورﻟﻴﻚ‬ Hydraulic system

‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬ Filter ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬ Brake system

‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬ Air filter ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬ Axles

‫اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻄﺢ‬ Level check ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ Fuel system

‫ﻛﺸﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ‬ Belt tension ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ Battery

‫ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎي ﻫﺸﺪار‬ Control lamps ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ Coolant

‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬ Draining ‫ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا‬ Air conditioning

173
Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Lubrication and service chart ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ روان ﻛﺎري و ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

Lubrication and service chart ‫ﻧﻤﻮدار روان ﻛﺎري و ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺮدن ﻫﺎي روﻏﻦ و رواﻧﻜﺎري‬،‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎ‬
Checks, oil changes and lubrication :‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
Intervals:
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ )ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎي ﻛﻠﻴﺪي را در‬,6000,4000,2000,1000,500، 50،‫روزاﻧﻪ‬
Daily, 50, 250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000 and 6000 hours (for
symbol key, see previous page) (‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

174
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬، ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Lubrication and service chart ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ روان ﻛﺎري و ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫آﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫اﻗﺪاﻣﺎت‬

Measure
Page Item
DAILY (every 10 hours) ( ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬10‫روزاﻧﻪ )ﻫﺮ‬
Check function of control lamps 152 1 ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎي ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه‬
Check oil-bath air cleaner oil level (optional (‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻫﻮا )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
147
equipment)
Check travel lights, working lights, reversing ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر و ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه‬، ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺨﺼﻮص ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
alarm

A = EVERY 50 HOURS ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬50 ‫ = ﻫﺮ‬A

After carrying out Daily service ‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ روزاﻧﻪ‬
Check engine oil level 139 4 ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺪار روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Check coolant level 149 12 ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
(5
Check tyres (air pressure and damage) 5) 171 ( ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ )ﻣﻘﺪار ﺑﺎد و آﺳﻴﺐ دﻳﺪﮔﻲ‬
(1
Lubricate the lifting frame lower bucket pins ‫روان ﻛﺎري ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
173 2
1)

B = EVERY 250 HOURS ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬250 ‫= ﻫﺮ‬B

After carrying out Daily and A services A ‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ روزاﻧﻪ و ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Check hydraulic system oil level 168 3 ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺪار روﻏﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Drain the fuel system water trap 143 6 ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ آب از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Check battery electrolyte level 152 7 ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺪار اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
Check for any leaks ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ ﻫﺎ‬
(3
Lubricate lifting frame 3) 173 2 ‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ‬
(3
Lubricate the frame joint upper bearing 3) 173 8 ‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ‬
(3
Lubricate the steering cylinder bearings 3) 173 8 ‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬

C = EVERY 500 HOURS ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬500 ‫= ﻫﺮ‬C

After carrying out Daily, A and B services A,B، ‫ﺑﻌﺪ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ روزاﻧﻪ‬
(2
Change engine oil and replace oil filter 2) 139 4 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ‬
Replace fuel filters 142 5 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Check belt tension, alternator ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر‬
155
Check belt tension, coolant pump and fuel ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري و ﭘﻤﭗ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
150 11
feed pump
165 ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺗﺴﻤﻪ ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر‬
Check belt tension, compressor
Check transmission oil level 158 10 ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺪار روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
(4
Lubricate propeller shafts and support bearing ‫روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﻣﻴﻞ ﮔﺎردان و ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
161 9
4)

1) During difficult operating conditions these should be .‫ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ روز اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬،‫در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻛﺎري دﺷﻮار‬ (1
lubricated daily. 139 ‫در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ وﻳﮋه اي ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻣﻲ آﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ (2
2) For conditions which have to be met, if the interval is to .‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
apply, see page139.
‫در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﺎر زﻳﺎد اﺳﺖ و ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ روﻏﻦ‬ (3
3) In aggressive/corrosive environment lubrication should be
carried out every 50 hours. .‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬50 ‫ﻛﺎري ﻫﺮ‬
4) In aggressive/corrosive environment lubrication of the ‫در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻛﺎر زﻳﺎد اﺳﺖ و ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد روﻏﻦ‬ (4
universal joints should be carried out every 50 hours.
‫ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ در ﻣﺪت‬.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬50 ‫ﻛﺎري اﺗﺼﺎﻻت اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬
Splined joints should only be lubricated when necessary.
.‫زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
5) If the machine is used for handling sharp rocks, a check
should be carried out daily. ‫ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺳﻨﮓ ﻫﺎي ﻧﻮك ﺗﻴﺰ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ (5
.‫روز اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬

175
‫‪Service and maintenance‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫‪Lubrication and service chart‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ روان ﻛﺎري و ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫‪Lubrication and service chart‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮدار روان ﻛﺎري و ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﺮدن ﻫﺎي روﻏﻦ و رواﻧﻜﺎري‬
‫‪Checks, oil changes and lubrication‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪Intervals:‬‬
‫روزاﻧﻪ‪ 2000,500,250، 50،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ )ﻧﻤﺎدﻫﺎي ﻛﻠﻴﺪي را در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪Daily, 50, 250, 500and 2000 hours (for symbol key, see‬‬
‫)‪page 173‬‬ ‫‪173‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﺋﻴﺪ(‬

‫‪176‬‬
Service and maintenance ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Lubrication and service chart ‫ ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري و روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬،‫ﺟﺪول ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫آﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬

Measure
Page Item
D = EVERY 1000 HOURS ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬1000 ‫= ﻫﺮ‬D
After carrying out Daily, A, B and C C‫ و‬B ‫ و‬A ‫ﭘﺲ از اﻧﺠﺎم روزاﻧﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻫﺎي‬
services
Change oil in front and rear axles 160 21 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ در اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺒﻲ و ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ‬
Drain sludge and condensation water 169 17 ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ آﺷﻐﺎل و آب ﻛﺜﻴﻒ از ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
from the hydraulic system
Replace air cleaner primary filter 146 30 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ ﻫﻮا‬
Replace cab ventilation filter (prefilter) 163 16 (‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ )ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
1)
Lubricate lower bearing on frame joint 173 28 ‫روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن روي ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ‬
Lubricate cab door hinges 4) 173 15 ‫روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﻟﻮﻻ ﻫﺎي در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Workshop jobs (should be carried out by ‫ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ) ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﺋﻴﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم‬
an authorised workshop) (‫ﮔﻴﺮد‬
Checking brake disc wear 162 30 ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺳﺎﻳﺶ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬

E = EVERY 2000 HOURS ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬2000 ‫ = ﻫﺮ‬E

After carrying out Daily, A, B, C and C‫ و‬B ‫ و‬A ‫ﭘﺲ از اﻧﺠﺎم روزاﻧﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﻫﺎي‬
D services
Change transmission oil and clean 158 25 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ و ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ‬
suction strainer
Replace transmission breather filter 159 23 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Replace transmission oil filter 159 24 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻗﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Replace hydraulic system return oil filter 169 20 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Replace hydraulic system breather filter 169 19 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Replace cab ventilation filter (main filter) 1) 163 16 (‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ‬
Replace air cleaner secondary filter 146 21 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻣﻄﺒﻮع‬
Replace front and rear axle breather filters 161 18 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮاي اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺒﻲ و ﺟﻠﻮﻳﻲ‬
Replace the fuel system breather filter 144 22 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Checking freezing point of the coolant 31 ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ اﻧﺠﻤﺎد ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Workshop jobs (should be carried out by an ‫ﻛﺎرﻫﺎي ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎﻫﻲ )ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﮔﺎه ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﺋﻴﺪ اﻧﺠﺎم‬
authorised workshop) (‫ﮔﻴﺮد‬
Check valve clearance, engine ‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻟﻘﻲ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻫﺎ در ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

EVERY 4000 HOURS ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬4000 ‫ﻫﺮ‬

Change hydraulic system oil 2) 168 26 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

EVERY 6000 HOURS ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬6000 ‫ﻫﺮ‬

Change coolant 3) 149
1) Replace the cab filter more often when required
2) If the system is filled with mineral hydraulic oil or
Volvo Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil 46, the oil should
be changed every 4000 hours (In case of other
biologically degradable hydraulic oil, the oil should be
changed every 2000 hours).
3) Change coolant every 6000 hours or at least every
fourth year.
27 ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ را در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ (1
.‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ‬46 ‫اﮔﺮ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ (2
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬4000 ‫ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ‬،‫در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ رﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻲ‬،‫ﺷﻮد )در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﺎﻳﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ‬
(.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮔﺮدد‬2000 ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر‬4 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر و ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻫﺮ‬6000 ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري را ﻫﺮ‬ (3

4) Lubricate more often when required. .‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

.‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﻧﻴﺎز ﺗﻌﺪاد دﻓﻌﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﻳﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬ (4
Machines with automatic greasing, see
page178. .‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬178 ‫در ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

177
Service and maintenance
greasing Automatic
Automatic greasing
Checking and adjusting greasing
cycles is done with the aid of the
keyboard and the display unit, see
page38.
The machine may be equipped with
an automatic greasing system which
automatically greases many points
according to a preselected lubrication
cycle. The automatic greasing system
should be inspected regularly and
should be coordinated with other
regular maintenance and control.
Check the following regularly:
- that there is sufficient lubricant in the
reservoir. Top up when required, see
page180.
NOTE! Too low lubricant level
constitutes a great risk of air entering
the system (the most common cause of
operating problems).
- that the system functions. Carry out the
system test on page183.
- that the lubricant reservoir is
undamaged.
- that the connections do not leak.
- that the dust guards for quick-action
couplings are installed and
undamaged.
- that the lubrication lines are undamaged
and well secured.
- that all lubrication points are lubricated
(that lubricant is forced out at bearings
and joints).
NOTE! Remember to lubricate by
hand the lubrication points which
are not included in the automatic
greasing system. See the ordinary
lubrication chart.
1 Pump unit wifri automatics
2 Battery
3 Metering blocH
4 Metering valve
5 V-ECU
6 LubrfcaBon pressure sensor
7 Main line A
8 Main (ins 8
9 Ignition switch
10
11
12 System testing button
13 Filling
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ دوره ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ و ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ ﻧﮕﺎه ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬38
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري‬،‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﻃﺒﻖ دوره ﻫﺎي‬،‫ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬
‫روﻏﻨﻜﺎري از ﭘﻴﺶ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﺑﺴﻴﺎري از ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ را‬
‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬. ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻨﻈﻢ و ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و‬
.‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري و ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬
:‫ﻣﻮارد زﻳﺮ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻴﺰان روﻏﻦ در ﻣﺨﺰن در ﺻﻮرت‬-
‫ ﻧﮕﺎه‬180 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﻧﻴﺎز )روﻏﻦ( اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ! ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﻣﻴﺰان روان ﺳﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ رﻳﺴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺰرگ ورود ﻫﻮا ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ را ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺷﻮد )راﻳﺞ‬
(‫ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري و اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دﺳﺘﮕﺎه‬
‫ ﻧﺤﻮه ﺗﺴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدﻫﺎي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ در ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬-
.‫ آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ‬183
‫ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﻮدن روان ﺳﺎز‬-
‫ ﻧﺸﺖ ﻧﻜﺮدن اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬-
‫ ﻧﺼﺐ و ﺳﺎﻟﻢ ﺑﻮدن ﮔﺮد ﮔﻴﺮ ﺑﺮ روي ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ‬-
‫ﻫﺎي ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻟﻢ و اﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻮدن ﺧﻄﻮط روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬-
‫ ﺗﻤﺎم ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬-
‫روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ)رﺳﻴﺪن روﻏﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ‬
(‫ﺳﻄﻮح ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎ و اﺗﺼﺎﻻت‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ! ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ داﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﺪ ﻗﺴـﻤﺖ ﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ رواﻧﻜﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر رواﻧﻜـﺎري ﻧﻤـﻲ ﺷـﻮﻧﺪ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪول‬.‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ آﻧﻬﺎ را ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر دﺳﺘﻲ روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫رواﻧﻜﺎري ﻋﺎدي ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﮔﺮﻳﺴﻜﺎر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬ 1
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ 2
‫ﺑﻠﻮك اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬ 3
(‫ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي )ﺷﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻘﺪار ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬ 4
V-ECU 5
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮر ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬ 6
A ‫ﺧﻂ اﺻﻠﻲ‬ 7
B ‫ﺧﻂ اﺻﻠﻲ‬ 8
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺣﺘﺮاق‬ 9
10
11
‫ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬12
‫ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺨﺰن‬13
178
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
greasing maticAuto ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬

Lubrication points

1 Lifting frame 5 Propeller shafts, front and rear support bearings

2 Hydraulic attachment bracket 6 Frame joint bearings, upper and lower bearings
3 Lifting cylinder, front and rear bearings 7 Steering cylinder, front and rear bearings
4 Tilting cylinder, front and rear bearings 8 Bucket attachment, upper and lower attachments

‫ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎي )ﻣﻮرد ( روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬

‫ )ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﮔﺮدان( ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎن ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ ﭼﻬﺎر ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﮔﺎردان‬5 ‫ ﺷﺎﺳﻲ ﺟﻠﻮ‬1
‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬،‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ‬6 ‫ ﻣﺤﻞ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬2
‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬، ‫ ﺟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬7 ‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ ﺟﻚ ﺑﻮم‬3
‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ و ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬،‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬8 ‫ ﻳﺎﺗﺎﻗﺎن ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬، ‫ ﺟﻚ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬4

179
Service and maintenance
greasing Automatic
Filling lubricant
Lubricant must be topped up before
the level falls below the minimum
marking on the reservoir.
On the pump unit there is a filler
connection (grease nipple) to which a
hand pump or an industrial pump are
connected when filling.
NOTE! If and industrial pump is used,
the filter between connection and
pump must be cleaned regularly. A
partly blocked filter can easily burst,
with a consequent great risk of small
particles entering the lubrication
system. This may in turn lead to a
breakdown in the lubrication system.
Proceed as follows:
1 Carefully clean the filler connection and
the coupling on the filler hose.
2 Fill the filler hose completely full with
grease before beginning to fill. This will
prevent air from entering the system.
3 Remove the protective cap on the filler
connection and connect the coupling to
the filler connection.
4 Fill with lubricant to the maximum level
on the reservoir.*) If it is hard to pump in
the lubricant, either the filter behind the
filler connection is blocked or there may
be dirt in the filler nipple itself. Clean the
filter, if required replace the nipple and
try again.
5 Re-install the protective cap.
6 Keep the lubrication pump in a dust-free
place, so that it will not be exposed to
dirt.
*) If the reservoir is filled above the
maximum level, the surplus lubricant
will be drained through the ventilation
hole on the left side of the reservoir. Any
air under the plate in the reservoir is also
drained through the ventilation hole.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬
(‫ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن روان ﺳﺎز)ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻣﺨﺰن ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰان روان ﺳﺎز ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از ﺣﺪ ﻣﻴﻨﻴﻤﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ و در ﺻﻮرت‬
.‫رﺳﻴﺪن ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ آن اﻓﺰوده ﺷﻮد‬
(‫در ﭘﻤﭗ رواﻧﻜﺎري ﻳﻚ اﺗﺼﺎل ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن )ﻧﻴﭙﻞ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬
‫دﺳﺘﮕﺎه وﺟﻮد دارد ﻛﻪ در زﻣﺎن ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن روﻏﻦ ﭘﻤﭗ دﺳﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
.‫ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ آن ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ! اﮔﺮ از ﭘﻤﭗ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮي ﻛﻪ‬.‫اﺗﺼﺎﻻت و ﭘﻤﭗ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ‬،‫ﺑﺨﺸﻲ از آن ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ آﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﭘﺎره ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﻜﺘﻮر ﭘﺮﻛﻦ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬
. ‫ﺑﺰرگ ورود ذرات ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﻛﻮﭼﻚ رواﻧﻜﺎري را ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه دارد‬
‫اﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﺮاب ﺷﺪن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ رواﻧﻜﺎري‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
:‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ زﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ دﻗﺖ اﺗﺼﺎﻻت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ رواﻧﻜﺎر و ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ‬ .1
.‫روي ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻠﻨﮓ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ را ﻗﺒﻞ از ﺷﺮوع ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن )دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ( ﭘﺮ‬ .2
.‫از ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫درﭘﻮش ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ روي اﺗﺼﺎل ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ را ﺑﺮدارﻳﺪ و‬ .3
.‫ﻛﻮﭘﻠﻴﻨﮓ را ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ اﺗﺼﺎل وﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺰن را ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ از روان ﺳﺎز ﭘﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ اﮔﺮ ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن‬ .4
‫رواﻧﺴﺎز در دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد ﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﭘﺸﺖ‬
‫اﺗﺼﺎل ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ ﻣﺴﺪود اﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﭙﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ ﻛﺜﻴﻒ اﺳﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫را ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و در ﺻﻮرت ﻧﻴﺎز ﻧﻴﭙﻞ را ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ و‬
.‫دوﺑﺎره اﻣﺘﺤﺎن ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫درﭘﻮش ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ را ﺳﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﺶ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ‬ .5
‫ﭘﻤﭗ روﻏﻦ را در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ دور از ﮔﺮد و ﻏﺒﺎر ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ .6
.‫ﺗﺎ آﻟﻮده ﻧﺸﻮد‬
‫ روﻏﻦ اﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬،‫( اﮔﺮ ﻣﺨﺰن ﺑﻴﺶ ﺗﺮ از ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﺶ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬Ì
‫از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻮراخ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻪ در ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ آن ﻗﺮار دارد ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ در ﺻﻮرت وﺟﻮد ﻫﻮا ﻛﻪ در زﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ درون ﻣﺨﺰن ﻗﺮار‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
.‫دارد ﻧﻴﺰ از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻮراخ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺧﺎرج ﺷﻮد‬
180
 Service and maintenance ‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
greasing Automatic ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬

‫روان ﺳﺎزﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬

Recommended lubricants
The system requires that the lubricant is clean and
possible to pump at the prevailing temperature.
Therefore use lubricant of a recommended NLGI
class. A lower NLGI class grease, may reduce the
lubrication effect with increased wear as a
consequence.
ƒ Do not mix different types of lubricants. When
changing, all lubricant must be changed, not only
in the reservoir.
ƒ There must be no additives of graphite or Teflon
in the lubricant.
ƒ The use of molybdenum disulphide (MoS2) is
only permissible if:
- the lubricant is of a very high quality and does not
contain more than 5 % MoS2.
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻴﺎزﻣﻨﺪ رواﻧﺴﺎزي ﺗﻤﻴﺰ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮان آن را در ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ دﻣﺎي ﻛﺎري‬
‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬NLGI ‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ از روان ﺳﺎزي ﻫﺎ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدﻫﺎي ﻛﻼس‬.‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻛﺮد‬
‫ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻴﺰان اﺛﺮات ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬، ‫ آن ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ اﺳﺖ‬NLGI ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺴﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻼس‬.
.‫اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع رواﻧﻜﺎر در ﺣﻴﻦ اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﭘﻮﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ رواﻧﺴﺎز را‬.‫ƒ اﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ روان ﺳﺎز را ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻫﻤﻪ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ و ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ رواﻧﺴﺎز درون‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد‬،‫ﻣﺨﺰن‬
.‫ƒ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ اﻓﺰودﻧﻲ ﮔﺮاﻓﻴﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در رواﻧﺴﺎز وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫( ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺠﺎز اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬MoS2) ‫ƒ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از دي ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻟﻴﺒﺪن‬
‫روان ﺳﺎز داراي ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺴﻴﺎر ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ و ﺣﺎوي ﻣﻘﺪاري ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬ -
.‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬5%(MoS2)

- the lubrication system is regularly checked to .‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ رواﻧﻜﺎري ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺼﻮل اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد آن ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺎً ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ -
provide reliable operation. .‫ﺧﻄﻮط اﺻﻠﻲ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺳﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر )ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﻴﺎل( ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ -
- the main lines are flushed through at least once a
year.

Recommended lubricants ‫روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬

Lubricant type,
Lowest temperature Highest temperature
NLGI
‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ دﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ دﻣﺎ‬ NLGI ،‫ﻧﻮع روﻏﻦ‬
Above -25 °C (-13 °F) +80°C (176 °F) 2 25 °C(-13 °F) -‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﺮ از‬
Below -25 °C (-13 °F) 0 °C (32 °F) 0/1 25 °C(-13 °F) - ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ از‬
Below -25 °C (-13 °F) +80°C (176 °F) Synthetic 2 25 °C(-13 °F) - ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ از‬
Below -25 °C (-13 °F) 0 °C (32 °F) Synthetic 0 / 1 25 °C(-13 °F) - ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ از‬

NOTE! Special tools are required for fault tracing, ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ و ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﺑﻪ اﺑﺰار ﺧﺎص ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻲ‬، ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ! ﺑﺮاي ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ‬
adjusting and repairing the control unit. Therefore, . ‫ در اﻳﻦ ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺎ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﻛﺎر ﻣﺎﻫﺮ و ﻣﻮرد ﺗﺄﺋﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬،‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
contact qualified service personnel when required.

181
Service and maintenance
greasing Automatic
Changing lubrication cycle
If the preselected lubrication cycle does not suit the
working and loading conditions to which the machine is
exposed, the operator can alter the lubrication cycle.
Checking and adjusting greasing cycles is done with the
aid of the keyboard and the display unit, see page38.
The display unit has a menu for central lubrication
(automatic greasing).
When changing lubrication cycle, the ignition key must
be in position 1 (running position).
To be able to change the lubrication cycle again the
ignition key must first be turned to the 0 position and
then a new lubrication cycle can be selected.
NOTE! If the ignition key is turned to position 0
within 20 seconds, the latest selected lubrication
cycle will be erased. Therefore, wait for at least 20
seconds after the setting has been made, before
turning the ignition key to position 0.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دوره ﻫﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
‫اﮔﺮ دوره ﻫﺎي از ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺰان ﻛﺎر و وﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ دوره‬،‫ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ وارد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ﻫﺎي روﻏﻨﻜﺎري را ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ و ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ دوره ﻫﺎي ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ و ﺑﺨﺶ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬38 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ دﺳﺘﮕﺎه داراي ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ رواﻧﻜﺎري ﻣﺮﻛﺰي‬
.‫)ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دوره ﻫﺎي روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﺎل( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬1
‫ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دوﺑﺎره دوره ﻫﺎي روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ اﺑﺘﺪا ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت روي‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد و ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ روان ﻛﺎري‬0 ‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
.‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻛﺮد‬
،‫ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮد‬0 ‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ در ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬20 ‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ! اﮔﺮ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬
، ‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ‬.‫ﻛﺎري اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه ﭘﺎك ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫آﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ روان‬
‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﭘﺲ از اﻧﺠﺎم ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت و ﻗﺒﻞ از ﻗﺮار دادن‬20 ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺪت‬
.‫ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺻﺒﺮ ﻛﺮد‬0 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت روي ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
182
Service and maintenance
greasing Automatic
System test
In order to check the function of the
greasing system, or to initiate an extra
lubrication cycle after for example the
machine has been washed, a system test
can be carried out. The test button, which
is used to begin a system test, is positioned
at the front on the pump.
A test cycle can only be carried out when
the pump is between two ordinary
lubrication cycles (not during an ongoing
lubrication cycle).
Single test lubrication cycle
The pump only carries out one lubrication
cycle via one main line. May be used after
a wash in order to obtain an extra
lubrication cycle.
1 Turn the ignition key to position 1
(running position).
2 Press in the test button for 2-6 s.
3 The lubrication cycle starts.
4 The test cycle is ended automatically.
If the test lubrication cycle has been
used to obtain an additional lubrication
cycle after a wash, the test button should
be pressed once more to lubricate the
other main line.
Continuous test lubrication cycle
The pump carries out an unlimited
number of lubrication cycles , i.e. it
continuously pumps out lubricant
alternately via the two main lines. This is
used for bleeding the system of air.
1 Turn the ignition key to position 1
(running position).
2 Press the test button for more than 6 s.
3 The lubrication cycle starts.
4 End the test cycle by turning the ignition
key to position 0.
The test cycle is not ended
automatically.
183
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺮوع‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل ﭘﺲ از ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮي‬، ‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ رواﻧﻜﺎري ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ را آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺮد‬،‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
. ‫ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮاي ﺷﺮوع ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﻣﻲ رود‬، ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ‬
.‫روي ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮي ﭘﻤﭗ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اﺟﺮاﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ از ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫زﻣﺎن ﺑﻴﻦ دو دوره ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ رواﻧﻜﺎري ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﻧﻪ زﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ در‬
‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻨﻜﺎري‬ .(‫ﺣﺎل اﻧﺠﺎم روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اي ﺳﻴﻜﻞ رواﻧﻜﺎري‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ رواﻧﻜﺎري ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻜﻲ از ﺧﻄﻮط اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
.‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ از ﺷﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ رواﻧﻜﺎري‬
.‫اﺿﺎﻓﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﻮد‬
(‫ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﺎل‬1 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ .1
.‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬6 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬2 ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت‬ .2
.‫دوره رواﻧﻜﺎري ﺷﺮوع ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ .3
‫دوره ﺗﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ .4
‫اﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ رواﻧﻜﺎري آزﻣﺎﻳﺸﻲ ﺑﺮاي اﻧﺠﺎم ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ‬
‫ دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬،‫رواﻧﻜﺎري ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﭘﺲ از ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮ اﺟﺮا ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﻳﻜﺒﺎر دﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮاي رواﻧﻜﺎري ﺧﻂ اﺻﻠﻲ دﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر داده ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﺪاوم ﺳﻴﻜﻞ رواﻧﻜﺎري‬
‫ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﻪ‬.‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻧﺎﻣﺤﺪود دوره رواﻧﻜﺎري را اﺟﺮا ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻃﻮر ﻣﺪاوم رواﻧﻜﺎري را از ﻃﺮﻳﻖ دو ﺧﻂ اﺻﻠﻲ اﻧﺠﺎم ﻣﻲ‬
‫ و اﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺧﺮوج ﻫﻮا و ﻫﻮاﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻣﻲ‬.‫دﻫﺪ‬
.‫ﺷﻮد‬
(‫ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ )ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﺎل‬1 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ .1
.‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬6 ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﺖ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ از‬ .2
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻞ رواﻧﻜﺎري آﻏﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ .3
‫دوره روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮار دادن ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ .4
.‫ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎن ﻣﻲ رﺳﺪ‬0
‫ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﺗﻤﺎم ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
maintenance Service and
greasing Automatic
Bleeding the system
The pump must not be activated for
longer than five minutes.
1 Make sure that the lubricant reservoir
has been filled up to the max. mark.
2 Remove the plugs in metering block
(C) which is furthest away from
pump unit (D).
3 Turn the ignition key to position 1
(running position).
4 Press the test button for more than six
seconds, which will initiate a
continuous test cycle.
5 When lubricant, free from air, emerges
from one of main lines (B), the air
bleeding is completed in that main
line.
6 Turn the ignition key to the "0"
position and install plug (A).
7 Follow points 3-6 in order to bleed the
other main line.
8 Test the system using the method
"Single test lubrication cycle", see
page182.
Cleaning with high-pressure wash
Normally water cannot penetrate into the
system. However, during a high-pressure
wash the risk increases and the pump unit
should be protected, as water, which has
entered the system, does not disappear by
itself, but could instead cause operating
problems. After a high-pressure wash a "
Single test lubrication cycle" should be
carried out to obtain additional
lubrication.
‫ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬،‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬
‫ﻫﻮاﮔﻴﺮي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
.‫ دﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﻮد‬5 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺰن روان ﺳﺎز ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬ 1
.‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺧﻮد ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫( را ﻛﻪ در‬C) ‫در ﭘﻮش ﻫﺎي داﺧﻞ ﺑﻠﻮك اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬ 2
‫ ﺧﺎرج‬،‫ ( ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬D ) ‫دورﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ از ﭘﻤﭗ‬
.‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻗﺮار دﻫﻴﺪ )وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬1 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ 3
(‫ﻓﻌﺎل‬
‫ ﺗﺎ‬،‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺎر دﻫﻴﺪ‬6 ‫دﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﺴﺖ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﺑﻴﺶ از‬ 4
.‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﺪاوم را ﻓﻌﺎل ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ از ﻳﻜﻲ از‬، ‫ ﻋﺎري از ﻫﻮا‬، ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ روان ﺳﺎز‬ 5
‫ ﻫﻮا ﮔﻴﺮي در ﺧﻂ‬،‫( وارد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬B) ‫ﺧﻄﻮط اﺻﻠﻲ‬
.‫اﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ اﺗﻤﺎم ﻣﻲ رﺳﺪ‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻗﺮار داده و در‬0 ‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت را در وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬ 6
.‫( را ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬A) ‫ﭘﻮش‬
‫ را ﺑﻪ‬6 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬3 ‫ﺑﺮاي ﻫﻮا ﮔﻴﺮي ﺧﻂ اﺻﻠﻲ دﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻮارد‬ 7
.‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از روش )ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اي ﺳﻴﻜﻞ‬ 8
182 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫روﻏﻨﻜﺎري ( ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ را آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮي ﭘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر‬
‫ در‬. ‫آب ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﻋﺎدي ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻔﻮذ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮي ﭘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر ﻣﻴﺰان ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲ رود و ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ از ﭘﻤﭗ‬
‫ ﺧﻮد‬،‫ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ آﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ وارد ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬، ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺷﻮد‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮد از ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻲ رود و ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺗﻲ‬
‫ ﭘﺲ از ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮي ﭘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎر ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬،‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮدي در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﻮد‬
‫»ﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اي ﺳﻴﻜﻞ رواﻧﻜﺎري « روي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺠﺎم‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬182 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ﺷﻮد‬
184
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Recommended lubricants ‫رواﻧﻜﺎرﻳﻬﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Recommended lubricants ‫رواﻧﻜﺎرﻳﻬﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬
The viscosity indications are according to SAE J 300
MAR93. .‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬SAE J 300 MAR93 ‫وﻳﺴﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ )ﻟﺰﺟﺖ( ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ درآﻣﺪه ﻃﺒﻖ‬
Other mineral oils can be used if they conform to our ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ در ﺻﻮرت داﺷﺘﻦ وﻳﺴﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه و ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد‬
viscosity recommendations and meet our quality
requirements. .‫ﻧﻴﺎز ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
Approval must first be obtained from Volvo CE before ‫ﻗﺒﻞ از اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ )روﻏﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻪ‬
another base oil quality (e.g. biologically degradable oil) . ‫ درﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻮد‬Volvo CE ‫ﻋﻨﻮان ﻣﺜﺎل( ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺋﻴﺪﻳﻪ رﺳﻤﻲ از ﺳﻮي‬
is used
In case of lower ambient temperatures than in this ‫در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ دﻣﺎي ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ از دﻣﺎﻫﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼﻋﺎت‬
recommendation, contact your local Volvo Service .‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎزﻣﺎن ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ اي ﺧﺪﻣﺎت وﻟﻮو ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
organisation for further information.
Recommended viscosity at varying
ambient temperatures
Oil grade ‫وﻳﺴﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ)ﻟﺰﺟﺖ(ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫درﺟﻪ روﻏﻦ‬
‫دﻣﺎي ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
Volvo Ultra Diesel ‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine Oil Volvo Ultra Diesel
or ‫ﻳﺎ‬
Engine oil
VDS-3 or ‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
ENGINE VDS-2 + ACEA- ‫ ﻳﺎ‬VDS-3 ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
E7 or
VDS-2 + API CI-4 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬ACEA-E7+VDS-2
or ‫ ﻳﺎ‬API CI-4+VDS-2
VDS-2 + EO-N
Premium plus EO-N +VDS-2
Premium plus
AXLES Volvo Wet Brake ‫روﻏﻦ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ اﻛﺴﻞ وﻟﻮ‬
Transaxle Oil ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
HUB ‫ﺑﺮاي ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺮخ دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي‬
REDUCTI For alternative, .‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬188
ON see page 188 ‫ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﺗﻮﭘﻲ‬
GEARS
Volvo Automatic ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر وﻟﻮو‬
Transmission Oil ‫روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ وﻟﻮو‬
TRANSMI Fluid ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
SSION 97341
Volvo transmission
Oil 97341
Volvo Super ‫روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﭘﺮ وﻟﻮو‬
Hydraulic Oil SS15 54 34 ‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﺳﻮﺋﺪي‬
Swedish norm SS
15 54 34 ‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ‬
alternatively ‫ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ‬/‫اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬
international norm
Vickers 35 VQ/25 ‫ وﻳﻜﺮز‬35 VQ/25 ‫ﺗﺴﺖ‬
test ISO 3448 ‫وﻳﺴﻜﻮزﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
viscosity acc. to
ISO 3448 ISO 6743-4 ‫ﻛﻼس ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
HYDRAU class acc. to ISO
LIC ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮان از‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
SYSTEM 6743-4
Available as an ‫روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه‬
alternative there is Volvo ‫در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
also Biodegradable
Volvo ‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬HydraulicOil 46
Biodegradable
Hydraulic Oil 46. .‫ﻛﺮد‬
For further ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ دﻓﺘﺮ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬
information
contact your local .‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎت وﻟﻮو ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
Volvo Service.
Only Volvo Coolant VCS should be
used. (Water 50 %, anti-freeze 50 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬: VCS
Cooling Volvo Coolant %), see page 187 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
system VCS .‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري وﻟﻮو اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﺷﻮد‬VCS ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ از‬ ‫وﻟﻮو‬
(‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬187 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،50%‫ ﺿﺪ ﻳﺦ‬، 50% ‫)آب‬

185
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Recommended lubricants ‫رواﻧﻜﺎرﻳﻬﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬

Grease ‫ﮔﺮﻳﺲ‬
General lubrication points ‫ﻧﻜﺎت ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ در ﻣﻮرد رواﻧﻜﺎري‬
Volvo Super Grease Lithium EP2. ‫ وﻟﻮو‬EP2 ‫ﺳﻮﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮم‬
Or corresponding grease on lithium base with EP ‫ و‬2 ‫ ﻛﻼس‬/ ‫ ورده‬EP ‫ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻟﻴﺘﻴﻮم ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه اﻓﺰودﻧﻲ ﻫﺎي‬
additives and consistency NLGI class 2.
NLGI ‫دوام‬
If the machine is provided with automatic greasing
system, other recommended lubricants apply. /‫اﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر اﺳﺖ از ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ‬
.‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﺷﺪه اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

Fuel
Quality requirements: The fuel should at least meet
the legal requirements, and national and international
standards for marketed fuels, for example: EN590 (with
nationally adapted temperature requirements), ASTM D
975 No. 1D and 2D, JIS KK 2204.
Sulphur content: According to current legal
requirements (the sulphur content must however not
exceed 0.3 percent by weight), see also page139.
Bio-diesel fuel
Vegetable oils and / or esters, also called "bio-diesel",
(e.g. rape-seed methyl ester RME fuel), which are
offered on certain markets both as pure products and as
mixed into the diesel fuel.
Volvo CE accepts a maximum intermix of 5% bio-diesel
fuel in the diesel fuel, ready mixed from the oil
companies.
A higher intermix than 5% of bio-diesel fuel may cause:
- Increased emission by nitrogen oxide, (thereby not
meeting legal requirements)
- The short service life of motor and injection system
- Increased fuel consumption
- Altered engine output
- Shortening the engine oil change interval to a half
- Shortened service life of rubber materials in the fuel
system
- Less good cold handling properties of the fuel
- Limit storage time for the fuel, which may cause
clogging up of the fuel system if the machine is laid up
for a longer period
Warranty condition
The warranty does not cover damage caused be an
intermix of more than 5% of bio-diesel fuel.
‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ از ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ و اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد ﻫﺎي‬: ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
EN590 :‫ ﻣﺜﻞ‬،‫ﻣﻠﻲ و ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻮردار ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
ASTM D (‫)ﻛﻪ از ﻟﺤﺎظ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي ﻣﻠﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ دارد‬
JIS kk 2204, 2D, 1D: ‫ ﺷﻤﺎره‬، 975
‫ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﻠﺰوﻣﺎت ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ و راﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺑﻬﺮ ﺣﺎل ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻮر‬:‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻮﻟﻔﻮر‬
(.‫ وزن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬0/ 3% ‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
(‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر دﻳﺰل )ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﻴﻮ دﻳﺰل‬
‫ ﻛﻪ »ﺑﻴﻮ دﻳﺰل« ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬،‫روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﮔﻴﺎﻫﺎن و ﻳﺎ اﺳﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻣﺘﻴﻞ اﺳﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ داﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﺰا( در ﺑﻌﻀﻲ از ﻓﺮوﺷﮕﺎه ﻫﺎي ﺧﺎص ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان‬RME
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﺼﻮل ﻣﺠﺰا ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ از ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺮوﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
.‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺑﻴﻮ دﻳﺰل را در ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻫﺎي‬5% ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ وﻟﻮو ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ‬
،‫ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ارزﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬،‫دﻳﺰﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ از ﺳﻮي ﻛﻤﭙﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻔﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
: ‫ ﺑﻴﻮ دﻳﺰل ﺑﺎ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺳﺒﺐ‬5% ‫ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮد ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬
‫اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ آﻟﻮدﮔﻲ اﻛﺴﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺘﺮوژن در ﻓﻀﺎ )و ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻧﺪاﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ‬ -
(‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﺮ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﮋﻛﺘﻮري آن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ -
‫اﻓﺰاﻳﺶ ﻣﺼﺮف ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ -
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎزده ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬ -
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻣﻴﺰان ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻈﺮ‬ -
‫ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺷﺪن ﻋﻤﺮ ﻣﻮادي ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎن اﺳﺘﻔﺎده‬ -
. ‫ﺷﺪه‬
‫ﻛﻢ ﺷﺪن ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺧﻮب ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ -
‫ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬، ‫ﻣﺤﺪودﻳﺖ در زﻣﺎن ذﺧﻴﺮه ﺳﺎزي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬ -
‫ﻣﺴﺪود ﺷﺪن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎن در ﻣﻮاﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪت ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ از‬
.‫ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻧﺸﻮد‬
‫وﺿﻌﻴﺖ واراﻧﺘﻲ‬
5 ‫واراﻧﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ آﺳﻴﺐ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻴﺶ از‬ -
.‫ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺮدد‬،‫درﺻﺪ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻫﺎي ﺑﻴﻮ دﻳﺰل ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

186
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Recommended lubricants ‫رواﻧﻜﺎرﻳﻬﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬

Coolant ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬

Only use Volvo Coolant VCS when topping up or
changing coolant. In order to avoid damage to engine and
cooling system different makes of coolants or corrosion
protection must not be mixed.
When using concentrated Volvo Coolant VCS and clean
water, the mixture should contain 40-60 % concentrated
coolant and 60-40 % clean water. The amount of
concentrated coolant must never be less than 40 % of the
total mixture, see table below.
‫ﺑﺮاي ﭘﺮ ﻛﺮدن ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺗﻨﻬﺎ از ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎت ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي از آﺳﻴﺐ‬. ‫ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ وﻟﻮو ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪه ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬VCS ‫اﺧﺘﺼﺎر‬
‫دﻳﺪن ﻣﻮﺗﻮر و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ از ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺳﻴﺎﻟﻬﺎي ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
.‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ و ﻣﻮاد ﺿﺪ ﺧﻮردﮔﻲ اﺟﺘﻨﺎب ﺷﻮد‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬،‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﺳﻴﺎل ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري وﻟﻮو آب ﺧﺎﻟﺺ‬
‫ درﺻﺪ آب‬40 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬60‫ درﺻﺪ ﺳﻴﺎل ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬60 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬40 ‫ﺣﺎوي‬
40% ‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺎه ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬.‫ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
.‫ ﺟﺪول زﻳﺮ را ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬.‫ﻛﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

Amount of concentrated coolant Freeze protection down to

‫ﻣﻘﺪار ﺳﻴﺎل ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ ‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﻳﺦ زدن ﺗﺎ دﻣﺎي‬
40% -25 °C (-13 °F)
50% -35 °C (-35 °F)
60% -46 °C (-51 °F)

The concentrated coolant must not be mixed with water
that contains a high degree of lime (hard water), salt or
metals.
The clean water for the cooling system must also
meet the following requirements:
‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ آﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ داراي اﻣﻼح ﺑﻴﺶ از ﺣﺪ )آب‬
.‫ ﻧﻤﻚ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻠﺰات اﺳﺖ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﻮد‬،(‫ﺳﺨﺖ‬
.‫آب ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺑﺮاي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ زﻳﺮ را دارا ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

Description Value ‫ﻣﻘﺪار‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎت‬

Total number of solid particles < 340 ppm ‫ﻛﻞ ﺗﻌﺪاد ذرات ﺟﺎﻣﺪ‬
Total hardness < 9.5 ° dH ‫درﺟﻪ ﻛﻞ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ‬
Chloride < 40 ppm ‫ﻛﻠﺮﻳﺪ‬
Sulphate < 100 ppm ‫ﺳﻮﻟﻔﺎت‬
pH value 5.5-9 PH ‫ﻣﻘﺪار‬
Silica < 20 mg SiO 2 /litre ‫ﺳﻴﻠﻴﺲ‬
Iron < 0.10 mg Fe/litre ‫آﻫﻦ‬
Manganese < 0.05 mg Mn/litre ‫ﻣﻨﮕﻨﺰ‬
Electrical conductivity < 500 S/cm ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺪاﻳﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎن اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ‬
Organic content, COD-Mn < 15 mg/litre COD-Mn ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ آﻟﻲ‬

‫ از ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬،‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ آب ﻣﻮرد ﺷﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

When there is doubt as to the quality of the water,
‫ درﺻﺪ ﺳﻴﺎل ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﺧﻨﻚ‬40 ‫ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎوي‬VCS ‫ درﺻﺪي وﻟﻮو ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬40 ‫آﻣﺎده‬
ready-mixed Volvo Coolant VCS, which contains
40 % concentrated coolant, must be used. Do not ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري را ﺑﺎﺳﻴﺎﻟﻬﺎي ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬.‫ﻛﺎري ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
mix with other ready-mixed coolants, as this may .‫آﻣﺎده دﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺨﻠﻮط ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر آﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﺪ‬
cause engine damage.

187
Specifications
Recommended lubricants
Oils for AWB axles made by Volvo Wheel
Loaders AB
Trade names of oils which correspond to Volvo Wet
Transaxle Oil are listed below.
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
‫رواﻧﻜﺎرﻳﻬﺎي ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي‬
‫ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮدرﻫﺎي‬AB ‫ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ واﺣﺪ‬AWB ‫روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ‬
.‫ﭼﺮخ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ وﻟﻮو ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺎم ﺗﺠﺎري روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎ ﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ روﻏﻦ اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي روﻏﻨﻲ وﻟﻮو ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ در‬
.‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ زﻳﺮ آﻣﺪه اﺳﺖ‬

‫ﻧﺎم ﺗﺠﺎري‬ ‫ﻛﻤﭙﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه روﻏﻦ‬

Q8T2200 Q8
MIBILFLUID 424 MIBIL
TORQUE FLUID 56 ESSO
SOLENE TRACTELF CH-5 SOLENE INDUSTRIAL LUBICANT
TRANSWAY WB STATOIL
AGROL HYBRAN AGROL
AGROL HYBRAN PLUS AGROL
ARAL FLUID HGS ARAL
TEXACO TEXTRAN TDH PREMIUM TEXACO
Textran WB101 CHEVRON, TEXACO
VALVLINE UNITRAC VALVLINE
Wintershall Hydrofluid N Schmierstoff raffinerie Saizbergen GmbH
TRACTELF BF 16 ELF
OMV AUSTROMATIC IGB OMV AS
HYDROFLUID DLZ AVIA
TEXTRAN TDH PREMIUM CALTEX
SPECIAL UTTO 170 DELTA
DYNATRANS MPV TOTAL
PANOLIN HMO 324 PANOLIN AG
LUBRAX UNITRACTOR PETROBAS
VOLVO AC EJES FRENOS HUMEDOS CEPSA
Donax TDS 10W30 SHELL
Donax TDS SHELL
Terrac Super Transmission BP
Castrol Agri Transplus CASTROL

188
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Capacities L60F L60F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬

Capacities L60F L60F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬

Capacities When changing Total ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
Engine oil, incl. 20 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬20 ‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
filter (5.3 US gal) (5.3 US gal)
Transmission incl. 20 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬20 ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
filter (5.3 US gal) (5.3 US gal)
Front axle incl. 24 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬24 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﺗﻮﭘﻲ‬
hub reduction gear (6.3 US gal) (6.3 US gal)
Rear axle incl. hub 24 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬24 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه‬
reduction gear (6.3 US gal) (6.3 US gal) ‫ﺗﻮﭘﻲ‬

135 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬135 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Hydraulic system
(35.6 US gal) (35.6 US gal )

90 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬90 ‫ﻣﺨﺰن روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Hydraulic oil tank
(23.8 US gal) (23.8 US gal)

Fuel tank, 219 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬219 ‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬،‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺗﺎﻧﻚ‬

available fuel (57.8 US gal) (57.8 US gal)

Fuel tank 224 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬224 (‫ﺗﺎﻧﻚ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ )ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬

(available) (59.1 US gal) (59.1 US gal )

30 litres 38 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬38 ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬30 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬

Cooling system
(7.9 US gal) (10.0 US gal) (10.0 US gal ) (7.9 US gal )
Oil-bath air ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬5.5 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺶ ﻫﻮا‬
5.5 litres
cleaner (optional
(1.5 US gal) (1.5 US gal ) (‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
equipment)
‫ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺪن اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Carry out checks according to the Service
Programme for the machine, see page135. .‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬135 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬

Oil and fluid changes Hours ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺳﺎﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ و ﺳﻴﺎل ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ‬
Engine 500* ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Coolant 6000 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Front and rear axles 1000 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ وﻋﻘﺐ‬
Transmission, at the same time clean ‫ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
2000
suction strainer
Hydraulic system (w ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎر‬
orking hydraulics, brake system and 4000/2000**
(‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬
steering system)
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮي در زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ‬، ‫( ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
*) Regarding conditions required if the interval between
engine oil changes is to apply, see page139. ‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬139 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد‬
**) Change coolant every 6000 hours or at least every ‫ ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر‬4 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻫﺮ‬6000 ‫( ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري را ﻫﺮ‬
fourth year. .‫ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
***) If the system is filled with mineral hydraulic oil or
Volvo Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil 46, the interval is ‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬46 ‫( اﮔﺮ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
4000 hours. ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر‬4000 ‫ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ رﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
If another biologically degradable hydraulic oil is used,
‫ روﻏﻦ‬،‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد )در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﺎﻳﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ‬
the interval is 2000 hours.
(.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮔﺮدد‬2000 ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻫﺮ‬

189
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Capacities L60F L60F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬

Filter replacements Hours ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺳﺎﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬

Engine, oil filters 500* ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine, air filter (primary filter) 1000 (‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine, air filter (secondary filter) 2000 (‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Fuel filters 500** ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Fuel system, breather filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬

Oil-bath air cleaner, filter inserts cleaning ‫ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن اﻟﻤﺎن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬،‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺶ ﻫﻮا‬
2000
(optional equipment) (‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
Transmission, oil filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ‬،‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Transmission, breather filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬،‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Drive axles, breather filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬، ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮك‬
Cab, ventilation filter (prefilter) 1000 (‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ )ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
Cab, ventilation filter (main filter) 2000*** ( ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ‬
Hydraulic system, return oil filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬، ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Hydraulic system, breather filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬، ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

 ) Regarding conditions required if the interval between
engine oil changes is to apply, see page139.
) Or when replacing the engine oil filter, which may
mean a shorter interval.
) In case of environment containing asbestos the
filter should be replaced every 1000 hours.
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮي در زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ‬، ‫( ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬139 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫( ﻳﺎ زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺗﺮي اﺳﺖ‬
‫( در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز دارﻧﺪن از ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮔﺮدد‬1000

190
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Engine, specifications L60F L60F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Engine, specifications L60F L60F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Volvo D6E Volvo D6E ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬

Designation
LCE3 LCE3
114 kW (155 114 kW (155 hp) ISO ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
Max. output according to ISO 9249,
hp) at 1700 rpm at 1700 rpm
SAE J1349 9249,SAE J1349
(28.3 r/s) (28.3 r/s)
564 N m (416 564 N m (416 lbf ISO 9249,SAE ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
Max. torque according to ISO 9249,
lbf ft) at 1700 ft) at 1700 rpm
SAE J1349 J1349
rpm (28.3 r/s) (28.3 r/s)
Number of cylinders 6 6 ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪرﻫﺎ‬
Cylinder bore 98 mm (3.858 in) 98 mm (3.858 in) ‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر‬
Stroke 126 mm (4.960 in) 126 mm (4.960 in) ‫ﻛﻮرس‬
3
Cylinder capacity 5.7 litres (349 in3) (349 in ) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬5.7 ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر‬
Compression ratio 18.4:1 18.4:1 ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ‬
Method with ‫روش ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن زاوﻳﻪ‬
Valve clearance angular tightening ‫ﻟﻘﻲ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻫﺎ‬
‫اي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ‬
is required
Idling speed, low 700 +/- 50 rpm 700+/-50 rpm ‫ ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫دور در ﺟﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Idling speed, high 2370 +/- 25 rpm 2370+/-25 rpm ‫ ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬،‫دور در ﺟﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Lubrication system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
450-500 kPa (4.5-
Oil pressure, (warm engine, high 450-500 kPa (4.5- ‫ دور در ﺟﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬،‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ )ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪه‬
5.0 bar) (65-73
idling speed) 5.0 bar)(65-73 psi) (‫ﺗﻨﺪ‬
psi)
Fuel system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎن‬
Order of injection 1-5-3-6-2-4 1-5-3-6-2-4 ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺰرﻳﻖ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
150-600 kPa (1.5-
150-600 kPa (1.5- ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
Feed pressure 6.0 bar) (22-87
6.0 bar)(22-87 psi)
psi)
Injectors ‫اﻧﮋﻛﺘﻮرﻫﺎ‬
Variable, ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬،‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
Opening pressure electronically ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ورودي اﻧﮋﻛﺘﻮرﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
controlled
Air cleaner ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬

Air cleaning in 3 3 ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻫﻮا در‬

Type ‫ﻧﻮع‬
steps ‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
Cyclone cleaner - -‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﻮﻧﻲ‬
primary filter -
secondary filter ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ – ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬
Cooling system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Type Closed system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Thermostat begins to open at 83 °C (181 °F) 83 °C(181 °F) ‫دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎت‬
Thermostat fully open at 95 °C (203 °F) 95 °C(203 °F) ‫دﻣﺎي ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎت‬
Cooling fan motor ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Type Axial piston pump ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺤﻮري‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

191
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L60F L60F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L60F L60F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

System voltage 24 V ‫ وﻟﺖ‬24 ‫وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬

Batteries 2 (connected in series) (‫ )ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺳﺮي ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬2 ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬
Battery voltage 12 V ‫ وﻟﺖ‬12 ‫وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
Battery capacity 2 x 110 Ah ‫ آﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬2¯110 ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
Alternator 2280 W ‫ وات‬2280 ‫آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر‬
Starter motor output 5.5 kW (7.5 hp) (7.5 hp)‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ وات‬5.5 ‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬

Battery electrolyte density kg/dm 3 kg / dm3 ‫ﻏﻠﻈﺖ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬

Fully charged battery 1.275-1.285 1.275-1.285 ‫در زﻣﺎن ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
The battery should be 1.250 ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي در اﻳﻦ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﻮد‬
1.250
recharged at a density of

Bulbs Socket ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ‬ Watt ‫وات‬ ‫ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎ‬

Travel lights, low beams PX 26D (H7) 70 ‫ ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
Travel lights, high beams PK 22s (H3) 70 ‫ ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
Parking lights, front BA 9s 4 ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎرك‬
Parking lights, rear BA 15s 10 ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎرك‬
Tail lights BA 15s 10 ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Stop lights BA 15s 21 ‫ اﻳﺴﺖ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
Direction indicators, ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
BA 15s 21
front
Direction indicators, rear BA 15s 21 ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
Side lights, (amber side- (‫ )ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي زرد ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺎر‬
– –
marking lights)
Cab light BA 15s 10 ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Working lights, front (‫ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژن ﺟﻠﻮ )اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬
PK 22s (H3) 70
halogen (optional)
Working lights, rear (‫ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژن ﻋﻘﺐ )اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬
PK 22s (H3) 70
halogen (optional)
Guide light in switches W 2 x 4.6 d 1.2 ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي راﻫﻨﻤﺎي روي ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬

192
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L60F L60F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

Relays L60F L60F ‫رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي‬

FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ RE FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ RE

Voltage supply E- E-ECU,V- ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
ECU, V-ECU, V2- 13 Bucket positioner ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ )ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ دﻫﻨﺪه( ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ 01
ECU V2-ECU
Voltage supply ECC ECC‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 14 Reversing alarm ‫ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 02
Windscreen wiper ‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 15 Working lights, front ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬ 03
15A feed 15A ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 16 Working lights, rear ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬ 04
15A feed 15A ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 17 Boom kick-out ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬ 05
15EA feed 15EA ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 18 Starter relay ‫رﻟﻪ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ 06
Working lights cab ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺟﻠﻮي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 07
front
Boom Suspension (BBS )‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬ 08
System - BSS
Water pump interval ‫ زﻣﺎن ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن آب ﭘﻤﭗ‬8701 ‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Rear window wiper 09
heating
Adjustable flow for ‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬
3rd hydraulic 9101 Stop lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ 10
function ‫ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

‫ رﻟﻪ ﻓﻼﺷﺮ‬RF1 Working lights radiator ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎري ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬

Flasher relay 11
casing
30 feed controlled by ‫ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬I-ECU ‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬30 ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
I-ECU 12
Holding voltage RE 13 ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬RE13 ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬

193
‫‪Specifications‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

‫‪Electrical system, specifications L60F‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ‪L60F‬‬

‫رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎرج از ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬

‫‪FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ ‫‪RE‬‬ ‫‪FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ ‫‪RE‬‬

‫‪Secondary steering‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ ‫‪6401‬‬ ‫‪Preheating‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬ ‫‪2501‬‬

‫‪194‬‬
 Specifications
Electrical system, specifications L60F
Fuses L60F
FUNCTION
Preheating relay,
RE2501
boom Suspension
System, attachment
lock, detent function
3rd hydraulic function
Working hydraulics
Windscreen wiper,
windscreen washer,
headlight flasher
Rear window wiper,
rear window washer,
level monitor washer
fluid
Battery charging
Hazard flashers
Electrically heated
fuel filter, working
lights, double working
lights cab, working
lights automatic
reversing light
Horn, kick-down, rear
vision camera, electrically
heated rear view mirrors,
electrically adjustable rear
view mirrors
Seat with air
suspension, heated
seat, position sensor
operator seat
Mode selector, differential
lock, fully automatic
downshifting, gear selector
control gear lever carrier,
lever steering, Booms
Suspension System
activation / function selection
Automatic greasing
Gear selector control,
steering column
Parking brake
Secondary Steering
Voltage supply VCADS ‫ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ‬VCADS ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
Pro service socket
Ignition switch
dependent voltage
supply, I-ECU, V-
ECU, V2-ECU, ECC
Electrically heated fuel ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬15
filter
Rear vision camera
Rear vision camera,
activated when
reversing
– – –
– – –
Radio
Main fuse
Secondary steering
pump
Preheating
Voltage converter
195
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
L60F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
L60F ‫ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬A ‫ﻓﻴﻮز‬ FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ A ‫ﻓﻴﻮز‬
RE250 ‫ رﻟﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬5 31 Stop lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ 5 01
، ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬
10 32 - - 02
‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ 10 33 Working lights cab, front ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺟﻠﻮﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 15 03
‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر‬،‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ RE14 ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﻓﻼﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ‬،‫ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 10 34 Voltage supply to RE14 5 04
،‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ Instrument lighting, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺷﻮﻳﻨﺪه‬ parking light front left, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺎر‬،‫ﭘﺎرك ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
10 35 side light front left, tail 5 05
light right .‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻋﻘﺐ راﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ Parking light front right, ،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
5 36 side light front right, tail ‫ ﭼﺮاغ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺎر ﺟﻠﻮ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬ 5 06
light left, number plate
lighting ‫ ﻧﻮر ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺷﺮ ﻫﺸﺪار‬ 5 37 Low beam, left ‫ ﭼﭗ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 5 07
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي دوﺗﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎر‬،‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
5 38 Low beam, right ‫ راﺳﺖ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 5 08
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮرت )ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬،‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ( ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﮔﺮم‬،‫ دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ ﭘﺸﺖ‬،‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬،‫ﺑﻮق‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ‬،‫ ﻛﻦ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ‬10 ‫واﺣﺪ ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
39 Reversing warning unit 5 09
.‫ﻫﺎ ي دﻳﺪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬
، ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻫﻮا‬
‫ ﺳﻨﺴﻮر‬،‫ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ‬10 ‫ راﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬
41 High beam, right 5 10
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺮ ﻣﺪ ﻛﺎري ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬
ً‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ؛ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‬،
‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮر‬، ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه‬،‫ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬10 42 High beam, left ‫ ﭼﭗ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬ 5 11
‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬،‫ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬، ‫دﻧﺪه‬
.‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬/‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
‫ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬10 43 15RA feed to voltage converter ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪل وﻟﺘﺎژ‬15RA ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 5 12
‫ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬، ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه‬5 45 Working lights forward, ‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 15 13
attachments
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬5 48 Direction indicator ‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ 5 14
Working lights rear, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬، ‫ﭼﺮاﻏﻬﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ 5 49 working lights automatic 15 15
reversing light ‫ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﭼﺮاغ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ اي‬5 50 casing lights radiator
Working ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎري روي ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ 15 16
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬
Voltage supply I-ECU, ‫ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬، I-ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
5 51 holding voltage RE13 10 17
RE130 ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬
61 Power socket 24 V ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺗﻮان اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬ 10 18
‫ دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ ﭘﺸﺖ‬5 62 Travel lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ 15 19
‫دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ از ﭘﺸﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ Ignition switch voltage
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮق ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬
‫ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬5 63 supply 10 20
64 Rotating warning ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮدان ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه‬ 10 21
beacon, interior lighting
65 Voltage supply to RE12 RE12 ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 5 22
‫ رادﻳﻮ‬15 66 Engine Starter Motor ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ 5 23
Voltage supply E-ECU E-ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 24
‫ ﻓﻴﻮز اﺻﻠﻲ‬125 70 Voltage supply V-ECU V-ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 25
‫ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬125 71 Voltage supply V2-ECU V2-ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 26
‫ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬125 72 Cab fan ‫ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 20 27
‫ﻣﺒﺪل وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ AC compressor, water ‫ وﻗﻔﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬،AC ‫ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر‬
10 74 pump interval heating 10 28
‫ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن واﺗﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ‬
ECC, air conditioning ‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا‬،ECC 5 29
EGR valve EGR ‫ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ‬ 5 30
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L60F L60F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

196
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Power transmission, specifications L60F L60F ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Power transmission, specifications L60F L60F ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Transmission ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Make Volvo Volvo ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬

Power-shift transmission ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﭘﺎور ﺷﻴﻔﺖ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻨﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

Type
with torque converter ‫ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر( ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮرك ﻛﻨﻮرﺗﻮر‬
Designation HTE110 HTE110 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Torque converter Single stage ‫ﺗﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اي‬ ‫ﺗﻮرك ﻛﻨﻮرﺗﻮر‬
Torque multiplication 2.85:1 2.85:1 ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور‬
Number of gears 4/4 ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬/‫ﺗﻌﺪاد دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ‬
4/4
forward/reverse
Gear-shifting system Electro-hydraulic (APS) ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻧﺪه‬

Transmission oil cooler ‫ﻛﻮﻟﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Make Volvo volvo ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
Type Heat exchanger ‫ﻣﺒﺪل ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Cooling agent Liquid ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬

‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎر ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﮔﺎردان ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺷﻨﺎور ﺑﺎ‬
Fully floating drive shafts
Type with hub reductions of the ‫ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﺗﻮﭘﻲ از ﻧﻮع ﭼﺮخ دﻧﺪه ﺳﻴﺎره‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
planetary gear type ‫اي ﺧﻮرﺷﻴﺪي‬
Front axle, make Volvo volvo ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬،‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Designation AWB15 AWB15 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Rear axle, make Volvo volvo ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬،‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Designation AWB15 AWB15 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Differential lock On front axle ‫ﺑﺮ روي اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬
Type Dog clutch 100% 100%(‫ﻛﻼچ زﺑﺎﻧﻪ دار)ﮔﻴﺮه دار‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Operation Electro-hydraulic ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬

Wheel bolts
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ‬

600 ±50 N m ‫ ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ‬600±50

Tightening torque ‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن‬
(443 ±37 lbf ft) (443±37 lbf ft)

197
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Brakes / steering system, specifications L60F L60F ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬

Brakes /steering system, specifications L60F L60F ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬

Brakes ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬، ‫ﻣﺪار دو ﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ ﻣﺪل‬،‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Dual circuit, all-hydraulic
Service brakes, type with disc brakes and ‫و دﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه‬
chargeable accumulators .‫آﻟﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎرژ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Number of discs front/rear 1/1 1/1 ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬/ ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ ي ﻋﻘﺐ‬
2 2
636/636 cm (99/99 in ) ‫ﺳﻄﺢ اﺻﻄﺤﻜﺎﻛﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﭼﺮخ‬
Brake friction area 1289/636 cm 2 (200/99
front/rear per wheel in2) ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬/‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Accumulator 3 pcs 3 pcs ‫اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر‬
Disc thickness, new 9.5 mm (0.374 in) 9.5 mm (0.374 in) ‫ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬، ‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ‬
Disc thickness, min. 7.2 mm (0.283 in) 7.2 mm (0.283 in) ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ‬
Wear indicator for brake ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺋﻴﺪﮔﻲ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ‬
Mechanical
disc, type

Parking brake ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬

Electro-hydraulically
controlled disc brake
Type
positioned on transmission
output shaft
Brake disc 1 pc
Brake friction area 102 cm 2 (16 in 2 )
Brake disc thickness, new 12.4-13.0 mm (0.488-
brake disc 0.551 in)
Accumulator See service brakes
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
‫روي ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬ ‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
2 2
102 cm (15.8 in ) ‫ﺳﻄﺢ اﺻﻄﻜﺎﻛﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
12.4-13.0 mm (0.488-0.551 ‫ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻮ‬،‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
in)
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر‬

Steering system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬

Type Load-sensing, hydrostatic ‫ ﻫﻴﺪرواﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬، ‫ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Number of steering wheel ‫ دور‬4.3 ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﻞ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
4.3 revolutions
revolutions, total
Steering arc +/- 40° +/- 40° (‫زاوﻳﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي )زاوﻳﻪ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ‬

198
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Recommended air pressure L60F L60F ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎي‬

Recommended air pressure L60F L60F ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎي‬

If other tyres are used for than those stated, the tyre ‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼع از‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎي ﻋﻨﻮان ﺷﺪه ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
manufacturer should be contacted regarding information
about the correct tyre pressure. .‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎدﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد‬

Timber Material handling Material handling

Tyres handling Loading/Carrying max. loading work
25 km/h (15.5 mph) 10 km/h (6.2 mph)
‫ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﻮار‬ ‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
25 km (15.5 mph) 10 km/h (6.2 mph)
Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front
‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Bridgestone VMT 300 450 300 450 kPa VMT ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
20.5R25* - - 44 65 44 65 psi 17.5R25
Bridgestone VSW 300 450 300 450 kPa VSW ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
20.5R25* - - 44 65 44 65 psi 17.5R25
Bridgestone VMT 250 350 200 325 200 325 kPa VMT ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
20.5R25* 36 51 29 47 29 47 psi 20.5R25
Bridgestone VSW 250 350 200 325 200 325 kPa VSW ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
20.5R25* 36 51 29 47 29 47 psi 20.5R25
Bridgestone 200 325 200 325 kPa VSDL ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
VSDL - - 29 47 29 47 psi
20.5R25* 20.5R25
Bridgestone VJT 250 350 200 325 200 325 kPa VJT ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
20.5R25* 36 51 29 47 29 47 psi 20.5R25
Firestone SGG 300 450 300 450 kPa SGG ‫ﻓﺎﻳﺮاﺳﺘﻮن‬
17.5-25/12 PR - - 44 65 44 65 psi 17.5-25/12 PR
Firestone SRG 300 450 300 450 kPa SRG ‫ﻓﺎﻳﺮاﺳﺘﻮن‬
17.5-25/16 PR - - 44 65 44 65 psi 17.5-25/16 PR
Goodyear GP2B 300 450 300 450 kPa GP2B ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
17.5R25 - - 44 65 44 65 psi 17.5R25
Goodyear RL-2+ 300 450 300 450 kPa RL-2+ ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
17.5R25 - - 44 65 44 65 psi
Goodyear HRL 200 250 200 250 kPa HRL ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25/16 - - 29 36 29 36 psi 20.5R25/16
Goodyear TL-3A+ 250 350 200 325 200 325 kPa TL-3A+ ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25 36 51 29 47 29 47 psi 20.5R25
Goodyear RL-5K 200 325 200 325 kPa RL-5K ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25 - - 29 47 29 47 psi 20.5R25
Goodyear GP2B 250 350 200 325 200 325 kPa GP2B ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25 36 51 29 47 29 47 psi 20.5R25
Goodyear GP4B 250 350 200 325 200 325 kPa GP4B ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25 36 51 29 47 29 47 psi 20.5R25*
Goodyear RL2+ 250 350 200 325 200 325 kPa RL2+ ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25 36 51 29 47 29 47 psi 20.5R25
Goodyear GP3D 250 350 200 300 200 300 kPa GP3D ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25 36 51 29 44 29 44 psi 600/65R25
Michelin ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬
SNOPLUS - - 250 400 250 400 kPa
36 58 36 58 psi SNOPLUS
20.5R25* 17. 5R25
Michelin XHA 250 400 250 400 kPa XHA ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬
20.5R25* - - 36 58 36 58 psi 17. 5R25
Michelin ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬
SNOPLUS 250 300 200 250 200 250 kPa
36 44 29 36 29 36 psi SNOPLUS
20.5R25* 20. 5R25
Michelin XHA 250 300 200 250 200 250 kPa XHA ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬
20.5R25* 36 44 29 36 29 36 psi 20. 5R25
Michelin X-mine X-mine ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬
D2 - - 200 250 200 250 kPa
29 36 29 36 psi D2
20.5R25* 20. 5R25

199
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Recommended air pressure L60F L60F ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎي‬

Timber Material handling Material handling

Tyres handling Loading/Carrying max. loading work
25 km/h (15.5 mph) 10 km/h (6.2 mph)
‫ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﻮار‬ ‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
25 km (15.5 mph) 10 km/h (6.2 mph)
Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front
‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Michelin XLD 250 300 200 250 200 250 kPa XLD ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬
600/65R25* 36 44 29 36 29 36 psi 600/6 5R25
Yokohama RB31 250 350 200 325 200 325 kPa RB31‫ﻳﻮﻛﻮﻫﺎﻣﺎ‬
20.5R25* 36 51 29 47 29 47 psi 20.5R25*

- The recommended tyre pressures are based on the rated
load for each handling case.
- In case of heavier loads, especially during timber
handling or loading-carrying operations, a higher tyre
pressure is required. Contact the tyre manufacturer for
information about which air pressure is the correct one
for the load to be handled and transported over a
particular distance.
- If L4 or L5 tyres are used for loading-carrying
operations, due attention must be paid to the
transporting distances.
Radial tyres are to be preferred for loading-carrying
operations, as the build-up of heat is less in this type of
tyre.
‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﺑﺎري ﻛﻪ در ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮرد از‬ -
.‫ﻣﻮارد ﺑﺎﻻ ذﻛﺮ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮص در زﻣﺎن ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن اﻟﻮار ﻳﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم‬،‫در ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‬ -
‫ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬، ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼع از ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ‬.‫وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﻮد و در ﻃﻮل ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺘﻲ ﺧﺎص ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار‬L5 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬L4 ‫اﮔﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي‬ -
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ داﺷﺖ‬. ‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر از ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ ي رادﻳﺎل اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮا‬ -
.‫ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎي اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع از ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻢ ﺗﺮ اﺳﺖ‬

200
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Hydraulic system, specifications L60F L60F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Hydraulic system, specifications L60F L60F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Load-sensing, (closed (‫ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر )ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

Type
centre)
Hydraulic oil pump, Does not apply to this .‫روي اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ (1 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﭘﻤﭗ‬
(pump 1) machine type
Working hydraulics, ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎر‬ (2 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﭘﻤﭗ‬
Hydraulic oil pump,
steering system, brake
(pump 2) ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮو‬، ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬،‫ﮔﻴﺮي‬
system and servo system
Type Variable axial piston pump ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮن ﻣﺤﻮري ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Hydraulic oil pump, Cooling fan pump, brake ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬، ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ (3 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﭘﻤﭗ‬
(pump 3) system
Type Variable axial piston pump ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮن ﻣﺤﻮري ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

201
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Dimensional drawing L60F L60F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

Dimensional drawing L60F L60F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

Specifications and dimensions comply in applicable parts
with ISO 7131 1984, SAE J732 JUN 92, ISO 7546 1983,
SAE J742 FEB 85, ISO 5998 1986, SAE J818 MAY 87,
ISO 8313.
The data apply to a machine with 20.5 R25 L2 tyres.
ISO 7131 1984, SAE J732 JUN ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎت و اﺑﻌﺎد ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬
92,ISO 7546 1983,SAE J742 FEB 85, ISO 5998 1986 ,
.‫ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ دارﻧﺪ‬SAE J818 MAY 87, ISO 8313
.‫ داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬20.5 R25 L2 ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي‬

Long boom (lifting arms) Standard boom (lifting arms Standard boom (lifting arms)
(‫ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬ (‫ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬ (‫ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬
6504 mm (21 4.1) B 45° P  A
4097 mm (13 5.3) J 42° R 5990 mm(19 7.8) B
4407 mm (14 5.5) K 46° R1 3000 mm (9 10.1) C
79° S 460 mm(16.1) D
94 mm (0 3.7) T  E
400 mm (1 3.7) U 3220 mm(10 6.8) F
1900 mm (6 2.8) X 2134 mm(7 ft 0.0 in) G
2440 mm (8 0.1) Y  H
3210 mm (10 4.6) Z 3580 mm(11 8.9) J
5340 mm (17 6.2) a2 3870 mm (12 8.4) K
2900 mm (9 6) a3  L
±40° a4  M
 N
56° O

)See table on the next page ‫( ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪول ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
)Carrying position SAE
‫ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اﺟﺮا ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬SAE ‫( وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
) P-max. 49°
P-max.49° (
The difference between standard boom and long boom is ‫ﺗﻔﺎوت ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﻢ اﻧﺪازه ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
shown here with the same size bucket.
. ‫اﺳﺖ‬
Note that the version with long boom is intended to be used
with a material with a lower density. ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ دارد ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮم ﺣﺠﻤﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮي‬
.‫دارﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
202
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Machine capacity L60F L60F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

Machine capacity L60F L60F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

The machine is constructed for a maximum machine ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ( ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه‬
weight (incl. equipment and attachments) of 16500 kg .‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬14000 kg (30865 Ib) ‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
(36376 lb).

Levelling
Long boom Light material Standard buckets
bucket 20.5 ‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
Tyres 20.5
R25 L2 ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ اﻧﺪازه‬
‫ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮاد ﺳﺒﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬ R25 L2
‫ﮔﻴﺮي‬
Edge Edge
Edge savers Teeth
savers savers
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬ ‫دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ اﻧﺒﺎﺷﺖ‬
Capacity,
5.0 m3 3.1 m3 1.6 m3 2.1 m3 1.9 m3 1.8 m3
heaped ‫ﻃﺒﻖ‬
ISO/SAE (6.5 yd3) (4.1 yd3) (2.1yd3) (2.7 yd3) (2.5 yD3) (2.4 yd3)
ISO/SAE
Capacity ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه‬
5.5 m3 3.4 m3 1.8 m3 2.3 m3 2.1 m3 2.0 m3
filled to 110
% (7.2 yd3) (4.4 yd3) (2.4 yd3) (3.0 yd3) (2.7 yD3) (2.6 yd3) 110%

Static tipping -1720 kg 7720 kg 7740 kg 7290 kg 8030 kg 8120 kg 8270 kg ‫ﺣﺪ اﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر در‬
load (-3792 Ib) (17020 Ib) (17064 Ib) (16072Ib) (17703 Ib) (2535 Ib) (18232 Ib) ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
-1570 kg 6850 kg 6900 kg 6540 kg 7170 kg 7260 kg 7410 kg 35°‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬
Steered 35°
(-3461 Ib) (15102 Ib) (15212 Ib) (14418 Ib) (15807 Ib) (16006 Ib) (16336 Ib)
-1530 kg 6600 kg 6660 kg 6310 kg 6920 kg 7010 kg 7150 kg ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬
Fully steered
(-3373 Ib) (14550 Ib) (14683 Ib) (13911Ib) (15256 Ib) (15454 Ib) (15763 Ib) ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
Break-out ‫ﻧﻴﺮوي ﺑﻮﺷﻲ‬
force
+9 kN 53.8 kN 61.7kN 62.4 kN 76.1 kN 80.1 kN 84.2 kN
(+2023 Ibf) (12095 Ibf) (13871 Ibf) (14028 Ibf) (17108 Ibf) (18007 Ibf) (18929 Ibf)
A +523 mm 7880 mm 7650 mm 7540 mm 7370 mm 7310 mm 7420 mm A
(+1 8.6) (25 10.2) (25 1.2) (24 8.8) (2 5.9) (23 11.8) (24 4.1)
E +36 mm 1690 mm 1470 mm 1330 mm 1190 mm 1130 mm 1260 mm E
(+0 1.4) (5 6.5) (4 9.9) (4 4.4) (3 10.9) (3 8.5) (4 1.6)
H* +534 mm 2440 mm 2590 mm 2580 mm 2770 mm 2810 mm 2740 mm H
(+1 9.0) (8 0.1) (8 6.0) (8 5.6) (9 1.1) (9 2.6) (8 11.9)
L +517 mm 5490 mm 5290 mm 4540 mm 5180 mm 5120 mm 5120 mm L
(+1 8.4) (18 0.1) (17 4.3) (14 10.7) (16 11.9) (16 9.6) (16 9.6)
M* -7 mm 1500 mm 1320 mm 1100 mm 1090 mm 1040 mm 1160 mm M
(0 0.3) (4 11 .1) (4 4.0) (3 7.3) (2 5.9) (3 4.9) (2 5.9)
N* +443 mm 1680 mm 1630 mm 1510 mm 1610 mm 1590 mm 1660 mm N
(+1 5.4) (2 5.9) (5 ft 4.2IN) (4 11.4 ) (5 3.4) (5 2.6) ( 5 5.4)
V 2650 mm 2550 mm 2500 mm 2500 mm 2500 mm 2500 mm V
(8 8.3) (2 5.9) (8 2.4) (8 2.4) (8 2.4) (8 2.4)
a1 12060 mm 11830 mm 11920 mm 11630 mm 11590 mm 11660 mm a1
(39 6.8 ) (38 9.7) (39 1.3) (38 1.9) (38 0.3) (38 3.1)
Machine ‫وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
+162 kg 12220 kg 11940 kg 11630 kg 11840 kg 11800 kg 11740 kg
weight
(+357 Ib) (26940 Ib) (26323 Ib) (25640 Ib ) (26103 Ib) (26015 Ib) (25882 Ib)

) Measurement to tip of bucket teeth or edge savers. Dumping ‫ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ‬. ‫(اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮك دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
height to edge of bucket (acc. to SAE) + approx. 150 mm (6 in).
Measured at a dumping angle of 45°. .(‫ اﻳﻨﭻ‬6) ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‬150 ً‫ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬+ (SAE ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻛﺖ )ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
45° ‫اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي در زاوﻳﻪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬

203
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Pallet fork L60F L60F ‫ﻓﻮرك ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬

Pallet fork L60F L60F ‫ﻓﻮرك ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬

Pallet fork (with attachment bracket)
Attachment Bracket-mounted
Fork tine, length 1450 mm (4' 9.1'')
Width, fork frame 1500 mm (4' 11.1'')
3650 kg (8047 lb), at a ‫ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬، (8047Ib) 3650 kg
distance to centre of
Work load
gravity of 600 mm (23.6
in)
11450 kg (25243 lb) Long
Machine weight
boom + 162 kg (357 lb)
Tyres 20.5 R25 L2
(‫ﻓﻮرك ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ )ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎت‬
‫ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
1450 mm (4 9.1) ‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ و ﻃﻮل دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻓﻮرك‬
1500 mm (4 11.1) ‫ﻋﺮض و ﻗﺎب ﻓﻮرك‬
‫وزن ﺑﺎر‬
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮي ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ‬600
600 mm (23.6 in)
(25243Ib) 11450 kg ‫وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
(357 lb) 162 kg +‫ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬
20.5 R25 L2 ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬

(12 2.5) mm 3720 E (-0 1.8) Mm -46 C (2 7.5) mm 800 A

(2 3.6) mm 700 F (6 0.4) mm 1840 D (5 1.8) mm 1570 B

For further information, see the Attachment Catalogue. .‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺗﻮﻟﻮگ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬

204
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Material handling arm L60F L60F ‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬

Material handling arm L60F L60F ‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬

Material handling arm (with attachment (‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر )ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎت‬
bracket)
Attachment Bracket-mounted ‫ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Weight, material handling 380 kg (838 Ib) ‫ ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬،‫وزن‬
380 kg (838 lb)
arm
Order No. 92007 92007 ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
Machine weight 11370 kg (28351 lb) 11370 kg (25067 Ib) ‫وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
Tyres 20.5 R25 L2 20 . 5 R25 L2 ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬

1520 mm (4´11.8˝) P 910 mm (2´11.8˝) J 2580 mm (8´5.6˝) D

5300 mm (2´5.9˝) Q 1240 mm (4´0.8˝) K 1990 mm(6´6.3˝) E
6180 mm (20´3.3˝) R 1590 mm (5´2.6˝) L 1450 mm(4´9.1˝) F
7150 mm (23´5.5˝) S 2250 mm (7´4.6˝) M 3270 mm(10´8.7˝) G
3230 mm (10´7.2˝) N 4300 mm(14´1.3˝) H
4310 mm (14´1.7˝) O 5440 mm(17´10.2˝) I

Loading table for material handling arm ‫ﺟﺪول وزﻧﻲ ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻮاد‬

A Retracted 1800 kg (3968 Ib) ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ A

B Halfway extended 1400 kg (3086 Ib) ‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎز‬ B
C Fully extended 1150 kg (2535 Ib) (‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز )ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﻮل‬ C

205
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Capacities L70F L70F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬

Capacities L70F L70F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬

Capacities When changing Total ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫در ﺣﺎل ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
Engine oil, incl. 20 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬20 ‫ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬، ‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
filter (5.3 US gal) (5.3 US gal) ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
Transmission 21 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬20 ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
incl. filter (5.5 US gal) (5.3 US gal)
35 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬35 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ دﻧﺪه‬
Front axle
(9.2 US gal) (9.2 US gal) ‫ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﺗﻮﭘﻲ‬
27 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬27 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ دﻧﺪه‬
Rear axle
(7.1 US gal) (7.1 US gal) ‫ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﺗﻮﭘﻲ‬
135 litres (35.6 ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬135 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Hydraulic system
US gal) (35.6 US gal)
Hydraulic oil 90 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬90 ‫روﻏﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺰن‬
tank (23.8 US gal) (23.8 US gal) ‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Fuel tank, 219 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬219 ‫ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬،‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
available fuel (57.8 US gal) (57.8 US gal) ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬
Fuel tank 224 litres (59.1 ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬224 ‫ﻣﺨﺰن ﺳﻮﺧﺖ)ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
(available) US gal) (59.1 US gal) (‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬
30 litres 38 litres (10.0 ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬38 ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬30 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Cooling system
(7.9 US gal) US gal) (10.0 US gal) (7.9 US gal)
Oil-bath air 5.5 litres (1.5 US ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬5.5 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
cleaner (optional
equipment) gal) (1.5 US gal) (‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬

Carry out checks according to Service ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬،‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻫﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم دﻫﻴﺪ‬
Programmes for the machine, see page 135
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬135

Oil and fluid changes Hours ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ و ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻻت‬
 ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine 500
 ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Coolant 6000
Front and rear axles 1000 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Transmission, at the same time clean ‫ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ روﻏﻦ را ﻫﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
2000
suction strainer
Hydraulic system (working hydraulics, (‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬، ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎر‬
4000/2000
brake system and steering system)

) Regarding conditions required if the interval
between engine oil changes is to apply, see
page139.
) Change coolant every 6000 hours or at least
every fourth year.
) If the system is filled with mineral hydraulic oil
or Volvo Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil 46, the
interval is 4000 hours
If another biologically degradable hydraulic oil is
used, the interval is 2000 hours.
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮي در زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ ﺻﻮرت‬، ‫( ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬139 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﮔﻴﺮد‬
‫ ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر‬4 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر و ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻫﺮ‬6000 ‫( ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري را ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬46 ‫( اﮔﺮ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر‬4000 ‫ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ رﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ روﻏﻦ‬،‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد )در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﺎﻳﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ‬
(.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮔﺮدد‬2000 ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻫﺮ‬

206
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Capacities L70F L70F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬

Filter replacements Hours ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺳﺎﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬

Engine, oil filters 500* ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine, air filter (primary filter) 1000 (‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine, air filter (secondary filter) 2000 (‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Fuel filters 500** ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Fuel system, breather filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬

Oil-bath air cleaner, filter inserts cleaning ‫ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن اﻟﻤﺎن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬،‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺶ ﻫﻮا‬
2000
(optional equipment) (‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
Transmission, oil filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ‬،‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Transmission, breather filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬،‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Drive axles, breather filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬، ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮك‬
Cab, ventilation filter (prefilter) 1000 (‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ )ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
Cab, ventilation filter (main filter) 2000*** ( ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ‬
Hydraulic system, return oil filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬، ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Hydraulic system, breather filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬، ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

 ) Regarding conditions required if the interval between
engine oil changes is to apply, see page139.
) Or when replacing the engine oil filter, which may
mean a shorter interval.
) In case of environment containing asbestos the
filter should be replaced every 1000 hours.
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮي در زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ‬، ‫( ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬139 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫( ﻳﺎ زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺗﺮي اﺳﺖ‬
‫( در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز دارﻧﺪن از ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮔﺮدد‬1000

207
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Engine, specifications L70F L70F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Engine, specifications L70F L70F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Volvo D6E Volvo D6E ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬

Designation
LCE3 LCE3
125 kW (170 125 kW (170 hp) ISO ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
Max. output according to ISO 9249,
hp) at 1700 rpm at 1700 rpm
SAE J1349 9249,SAE J1349
(28.3 r/s) (28.3 r/s)
732 N m (540 lbf 732 N m (540 lbf ISO 9249,SAE ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
Max. torque according to ISO 9249,
ft) at 1400 rpm ft) at 1400 rpm
SAE J1349 (23.3 r/s) (23.3 r/s) J1349
Number of cylinders 6 6 ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪرﻫﺎ‬
Cylinder bore 98 mm (3.858 in) 98 mm (3.858 in) ‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر‬
Stroke 126 mm (4.960 in) 126 mm (4.960 in) ‫ﻛﻮرس‬
3
Cylinder capacity 5.7 litres (349 in3) (349 in ) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬5.7 ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر‬
Compression ratio 18.4:1 18.4:1 ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ‬
Method with ‫روش ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن زاوﻳﻪ‬
Valve clearance angular tightening ‫ﻟﻘﻲ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻫﺎ‬
is required ‫اي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ‬
Lubrication system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
450-500 kPa (4.5-
Oil pressure, (warm engine, high 450-500 kPa (4.5- ‫ دور در ﺟﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬،‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ )ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪه‬
5.0 bar) (65-73
idling speed) 5.0 bar)(65-73 psi) (‫ﺗﻨﺪ‬
psi)
Fuel system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎن‬
Order of injection 1-5-3-6-2-4 1-5-3-6-2-4 ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺰرﻳﻖ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
150-600 kPa (1.5-
150-600 kPa (1.5- ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
Feed pressure 6.0 bar) (22-87
6.0 bar)(22-87 psi)
psi)
Injectors ‫اﻧﮋﻛﺘﻮرﻫﺎ‬
Variable, ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬،‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
Opening pressure electronically ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ورودي اﻧﮋﻛﺘﻮرﻫﺎ‬
controlled ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
Air cleaner ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬

Air cleaning in 3 3 ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻫﻮا در‬

Type ‫ﻧﻮع‬
steps ‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
Cyclone cleaner - -‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﻮﻧﻲ‬
primary filter -
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ – ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬
secondary filter
Cooling system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Type Closed system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Thermostat begins to open at 83 °C (181 °F) 83 °C(181 °F) ‫دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎت‬
Thermostat fully open at 95 °C (203 °F) 95 °C(203 °F) ‫دﻣﺎي ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎت‬
Cooling fan motor ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Type Axial piston pump ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺤﻮري‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

208
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L70F L70F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L70F L70F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

System voltage 24 V ‫ وﻟﺖ‬24 ‫وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬

Batteries 2 (connected in series) (‫ )ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺳﺮي ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬2 ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬
Battery voltage 12 V ‫ وﻟﺖ‬12 ‫وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
Battery capacity 2 x 110 Ah ‫ آﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬2¯110 ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
Alternator 2280 W ‫ وات‬2280 ‫آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر‬
Starter motor output 5.5 kW (7.5 hp) (7.5 hp)‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ وات‬5.5 ‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬

Battery electrolyte density kg/dm 3 kg / dm3 ‫ﻏﻠﻈﺖ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬

Fully charged battery 1.275-1.285 1.275-1.285 ‫در زﻣﺎن ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
The battery should be 1.250 ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي در اﻳﻦ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﻮد‬
1.250
recharged at a density of

Bulbs Watt Socket ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ‬ ‫وات‬ ‫ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎ‬

Travel lights, ‫ ﻧﻮر‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬

70 PX 26D (H7) PX 26D (H7) 70
low beams ‫ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬

Travel lights, ‫ ﻧﻮر‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬

70 PK 22s (H3) PK 22s (H3) 70
high beams ‫ﺑﺎﻻ‬
Parking lights, ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎرك‬
4 BA 9s BA 9s 4
front
Parking lights, ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎرك‬
10 BA 15s BA 15s 10
rear
Tail lights 10 BA 15s BA 15s 10 ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Stop lights 21 BA 15s BA 15s 21 ‫ اﻳﺴﺖ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
Direction ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
indicators, 21 BA 15s BA 15s 21
front
Direction ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
21 BA 15s BA 15s 21
indicators, rear
Side lights, ‫ )ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺎر‬
(amber side- – – – –
(‫زرد ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
marking lights)
Cab light 10 BA 15s BA 15s 10 ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Working ‫ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژن ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬
lights, front
70 PK 22s (H3) PK 22s (H3) 70 (‫)اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
halogen
(optional)
Working ‫ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژن ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬
lights, rear
70 PK 22s (H3) PK 22s (H3) 70 (‫)اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
halogen
(optional)
Guide light in ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي راﻫﻨﻤﺎي‬
1.2 W 2 x 4.6 d W 2 x 4.6 d 1.2
switches ‫روي ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬

209
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L70F L70F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

Relays L70F L70F ‫رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي‬

FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ RE FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ RE

Voltage supply E- E-ECU,V- ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
ECU, V-ECU, V2- 13 Bucket positioner ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ )ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ دﻫﻨﺪه( ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ 01
ECU V2-ECU
Voltage supply ECC ECC‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 14 Reversing alarm ‫ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 02
Windscreen wiper ‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 15 Working lights, front ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬ 03
15A feed 15A ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 16 Working lights, rear ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬ 04
15A feed 15A ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 17 Boom kick-out ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬ 05
15EA feed 15EA ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 18 Starter relay ‫رﻟﻪ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ 06
Working lights cab ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺟﻠﻮي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 07
front
Boom Suspension BBS ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬ 08
System - BSS
Water pump interval ‫ زﻣﺎن ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن آب ﭘﻤﭗ‬8701 ‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Rear window wiper 09
heating
Adjustable flow for ‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬
3rd hydraulic 9101 Stop lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ 10
function ‫ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

‫ رﻟﻪ ﻓﻼﺷﺮ‬RF1 Working lights radiator ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎري ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬

Flasher relay 11
casing
30 feed controlled by ‫ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬I-ECU ‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬30 ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
I-ECU 12
Holding voltage RE 13 ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬RE13 ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬

210
 ‫‪Specifications‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

‫‪Electrical system, specifications L70F‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ‪L70F‬‬

‫رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎرج از ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬

‫‪FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ ‫‪RE‬‬ ‫‪FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ ‫‪RE‬‬

‫‪Secondary steering‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ ‫‪6401‬‬ ‫‪Preheating‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬ ‫‪2501‬‬

‫‪211‬‬
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L70F L70F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

212
 Specifications
Electrical system, specifications L70F
Fuses L60F
FUNCTION
Preheating relay,
RE2501
boom Suspension
System, attachment
lock, detent function
3rd hydraulic function
Working hydraulics
Windscreen wiper,
windscreen washer,
headlight flasher
Rear window wiper,
rear window washer,
level monitor washer
fluid
Battery charging
Hazard flashers
Electrically heated
fuel filter, working
lights, double working
lights cab, working
lights automatic
reversing light
Horn, kick-down, rear
vision camera, electrically
heated rear view mirrors,
electrically adjustable rear
view mirrors
Seat with air
suspension, heated
seat, position sensor
operator seat
Mode selector, differential
lock, fully automatic
downshifting, gear selector
control gear lever carrier,
lever steering, Booms
Suspension System
activation / function selection
Automatic greasing
Gear selector control,
steering column
Parking brake
Secondary Steering
Voltage supply VCADS ‫ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ‬VCADS ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
Pro service socket
Ignition switch
dependent voltage
supply, I-ECU, V-
ECU, V2-ECU, ECC
Electrically heated fuel ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬15
filter
Rear vision camera
Rear vision camera,
activated when
reversing
– – –
– – –
Radio
Main fuse
Secondary steering
pump
Preheating
Voltage converter
213
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
L70F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
L60F‫ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬A ‫ﻓﻴﻮز‬ FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ A ‫ﻓﻴﻮز‬
RE250 ‫ رﻟﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬5 31 Stop lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ 5 01
، ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬
10 32 - - 02
‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ 10 33 Working lights cab, front ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺟﻠﻮﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 15 03
‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر‬،‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ RE14 ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﻓﻼﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ‬،‫ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 10 34 Voltage supply to RE14 5 04
،‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ Instrument lighting, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺷﻮﻳﻨﺪه‬ parking light front left, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺎر‬،‫ﭘﺎرك ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
10 35 side light front left, tail 5 05
light right .‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻋﻘﺐ راﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ Parking light front right, ،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
5 36 side light front right, tail ‫ ﭼﺮاغ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺎر ﺟﻠﻮ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬ 5 06
light left, number plate
lighting ‫ ﻧﻮر ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺷﺮ ﻫﺸﺪار‬ 5 37 Low beam, left ‫ ﭼﭗ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 5 07
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي دوﺗﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎر‬،‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
5 38 Low beam, right ‫ راﺳﺖ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 5 08
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮرت )ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬،‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ( ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﮔﺮم‬،‫ دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ ﭘﺸﺖ‬،‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬،‫ﺑﻮق‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ‬،‫ ﻛﻦ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ‬10 ‫واﺣﺪ ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
39 Reversing warning unit 5 09
.‫ﻫﺎ ي دﻳﺪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬
، ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻫﻮا‬
‫ ﺳﻨﺴﻮر‬،‫ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ‬10 ‫ راﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬
41 High beam, right 5 10
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺮ ﻣﺪ ﻛﺎري ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬
ً‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ؛ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‬،
‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮر‬، ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه‬،‫ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬10 42 High beam, left ‫ ﭼﭗ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬ 5 11
‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬،‫ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬، ‫دﻧﺪه‬
.‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬/‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
‫ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬10 43 15RA feed to voltage converter ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪل وﻟﺘﺎژ‬15RA ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 5 12
‫ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬، ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه‬5 45 Working lights forward, ‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 15 13
attachments
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬5 48 Direction indicator ‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ 5 14
Working lights rear, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬، ‫ﭼﺮاﻏﻬﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ 5 49 working lights automatic 15 15
reversing light ‫ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﭼﺮاغ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ اي‬5 50 casing lights radiator
Working ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎري روي ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ 15 16
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬
Voltage supply I-ECU, ‫ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬، I-ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
5 51 holding voltage RE13 10 17
RE130 ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬
61 Power socket 24 V ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺗﻮان اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬ 10 18
‫ دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ ﭘﺸﺖ‬5 62 Travel lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ 15 19
‫دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ از ﭘﺸﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ Ignition switch voltage
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮق ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬
‫ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬5 63 supply 10 20
64 Rotating warning ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮدان ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه‬ 10 21
beacon, interior lighting
65 Voltage supply to RE12 RE12 ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 5 22
‫ رادﻳﻮ‬15 66 Engine Starter Motor ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ 5 23
Voltage supply E-ECU E-ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 24
‫ ﻓﻴﻮز اﺻﻠﻲ‬125 70 Voltage supply V-ECU V-ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 25
‫ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬125 71 Voltage supply V2-ECU V2-ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 26
‫ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬125 72 Cab fan ‫ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 20 27
‫ﻣﺒﺪل وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ AC compressor, water ‫ وﻗﻔﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬،AC ‫ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر‬
10 74 pump interval heating 10 28
‫ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن واﺗﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ‬
ECC, air conditioning ‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا‬،ECC 5 29
EGR valve EGR ‫ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ‬ 5 30
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L70F L70F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

214
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Power transmission, specifications L70F L70F ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Power transmission, specifications L70F L70F ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Transmission ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Make Volvo Volvo ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬

Power-shift transmission ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﭘﺎور ﺷﻴﻔﺖ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻨﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

Type
with torque converter ‫ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر( ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮرك ﻛﻨﻮرﺗﻮر‬
Designation HTE120 HTE120 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Torque converter Single stage ‫ﺗﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اي‬ ‫ﺗﻮرك ﻛﻨﻮرﺗﻮر‬
Torque multiplication 2.67:1 2.67:1 ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور‬
Number of gears 4/4 ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬/‫ﺗﻌﺪاد دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ‬
4/4
forward/reverse
Gear-shifting system Electro-hydraulic (APS) ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻧﺪه‬

Transmission oil cooler ‫ﻛﻮﻟﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Make Volvo volvo ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
Type Heat exchanger ‫ﻣﺒﺪل ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Cooling agent Liquid ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬

‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎر ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﮔﺎردان ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺷﻨﺎور ﺑﺎ‬
Fully floating drive shafts
Type with hub reductions of the ‫ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﺗﻮﭘﻲ از ﻧﻮع ﭼﺮخ دﻧﺪه ﺳﻴﺎره‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
planetary gear type ‫اي ﺧﻮرﺷﻴﺪي‬
Front axle, make Volvo volvo ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬،‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Designation AWB25 AWB25 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Rear axle, make Volvo volvo ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬،‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Designation AWB20 AWB20 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Differential lock On front axle ‫ﺑﺮ روي اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬
Type Dog clutch 100% 100% (‫ﻛﻼچ زﺑﺎﻧﻪ دار)ﮔﻴﺮه دار‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Operation Electro-hydraulic ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬

Wheel bolts
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ‬

600 ±50 N m ‫ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ‬600±50

Tightening torque ‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن‬
(443 ±37 lbf ft) (443±37 lbf ft)

215
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Brakes / steering system, specifications L70F L70F ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬

Brakes /steering system, specifications L70F L70F ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬

Brakes ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬، ‫ﻣﺪار دو ﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ ﻣﺪل‬،‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
Dual circuit, all-hydraulic
Service brakes, type with disc brakes and ‫و دﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه‬
chargeable accumulators .‫آﻟﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎرژ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
Number of discs front/rear 1/1 1/1 ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬/ ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ ي ﻋﻘﺐ‬
2 2
636/636 cm (99/99 in ) ‫ﺳﻄﺢ اﺻﻄﺤﻜﺎﻛﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﭼﺮخ‬
Brake friction area 1289/636 cm 2 (200/99
front/rear per wheel in2) ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬/‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Accumulator 3 pcs 3 pcs ‫اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر‬
Disc thickness, new 9.5 mm (0.374 in) 9.5 mm (0.374 in) ‫ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬، ‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ‬
Disc thickness, min. 7.2 mm (0.283 in) 7.2 mm (0.283 in) ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ‬
Wear indicator for brake ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺋﻴﺪﮔﻲ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ‬
Mechanical
disc, type

Parking brake ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬

Electro-hydraulically
controlled disc brake
Type
positioned on transmission
output shaft
Brake disc 1 pc
Brake friction area 102 cm 2 (16 in 2 )
Brake disc thickness, new 12.4-13.0 mm (0.488-
brake disc 0.551 in)
Accumulator See service brakes
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
‫روي ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬ ‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
2 2
102 cm (15.8 in ) ‫ﺳﻄﺢ اﺻﻄﻜﺎﻛﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
12.4-13.0 mm (0.488-0.551 ‫ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻮ‬،‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
in)
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر‬

Steering system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬

Type Load-sensing, hydrostatic ‫ ﻫﻴﺪرواﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬، ‫ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Number of steering wheel ‫ دور‬4.3 ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﻞ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
4.3 revolutions
revolutions, total
Steering arc +/- 40° +/- 40° (‫زاوﻳﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي )زاوﻳﻪ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ‬

216
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Recommended air pressure L70F 0F7L ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎي‬

Recommended air pressure L70F L70F ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎي‬

If other tyres are used for than those stated, the tyre ‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼع از‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎي ﻋﻨﻮان ﺷﺪه ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
manufacturer should be contacted regarding information
about the correct tyre pressure. .‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎدﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد‬

Timber Material handling Material handling

Tyres handling Loading/Carrying max. loading work
25 km/h (15.5 mph) 10 km/h (6.2 mph)
‫ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﻮار‬ ‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
25 km (15.5 mph) 10 km/h (6.2 mph)
Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front
‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Bridgestone 375 VMT ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
250 200 350 200 350 kPa
VMT psi
36 54 29 51 29 51 17.5R25
20.5R25*
Bridgestone VSW ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
250 375 200 350 200 350 kPa
VSW psi
36 54 29 51 29 51 17.5R25
20.5R25*
Bridgestone VJT ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
250 375 200 350 200 350 kPa
VJT psi
36 54 29 51 29 51 20.5R25
20.5R25*
Bridgestone VSDL ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
200 350 200 350 kPa
VSDL - - psi
29 51 29 51 20.5R25
20.5R25*
Goodyear GP-2B 275 350 275 350 kPa VSDL ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
- - psi
20.5/16 HRL* 40 51 40 51 20.5R25
Goodyear GP-2B 250 375 225 350 225 350 kPa GP-2B‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25* 36 54 33 51 33 51 psi 20.5R25*
Goodyear GP-4B 250 375 225 350 225 350 kPa GP-4B‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25* 36 54 33 51 33 51 psi 20.5R25*
Goodyear RL2+ 250 375 225 350 225 350 kPa RL2+‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25* 36 54 33 51 33 51 psi 20.5R25*
Good Year TL-
250 375 225 350 225 350 kPa TL-3A+ ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
3A+ psi
20.5R25*
36 54 33 51 33 51 20.5R25*
Good Year RL-
- - 225 350 225 350 kPa RL-5K ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
5K psi
20.5R25*
33 51 33 51 20.5R25*
Goodyear GP-3D 250 350 200 325 200 325 kPa GP-3D ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
600/65R25 36 51 29 47 29 47 psi 20.5R25*
Michelin ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬
250 350 200 300 200 300 kPa
SNOPLUS psi SNOPLUS
36 51 29 44 29 44 20.5R25*
20.5R25*
Michelin XHA 250 350 200 300 200 300 kPa XHA‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬
20.5R25* 36 51 29 44 29 44 psi 20.5R25*
Michelin X-mine X-mine ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬
200 300 200 300 kPa
D2 - - psi D2
29 44 29 44 20.5R25*
20.5R25*
Michelin XLD 250 325 200 300 200 300 ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬
kPa
600/65R25* 36 47 29 44 29 44 psi XLD
600/65R25*
RB31 ‫ﻳﻮﻛﻮﻫﺎﻣﺎ‬
Yokohama RB31 250 375 225 350 225 350 kPa
20.5R25* 36 54 33 51 33 51 psi 20.5R25*

217
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Hydraulic system, specifications L70F L70F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Hydraulic system, specifications L70F L70F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Load-sensing, (closed (‫ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر )ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

Type
centre)
Hydraulic oil pump, Does not apply to this .‫روي اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ (1 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﭘﻤﭗ‬
(pump 1) machine type
Working hydraulics, ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎر‬ (2 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﭘﻤﭗ‬
Hydraulic oil pump,
steering system, brake
(pump 2) ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮو‬، ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬،‫ﮔﻴﺮي‬
system and servo system
Type Variable axial piston pump ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮن ﻣﺤﻮري ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Hydraulic oil pump, Cooling fan pump, brake ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬، ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ (3 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﭘﻤﭗ‬
(pump 3) system
Type Variable axial piston pump ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮن ﻣﺤﻮري ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

218
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Dimensional drawing L60F L60F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

Dimensional drawing L60F L60F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

Specifications and dimensions comply in applicable parts
with ISO 7131 1984, SAE J732 JUN 92, ISO 7546 1983,
SAE J742 FEB 85, ISO 5998 1986, SAE J818 MAY 87,
ISO 8313.
The data apply to a machine with 20.5 R25 L2 tyres.
ISO 7131 1984, SAE J732 JUN ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎت و اﺑﻌﺎد ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬
92,ISO 7546 1983,SAE J742 FEB 85, ISO 5998 1986 ,
.‫ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ دارﻧﺪ‬SAE J818 MAY 87, ISO 8313
.‫ داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬20.5 R25 L2 ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي‬

Long boom (lifting arms) Standard boom (lifting arms Standard boom (lifting arms)
(‫ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬ (‫ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬ (‫ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬
6527 mm (21' 5.0'') B 46° P * A
4059 mm (13' 3.8'') J 43° R 6046 mm (19' 10.0'') B
4342 mm (14' 2.9'') K 46° R1 3000 mm (9' 10.1'') C
69° S 460 mm (1' 6.1'') D
102 mm (0' 4.0'') T * E
385 mm (1' 3.2'') U 3280 mm (10' 9.1'') F
1934 mm (6' 4.1'') X 2135 mm (7' 0.1'') G
2470 mm (8' 1.2'') Y * H
3200 mm (10' 6.0'') Z 3585 mm (11' 9.1'') J
5350 mm (17' 6.6'') a2 3870 mm (12' 8.4'') K
2890 mm (9' 5.8'') a3 * L
±40° a4 * M
* N
56° O

)See table on the next page ‫( ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪول ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
)Carrying position SAE
‫ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اﺟﺮا ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬SAE ‫( وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
) P-max. 49°
P-max.49° (
The difference between standard boom and long boom is ‫ﺗﻔﺎوت ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﻢ اﻧﺪازه ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
shown here with the same size bucket.
. ‫اﺳﺖ‬
Note that the version with long boom is intended to be used
with a material with a lower density. ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ دارد ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮم ﺣﺠﻤﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮي‬
.‫دارﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
219
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Machine capacity L60F L60F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

Machine capacity L60F L60F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

The machine is constructed for a maximum machine ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ( ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه‬
weight (incl. equipment and attachments) of 16500 kg .‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬14000 kg (30865 Ib) ‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
(36376 lb).

Tyres 20.5 Long boom Light material Standard buckets 20.5 ‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
R25 L2 ‫ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮاد ﺳﺒﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد‬ R25 L2
Edge savers Edge savers Edge savers Teeth
‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬ ‫دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ‬
Capacity, ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ اﻧﺒﺎﺷﺖ‬
6.4 m3 3.4 m3 (4.4 2.3 m3 2.1 m3 2.0 m3
heaped
ISO/SAE (8.4 yd3) yd3) (3.0 yd3) (2.7 yd3) (2.6 yd3) ISO/SAE‫ﻃﺒﻖ‬
Capacity filled 7.0 m3 3.7 m3 (4.8 2.5 m3 2.3 m3 2.2 m3 ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه‬
to 110 % (9.2 yd3) yd3) (3.3 yd3) (3.0 yd3) (2.9 yd3) 110%
9770 kg ‫ﺣﺪ اﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر در‬
Static tipping -1772 kg 8350 kg 8780 kg 9250 kg 9420 kg
load
(21539
(-3907 lb) (18409 lb) (19357 lb) (20393 lb) (20768 lb) ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
lb)
-1620 kg 7330 kg 7800 kg 8730 kg 8250 kg 8410 kg 35°‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬
Steered 35°
(-3571 lb) (16160 lb) (19158 lb) (19246 lb) (18188 lb) (18541 lb)
-1575 kg 7030 kg 7500 kg 8420 kg 7950 kg 8110 kg ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬
Fully steered
(-3472 lb) (15498 lb) (16535 lb) (18563 lb) (17527 lb) (17879 lb) ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
95.4 kN
Break-out force -2 kN 53.9 kN 71.8 kN 90.3 kN 94.7 kN ‫ﻧﻴﺮوي ﺑﻮﺷﻲ‬
(21447
(-450 lbf) (12117 lbf) (16141 lbf) (20300 lbf) (21289 lbf)
lbf)
7750 mm
A + 465 mm 8300 mm 7390 mm 7450 mm 7570 mm
(25 ft 5.1 A
(+1' 4.3") (27' 2.8'') (24' 2.9'') (24' 5.3'') (24' 10.0'')
in)
E + 25 mm 1970 mm 1470 mm 1130 mm 1180 mm 1300 mm
E
(+0' 1.0") (6' 5.6'') (4' 9.9'') (3' 8.5'') (3' 10.5'') (4' 3.2'')
H* + 486 mm 2150 mm 2520 mm 2790 mm 2750 mm 2680 mm
H
(+1' 7.1") (7' 0.6'') (8' 3.2'') (9' 1.8'') (9' 0.3'') (8' 9.5'')
L + 474 mm 5780 mm 5450 mm 5220 mm 5220 mm 5220 mm
L
(+1' 6.7") (18' 11.6'') (17' 10.6'') (17' 1.5'') (17' 1.5'') (17' 1.5'')
M* - 21 mm 1730 mm 1350 mm 1090 mm 1140 mm 1250 mm
M
(0' 0.8'') (5' 8.1'') (4' 5.1'') (2' 5.9'') (2' 5.9'') (4' 5.2'')
N* + 397 mm 1730 mm 1680 mm 1620 mm 1650 mm 1720 mm
N
(+1' 3.6") (5' 8.1'') (2' 5.9'') (5' 3.8'') (5' 5.0'') (5' 7.7'')
V 2750 mm 2650 mm 2550 mm 2550 mm 2550 mm
V
(9' 0.3'') (8' 8.3'') (2' 5.9'') (2' 5.9'') (2' 5.9'')
a1 12410 mm 11980 mm 11670 mm 11690 mm 11760 mm
a1
(40' 8.6'') (2' 5.9'') (38' 3.4'') (2' 5.9'') (38' 7.0'')
Machine
+ 246 kg 14160 kg 13620 kg 13160 kg 13370 kg 13300 kg ‫وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
weight
(+542 lb) (31217 lb) (30027 lb) (29013 lb) (29476 lb) (29321 lb)

) Measurement to tip of bucket teeth or edge savers. Dumping ‫ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ‬. ‫(اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮك دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
height to edge of bucket (acc. to SAE) + approx. 150 mm (6 in).
Measured at a dumping angle of 45°. .(‫ اﻳﻨﭻ‬6) ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‬150 ً‫ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬+ (SAE ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻛﺖ )ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
45° ‫اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي در زاوﻳﻪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬

220
 Specifications
Pallet fork L70F
Pallet fork L70F
Pallet fork (with attachment bracket)
Attachment
Fork tine, length
Width, fork frame
Work load
Machine weight
Tyres
A 830 mm (2' 8.7'')
B 1600 mm (5' 3.0'')
For further information, see the Attachment Catalogue.
221
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
L70F ‫ﻓﻮرك ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬
L70F ‫ﻓﻮرك ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬
(‫ﻓﻮرك ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ )ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎت‬
Bracket-mounted ‫ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
1450 mm (4' 9.1'') 1450 mm (4 9.1) ‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ و ﻃﻮل دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻓﻮرك‬
1500 mm (4' 11.1'') 1500 mm (4 11.1) ‫ﻋﺮض و ﻗﺎب ﻓﻮرك‬
3650 kg (8047 lb), at a ‫ در ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬، 3650 kg (8047Ib) ‫وزن ﺑﺎر‬
distance to centre of
‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮي ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺛﻘﻞ‬600
gravity of 600 mm (23.6
in) 600 mm (23.6 in)
12950 kg (28550 lb) Long (28550Ib) 12950 kg ‫وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
‫ ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬246 kg + (542 lb)
boom + 246 kg (542 lb)
20.5 R25 L2 20.5 R25 L2 ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬
C -46 mm (-0' 1.8'') E 3730 mm (12' 2.9'')
D 1850 mm (6' 0.8'') F 760 mm (2' 5.9'')
.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺗﻮﻟﻮگ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Material handling arm L70F L70F ‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬

Material handling arm L70F L70F ‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬

Material handling arm (with attachment (‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر )ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎت‬
bracket)
Attachment Bracket-mounted ‫ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Weight, material handling ‫ ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬،‫وزن‬
380 kg (838 lb) 380 kg (838 lb)
arm
Order No. 92007 92007 ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
Machine weight 12860 kg (28351 lb) 12860 kg (28351 lb) ‫وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
Tyres 20.5 R25 L2 20.5 R25 L2 ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬

1520 mm (4' 11.8'') P 1270 mm (4' 2.0'') J 2720 mm (8' 11.1'') D

5290 mm (17' 4.3'') Q 1750 mm (5' 8.9") K 2110 mm (6' 11.1") E
6170 mm (20' 2.9'') R 2270 mm (7' 5.4'') L 1550 mm (5' 1.0'') F
7120 mm (23' 4.3 S 2180 mm (7' 1.8'') M 3320 mm (10' 10.7'') G
3100 mm (10' 2.0'') N 4360 mm (14' 3.7'') H
4100 mm (13' 5.4'') O 5490 mm (18' 0.1'') I

Loading table for material handling arm ‫ﺟﺪول وزﻧﻲ ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻮاد‬

A Retracted 2150 kg (4740 lb) ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ A

B Halfway extended 1710 kg (3770 lb) ‫ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎز‬ B
C Fully extended 1400 kg (3086 lb) (‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز )ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﻮل‬ C

222
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Capacities L90F L90F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬

Capacities L90F L90F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬

Capacities When changing Total ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
Engine oil, incl. 20 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬20 ‫روﻏﻦ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
filter (5.3 US gal) (5.3 US gal)
Transmission incl. 20 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬20 ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
filter (5.3 US gal) (5.3 US gal)
Front axle incl. 24 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬24 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﺗﻮﭘﻲ‬
hub reduction gear (6.3 US gal) (6.3 US gal)
Rear axle incl. hub 24 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬24 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪه ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه‬
reduction gear (6.3 US gal) (6.3 US gal) ‫ﺗﻮﭘﻲ‬

135 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬135 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Hydraulic system
(35.6 US gal) (35.6 US gal )

90 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬90 ‫ﻣﺨﺰن روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Hydraulic oil tank
(23.8 US gal) (23.8 US gal)

Fuel tank, 219 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬219 ‫ ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬،‫ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﺗﺎﻧﻚ‬

available fuel (57.8 US gal) (57.8 US gal)

Fuel tank 224 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬224 (‫ﺗﺎﻧﻚ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ )ﻣﻘﺪار ﻣﻮﺟﻮد‬

(available) (59.1 US gal) (59.1 US gal )

30 litres 38 litres ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬38 ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬30 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬

Cooling system
(7.9 US gal) (10.0 US gal) (10.0 US gal ) (7.9 US gal )
Oil-bath air ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬5.5 ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺶ ﻫﻮا‬
5.5 litres
cleaner (optional
(1.5 US gal) (1.5 US gal ) (‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
equipment)
‫ﺑﺮاي دﻳﺪن اﻧﺠﺎم ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Carry out checks according to the Service
Programme for the machine, see page135. .‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬135 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬

Oil and fluid changes Hours ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺳﺎﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ و ﺳﻴﺎل ﻫﺎي دﻳﮕﺮ‬
Engine 500* ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Coolant 6000 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Front and rear axles 1000 ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎي ﺟﻠﻮ وﻋﻘﺐ‬
Transmission, at the same time clean ‫ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎن ﺻﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺶ را ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬، ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
2000
suction strainer
Hydraulic system (w ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ و‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎر‬
orking hydraulics, brake system and 4000/2000**
(‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬
steering system)
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮي در زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ‬، ‫( ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
*) Regarding conditions required if the interval between
engine oil changes is to apply, see page139. ‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬139 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد‬
**) Change coolant every 6000 hours or at least every ‫ ﺳﺎل ﻳﻜﺒﺎر‬4 ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﻳﺎ ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﻫﺮ‬6000 ‫( ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري را ﻫﺮ‬
fourth year. .‫ﻋﻮض ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
***) If the system is filled with mineral hydraulic oil or
Volvo Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil 46, the interval is ‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬46 ‫( اﮔﺮ در ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻳﺎ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
4000 hours. ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر‬4000 ‫ روﻏﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ‬،‫ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ رﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
If another biologically degradable hydraulic oil is used,
‫ روﻏﻦ‬،‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮد )در ﻣﻮرد ﺳﺎﻳﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻫﺎي ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه در ﻣﺤﻴﻂ زﻳﺴﺖ‬
the interval is 2000 hours.
(.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮔﺮدد‬2000 ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻫﺮ‬

223
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Capacities L90F L90F ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻫﺎي‬

Filter replacements Hours ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺳﺎﻋﺎت‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬

Engine, oil filters 500* ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine, air filter (primary filter) 1000 (‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Engine, air filter (secondary filter) 2000 (‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Fuel filters 500** ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎي ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
Fuel system, breather filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬

Oil-bath air cleaner, filter inserts cleaning ‫ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن اﻟﻤﺎن ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬،‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻨﻲ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺶ ﻫﻮا‬
2000
(optional equipment) (‫)ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬
Transmission, oil filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ‬،‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Transmission, breather filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬،‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Drive axles, breather filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬، ‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮك‬
Cab, ventilation filter (prefilter) 1000 (‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ )ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
Cab, ventilation filter (main filter) 2000*** ( ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ )ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ‬
Hydraulic system, return oil filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﺧﻂ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ‬، ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
Hydraulic system, breather filter 2000 ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﻨﻔﺲ‬، ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

 ) Regarding conditions required if the interval between
engine oil changes is to apply, see page139.
) Or when replacing the engine oil filter, which may
mean a shorter interval.
) In case of environment containing asbestos the
filter should be replaced every 1000 hours.
‫ اﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮي در زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ روﻏﻦ‬، ‫( ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز‬
‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬139 ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬، ‫ﺻﻮرت ﮔﻴﺮد‬
.‫( ﻳﺎ زﻣﺎن ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ روﻏﻦ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﻮﺗﺎه ﺗﺮي اﺳﺖ‬
‫( در ﻣﻮرد ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﺴﻮز دارﻧﺪن از ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺮ‬
.‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻳﻜﺒﺎر ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﮔﺮدد‬1000

224
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Engine, specifications L90F L90F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Engine, specifications L90F L90F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬

Volvo D6E Volvo D6E ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت‬

Designation
LCE3 LCE3
128 kW (174 128 kW (174 hp) ISO ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
Max. output according to ISO 9249,
hp) at 1700 rpm at 1700 rpm
SAE J1349 9249,SAE J1349
(28.3 r/s) (28.3 r/s)
732 N m (540 lbf 732 N m (540 lbf ISO 9249,SAE ‫ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
Max. torque according to ISO 9249,
ft) at 23.3 r/s ft) at 23.3 r/s (1400
SAE J1349 (1400 rpm) rpm) J1349
Number of cylinders 6 6 ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪرﻫﺎ‬
Cylinder bore 98 mm (3.858 in) 98 mm (3.858 in) ‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر‬
Stroke 126 mm (4.960 in) 126 mm (4.960 in) ‫ﻛﻮرس‬
3
Cylinder capacity 5.7 litres (349 in 3 ) (349 in ) ‫ ﻟﻴﺘﺮ‬5.7 ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺳﻴﻠﻨﺪر‬
Compression ratio 18.4:1 18.4:1 ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﺮاﻛﻢ‬
Method with ‫روش ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن زاوﻳﻪ‬
Valve clearance angular tightening ‫ﻟﻘﻲ ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ ﻫﺎ‬
is required ‫اي ﻣﻮرد ﻧﻴﺎز اﺳﺖ‬
Idling speed, low 700 +/- 50 rpm 700+/-50 rpm ‫ ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫دور در ﺟﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Idling speed, high 2360 +/- 25 rpm 2370+/-25 rpm ‫ ﻛﻨﺪ‬،‫دور در ﺟﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬
Lubrication system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬
450-500 kPa (4.5-
Oil pressure, (warm engine, high 450-500 kPa (4.5- ‫ دور در ﺟﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر‬،‫ﻓﺸﺎر روﻏﻦ )ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪه‬
5.0 bar) (65-73
idling speed) 5.0 bar)(65-73 psi) (‫ﺗﻨﺪ‬
psi)
Fuel system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ رﺳﺎن‬
Order of injection 1-5-3-6-2-4 1-5-3-6-2-4 ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺰرﻳﻖ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ‬
150-600 kPa (1.5-
150-600 kPa (1.5- ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
Feed pressure 6.0 bar) (22-87
6.0 bar)(22-87 psi)
psi)
Injectors ‫اﻧﮋﻛﺘﻮرﻫﺎ‬
Variable, ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬،‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
Opening pressure electronically ‫ﻓﺸﺎر ورودي اﻧﮋﻛﺘﻮرﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
controlled
Air cleaner ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻫﻮا‬

Air cleaning in 3 3 ‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮدن ﻫﻮا در‬

Type ‫ﻧﻮع‬
steps ‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
Cyclone cleaner - -‫ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻨﺪه ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﻮﻧﻲ‬
primary filter -
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ – ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬
secondary filter
Cooling system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Type Closed system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Thermostat begins to open at 83 °C (181 °F) 83 °C(181 °F) ‫دﻣﺎي ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن اوﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎت‬
Thermostat fully open at 95 °C (203 °F) 95 °C(203 °F) ‫دﻣﺎي ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﺘﺎت‬
Cooling fan motor ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬
Type Axial piston pump ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﺤﻮري‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Precleaner - -‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اوﻟﻴﻪ – ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ اﺻﻠﻲ‬
main filter -
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬
secondary filter
Lubrication system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ روﻏﻦ ﻛﺎري‬

225
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L90F L90F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L90F L90F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

System voltage 24 V ‫ وﻟﺖ‬24 ‫وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬

Batteries 2 (connected in series) (‫ )ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮر ﺳﺮي ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬2 ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي ﻫﺎ‬
Battery voltage 12 V ‫ وﻟﺖ‬12 ‫وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
Battery capacity 2 x 110 Ah ‫ آﻣﭙﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬2¯110 ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
Alternator 2280 W ‫ وات‬2280 ‫آﻟﺘﺮﻧﺎﺗﻮر‬
Starter motor output 5.5 kW (7.5 hp) (7.5 hp)‫ ﻛﻴﻠﻮ وات‬5.5 ‫ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬

Battery electrolyte density kg/dm 3 kg / dm3 ‫ﻏﻠﻈﺖ اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬

Fully charged battery 1.275-1.285 1.275-1.285 ‫در زﻣﺎن ﺷﺎرژ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬
The battery should be 1.250 ‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮي در اﻳﻦ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺷﺎرژ ﺷﻮد‬
1.250
recharged at a density of

Bulbs Socket ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ‬ Watt ‫وات‬ ‫ﻻﻣﭙﻬﺎ‬

Travel lights, low beams PX 26D (H7) 70 ‫ ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
Travel lights, high beams PK 22s (H3) 70 ‫ ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
Parking lights, front BA 9s 4 ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎرك‬
Parking lights, rear BA 15s 10 ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎرك‬
Tail lights BA 15s 10 ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Stop lights BA 15s 21 ‫ اﻳﺴﺖ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
Direction indicators, ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
BA 15s 21
front
Direction indicators, rear BA 15s 21 ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
Side lights, (amber side- (‫ )ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي زرد ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺎر‬
– –
marking lights)
Cab light BA 15s 10 ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
Working lights, front (‫ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژن ﺟﻠﻮ )اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬
PK 22s (H3) 70
halogen (optional)
Working lights, rear (‫ ﻫﺎﻟﻮژن ﻋﻘﺐ )اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬
PK 22s (H3) 70
halogen (optional)
Guide light in switches W 2 x 4.6 d 1.2 ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي راﻫﻨﻤﺎي روي ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬

226
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L90F L90F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

Relays L90F L90F ‫رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎي‬

FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ RE FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ RE

Voltage supply E- E-ECU,V- ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
ECU, V-ECU, V2- 13 Bucket positioner ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ )ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ دﻫﻨﺪه( ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬ 01
ECU V2-ECU
Voltage supply ECC ECC‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 14 Reversing alarm ‫ﺑﻮق ﻫﺸﺪار ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ 02
Windscreen wiper ‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 15 Working lights, front ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬ 03
15A feed 15A ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 16 Working lights, rear ‫ ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬ 04
15A feed 15A ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 17 Boom kick-out ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻦ ﺑﻮم‬ 05
15EA feed 15EA ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 18 Starter relay ‫رﻟﻪ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ 06
Working lights cab ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺟﻠﻮي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 07
front
Boom Suspension BBS ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬ 08
System - BSS
Water pump interval ‫ زﻣﺎن ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن آب ﭘﻤﭗ‬8701 ‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Rear window wiper 09
heating
Adjustable flow for ‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎن ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﻧﺪه ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ‬
3rd hydraulic 9101 Stop lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ 10
‫ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬
function
‫ رﻟﻪ ﻓﻼﺷﺮ‬RF1 Working lights radiator ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎري ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬
Flasher relay 11
casing
30 feed controlled by ‫ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬I-ECU ‫ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬30 ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
I-ECU 12
‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬RE13 ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬
Holding voltage RE 13

227
‫‪Specifications‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

‫‪Electrical system, specifications L90F‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ‪L90F‬‬

‫رﻟﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺎرج از ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻗﺮار دارﻧﺪ‬

‫‪FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ ‫‪RE‬‬ ‫‪FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ ‫‪RE‬‬

‫‪Secondary steering‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ ‫‪6401‬‬ ‫‪Preheating‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬ ‫‪2501‬‬

‫‪228‬‬
 Specifications
Electrical system, specifications L90F
Fuses L60F
FUNCTION
Preheating relay,
RE2501
boom Suspension
System, attachment
lock, detent function
3rd hydraulic function
Working hydraulics
Windscreen wiper,
windscreen washer,
headlight flasher
Rear window wiper,
rear window washer,
level monitor washer
fluid
Battery charging
Hazard flashers
Electrically heated
fuel filter, working
lights, double working
lights cab, working
lights automatic
reversing light
Horn, kick-down, rear
vision camera, electrically
heated rear view mirrors,
electrically adjustable rear
view mirrors
Seat with air
suspension, heated
seat, position sensor
operator seat
Mode selector, differential
lock, fully automatic
downshifting, gear selector
control gear lever carrier,
lever steering, Booms
Suspension System
activation / function selection
Automatic greasing
Gear selector control,
steering column
Parking brake
Secondary Steering
Voltage supply VCADS ‫ ﺳﻮﻛﺖ‬VCADS ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
Pro service socket
Ignition switch
dependent voltage
supply, I-ECU, V-
ECU, V2-ECU, ECC
Electrically heated fuel ‫ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬15
filter
Rear vision camera
Rear vision camera,
activated when
reversing
– – –
– – –
Radio
Main fuse
Secondary steering
pump
Preheating
Voltage converter
229
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
L90F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬
L60F‫ﻓﻴﻮزﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬A ‫ﻓﻴﻮز‬ FUNCTION ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬ A ‫ﻓﻴﻮز‬
RE250 ‫ رﻟﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬5 31 Stop lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ 5 01
، ‫ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺳﻮﻣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬
10 32 - - 02
‫ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎي ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ 10 33 Working lights cab, front ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎر ﺟﻠﻮﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 15 03
‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر‬،‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ RE14 ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ ﻓﻼﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ‬،‫ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 10 34 Voltage supply to RE14 5 04
،‫ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺷﻮر ﻋﻘﺐ‬،‫ﺑﺮف ﭘﺎﻛﻦ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ Instrument lighting, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ‬، ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎﻧﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻛﺎري‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺷﻮﻳﻨﺪه‬ parking light front left, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺎر‬،‫ﭘﺎرك ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
10 35 side light front left, tail 5 05
light right .‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻋﻘﺐ راﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺷﺎرژ ﺑﺎﺗﺮي‬ Parking light front right, ،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﭘﺎرﻛﻴﻨﮓ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬
5 36 side light front right, tail ‫ ﭼﺮاغ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﻨﺎر ﺟﻠﻮ ﺳﻤﺖ راﺳﺖ‬ 5 06
light left, number plate
lighting ‫ ﻧﻮر ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎره ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﻋﻘﺐ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺷﺮ ﻫﺸﺪار‬ 5 37 Low beam, left ‫ ﭼﭗ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 5 07
‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﮔﺮم ﻣﻲ‬
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي دوﺗﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎر‬،‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري‬،‫ﺷﻮد‬
5 38 Low beam, right ‫ راﺳﺖ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ‬ 5 08
‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻛﻪ ﺑﺼﻮرت )ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬،‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
.‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ( ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﮔﺮم‬،‫ دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ ﭘﺸﺖ‬،‫ دﻧﺪه ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬،‫ﺑﻮق‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ‬،‫ ﻛﻦ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ آﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ‬10 ‫واﺣﺪ ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
39 Reversing warning unit 5 09
.‫ﻫﺎ ي دﻳﺪ ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬
، ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ داراي ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻫﻮا‬
‫ ﺳﻨﺴﻮر‬،‫ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ‬10 ‫ راﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬
41 High beam, right 5 10
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
‫اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﮔﺮ ﻣﺪ ﻛﺎري ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬
ً‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻧﺪه ﺑﻪ دﻧﺪه ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ؛ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‬،
‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻴﻮر‬، ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه‬،‫ ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬10 42 High beam, left ‫ ﭼﭗ‬، ‫ﻧﻮر ﺑﺎﻻ‬ 5 11
‫ ﻓﻌﺎل ﺷﺪن ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬،‫ ﻟﻴﻮر ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬، ‫دﻧﺪه‬
.‫ اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬/‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻮم‬
‫ ﮔﺮﻳﺲ ﻛﺎري ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر‬10 43 15RA feed to voltage converter ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪل وﻟﺘﺎژ‬15RA ‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬ 5 12
‫ ﺳﺘﻮن ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬، ‫ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻧﺘﺨﺎب دﻧﺪه‬5 45 Working lights forward, ‫ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬،‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻫﺎي ﻛﺎري ﺟﻠﻮ‬ 15 13
attachments
‫ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬5 48 Direction indicator ‫راﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬ 5 14
Working lights rear, ‫ ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎر‬، ‫ﭼﺮاﻏﻬﺎي ﻛﺎري ﻋﻘﺐ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬ 5 49 working lights automatic 15 15
reversing light ‫ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر ﭼﺮاغ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس‬
‫ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺣﺮﻓﻪ اي‬5 50 casing lights radiator
Working ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﻛﺎري روي ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ رادﻳﺎﺗﻮر‬ 15 16
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ واﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬
Voltage supply I-ECU, ‫ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬، I-ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬
5 51 holding voltage RE13 10 17
RE130 ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪارﻧﺪه‬
61 Power socket 24 V ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺗﻮان اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬ 10 18
‫ دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ ﭘﺸﺖ‬5 62 Travel lights ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ 15 19
‫دورﺑﻴﻦ دﻳﺪ از ﭘﺸﺖ ﻛﻪ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ Ignition switch voltage
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺮق ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ اﺳﺘﺎرت‬
‫ ﻣﻌﻜﻮس ﻓﻌﺎل ﻣﻴﺸﻮد‬5 63 supply 10 20
64 Rotating warning ‫ﭼﺮاغ ﺑﺮق ﮔﺮدان ﻫﺸﺪار دﻫﻨﺪه‬ 10 21
beacon, interior lighting
65 Voltage supply to RE12 RE12 ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 5 22
‫ رادﻳﻮ‬15 66 Engine Starter Motor ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮر اﺳﺘﺎرت‬ 5 23
Voltage supply E-ECU E-ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 24
‫ ﻓﻴﻮز اﺻﻠﻲ‬125 70 Voltage supply V-ECU V-ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 25
‫ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻳﻪ‬125 71 Voltage supply V2-ECU V2-ECU ‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ 15 26
‫ ﭘﻴﺶ ﮔﺮم ﻛﻦ‬125 72 Cab fan ‫ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬ 20 27
‫ﻣﺒﺪل وﻟﺘﺎژ‬ AC compressor, water ‫ وﻗﻔﻪ ﻫﺎي زﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬،AC ‫ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮر‬
10 74 pump interval heating 10 28
‫ﮔﺮم ﺷﺪن واﺗﺮ ﭘﻤﭗ‬
ECC, air conditioning ‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ ﻫﻮا‬،ECC 5 29
EGR valve EGR ‫ﺳﻮﭘﺎپ‬ 5 30
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Electrical system, specifications L90F L90F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ‬

230
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Power transmission, specifications L90F L90F‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻗﺪرت‬

Power transmission, specifications L90F L90F‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻗﺪرت‬

Transmission ‫ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
Make Volvo Volvo ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬

Power-shift transmission ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﭘﺎور ﺷﻴﻔﺖ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻫﻨﺪه‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

Type
with torque converter ‫ﺧﻮدﻛﺎر( ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮرك ﻛﻨﻮرﺗﻮر‬
Designation HTE125 HTE125 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Torque converter Single stage ‫ﺗﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اي‬ ‫ﺗﻮرك ﻛﻨﻮرﺗﻮر‬
Torque multiplication 2.67:1 2.67:1 ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﮔﺸﺘﺎور‬
Number of gears 4/4 ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬/‫ﺗﻌﺪاد دﻧﺪه ﻫﺎي ﻋﻘﺐ‬
4/4
forward/reverse
Gear-shifting system Electro-hydraulic (APS) ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ دﻧﺪه‬

Transmission oil cooler ‫ﻛﻮﻟﺮ روﻏﻦ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬

Make Volvo volvo ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬
Type Heat exchanger ‫ﻣﺒﺪل ﺣﺮارﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Cooling agent Liquid ‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺎل ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬

‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭼﻬﺎر ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﮔﺎردان ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺷﻨﺎور ﺑﺎ‬
Fully floating drive shafts
Type with hub reductions of the ‫ﻛﺎﻫﻨﺪه ﺗﻮﭘﻲ از ﻧﻮع ﭼﺮخ دﻧﺪه ﺳﻴﺎره‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
planetary gear type ‫اي ﺧﻮرﺷﻴﺪي‬
Front axle, make Volvo volvo ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬،‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Designation AWB25 AWB25 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Rear axle, make Volvo volvo ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬،‫اﻛﺴﻞ ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Designation AWB20 AWB20 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
Differential lock On front axle ‫ﺑﺮ روي اﻛﺴﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻛﻦ دﻳﻔﺮاﻧﺴﻴﻞ‬
Type Dog clutch 100% 100% ‫ﻛﻼچ زﺑﺎﻧﻪ دار‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Operation Electro-hydraulic ‫اﻟﻜﺘﺮو ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮد‬

Wheel bolts
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎي ﭼﺮخ‬

600 ±50 N m ‫ﻧﻴﻮﺗﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ‬600±50

Tightening torque ‫ﮔﺸﺘﺎور ﺳﻔﺖ ﻛﺮدن‬
(443 ±37 lbf ft) (443±37 lbf ft)

231
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Brakes / steering system, specifications L90F L90F ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬

Brakes /steering system, specifications L90F L90F ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬/‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬

Brakes
Dual circuit, all-hydraulic
Service brakes, type with disc brakes and
chargeable accumulators
Number of discs front/rear 1/1
‫ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬، ‫ﻣﺪار دو ﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫و دﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه‬
.‫آﻟﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر ﻫﺎي ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎرژ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
1/1
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ‬
‫ ﻣﺪل‬،‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎي ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬/ ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد دﻳﺴﻚ ﻫﺎ ي ﻋﻘﺐ‬

Brake friction area 1289/636 cm 2 1289/636 cm 2 ‫ﺳﻄﺢ اﺻﻄﺤﻜﺎﻛﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺮاي ﻫﺮ ﭼﺮخ‬
front/rear per wheel (200/99 in2) (200/99 in2) ‫ ﺟﻠﻮ‬/‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬
Accumulator 3 pcs 3 pcs ‫اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر‬
Disc thickness, new 9.5 mm (0.374 in) 9.5 mm (0.374 in) ‫ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬، ‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ‬
Disc thickness, min. 7.2 mm (0.283 in) 7.2 mm (0.283 in) ‫ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ‬
Wear indicator for brake ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺋﻴﺪﮔﻲ دﻳﺴﻜﻬﺎ‬
Mechanical
disc, type

Parking brake ‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﺳﺘﻲ‬

Electro-hydraulically
controlled disc brake
Type
positioned on transmission
output shaft
Brake disc 1 pc
Brake friction area 102 cm 2 (16 in 2 )
Brake disc thickness, new 12.4-13.0 mm (0.488-
brake disc 0.551 in)
Accumulator See service brakes
‫ﺗﺮﻣﺰ دﻳﺴﻜﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻟﻜﺘﺮوﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
‫روي ﺷﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺮوﺟﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺑﻜﺲ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ‬ ‫دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
2 2
102 cm (15.8 in ) ‫ﺳﻄﺢ اﺻﻄﻜﺎﻛﻲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
12.4-13.0 mm (0.488-0.551 ‫ دﻳﺴﻚ ﻧﻮ‬،‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ دﻳﺴﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬
in)
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ ﺗﺮﻣﺰﻫﺎ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫اﻛﻮﻣﻮﻻﺗﻮر‬

Steering system ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬

Type Load-sensing, hydrostatic ‫ ﻫﻴﺪرواﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬، ‫ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Number of steering wheel ‫ دور‬4.3 ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد ﻛﻞ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻏﺮﺑﺎﻟﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬
4.3 revolutions
revolutions, total
Steering arc +/- 40° +/- 40° (‫زاوﻳﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي )زاوﻳﻪ ﻛﻤﺮ ﺷﻜﻦ‬

232
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Recommended air pressure L90F L90F ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎي‬

Recommended air pressure L90F L90F ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺎد ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎي‬

If other tyres are used for than those stated, the tyre ‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼع از‬،‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎي ﻋﻨﻮان ﺷﺪه ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ اﺳﺖ‬
manufacturer should be contacted regarding information
about the correct tyre pressure. .‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎدﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه ﺗﻤﺎس ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺷﻮد‬

Timber Material handling Material handling

Tyres handling Loading/Carrying max. 25 loading work
km/h (15.5 mph) 10 km/h (6.2 mph)
‫ﺣﻤﻞ اﻟﻮار‬ ‫ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
25 km (15.5 mph) 10 km/h (6.2 mph)
Rear Front Rear Front Rear Front
‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﺐ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮ‬
Bridgestone VSW 350 450 250 400 250 400 kPa VST ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
20.5R25 51 65 36 58 36 58 psi 17.5R25
Bridgestone VMT 350 450 250 400 250 400 kPa MTSW ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
20.5R25 51 65 36 58 36 58 psi 17.5R25
Bridgestone VJT 350 450 250 400 250 400 kPa VJT ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
20.5R25 51 65 36 58 36 58 psi 20.5R25
Bridgestone VSDL 250 400 250 400 kPa VSDL ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
20.5R25 - - 36 58 36 58 psi 20.5R25
Bridgestone VTS 300 450 250 350 250 350 kPa VTS ‫ﺑﺮﻳﺠﺴﺘﻮن‬
650/65R25 44 65 36 51 36 51 psi 650/65R25
Goodyear RL2+ 350 450 250 400 250 400 kPa RL2+‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25 51 65 36 58 36 58 psi 20.5R25
Goodyear GP2B 350 450 250 400 250 400 kPa GP2B‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25 51 65 36 58 36 58 psi 20.5R25
Goodyear GP4B 350 450 250 400 250 400 kPa GP4B‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25 51 65 36 58 36 58 psi 20.5R25
Goodyear TL-3A+ 350 450 250 400 250 400 kPa TL-3A+ ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25 51 65 36 58 36 58 psi 20.5R25
Goodyear RL-5K - - 250 400 250 400 kPa RL-5K ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25 36 58 36 58 psi 20.5R25
Goodyear HRL - - 225 350 225 350 kPa HRL ‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
20.5R25/16 33 51 33 51 psi 20.5R25/16
Goodyear GP3D 300 450 250 350 250 350 kPa GP3D‫ﮔﻮدﻳﺮ‬
650/65R25 44 65 36 51 36 51 psi 650/65R25
Michelin XHA 250 350 225 325 225 325 kPa XHA‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬
20.5R25 36 51 33 47 33 47 psi 20.5R25
Michelin 250 350 225 325 225 325 kPa SNOPLUS ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬
SNOPLUS 20.5R25 36 51 33 47 33 47 psi 20.5R25
Michelin XMINE XMINE ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬
- - 225 325 225 325 kPa
D2 33 47 33 47 psi D2
20.5R25 20.5R25
Michelin XLD 250 400 200 300 200 300 kPa XLD‫ﻣﻴﺸﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬
650/65R25 36 58 29 44 29 44 psi 650/65R25

- The recommended tyre pressures are based on the rated
load for each handling case.
- In case of heavier loads, especially during timber
handling or loading-carrying operations, a higher tyre
pressure is required. Contact the tyre manufacturer for
information about which air pressure is the correct one
for the load to be handled and transported over a
particular distance.
- If L4 or L5 tyres are used for loading-carrying
operations, due attention must be paid to the
transporting distances.
Radial tyres are to be preferred for loading-carrying
operations, as the build-up of heat is less in this type of tyre.
‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎدي ﺑﺮاي ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﺑﺎري ﻛﻪ در ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮرد از‬ -
.‫ﻣﻮارد ﺑﺎﻻ ذﻛﺮ ﺷﺪه اﻧﺘﺨﺎب ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮص در زﻣﺎن ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن اﻟﻮار ﻳﺎ اﻧﺠﺎم‬،‫در ﻣﻮرد ﺑﺎرﻫﺎي ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺗﺮ‬ -
‫ ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮي ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ در ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬، ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﻛﺴﺐ اﻃﻼع از ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎد ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎر ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ‬.‫وﺟﻮد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎزﻧﺪه‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﻮد و در ﻃﻮل ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺘﻲ ﺧﺎص ﺣﻤﻞ ﺷﻮد‬
.‫ﺗﻤﺎس ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﺮاي ﺑﺮداﺷﺘﻦ و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﻣﻮرد اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻗﺮار‬L5 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬L4 ‫اﮔﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي‬ -
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ داﺷﺖ‬. ‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎً ﺑﺮاي ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻛﺮدن و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر از ﺗﺎﻳﺮﻫﺎ ي رادﻳﺎل اﺳﺘﻔﺎده ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﺮا‬ -
.‫ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎي اﻳﺠﺎد ﺷﺪه در اﻳﻦ ﻧﻮع از ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻢ ﺗﺮ اﺳﺖ‬

233
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Hydraulic system, specifications L90F L90F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Hydraulic system, specifications L90F L90F ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ‬

Load-sensing, (closed (‫ﺣﺴﺎس ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎر )ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

Type
centre)
Hydraulic oil pump, Does not apply to this .‫روي اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ (1 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﭘﻤﭗ‬
(pump 1) machine type
Working hydraulics, ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎن‬،‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ ﻛﺎر‬ (2 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﭘﻤﭗ‬
Hydraulic oil pump,
steering system, brake
(pump 2) ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮو‬، ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬،‫ﮔﻴﺮي‬
system and servo system
Type Variable axial piston pump ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮن ﻣﺤﻮري ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬
Hydraulic oil pump, Cooling fan pump, brake ‫ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﺰ‬، ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﻓﻦ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺎري‬ (3 ‫ﭘﻤﭗ روﻏﻦ ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻚ )ﭘﻤﭗ‬
(pump 3) system
Type Variable axial piston pump ‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﭘﻴﺴﺘﻮن ﻣﺤﻮري ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع‬

234
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Dimensional drawing L90F L90F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

Dimensional drawing L90F L90F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

Specifications and dimensions comply in applicable parts
with ISO 7131:1997, SAE J732 JUN92,
ISO 7546: 1983, SAE J742 FEB85, SAE J818 MAY87,
ISO/FDIS 14397:1998 Part 1 & 2.
The data apply to a machine with 20.5 R25* tyres.
ISO 7131:1997, SAE J732 ‫ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎت و اﺑﻌﺎد ﺑﺎ اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاردﻫﺎي‬
JUN92,ISO 7546: 1983, SAE J742 FEB85, SAE J818
.‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ دارﻧﺪ‬MAY87, ISO/FDIS 14397:1998 Part 1 & 2.
.‫ داده ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬20.5 R25 L2 ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﺮ اﺳﺎس ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎي‬

Long boom (lifting arms) Standard boom (lifting arms Standard boom (lifting arms)
(‫ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬ (‫ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬ (‫ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد )ﺑﺎزوﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ‬
6547 mm (21' 5.8'') B 45 ° P * A
4079 mm (13' 4.6'') J 44° R 6118 mm (20' 0.9'') B
4387 mm (14' 4.7'') K 47° R1 3000 mm (9' 10.1'') C
67° S 455 mm (1' 5.7'') D
109 mm (0' 4.3'') T * E
430 mm (1' 4.9'') U 3280 mm (10' 9.1'') F
* X 2132 mm (6' 11.9'') G
1960 mm (2' 5.9'') Y * H
2492 mm (8' 2.1'') Z 3656 mm (11' 11.9'') J
3295 mm (10' 9.7'') a2 3963 mm (13' 0.0'') K
5367 mm (17' 7.3'') a3 * L
2875 mm (9' 5.2'') a4 * M
* N
56° O

)See table on the next page ‫( ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪول ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
)Carrying position SAE
‫ را ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ اﺟﺮا ﺑﮕﺬارﻳﺪ‬SAE ‫( وﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
) P-max. 49°
P-max.49° (
The difference between standard boom and long boom is ‫ﺗﻔﺎوت ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ در اﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻫﻢ اﻧﺪازه ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺬاﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪه‬
shown here with the same size bucket.
. ‫اﺳﺖ‬
Note that the version with long boom is intended to be used
with a material with a lower density. ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ دارد ﺑﺮاي ﻣﻮادي ﻛﻪ ﺟﺮم ﺣﺠﻤﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮي‬
.‫دارﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
235
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Machine capacity L90F L90F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

Machine capacity L90F L90F ‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ اﻧﺪازه ﻫﺎي ﻟﻮدر‬

The machine is constructed for a maximum machine ‫اﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﺮاي ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات و ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ( ﻃﺮاﺣﻲ ﺷﺪه‬
weight (incl. equipment and attachments) of 16500 kg .‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬14000 kg (30865 Ib) ‫اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
(36376 lb).

Bracket- Bracket- Bracket- Bracket- Bracket-

Buckets mounted mounted Direct- mounted mounted mounted
with edge with edge mounted with edge light light Long boom
savers savers with teeth savers material material
bucket bucket
‫ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ و ﺑﺎ دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاد ﺳﺒﻚ ﺷﻮد ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮاد ﺳﺒﻚ‬
‫ﺷﻮد‬ ‫ﺷﻮد‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ ‫ﺷﻮد‬
Capacity, 2.3 m 3 3 2.5 m 3 2.5 m 3 3 2.7 m 3 3 4.1 m3 7.0 m 3 3 ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ اﻧﺒﺎﺷﺖ‬
heaped, (3.0 yd ) (3.3 yd 3 ) (3.3 yd ) (3.5 yd ) (5.4 yd3
) (9.2 yd )
ISO/SAE ‫ ﻃﺒﻖ‬ISO/SAE
Capacity 2.5 m3 2.8 m3 2.8 m3 3.0 m3 4.5 m3 7.7 m3 ‫ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪه‬
filled to (3.3 yd3) (3.7 yd3) (3.7 yd3) (3.9 yd3) (5.9 yd3) (10.1 yd3)
110 % 110%
Static 10700 kg 10520 kg 10740 kg 10430 kg 10130 kg 9840 kg -1644 kg ‫ﺣﺪ اﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎر در‬
tipping (23589 lb) (23193 lb) (23678 lb) (22994 lb) (22333 lb) (21693 lb) (-3624 lb)
load ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ اﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
Steered 9470 kg 9300 kg 9500 kg 9200 kg 8920 kg 8610 kg -1495 kg
(20878 lb) (20503 lb) (20944 lb) (20283 lb) (19665 lb) (18982 lb) (-3296 lb) ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬35°
35°
Fully 9100 kg 8940 kg 9140 kg 8740 kg 8560 kg 8240 kg -1451 kg ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎن ﮔﻴﺮي‬
steered (20062 lb) (19709 lb) (20150 lb) (19158 lb) (18872 lb) (18166 lb) (-3199 lb)
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
Break-out 113.1 kN 108.5 kN 112.4 kN 104.5 kN 84.4 kN 73.0 kN
force (25426 (24392 (25269 (23493 (18974 (16411 ‫ﻧﻴﺮوي ﺑﻮﺷﻲ‬
lbf) lbf) lbf) lbf) lbf) lbf)

A 7500 mm 7610 mm 7810 mm 7670 mm ( 8000 mm 8300 mm + 430 mm

(24' 7.3'') (24' 11.6'') (25' 7.5'') 25' 2.0'') (26' 3.0'') (27' 2.8'') (+1' 4.9") A
E 1200 mm 1250 mm 1430 mm 1300 mm 1600 mm 1860 mm - 6 mm E
(3' 11.2'') (4' 5.2'') (4' 8.3'') (4' 3.2'') (5' 3.0'') (6' 1.2'') (-0' 0.2")
H *) 2820 mm 2780 mm 2650 mm 2740 mm 2530 mm 2320 mm + 421 mm H *)
(2' 5.9'') (9' 1.4'') (8' 8.3'') (8' 11.9'') (2' 5.9'') (7' 7.3'') (+16' 4.6")
L 5380 mm 5430 mm 5460 mm 5490 mm 5560 mm 5760 mm L
(17' 7.8'') (17' 9.7'') (17' 11.0'') (18' 0.1'') (18' 2.9'') (18' 10.8'')
M *) 1130 mm 1170 mm 1310 mm 1210 mm 1470 mm 1670 mm - 48 mm M *)
(3' 8.5'') (3' 10.1'') (4' 3.6'') (3' 11.6'') (4' 9.9'') (5' 5.7'') (-0' 1.9")
N 1700 mm 1720 mm 1770 mm 1730 mm 1740 mm 1730 mm + 364 mm N
(5' 6.9'') (5' 7.7'') (5' 9.7'') (5' 8.1'') (5' 8.5'') (5' 8.1'') (+1' 2.3")
V 2650 mm 2650 mm 2650 mm 2750 mm 2750 mm 3000 mm V
(8' 8.3'') (8' 8.3'') (8' 8.3'') (9' 0.3'') (9' 0.3'') (9' 10.1'')
a1 11860 mm 11880 mm 12000 mm 12010 mm 12200 mm 12600 mm a1
(38' 10.9'') (38' 11.7'') (39' 4.4'') (397' 4.8'') (40' 0.3'') (41' 4.1'')
Machine 15170 kg 15220 kg 15170 kg 15340 kg 15460 kg 15890 kg + 246 kg
weight (33444 lb) (33554 lb) (33444 lb) (33819 lb) (34083 lb) (35031 lb) (+542 lb) ‫وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬

) Measurement to tip of bucket tooth or edge savers. ‫ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ‬. ‫(اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮك دﻧﺪاﻧﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻛﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ‬
Dumping height to edge of bucket (acc. to SAE) + .(‫ اﻳﻨﭻ‬8) ‫ ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺘﺮ‬200 ً‫ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‬+ (SAE ‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎي ﺑﺎﻛﺖ )ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
approx. 200 mm (8 in).
45° ‫اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي در زاوﻳﻪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ‬
Measurement at a dumping angle of 45 ° . (Spade-nose
bucket 42°.)

236
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Timber grapple L90F L 90F ‫ﭼﻨﮕﺎل ﻛﻨﺪه ﺑﺮدار‬

Timber grapple L90F L 90F ‫ﭼﻨﮕﺎل ﻛﻨﺪه ﺑﺮدار‬

Timber grapple (for attachment bracket) (‫ﭼﻨﮕﺎل ﻛﻨﺪه ﺑﺮدار )ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Attachment Bracket-mounted ‫ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Order No. 80832 80832 ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
Tyres 20.5R25 GP-2B L2 20.5 R25GP-2BL2 ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬
2 2
A 2.4 m 2 (2.9 yd 2 ) 2.4 m (2.9 yd ) A

B 3420 mm (11' 2.6'') F 1440 mm (4' 8.7") J 2790 mm (9' 1.8'')

C 1830 mm (6' 0.0'') G 2770 mm (9' 1.1'') K 2990 mm (9' 9.7'')
D 2790 mm (9' 1.8'') H 4540 mm (14' 10.7'') L 2160 mm (7' 1.0")
E 1440 mm (4' 8.7") I 6580 mm (21' 7.1'') M 8420 mm (27' 7.5'')

237
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Pallet fork L90F L 90F ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬

Pallet fork L90F L 90F ‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬

Pallet fork (with attachment bracket) (‫ﺷﺎﺧﻚ ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ )ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Attachment Bracket-mounted ‫ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
Order No. 80109 80109 ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
Tyres 20.5R25 GP-2B L2 20.5 R25 GP-2B L2 ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬

A 960 mm (3' 1.8'') C -2 mm (-0' 0.1'') E 3770 mm (12' 4.4'')

B 1710 mm (5' 7.3'') D 1800 mm (5' 10.8'') F 760 mm (2' 5.9'')

238
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Pallet fork L90F L 90F ‫ﻓﻮرك ﺣﻤﻞ ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬

Loading table for pallet fork ‫ﺟﺪول وزﻧﻲ ﻓﻮرك ﭘﺎﻟﺖ‬

Rated operating load capacity (rated work load) at different load

Standard boom (lifting arms)
centre distances
‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز )ﻣﻴﺰان ﺑﺎر ﻛﺎري ﻣﺠﺎز( در ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺎر‬ (‫ﺑﻮم اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد)ﺑﺎزوي ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮ‬
1200 mm 900 mm 800 mm 700 mm 600 mm 500 mm Tyres ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫زﻣﻴﻦ‬ Ground
(47.2 in) (35.4 in) (31.5 in) (27.6 in) (23.6 in) (19.7 in)
3560 kg 3950 kg 4050 kg 4200 kg 4350 kg 4500 kg ‫ زﻣﻴﻦ ﺧﺸﻦ وﻧﺎﻣﺴﻄﺢ‬Rough terrain
20.5R25
(7848 Ib) (8708 Ib) (8929 Ib) (9259 Ib) (9590 Ib) (9920 Ib)
3800 kg 4100 kg 4250 kg 4400 kg 4500 kg 4650 kg
650/65R25
(8378 Ib) (9039 Ib) (9370 Ib) (9700 Ib) (9920 Ib) (10251 Ib)
4300 kg 5250 kg 5400 kg 5550 kg 5750 kg 5950 kg ‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ و ﺻﺎف‬ Even and
20.5R25
(9480 Ib) (11574 Ib) (11905 Ib) (12236 Ib) (12677 Ib) (13117 Ib) hard
4300 kg 5450 kg 5650 kg 5800 kg 6000 kg 6200 kg
650/65R25
(9480 Ib) (12015 Ib) (12456 Ib) (12787 Ib) (13228 Ib) (13669 Ib)
‫ﺑﻮم ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ Long boom
Tyres ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫زﻣﻴﻦ‬ Ground
3200 kg 3450 kg 3550 kg 3650 kg 3750 kg 3850 kg ‫ زﻣﻴﻦ ﺧﺸﻦ وﻧﺎﻣﺴﻄﺢ‬Rough terrain
20.5R25
(7055 Ib) (7606 Ib) (7826 Ib) (8047 Ib) (8268 Ib) (8488 Ib)
3300 kg 3600 kg 3700 kg 3800kg 3900 kg 4000 kg
650/65R25
(7275 Ib) (7937 Ib) (8157 Ib) (8378 Ib) (8598 Ib) (8818 Ib)
4200 kg 4550 kg 4850 kg 4800 kg 4950 kg 5100 kg ‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ و ﺻﺎف‬ Even and
20.5R25
(9259 Ib) (10031 Ib) (10692 Ib) (10582 Ib) (10930 Ib) (11244 Ib) hard
4300 kg 4750 kg 5650 kg 5000 kg 5150 kg 5300 kg
650/65 R25
(9480 Ib) (10470 Ib) (12456 Ib) (11023 Ib ) (11354 Ib) (11684 Ib)

The maximum permissible load according o the table is ‫اﮔﺮ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪه ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺟﺪول ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
reduced if the attachments are fitted with additional ‫ ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻟﻮگ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات ﻫﺎ‬. ‫ﺑﺎر ﻣﺠﺎز ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺧﻮاﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
equipment. For further information, see the Attachment
Catalogue. .‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

239
Specifications
Material handling arm L90F
Material handling arm L90F
Attachment
Order No.
Weight, material handling
arm
Machine weight
Tyres
D 2640 mm (8' 7.9'')
E 2040 mm (6' 8.3'')
F 1440 mm (4' 8.7")
G 3280 mm (10' 9.1'')
H 4410 mm (14' 5.6'')
I 5550 mm (18' 2.5'')
Loading table for material handling arm
Mechanical 92008
Arm extension
Retracted (A)
Halfway extended (B)
Fully extended (C)
Hydraulically folding 82137
Retracted (A)
Extended (B)
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬
L90F‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ و ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮاد‬
L90F‫ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ و ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮاد‬
Bracket-mounted ‫ﺑﺮاﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات‬
92008 92008 ‫ﺷﻤﺎره ﺳﻔﺎرش‬
500 kg (1103 Ib) ‫ ﺑﺎزوي ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻮاد‬،‫وزن‬
500 kg (1103 lb)
14440 kg (31835 lb) 14440 kg (31 835 Ib) ‫وزن ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ‬
20.5R25 20.5 R25 ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻫﺎ‬
J 1370 mm (4' 5.9'') P 1530 mm (5' 0.2'')
K 1920 mm (6' 3.6'') Q 5330 mm (17' 5.8'')
L 2470 mm (8' 1.2'') R 6290 mm (20' 7.6'')
M 2040 mm (6' 8.3'') S 7250 mm (23' 9.4'')
N 3030 mm (9' 11.3'')
O 4020 mm (13' 2.3'')
‫ﺟﺪول ﺑﺎر ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎزوي ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎر‬
92008 ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪن ﺑﺎزو‬
2760 kg (6085 lb) 2760 kg (6085 Ib) (A) ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
2130 kg (4696 lb) 2130 kg (4696 Ib) (B) ‫ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪه ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ‬
1740 kg (3836 lb) 1740 kg (3836 Ib) ( ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼً ﺑﺎز ﺷﺪه )ﻃﻮل ﺣﺪاﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت ﻫﻴﺪروﻟﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺪه‬
2060 kg (4542 lb) 2060 kg (4542 Ib) (A) ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
1730 kg (3814 lb) 1730 kg (3814 Ib) (B) ‫ﺑﺎز‬
240
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Cab, specifications ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Cab, specifications ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

General ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬

The cab is fitted on rubber elements, is insulated and has ‫ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺑﻨﺪي ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬،‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮ روي ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎي ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
a flat floor with rubber mat. .‫و ﻛﻒ آن ﻣﺴﻄﺢ اﺳﺖ و در روي آن ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻗﺮار دارد‬
‫آزﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﺎي ﻛﻨﺘﺮل اﻳﻤﻨﻲ روي ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪه و اﻳﻤﻨﻲ آن ﺗﺄﺋﻴﺪ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ و‬
Tested and approved as a protective cab and meets
standards according to ISO/DIS 3471-1:2004 and SAE ISO/DIS 3471-1:2004 , SAE1040- ‫داراي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪاد ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
1040-MAY 94 (ROPS), ISO/DIS 3449-2004 (FOPS) MAY 94(ROPS),ISO/DIS 3449-2004 (FOPS),ISO 6055-
and ISO 6055-1997 (protective roof for high-lifting rider ‫)داراي ﺳﻘﻒ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮﻫﺎي ﺑﺎ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﺑﺴﻴﺎر زﻳﺎد‬1997
trucks).
(.‫دارﻧﺪ‬
Fire retardant (fire ‫اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺿﺪ آﺗﺶ ﺑﻮدن )ﻣﻘﺎوﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ و ﺗﻮ دوزي داﺧﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬
resistant) measured
Cab interior fittings and ISO 3795- ‫در ﺑﺮاﺑﺮ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ( ﻃﺒﻖ‬
according to ISO 3795-
upholstery 1989
1989

1 (rear window to be ‫)ﭘﻨﺠﺮه ﭘﺸﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ وﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭼﻜﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪاد درﻫﺎي ﺧﺮوج اﺿﻄﺮاري‬
Number of emergency
smashed with emergency
exits (‫اﺿﻄﺮاري ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬
hammer)

Heating and ventilation ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ و ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬

The basic version of the loader is provided with a ‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ اﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻮدر داراي ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ و ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ از ﻳﺦ زدن ﻫﻤﻪ‬
heating and ventilation system with defrosting for all ‫ ﺗﻬﻮﻳﻪ‬.‫ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮي ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ و ﻫﻮا را ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮزﻳﻊ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
windows and the best possible air distribution (10
outlets). Air conditioning is available as optional extra. .‫ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮان ﻳﻚ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ اﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮاﻧﺪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮد‬

Operator seat ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬

This machine is equipped with an operator seat, which ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮص اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر ﻣﺠﻬﺰ اﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ داراي اﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪارد و‬
meets the criteria of EN ISO 7096. .‫ اﺳﺖ‬EN ISO 7096 ‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ‬
Height adjustment (rapid (‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ارﺗﻔﺎع )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
100 mm (4 in) 100 mm (4 in)
adjustment)
Longitudinal adjustment 160 mm (6.3 in) 160 mm (6.3 in) ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ‬
Adjustment for driver ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ وزن اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
40-130 kg (88-287 lb) 40-130 kg (88-287 Ib)
weight
Adjustment of back-rest, ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ )ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻴﺐ‬
(adjustable back-rest 12° 12°
(‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎه ﭘﺸﺘﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻟﻲ‬
inclination)
Upholstery Fire resistant ‫ﺿﺪ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻮدوزي‬

Lap type seat belt with ‫ﻛﻤﺮﺑﻨﺪ اﻳﻤﻨﻲ ﺗﺎﺷﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﻗﺮﻗﺮه‬
Yes ‫ﺑﻠﻪ‬
reel ‫ﻛﻤﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ‬

241
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Cab, specifications ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Vibration and sound information ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت و ﺻﺪا در ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬

Hand-arm vibrations
Emission of hand-arm vibration during real operating
conditions at its intended use is less than 2.5 m/s 2 RMS
(root mean square) acceleration according to ISO 8041.
Whole body vibrations
Emission of Whole-Body Vibration during real operating
conditions at its intended use is according to the table
below.
(‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﻮي اﺳﺘﻴﻚ )زﻳﺮ دﺳﺘﻲ‬
Clien ID CA-431056
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﻲ ﺑﻮﺟﻮد آﻣﺪه در دﺳﺘﮕﺎه ﺑﺮ روي ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﻮي اﺳﺘﻴﻚ )دﺳﺖ و‬
‫ﺑﺎزوي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر( در ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻛﺎري واﻗﻌﻲ و در راﺳﺘﺎي اﻫﺪاف ﻛﺎري اﭘﺮاﺗﻮري‬
‫ داﺷﺘﻪ‬ISO8041 ‫ )ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﮕﻴﻦ رﻳﺸﻪ( ﻃﺒﻖ‬2.5m/s2 ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺷﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ از‬
. ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﻛﻞ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‬
‫ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﻛﻞ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ در ﻃﻮل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﻛﺎري واﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪف ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ زﻳﺮ‬
:‫اﺳﺖ‬

Typical operating Vibration Vibration Vibration

conditions emission emission emission
value a w,eqz value a w,eqy value a w,eqx
(m/s RMS) (m/s RMS) (m/s RMS)
‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻧﺸﺮ ﻟﺮزش‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻧﺸﺮ ﻟﺮزش‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻧﺸﺮ ﻟﺮزش‬ ‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
aw.eqz aw.eqy aw.eqx
(m/s2RMS) (m/s2RMS) (m/s2RMS)
Loading and carrying ‫ﺑﺎر ﻛﺮدن و ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬
0.5 0.6 0.6
work
Mining application 0.8 0.7 0.8 ‫ﻛﺎر ﻛﺮد در ﻣﻌﺪن و ﺧﺎﻛﺒﺮداري‬
Transporting operation 0.5 0.7 0.5 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻧﺘﻘﺎل ﻣﻮاد‬
V-shaped loading and ‫ و‬V ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت ﺑﺎر ﻛﺮدن در ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
carrying work 0.5 0.6 0.7
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺑﺎر‬

The following vibration directions are defined:
x = fore and aft
y = lateral
z = vertical
NOTE! This / These hole-body vibration emission
value(s) was (were) determined at particular operating
and terrain conditions and is therefore not
representative for all the various conditions in
accordance with the intended use of the machine and
should not alone be used to determine the whole-body
vibration exposure to the operator using the machine.
For this purpose the information in ISO/CEN
Technical Report is recommended.
To ensure that the whole-body vibration emission during
machine use is kept to a minimum, see page104.
:‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎي ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮرت زﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ‬
‫= ﻋﻘﺐ و ﺟﻠﻮ‬X
‫=ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬Y
‫=ﻋﻤﻮدي‬Z
‫ﺑﻴﺎد داﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ و ﻧﺸﺮ ارﺗﻌﺎﺷﺎت در ﻛﻞ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫وﻳﮋه و در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻋﻮارض ﺧﺎص زﻣﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪه اﺳﺖ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮاﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ اراﺋﻪ ﺑﺮاي‬
‫ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﺎري ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ و اﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎدﻳﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮاي ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰان‬
‫ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را در ﻣﻌﺮض آن‬، ‫ارﺗﻌﺎش ﻛﻞ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ در ﻫﺮ ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر‬
. ‫ﻗﺮار ﻣﻲ دﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎر رود‬
(‫ﺑﺮاي ﻧﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ اﻳﻦ ﻫﺪف )ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪار ارﺗﻌﺎش ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ در ﺷﺮاﻳﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
.‫ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬ISO/CEN ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﮔﺰارش ﻓﻨﻲ ﻃﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺑﺮاي اﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎن از ﺣﺪاﻗﻞ ارﺗﻌﺎش ﻛﻞ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ در ﻫﻨﮕﺎم اﺳﺘﻔﺎده از ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺮاﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬104

242
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Cab, specifications ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻦ‬، ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Sound information, L60F L60F ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬

Sound pressure level ‫( در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬LPA) ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻓﺸﺎر ﺻﺪا‬

(LpA) at operator position 68 LpA dB(A)
68 LpA dB(A) ‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر)اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺮ‬
(Measurement according
to ISO 6396) (ISO 6396 ‫ﺣﺴﺐ‬
Sound power level (LWA) ‫( در‬LWA) ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻗﺪرت ﺻﺪا‬
around the machine
‫اﻃﺮاف ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
(Measurement according
to 2000/14/EC with 104 LwA dB(A) ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺟﺪاول‬2000/14 /EC
104 LWA dB(A)
applicable appendices and ISO ‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻘﻲ و روش اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
measuring method
according to ISO 6395) (6395

Sound information, L70F L70F ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬

Sound pressure level 68 LpA dB(A) 68 LpA dB(A) ‫( در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬LPA) ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻓﺸﺎر ﺻﺪا‬
(LpA) at operator position
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر )اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺮ‬
(Measurement according
to ISO 6396) (ISO 6396 ‫ﺣﺴﺐ‬
Sound power level (LWA) 105 LwA dB(A) 105 LwA dB(A) ‫( در‬LWA) ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻗﺪرت ﺻﺪا‬
around the machine
‫اﻃﺮاف ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
(Measurement according
to 2000/14/EC with ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺟﺪاول‬2000/14 /EC
applicable appendices and ISO ‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻘﻲ و روش اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
measuring method
according to ISO 6395) (6395

Sound information, L90F L90F ‫اﻃﻼﻋﺎت ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬

Sound pressure level 68 LpA dB(A) 68 LpA dB(A) ‫( در ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬LPA) ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻓﺸﺎر ﺻﺪا‬
(LpA) at operator position
‫ﻗﺮار ﮔﻴﺮي اﭘﺮاﺗﻮر )اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺮ‬
(Measurement according
to ISO 6396) (ISO 6396 ‫ﺣﺴﺐ‬
Sound power level (LWA) 105 LwA dB(A) 105 LwA dB(A) ‫( در‬LWA) ‫ﻣﻴﺰان ﻗﺪرت ﺻﺪا‬
around the machine
‫اﻃﺮاف ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ )اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
(Measurement according
to 2000/14/EC with ‫ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮاه ﺟﺪاول‬2000/14 /EC
applicable appendices and ISO ‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻘﻲ و روش اﻧﺪازه ﮔﻴﺮي‬
measuring method
according to ISO 6395) (6395

Blauer Engel (optional equipment) (‫)ﭘﻠﻮر اﻧﮕﻞ()ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰات اﺧﺘﻴﺎري‬

Equipment which concerns the noise emission of the
machine must be kept clean and must, when required, be
replaced. Settings made at the factory must not be
changed so that the noise emission of the machine is
impaired.
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰاﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪاي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ را ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮕﻪ داﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ و‬
‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎت اﻧﺠﺎم ﺷﺪه ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎرﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬.‫ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬،‫ در زﻣﺎن ﻻزم‬،‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬
.‫ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ ﭼﺮا ﻛﻪ در ﭘﺨﺶ ﺻﺪاي ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ اﺧﻼل اﻳﺠﺎد ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮد‬

243
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Servies history ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬

Servies history ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ Service 100 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬100 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ واراﻧﺘﻲ‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Warranty Inspection
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 1000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬1000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
‫… ﺑﺮرﺳﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮط ﺑﻪ واراﻧﺘﻲ‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Warranty Inspection
… Service and maintenance Hours Date
Servies history
‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 1500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬1500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬
‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 2000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬2000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 2500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬2500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 3000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬3000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

244
 Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Servies history ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ Service 3500 hours ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬3500‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 4000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬4000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 4500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬4500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 5000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬5000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 5500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬5500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 6000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬6000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 6500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬6500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

245
Specifications ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎت ﻓﻨﻲ‬

Servies history ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺨﭽﻪ ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬ Service 7000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬7000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 7500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬7500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 8000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬8000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 8500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬8500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 9000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬9000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 9500 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬9500 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

‫اﻣﻀﺎء و ﻣﻬﺮ‬ ‫ ﻧﻮع ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬Service 10000 hours ‫ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﮕﺮ‬10000 ‫ﺳﺮوﻳﺲ‬

‫… ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ و ﻧﮕﻬﺪاري‬
Signature and stamp Type of service ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎرﻳﺦ‬
…Service and maintenance
Hours Date

246